Alcatel Lucent - 1830 - PSS 36 32 16 - Release3 6 50 - 3.6.51 - User Guide

Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) | Release
3.6.50 and 3.6.51
PRODUCT INFORMATION AND PLANNING GUIDE
8DG61100AAAATQZZA
Issue 1 | January 2012
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the guidelines in this document, the
equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the expense of the user.
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to “How to order” (p. xxx) in the section titled “About this document” .
Contents
About this document

Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................................................... xxvii
xxvii
Reason for reissue .................................................................................................................................................................. xxvii

xxvii
Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxvii

xxvii
How to use this document ................................................................................................................................................... xxvii

xxvii
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxviii

xxviii
Related information .............................................................................................................................................................. xxviii

xxviii
Document support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

xxx
Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

xxx
How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

xxx
Packaging collection and recovery requirements .......................................................................................................... xxx
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ......................................................................................................................... xxx
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

xxxi
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

xxxi
1 Introduction
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

1-2
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio ............................................................................................................... 1-4

1-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family ........................................................................................................................ 1-4

1-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 ................................................................................................................ 1-7

1-7
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device ......................................................................................................... 1-9

1-9
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ......................................................................................................... 1-9

1-9
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH Edge Device ...................................................................................................... 1-10

1-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and iii
Planning Guide
8DG61100AAAATQZZA Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51
Issue 1 January 2012
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP Amplifier ................................................................................................................. 1-11
1-11
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ................................................................................................................................................ 1-11

1-11
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 benefits ............................................................................................ 1-12

1-12
Release 3.6.50/ Release 3.6.51 Feature List ................................................................................................................ 1-15

1-15
2 Features
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS36/PSS-32/PSS-16
OADM architectures ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3

2-3
DWDM filter architectures .................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2-4
Bidirectional CWDM single-fiber transmission ......................................................................................................... 2-13

2-13
Optical amplification and dispersion compensation .................................................................................................. 2-18

2-18
Automatic power reduction (APR) .................................................................................................................................. 2-22

2-22
Optical transponders .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-40

2-40
Wavelength Tracker ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-68

2-68
Alien wavelengths .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-76

2-76
Optical protection ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-77

2-77
Optical protection for 40G OTs ......................................................................................................................................... 2-88

2-88
CWDM ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-91

2-91
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves and equipage .................................................................. 2-93

2-93
Operation, administration, and maintenance ............................................................................................................. 2-123

2-123
DWDM topologies .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-130

2-130
Ethernet EPL and EVPL services ................................................................................................................................... 2-132

2-132
3 Topologies and configurations
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Network topology overview ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2

3-2
Network elements ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TOADM configurations ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3-8
ROADM configurations ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-16

3-16
40G and 100G OT regeneration configurations .......................................................................................................... 3-22

3-22
Anydirection configurations ............................................................................................................................................... 3-23

3-23
FOADM configurations ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-42

3-42
In-line amplifier (ILA) ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-53

3-53
TOADM networks ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-57

3-57
FOADM networks ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-64

3-64
Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies ............................................................................................................ 3-67

3-67
Inventory configurations ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-68

3-68
Variable Attenuator Cards in OADM configurations ................................................................................................ 3-73

3-73
Long Haul Wavelength Tracker (WTOCM) configurations ................................................................................... 3-76

3-76
Single-fiber bi-directional nodes ...................................................................................................................................... 3-86

3-86
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH networks ................................................................................................... 3-87

3-87
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 networks ................................ 3-89
3-89
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 and Alcatel-Lucent 1696 networks .......................................................................... 3-92

3-92
DWDM extended link configurations .......................................................................................................................... 3-104

3-104
4 Product description
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE
Overview of shelf types .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-2
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Shelf
Shelf variants and hardware overview .............................................................................................................................. 4-3

4-3
Mandatory module details ................................................................................................................................................... 4-27

4-27
Non-mandatory modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-38

4-38
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and v
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelf
DCM shelf overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-136

4-136
Non-COS/EOS shelves
Description of non-COS/EOS shelves ......................................................................................................................... 4-140

4-140
5 Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
OAMP
Fault detection and alarm management ............................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2
Performance monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5

5-5
Automatic power adjustments ........................................................................................................................................... 5-25

5-25
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability ................................................................................................................... 5-30

5-30
NE software installation, upgrades, and back-outs .................................................................................................... 5-32

5-32
Security ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-33

5-33
6 System planning and engineering
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool ............................................................................................................. 6-1

6-1
Power and grounding ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-3

6-3
Operating environment ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-11

6-11
Cooling ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

6-12
7 Quality and reliability
Quality and reliability chapter overview .......................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1
Product conformance statements by region
Canada .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7-2
China ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3

7-3
European Union ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-5

7-5
United States ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9

7-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Quality and reliability
Reliability program ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-11

7-11
Design and development ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-12

7-12
Manufacturing and field deployment .............................................................................................................................. 7-13

7-13
Failure rates .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-13

7-13
Sparing tables for field replaceable units ....................................................................................................................... 7-36

7-36
References ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-44

7-44
8 Technical specifications
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf
Shelf overviews ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

8-2
PTM optics .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6

8-6
Transmission parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-31

8-31
Technical specifications
Technical specification reference tables ......................................................................................................................... 8-46

8-46
A Ordering
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
Software
Network element software .................................................................................................................................................. A-3

A-3
1354RM-PhM ........................................................................................................................................................................... A-5

A-5
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS engineering and planning tool (EPT) ............................................................................ A-6
A-6
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment ..................................................................................................... A-7

A-7
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 installation kits .............................................................................................................. A-8

A-8
1830 PSS amplifiers ............................................................................................................................................................. A-12

A-12
1830 PSS filters ..................................................................................................................................................................... A-14

A-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and vii
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection ...................................................................................................................... A-16
A-16
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 dispersion compensation modules ....................................................................... A-17

A-17
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders .................................................................................................. A-20

A-20
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks ......................................................................................................... A-22

A-22
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables ............................................................................................................................. A-22

A-22
1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items ............................................................................................................ A-27

A-27

A-28

A-30
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment ........................................................................................ A-31

A-31
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and 1830 PSS-1 PTM optics
SFP ............................................................................................................................................................................................. A-35

A-35
XFP ............................................................................................................................................................................................. A-56

A-56
CFP ............................................................................................................................................................................................. A-59

A-59
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1
Edge device ............................................................................................................................................................................ A-60

A-60
B Feature release history
Feature history ........................................................................................................................................................................... B-1

B-1
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of tables
1 Supporting documentation ................................................................................................................................ xxviii
2-1 SFD5 channel coverage ........................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-2 SFD8 channel coverage ........................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-3 OSC SFP span loss support ................................................................................................................................. 2-19
2-4 OT compatibility for 2.5G and 10G OTs ........................................................................................................ 2-64
2-5 DWDM OT VOA usage ....................................................................................................................................... 2-74
2-6 PSS-36 Y-cable slot pairs for full-height 1-slot wide cards ..................................................................... 2-89
2-7 PSS-32 Y-cable slot pairs for 3-slot wide cards ........................................................................................... 2-90
2-8 PSS-36 Y-cable slot pairs for 3-slot wide cards ........................................................................................... 2-91
2-9 CWDM filter scheme ............................................................................................................................................. 2-92

2-92
2-10 Controller redundancy with mixed main/subtendng shelves ................................................................ 2-103
2-11 Card list .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-111

2-111
2-12 Supported 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 card applications .................................................................. 2-116
2-13 OTN performance monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 2-127
3-1 DWDM wavelengths and filters (100Ghz spacing) ...................................................................................... 3-6
3-2 CWDM wavelengths and filters ........................................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3 Supported SFD combinations for PSS-32/16 Degree 2 FOADMs with 50GHz spacing ............. 3-49
3-4 Supported SFD combinations for PSS-36 Degree 2 FOADMs with 50GHz spacing ................... 3-50
3-5 1830 PSS-1/1830 PSS-32 interconnecting ports ......................................................................................... 3-89
3-6 Supported 1830/1696 OT combinations ......................................................................................................... 3-92
4-1 Main and Extension supported shelf combinatons ........................................................................................ 4-7
4-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 card list and limits ....................................................................................... 4-12
4-3 Client signal time slot requirements ................................................................................................................. 4-74
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and ix
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 OT protection support ......................................................................................................................................... 4-126
4-5 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs ............................................................................................................ 4-136
5-1 SONET Section PM parameters ........................................................................................................................ 5-10
5-2 SONET Line PM parameters .............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5-3 SDH regenerator and multiplex section PM parameters ........................................................................... 5-11
5-4 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM NearEND PM Parameters .................................................................... 5-11
5-5 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM FarEND PM Parameters ....................................................................... 5-14
5-6 PCS PM parameter definitions (64B/66B) .................................................................................................... 5-16
5-7 PCS PM parameter definitions (8B/10B) ....................................................................................................... 5-16
5-8 Ethernet statistics definitions (ETH group) ................................................................................................... 5-17
5-9 Interface PM statistics definitions (INF group) ........................................................................................... 5-21
6-1 Power dissipation for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 .................................................................................... 6-5
6-2 Ambient temperature and humidity limits ..................................................................................................... 6-11
7-1 Failure rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 ................................................................... 7-14
8-1 4DPA2 SFPs ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7

8-7
8-2 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (FlexMux) ......................................................................................... 8-8
8-3 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (DualTran) ...................................................................................... 8-11
8-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs ............................................................................................................................................... 8-12
8-5 11DPE12E SFP/XFPs ........................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8-6 11DPM12 SFP/XFPs ............................................................................................................................................. 8-17
8-7 11QPA4(A) XFPs .................................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8-8 11STAR1 XFPs ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-23

8-23
8-9 11STGE12 SFPs ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-24

8-24
8-10 11STMM10 SFPs .................................................................................................................................................... 8-25
8-11 43STX4/4P XFPs .................................................................................................................................................... 8-27

8-27
8-12 43SCX4 Client XFPs ............................................................................................................................................. 8-28

8-28
8-13 112SCA1 and 112SNA1 Client CFPs ............................................................................................................. 8-29
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-14 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 Client XFPs ........................................................................................................ 8-30
8-15 Parameters specified for STM-1 optical interfaces ..................................................................................... 8-31
8-16 Parameters specified for STM-4 optical interfaces ..................................................................................... 8-32
8-17 Parameters specified for STM-16 optical interfaces .................................................................................. 8-33
8-18 Parameters specified for STM-16 colored optical interfaces .................................................................. 8-34
8-19 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192/OTU-2 optical interfaces ................................................. 8-35
8-20 Parameters specified for STM-64 optical interface L-64.2c ................................................................... 8-37
8-21 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192 uncompensated tunable full C+ DWDM optical
interface ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-38
8-38
8-22 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces 1000BASE-SX/-LX/-ZX ................................... 8-39
8-23 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces 1000BASE-ZX ...................................................... 8-41
8-24 Parameters specified for 10 GbE optical interfaces 10GBASE-LR/LW, 10GBASE-ER/EW,

10GBASE-ZR/ZW .............................................................................................................................................. 8-43
8-43
8-25 Management specifications ................................................................................................................................. 8-46
8-26 Shelf dimensions ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-46

8-46
8-27 LD specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 8-48

8-48
8-28 OSC specifications ................................................................................................................................................. 8-50

8-50
8-29 DWDM wavelengths (100-GHz spacing) ...................................................................................................... 8-51
8-30 DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz spacing) ........................................................................................................ 8-52
8-31 Channel plan (CWDM) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-54
8-32 Filter specifications (Part 1 of 2) ....................................................................................................................... 8-55
8-33 Filter specifications (Part 2 of 2) ....................................................................................................................... 8-57
8-34 Passband center wavelength ................................................................................................................................ 8-59
8-35 Wavelengths for SFC2 and SFC4 .................................................................................................................... 8-61
8-36 SFD8 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 8-61
8-37 SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 8-61
8-38 SFC2 Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................................... 8-62

8-62
8-39 SFC4 Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................................... 8-62

8-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xi
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-40 CWR8/CWR8B insertion loss ............................................................................................................................ 8-62
8-41 CWR8-88 specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 8-63
8-42 OT line-side specifications .................................................................................................................................. 8-64
8-43 SFP-XFP-CFP specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8-67
8-44 Alien wavelength client specifications ............................................................................................................ 8-85
8-45 1830 PSS-36 TOADM valid LD combinations ........................................................................................... 8-86
8-46 1830 PSS-32 TOADM valid LD combinations ........................................................................................... 8-87
8-47 1830 PSS-36 ROADM valid LD combinations ........................................................................................... 8-88
8-48 1830 PSS-32 ROADM valid LD combinations ........................................................................................... 8-89
8-49 1830 PSS-36 DFOADM valid LD combinations ........................................................................................ 8-91
8-52 1830 PSS-32 ILA valid LD combinations ..................................................................................................... 8-95
8-53 1830 PSS-16 ILA valid LD combinations ..................................................................................................... 8-96
A-1 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and license point fees ................................................ A-3
A-2 1354RM-PhM CD-ROM and license point fees ........................................................................................... A-5
A-3 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment ...................................................................................... A-7
A-4 1830 PSS amplifiers .............................................................................................................................................. A-12

A-12
A-5 1830 PSS filters ...................................................................................................................................................... A-14

A-14
A-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection ....................................................................................................... A-16
A-7 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs ............................................................................................................. A-17
A-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders ................................................................................... A-20
A-9 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks .......................................................................................... A-22
A-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables .............................................................................................................. A-22
A-11 1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items ............................................................................................. A-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment ........................................................................ A-31
A-15 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and PSS-1 SFPs .......................................................................................... A-35
A-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and GBEH XFPs ........................................................................................ A-56
A-17 1830 PSS-1 common equipment ...................................................................................................................... A-60
A-18 1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items .................................................................................... A-61
A-19 Hardened 1830 PSS-1 kit customer-replaceable items ............................................................................ A-62
A-20 1830 PSS-1 miscellaneous equipment ........................................................................................................... A-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xiii
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
1-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
2-1 FOADM 5-channel static-filter architecture (2-degree) .............................................................................. 2-6
2-2 FOADM 44-channel static filter architecture (2-degree) ............................................................................ 2-9
2-3 ROADM filter architecture (2-degree) ............................................................................................................ 2-10
2-4 ROADM filter architecture w/growth beyond 8 add-drop channels .................................................... 2-11
2-5 TOADM filter architecture (2-degree) ............................................................................................................ 2-12
2-6 Line terminal with SFC2 filter ........................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-9 Single-fiber bidirectional 2-degree OADM ................................................................................................... 2-17
2-10 Single Fiber bidirectional CWDM-DWDM regeneration ........................................................................ 2-17
2-11 Node optical architecture ..................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
2-12 Single fiber cut ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-24
2-13 Raman RA2P single fiber cut examples ......................................................................................................... 2-26
2-14 Single fiber restoration .......................................................................................................................................... 2-28

2-28
2-15 Double fiber cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-29

2-29
2-16 Double fiber restoration ........................................................................................................................................ 2-31
2-17 RA2P ILA with OSC disabled ............................................................................................................................ 2-32
2-18 Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier .................................................................................................................. 2-35
2-19 LD reset with RAMAN/EDFA ........................................................................................................................... 2-36
2-20 ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit .............................................................................. 2-37
2-21 Fiber cut after ingress LD .................................................................................................................................... 2-38
2-22 11STAR1 block diagram ...................................................................................................................................... 2-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xv
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-23 11STMM10 block diagram ................................................................................................................................. 2-43
2-24 11STGE12 block diagram .................................................................................................................................... 2-44
2-25 11QPA4(A) block diagram .................................................................................................................................. 2-46
2-26 11DPE12 block diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 2-48
2-27 11DPE12(E) block diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-49
2-28 11DPM12 block diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 2-50
2-29 43STX4/43STX4P block diagram .................................................................................................................... 2-52
2-30 43SCX4 block diagram ......................................................................................................................................... 2-54
2-31 43SCA1 block diagram ......................................................................................................................................... 2-55
2-32 43STA1P block diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 2-57
2-33 4DPA4 block diagram ........................................................................................................................................... 2-58
2-34 4DPA2 block diagram ........................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-35 112SCX10/112SNX10 OT block diagram ..................................................................................................... 2-61
2-36 112SCA1/112SNA1 OT block diagram .......................................................................................................... 2-63
2-37 Wavelength Tracker coding and encoding points ........................................................................................ 2-69
2-38 WTOCM addition for long haul WT ............................................................................................................... 2-70
2-39 Wavelength Tracker fault isolation ................................................................................................................... 2-72
2-40 Per-channel optical line protection ................................................................................................................... 2-77
2-41 OT OPS protection - TOADM auto-auto paths ............................................................................................ 2-79
2-42 SVAC OPS protection - FOADM manual-manual paths ......................................................................... 2-79
2-43 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual paths ................................ 2-80
2-44 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto paths ............................................................................................ 2-80
2-45 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths ............................................ 2-80
2-46 Optical sub-network connection protection (O-SNCP) ............................................................................ 2-81
2-47 E-SNCP on 4DPA4 OT ......................................................................................................................................... 2-83
2-48 E-SNCP on 4DPA2 OT ......................................................................................................................................... 2-85
2-49 11QPA4(A) E-SNCP examples .......................................................................................................................... 2-86
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50 Protection of alien wavelengths ......................................................................................................................... 2-87
2-51 Y-cable protection ................................................................................................................................................... 2-88

2-88
2-52 1830 PSS-36 shelf - physical design ................................................................................................................ 2-95
2-53 1830 PSS-36 shelf slot numbering ................................................................................................................... 2-96
2-54 1830 PSS-32 central office shelf - physical design .................................................................................... 2-98
2-55 1830 PSS-32 CO shelf slot numbering ........................................................................................................... 2-99
2-56 1830 PSS-16 end office shelf - physical design ........................................................................................ 2-100
2-57 1830 PSS-16 EO shelf slot numbering ......................................................................................................... 2-101
2-58 Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-36 NE connectivity .................................................................................. 2-107
2-59 Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-32 NE connectivity .................................................................................. 2-108
2-60 Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-16/32 NE connectivity ............................................................................ 2-109
2-61 Example TOADM shelf configuration ......................................................................................................... 2-121
2-62 Example: DWDM networks for FOADM, ROADM, and TOADM ................................................. 2-131
2-63 Spurs and dual-homed nodes ............................................................................................................................ 2-132
2-64 EPL and EVPL services ..................................................................................................................................... 2-133
2-65 HiGig vs. Q-in-Q frame formats ..................................................................................................................... 2-133
2-66 Interworking with 10GbE Router/Switch .................................................................................................... 2-134
3-1 Linear network configuration ................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3-2 Ring network configuration ................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-3 Interconnected ring network configuration ...................................................................................................... 3-4
3-4 Mesh network configuration .................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3-5 44 channel TOADM end terminal block diagram ......................................................................................... 3-9
3-6 88 channel TOADM end terminal block diagram ....................................................................................... 3-10
3-7 44 channel 2-Degree TOADM block diagram ............................................................................................. 3-11
3-8 88 channel Degree 2 TOADM block diagram .............................................................................................. 3-12
3-9 3-Degree TOADM block diagram with mixed CWRs .............................................................................. 3-13
3-10 TOADM with DWDM spur and OEO regeneration .................................................................................. 3-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xvii
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-11 TOADM with CWDM spur and OEO regeneration ................................................................................... 3-15
3-12 ROADM end terminal with WR8-88A(F) ..................................................................................................... 3-16
3-13 Degree 2 88-channel ROADM with WR8-88A(F) ..................................................................................... 3-17
3-14 Degree 4 88-channel ROADM with WR8-88A(F) ..................................................................................... 3-18
3-15 WR8-88 ROADM with DWDM spur/OEO regeneration ........................................................................ 3-20
3-16 WR8-88 ROADM with CWDM spur/OEO regeneration ........................................................................ 3-21
3-17 OT regeneration configuration ........................................................................................................................... 3-22
3-18 Two-node Anydirection A/D degree 4+2 example ..................................................................................... 3-24
3-19 WR8-88 with ITLU on drop port ...................................................................................................................... 3-25
3-20 Two-node regeneration with OTs in Different A/D Blocks ..................................................................... 3-29
3-21 Two-node regeneration with OTs in the same A/D Block ........................................................................ 3-30
3-22 Two-node add/drop with no MESH4 card in the Add path ..................................................................... 3-31
3-23 Two-node add/drop with one MESH4 card in the Add path ................................................................... 3-32
3-24 AnyDirection two-node diagram ....................................................................................................................... 3-33
3-25 AnyDirection single-node diagram .................................................................................................................. 3-38
3-26 OMD-based 44 channel DWDM end terminal ............................................................................................. 3-44
3-29 OMD-based 4 channel CWDM end terminal ............................................................................................... 3-46
3-30 FOADM hub block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 3-47
3-31 Degree 2 DWDM FOADM (100GHz spacing) ........................................................................................... 3-48
3-32 Degree 2 DWDM FOADM (80-channel/50GHz spacing) ...................................................................... 3-49
3-33 Degree 2 DWDM FOADM with ITLB thru connection .......................................................................... 3-49
3-34 CWDM degree 2 FOADM .................................................................................................................................. 3-51
3-35 Degree 3 44-channel FOADM block diagram ............................................................................................. 3-52
3-36 Asymmetrical Degree 4 DWDM FOADM .................................................................................................... 3-53
3-37 ILA with bidirectional LDs and optional RA2Ps ....................................................................................... 3-54
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38 ILA-2: ILA with unidirectional LDs and optional RA2Ps ....................................................................... 3-55
3-39 AM2125A/B topology assignments ................................................................................................................. 3-56
3-40 AM2125A/B topology assignments with RA2P .......................................................................................... 3-56
3-41 LD opposing port assignments with and without RA2P ........................................................................... 3-57
3-42 TOADM ring network topology ........................................................................................................................ 3-59
3-43 Interconnected TOADM rings ............................................................................................................................ 3-60
3-44 NE with connected TOADM CWR8 or CWR8-88 cards ......................................................................... 3-61
3-45 Two-degree TOADM NE linear network ....................................................................................................... 3-62
3-46 Split TOADM configuration ............................................................................................................................... 3-62
3-47 DWDM TOADM spur .......................................................................................................................................... 3-63
3-48 CWDM TOADM spur ........................................................................................................................................... 3-63
3-49 FOADM HUB ring ................................................................................................................................................. 3-65
3-50 FOADM spur connection ..................................................................................................................................... 3-66
3-51 3-Degree FOADM .................................................................................................................................................. 3-67
3-52 TOADM ring with static network spurs ......................................................................................................... 3-68
3-53 44-channel TOADM .............................................................................................................................................. 3-69
3-54 FOADM/DCM/SFD40/SFD44 .......................................................................................................................... 3-69
3-55 FOADM without DCM on LD ........................................................................................................................... 3-69
3-56 FOADM without SFD40/SFD44 ...................................................................................................................... 3-70
3-57 FOADM with DCM, SFD40/SFD44, SFD40B/SFD44B ........................................................................ 3-71
3-58 FOADM without a DCM on the LD ................................................................................................................ 3-71
3-59 FOADM without a DCM or SFD40B/SFD44B ........................................................................................... 3-72
3-60 88-channel TOADM with optional SFD44 ................................................................................................... 3-72
3-61 88-channel TOADM without SFD44B ........................................................................................................... 3-73
3-62 SVAC in TOADM ................................................................................................................................................... 3-74

3-74
3-63 MVAC in TOADM ................................................................................................................................................. 3-75
3-64 MVAC in FOADM ................................................................................................................................................. 3-75
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xix
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-65 MVAC in ROADM ................................................................................................................................................ 3-76
3-66 WTOCM/LD Connectivity with Bidirectional LDs ................................................................................... 3-77
3-67 ROADM WTOCM/LD connectivity with unidirectional LDs ............................................................... 3-78
3-68 ILA WTOCM/LD connectivity with unidirectional LDs ......................................................................... 3-78
3-69 TOADM Configurations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-79
3-70 FOADM configurations ........................................................................................................................................ 3-80
3-71 FOADM/TOADM configurations .................................................................................................................... 3-80
3-72 AxPyG Ingress LD with optional egress LD (TOADM or FOADM) ................................................. 3-82
3-73 AxPyG ingress LD with ALPFGT egress LD (FOADM only) .............................................................. 3-82
3-74 A2325A ingress LD with optional egress LD (TOADM only) .............................................................. 3-82
3-75 AM2125A ingress LD with AM2125A or AM2318A egress LD (TOADM only) ......................... 3-83
3-76 AM2125B ingress LD with AM2125B or AM2318A egress LD (TOADM only) ......................... 3-83
3-77 AM2318A ingress LD with AM2125A, AM2125B, or AM2318A egress LD (TOADM only)
............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-843-84
3-84
3-78 ALPFGT egress LD with optional ALPFGT ingress LD (FOADM only) ......................................... 3-84
3-79 OSCT card (FOADM only) ................................................................................................................................. 3-85
3-80 RA2P card with bidirectional LDs (T/R/FOADM) .................................................................................... 3-85
3-81 RA2P card with unidirectional LDs (T/ROADM only) ............................................................................ 3-86
3-82 Linear network topology ...................................................................................................................................... 3-87
3-83 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH ring network ............................................................................ 3-88
3-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 interconnected with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 ............................ 3-90
3-85 Examples of Mixed 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE topologies ........................................................... 3-91
3-86 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 OTU-1 interworking .......................................................................................... 3-92
3-87 Basic 1696-1830 transponder interoperability configuration ................................................................. 3-94
3-88 11STAR1 to 10GELAN configuration ............................................................................................................ 3-95
3-89 1830 PSS-1 GBEH to 10xGE interworking scenario ................................................................................ 3-97
3-90 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH to 10xGE GE transparent service transport ........................... 3-98
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-91 1830/1696 single line interconnections ........................................................................................................... 3-99
3-92 1830/1696 multi-line interconnections ......................................................................................................... 3-100
3-93 1830 dangling OT ................................................................................................................................................. 3-103
3-94 1621 SLE ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-104

3-104
3-95 1621 SLE configuration with 1830 PSS ...................................................................................................... 3-106
4-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 central office shelf ........................................................................................... 4-5
4-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 end office shelf ................................................................................................. 4-6
4-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf slot layout .............................................................................................. 4-10
4-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Shelf slot layout ............................................................................................. 4-11
4-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 Shelf slot layout ............................................................................................. 4-12
4-7 FLC36EA faceplate ................................................................................................................................................ 4-27

4-27
4-8 MT0C faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-28

4-28
4-9 BT36 bus termination card .................................................................................................................................. 4-29
4-10 EC faceplate .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-30

4-30
4-11 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 power filter faceplate (without voltage monitoring) ............................ 4-33
4-12 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 power filter faceplate (with voltage monitoring) .................................. 4-34
4-13 1830 PSS-36 power filter faceplate .................................................................................................................. 4-34
4-14 1830 PSS-36 fan tray ............................................................................................................................................ 4-35
4-15 1830 PSS-32 fan tray ............................................................................................................................................ 4-35
4-16 1830 PSS-16 fan tray ............................................................................................................................................ 4-36
4-17 1830 PSS-32 USRPNL faceplate ...................................................................................................................... 4-37
4-18 1830 PSS-16 USRPNL faceplate ...................................................................................................................... 4-37
4-19 Full-height LD module faceplate (typical w/DCM access) ..................................................................... 4-41
4-20 AM2125A faceplate (typical of DCM access and protective latch) ..................................................... 4-41
4-21 AM2318 faceplate (typical of no DCM with protective latch) .............................................................. 4-41
4-22 Half-height ALPFGT LD module ..................................................................................................................... 4-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xxi
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-23 RA2P optical module block diagram ............................................................................................................... 4-43
4-24 RA2P module ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-43

4-43
4-25 RA2P LAN connector ........................................................................................................................................... 4-44
4-26 OSCT card faceplate .............................................................................................................................................. 4-46

4-46
4-27 WTOCM faceplate .................................................................................................................................................. 4-46

4-46
4-28 Functional diagram of CWR8 module within an optical line ................................................................. 4-48
4-29 CWR8 faceplate ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-49

4-49
4-30 CWR8 block diagram ............................................................................................................................................ 4-50

4-50
4-31 Functional diagram of CWR8-88 module within an optical line .......................................................... 4-52
4-32 CWR8-88 faceplate ................................................................................................................................................ 4-53

4-53
4-33 CWR8-88 block diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-54
4-34 WR8-88A faceplate ................................................................................................................................................ 4-55

4-55
4-35 WR8-88A block diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-56
4-36 SFD5 functional diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-58
4-37 SFD8 functional diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-59
4-38 SFD40 module diagram ........................................................................................................................................ 4-60
4-39 SFD40/SFD40B faceplates .................................................................................................................................. 4-60
4-40 SFD40B module diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-61
4-41 SFD44 module diagram ........................................................................................................................................ 4-62
4-42 SFD44 faceplate view ........................................................................................................................................... 4-62

4-62
4-43 SFD44B module diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-63
4-44 SFD44B faceplate view ........................................................................................................................................ 4-63
4-45 ITLB block diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 4-64

4-64
4-46 ITLB faceplate view ............................................................................................................................................... 4-64

4-64
4-47 ITLB inventory port application ........................................................................................................................ 4-65
4-48 SFC4 module ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-66

4-66
4-49 Generic OT functional model ............................................................................................................................. 4-68
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-50 4DPA4 faceplate ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-71
4-71
4-51 Add/Drop operational mode ................................................................................................................................ 4-72
4-52 CROSSREGEN operational mode .................................................................................................................... 4-73
4-53 4DPA4 client signal mapping examples ......................................................................................................... 4-75
4-54 4DPA2 faceplate ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-75

4-75
4-55 11STAR1 faceplate ................................................................................................................................................. 4-78

4-78
4-56 11STAR1 block diagram ...................................................................................................................................... 4-79
4-57 11STMM10 faceplate ............................................................................................................................................ 4-82
4-58 11STMM10 OT block diagram .......................................................................................................................... 4-83
4-59 11QPA4(A) module ................................................................................................................................................ 4-87
4-60 11QPA4(A) functional diagram ......................................................................................................................... 4-89
4-61 11STGE12 faceplate .............................................................................................................................................. 4-91

4-91
4-62 11STGE12 block diagram .................................................................................................................................... 4-91
4-63 11DPE12(E) faceplate ........................................................................................................................................... 4-95
4-64 11DPE12(E) block diagram ................................................................................................................................ 4-95
4-65 11DPM12 faceplate ................................................................................................................................................ 4-98

4-98
4-66 11DPM12 ADM ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-99
4-67 11DPM12 ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex Mapping ........................................................................................... 4-100
4-68 11DPM12 OPTSG mapping ............................................................................................................................. 4-101
4-69 OPTSG cascading example: 3xSTM-4 + 4xSTM-1 + 3xSTM-16 over a single ODU2 ............ 4-104
4-70 43STX4/43STX4P OT faceplate ..................................................................................................................... 4-107
4-71 43STX4/43STX4P OT block diagram .......................................................................................................... 4-108
4-72 43SCX4 block diagram ....................................................................................................................................... 4-111
4-73 43STA1P faceplate ............................................................................................................................................... 4-112

4-112
4-74 43STA1P Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................... 4-113
4-75 43CSA1 faceplate ................................................................................................................................................. 4-114

4-114
4-76 43SCA1 Block Diagram .................................................................................................................................... 4-115
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xxiii
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-77 112SCX10 faceplate ............................................................................................................................................ 4-117
4-78 112SNX10 faceplate ............................................................................................................................................ 4-118
4-79 112SCA1 Faceplate ............................................................................................................................................. 4-120

4-120
4-80 112SCA1 block diagram with CFP ................................................................................................................ 4-122
4-81 112SNA1 Faceplate ............................................................................................................................................. 4-123
4-82 112SNA1 block diagram with CFP ................................................................................................................ 4-125
4-83 1+1 protection using Y-cable ............................................................................................................................ 4-129
4-84 OPS functional diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 4-132
4-85 OPS module faceplate ......................................................................................................................................... 4-133
4-86 SVAC faceplate ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-134

4-134
4-87 MVAC faceplate .................................................................................................................................................... 4-135

4-135
5-1 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 PM points .......................................................................................................... 5-6
5-2 Analog parameter TCAs ......................................................................................................................................... 5-9

5-9
5-3 EPT parameters for a TOADM node ............................................................................................................... 5-26
5-4 Per-channel power control points within a TOADM node ...................................................................... 5-27
5-5 Valid automatic and manual power adjustment configurations .............................................................. 5-28
5-6 Path power trace ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-31

5-31
5-7 Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point .............................................................. 5-32
6-1 1830 PSS-32 Shelf view showing power and ground connectors ........................................................... 6-4
6-2 Airflow through 1830 PSS-36 shelf ................................................................................................................. 6-13
6-5 Air filter ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16

6-16
7-1 Recommended 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 circuit pack and unit sparing levels: 30-day lead
time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-38
7-38
time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-41
7-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-43
7-43
8-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf dimensions .............................................................................................. 8-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xxv
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This document describes the features, applications, configurations, and technical
specifications for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Services Switch 36 (PSS-36),
Photonic Services Switch 32 (PSS-32), and Photonic Services Switch 16 (PSS-16).
Hardware components, network elements, and networks associated with these platform
variants, referred to collectively as 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16, are described here in
detail.
A high-level overview of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 Edge Devices are also included.
However, the focus of this document is on the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 platforms.
For complete information about a specific PSS-1 Edge Device, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide,
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.8.0 MD4H Edge
Device User Guide, or the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1)
Release 1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide.
Reason for reissue

This document is being revised to include information about the new features supported
by Release 3.6 of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS16).
Intended audience
Network planners, analysts, managers, and engineers comprise the primary audience for
the 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide. However, the Alcatel-Lucent
Account Team as well as anyone who needs information about the features, applications,
operation, and technical specifications of1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 could find this
document useful.
How to use this document

This document is divided into nine chapters. Refer to the Contents section to locate
specific information by chapter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xxvii
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety information
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.50 and
3.6.51 Safety Guide for safety information.
Related information
In addition to the 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide, the following
documents are included in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 document set in this release.
Table 1 Supporting documentation
Part number Document title

8DG61100HAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Safety Guide
8DG61100EAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 TL1
Commands and Messages Guide
8DG61100FAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Command
Line Interface Guide
3AL61337AAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 8.6.5
Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide
8DG61100GAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.6.50 Engineering and
Planning Tool User Guide
8DG61100BAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.5.60 and
3.6.51 User Provisioning Guide
8DG61100CAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.6.50 and
3.6.51 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing
Guide
8DG61100DAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation and System
Turn-Up Guide
8DG60418LAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS-1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device
User Guide
8DG60386JAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS-1) Release 1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User
Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Supporting documentation (continued)
8DG60888KAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1

(PSS-1) Release 1.1.0 MSAH Edge Device
User Guide
8DG60888LAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1
(PSS-1) Release 1.8.0 MD4H Edge Device
User Guide
8DG61100KAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.6.51
GMRE Command Line Interface Guide
8DG61100LAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.6.51
GMRE/GMPLS Configuration Guide
8DG61100PAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS R3.6.50 and 3.6.51
Data Communication Network (DCN)
Planning Guide
8DG60777KAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 3.5.0
RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA User Guide
8DG61100JAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Quick
Reference Guide
8DG60889AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Product Family Release 3.6.50 and
3.6.51 CD-ROM 1
3KC13128AAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4
(PSS-4) Release 3.6.50 User Guide
3KC13128BAAATQZZA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4
(PSS-4) Release 3.6.50 CLI Command Guide
3KC13129AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4
(PSS-4) Release 3.6.50 Customer
Documentatioin CD-ROM 1
Notes:
1. The CD does not include 1354 RM-PhM Guide or EPT User Guide. These are published on
separate media.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xxix
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document support
Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a non-technical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)
713 5000 (for all countries).
Technical support
Login to OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) at http://support.alcatel-lucent.com and
select your country from the pulldown menu under "Product Technical Support - Phone
and Email Contact Information".
How to order
Contact your local sales representative, or login to OLCS at http://support.alcatel-
lucent.com and select your product from the pulldown menu under "Technical Content
for".
Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field
Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the
market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end of their useful
life in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation. They shall not
be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be
contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human
health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates
that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to
provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent
equipment.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support at
[email protected] ([email protected]).
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
How to comment
To comment on this information product, go to the Online Comment Form
(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments) or email your comments to the Comments
Hotline ([email protected]).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and xxxi
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
1 Introduction
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter introduces the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Switch (PSS) family, with a
focus on the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 platforms. It also provides high-level
overviews of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device, Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH Edge Device, and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP amplifier. For detailed information about 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16, refer to Chapter 2, “Features” and Chapter 4, “Product
description”. For detailed information about the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Devices, and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP amplifier, refer to their respective user guides.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-2

Overview of Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio 1-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family 1-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 1-7
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device 1-9
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 1-9
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH Edge Device 1-10
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP Amplifier 1-11
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1-11
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 benefits 1-12
Release 3.6.50/ Release 3.6.51 Feature List 1-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and 1-1
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
MP L E
Lifting hazard E F
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal word Meaning

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
Symbols used in safety messages

The following symbols are defined for safety messages (hazard statements):
Legend
1 Safety Alert Symbol 12 Heavy overhead load

2 Electric shock 13 Noxious substance
3 Hazard of laser radiation 14 Explosion hazard

4 Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) 15 Falling object hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Electromagnetic radiation 16 Risk of suffocation
6 Flammable material / Risk of fire 17 Pinch hazard

7 Service disruption hazard 18 Lifting hazard, heavy object
8 Laceration hazard 19 Inhalation hazard

9 Corrosive substance 20 Slip hazard
10 Hazard caused by batteries 21 Trip hazard

11 Hot surface 22 Hazard of falling
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio

Introduction
Metropolitan, regional, and long-haul networks are communications networks that link
homes and businesses to larger, long-distance core networks. These complex networks are
filled with both legacy and new networking equipment, and must carry all types of
service traffic, including voice, data, and video. Complete information about the many
Alcatel-Lucent products in the merged Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio that supports
metropolitan, regional, and long-haul networks can be obtained from local customer
teams.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) product family provides
increased network flexibility and operational automation through zero-touch, transparent
photonic networking. Photonic networks use simplified and accelerated operations to
transform wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) into true transport networking with
advanced flexibility, performance, automation, and integration.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family includes the following:
• Universal slot-based shelves
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 Shelf
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Central Office Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 End Office Shelf
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Shelf
• Edge device (1 RU) shelves
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH Edge Device
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP amplifier
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 key differentiators

The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 has the following features that differentiate it from
other optical hardware.
• Modular multi-service multi-reach WDM platform provides the following:
– The best capital expense/operational expense (CAPEX/OPEX) mix
– Provides unrivaled density
– Optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) as:
Fixed OADM (FOADM)
Tunable OADM (TOADM)
Reconfigurable/Tunable OADM (R/TOADM)
– Universal optical transponder cards
– Options for full C-band tunable optics and PTM optics
• Photonic layer management
– Flexibility through automation
– Wavelength Tracker
– Automatic network-wide power monitoring
– Network design tools
– Transponderless node auto-commissioning
• Streamlined operations and reduced cost
– Comprehensive element management layer/network management layer
(EML/NML) reduces the operations expense (OPEX) for service provisioning
– Enhanced web-based work flows reduce the OPEX involved for managing
services
– Service assurance capabilities rapidly identify customers and services impact
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution
Figure 1-1, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution” (p. 1-6) shows the three key features that
distinguish Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS: the Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool
(EPT), the Network Management System (NMS), and the Network Element (NE)
Figure 1-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS solution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS platform family represents the next generation zero-touch
transparent photonic network solution. They compose a family of service-optimized,
flexible platforms that deliver advanced OADM/CWDM/DWDM transport capabilities.
This highly scalable and versatile set of packages support interoffice facility/converged
core transport and wavelength services such as OTN, SDH/SONET, GigE/10 GigE and
Storage Area Networks.
This innovative offering enables service providers to enhance their revenue opportunities
by offering a cost-effective, flexible and intelligent optical layer on which to deliver
voice, data and video services while minimizing operational and capital costs.
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 multi-service multi-reach solution

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, PSS-32, and PSS-16 are three closely related shelves
that compose the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 multi-service mult-reach solution. They
are scalable optical transport platforms that provide an evolution toward a single
converged platform for multi-service DWDM metro-area, long-haul, and Optical
Transport Network (OTN) switching, and leading edge flexibility with next generation
optical and OTN capabilities.
• The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 Universal shelf provides a 36-slot platform that
supports up to 18 full height universal, or service, slots and up to 32 half-height
universal, or service, slots.
• The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Central Office Shelf provides a 32-slot platform.
• The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 End Office Shelf provides an economical 16-slot
platform with a smaller footprint.
In this document, these shelves are referred to collectively as the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16. For specific information about the hardware and capabilities supported by
each of these shelves support, see Chapter 4, “Product description”.
WDM platform family
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 provides the following wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM) platform features.
• Cost-optimized footprints
• CWDM/DWDM platform
• 1 to 10-degree wavelength-selectable switch (WSS)-based R/TOADM
w/colored/colorless add/drop
• Fixed/Reconfigurable/Tunable OADM (FOADM/ROADM/TOADM) configurations
• Point-to-point linear, ring, and mesh-capable networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 88 channel support
• 2.5G/10G/40G/100G transport support
• Single fiber bidirectional transmission
• Advanced Engineering Rules
• Wavelength Tracker
• Software control of transmission (SCOT)
• Alien wavelength management
• Advanced Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT)
Note: TOADM and 100G transport are only supported on Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32.
Blade-based OTN/GbE/TDM service cards
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 provides the following blade-based OTN/GbE/TDM
service cards.
• Full C-band OTN tunable transponders or pluggable CWDM/DWDM XFPs
• Universal client interface cards
• Transparent/groomed services
• Optimized service interfaces
• Optical drop and continue for video
• Multiservice cards
• Alien wavelength cards
• Interleaver cards for 88 channel support with 50GHz spacing (Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-36/32)
• Up to 20 DWDM (TOADM) optical lines per NE (CWDM optical lines limited only
by the number of available shelf space)
High speed optical transponder shelf application (Drop Shelf)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 can be equipped with high-speed (40G and 100G)
optical transponders (OTs) as a High Speed Optical Transponder shelf. In this
configuration Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 can act as a
drop shelf for Alcatel-Lucent 1625LX, This configuration and features associated with it
are documented in the Photonic Service Switch (PSS-32/36) Release 3.6.50 High Speed
Optical Transponder Shelf User Guide.
GMPLS Control Plane
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 support a control plane, on top of the transport or
(data) plane, for building the GMPLS/ASON networks. This control plane uses a set of
protocols (OSPF-TE, RSVP-TE, LMP) to exchange information between network
elements (nodes) for establishing and releasing paths in an automated, distributed fashion
across a network. Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element in the transport plane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
can be equipped with a controller, called a GMPLS Routing Engine (GMRE). The GMRE
nodes in a network form the control plane and running the GMPLS protocol suite. All the
resources of the GMRE nodes are stored into a topology database, which is used for
routing and for link and alarm administration.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device

Introduction
The 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device is a 1-Rack-Unit (1-RU) device for installation in
19-inch, ANSI, or ETSI racks. It is based on a 12xGbE optical transponder that supports
optional CWDM filters.
Highlights of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device:
• 1 RU height
• DC power
• 1830 PSS-1 GBEH (8DG59989AA) is temperature hardened. Early PSS-1 GBE
platforms (8DG59657AA) are not temperature hardened.
• Black & White (B&W) or CWDM optics
• Support for single-fiber bidirectional transmission
• In-band management via GCC
• Interworking with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS or Alcatel-Lucent 1696ROADM
For a full list of features and complete product information, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

Introduction
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is a 1-Rack-Unit (1-RU) device for installation in
19-inch, ANSI, or ETSI racks. The MD4H designation represents the device as a
Multiservice Dual module unit with 4 client ports per module, which is temperature
Hardened. This device is based on two 4DPA4 optical transponders remapped into an 1
RU device that also supports optional CWDM filters.
Highlights of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
• -48V DC power supply with redundancy (PF1 and PF2)
• Black & White (B&W) or CWDM optics
• Support for single-fiber bidirectional transmission
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• In-band management via GCC
• Interworking with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS or Alcatel-Lucent 1696ROADM
Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.8.0 MD4H Edge Device User Guide.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH Edge Device

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH is a temperature hardened 1-Rack-Unit (1-RU)
device that provides a low cost option for aggregating E1 over WDM that simplifies
network infrastructure. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH supports two half-height
line cards (1xE1 aggregator and 1x4DPA4) to aggregate of up to 21 E1s in 155M
services.
Highlights of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH hardware features:
• Support for 8 CWDM wavelengths
• Fault and performance monitoring of the E1 aggregator
• Provide -48V DC power supply with redundancy (PF1 and PF2)
• External AC power supply
• Variable speed FAN unit:
– Controlled by hardware according to temperature settings in EEPROM
– Faceplate provides physical access to CIT, LAN1, and LAN2 ports
• ETSI CE certification
• Interworking with 1830, 1850, and 1870 platforms
• WebUI, CLI, SNMP I/F management and 1350 OMS support
Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.1.0 MSAH Edge Device User Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP Amplifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP Amplifier

Introduction
The 1830 PSS-1 AHP is a 1-Rack-Unit (1-RU) Edge Device supporting a specially
adapted amplifier, similar to the AHPHG card that can be installed in universal slot-based
shelves. Two PSS-1 AHP devices can be used to provide a low cost in-line amplifier
(ILA) node solution for 1830 PSS.
Highlights of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP features:
• Dual power filters with available redundancy
• The equipment controller, located on the backplane.
• Variable speed FAN unit:
– Controlled by hardware according to temperature settings in EEPROM
– Faceplate provides physical access to CIT, LAN1, and LAN2 ports
• OSC SFP module mounted internally within the amplifier card (Supports both OC-3
(155Mb/s) and Fast Ethernet (125 Mb/s) speed.)
• SFC filters, used on other 1830 PSS-1 shelves, are not used by the 1830 PSS-1 AHP.
Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide.

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 provides a modular platform with 4 universal slots that
can be used to hold cards supporting ILAs and various FOADM and terminal
configurations. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf is 2 RU high and can be mounted in
EIA (19" or 23"), ETSI, or WECO racks.
Highlights of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 features:
• Dual power filters with available redundancy
• CWDM or DWDM pluggable filters (optional)
• A pluggable controller with management I/O connections
• A pluggable fan unit
• 2 full-height or 4 half-height universal OT slots
Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 3.6.50 User Guide..
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 benefits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 benefits

Introduction
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 multi-service multi-reach shelves are designed to
provide options that drive down the costs of metro, regional, and long-haul network
deployments while increasing network manageability and responsiveness. One of the
main benefits of this platform is its scalability and application support, from simple
CWDM networks, through aggregation of CWDM/DWDM ring/mesh networks, to
regional and long-haul DWDM networks. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 provides
much of the functionality of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-36 in a smaller footprint and at lower initial cost. It also interworks seamlessly with
the larger shelves.
Lower costs
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS platform family supports the delivery of wavelength and
SDH/SONET services, while lowering the cost per bit carried, to accommodate changing
traffic patterns and enable fast service provisioning times.
The open photonic layer enables service providers to lower transport network costs by
eliminating unnecessary OEO conversions. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS platform family
can reduce network capital and operating costs by more than 50 percent each, improve
service velocity, and improve optical network manageability.
Manages capital expense (CAPEX)
Capital expense is reduced at central office, data center, and customer premise
configurations. Reduced sparing requirements and transponder configurations further cost
savings. Additionally, CAPEX is managed through the following 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 features.
• Zero-touch (“touchless”) transparent photonic networking/pure photonic traffic
processing
• Integrated any-type client interfaces
• Support of 40G/100G wavelengths for increasing service demands
• Multi-degree nodes for meshed topologies (1830 PSS-36 and 1830 PSS-32)
Provides exceptional operations environment
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 control plane facilitates and enhances the operations
environment by providing automated support, including auto-discovery of new circuit
packs, turn-up, and continuous SLA monitoring. Industry-leading density and a
GUI-based Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) add to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
exceptional operations environment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operations expense (OPEX) is reduced through the following 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16 features.
• End-to-end wavelength provisioning by network operations center (NOC)
• No manual intervention at the network element (NE)
• Fast network re-configuration from the NOC
• Extended photonic operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) and
restoration capabilities
Delivers service assurance

The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 platform delivers service assurance via integrated
Wavelength Tracker optical layer management. Wavelength Tracker optical layer
management delivers wavelength path tracing and monitoring capabilities and provides
proactive service assurance at low operational costs.
Wavelength Tracker optical performance monitoring
Wavelength Tracker enables next-generation optical networks through protected
wavelengths and extension to higher-degree nodes. Wavelength Tracker also provides the
following features.
• Service-aware wavelength management
• Easy-to-use graphical display allows for quick troubleshooting and fault isolation
• Saves on specialized training and costly optical test equipment
Wavelength Tracker optical layer management enables the delivery of true optical SLAs,
reduces network operations costs and makes optical network simple to manage.
Delivers forecast-free optical networking
• Reconfigurable, tunable OADM (R/TOADM)
• Fixed OADM (FOADM)
• Add/drop any wavelength at any node to reduce stranded bandwidth
• Add/drop any service at any port
• Up to 10-degree nodes for maximum connectivity
• CWDM/DWDM wavelengths
Improve efficiency, scalability and flexibility

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS multi-service multi-reach solution brings new levels of
efficiency, scalability, and flexibility to long-haul, regional, and metro networks by
offering reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexing, pay-as-you-grow DWDM, flexible
network and element management choices, and advanced network planning in a single
package. This architecture allows for arbitrary optical mesh networks, with a combination
of both ROADM and static NEs within the networks, that allows the lowest cost with the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
added flexibility of TOADMs. The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 enable service providers
to offer existing and new services while achieving life cycle cost savings over existing
networks.
Interworking with existing networks

The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports a variety of OTN/SDH/SONET, data, and
wavelength services for complementary interworking with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
PSS-1 Edge Devices and existing networks such as Alcatel-Lucent 1696ROADM.
Additionally, 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 photonic interoperability with other ITU grid
equipment reduces optical-to-electrical-to-optical (OEO) conversions.
GMPLS/ASON network benefits

The Benefits associated with a GMPLS-based network include:
• Fast and automated path provisioning
• Enhanced scalability
• High resilience against failures with minimum additional resources
• Support of multi-vendor networks
• Interworking with other networks at boundary nodes
• Support of multi-technology networks (IP, ATM, SDH, OTH)
• Seamless integration of data and transmission networks
• More efficient restoration procedure (distributed restoration instead of centralized
restoration)
• Fast and efficient network reaction in failure situations
• Maintenance improvement
Because all necessary network information is available locally, coordination of
maintenance actions is simplified
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Introduction Release 3.6.50/ Release 3.6.51 Feature List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release 3.6.50/ Release 3.6.51 Feature List

1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
The following is a list of new features for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.6.50
and 3.6.51.
• New Hardware
– 43SCA1
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports a 43-Gb/s single port tunable AnyRate
coherent Add/Drop optical transponder (43SCA1). The 43SCA1 OT uses
Polarization Division Multiplexing NRZ Binary Phase Shift Keying (PDM NRZ
BPSK) pulse format on the line interface. A line side coherent receiver, combined
with a digital signal processor (DSP), provides compensation for linear
transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD) and a reduction of
intra-channel non-linear transmission impairments (SPM and non-linear phase
noise). The line side optics of the 43SCA1 OT can be tuned to any of the 88
wavelengths in the C-band. The client interface supports fixed, short reach optics,
according to application code VSR2000-3R2/3/5 in ITU-T G.693. The 43SCA1
OT supports STM-256/OC-768 client interfaces. The Wavetracker encoder is
supported on the line interface for optical power auto-management. The 43SCA1
OT is a three slot wide, full height circuit pack supported on the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
– 112SNX10
The extended reach 10x10-Gb/s coherent optical muxponder (112SNX10) is
introduced. The line port of the 112SNX10 has tuning capability that supports the
full 88-channel C-Band with integrated Wavetracker encoder, and industry leading
performance for dispersion and nonlinearity tolerance. The line interface supports
the OTU4 digital structure compliant with ITU-T G.709/G.798. The client ports
use XFP modules to support flexible configuration of aggregated 10G services
including 10GbE LAN (Transparent or GFP mapped), OC-192/STM-64 or OTU2.
The 112SNX10 OT is a three slot wide, full height circuit pack supported on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
– 112SNA10
The extended reach 100-Gb/s coherent Add/Drop optical transponder (112SNA1)
is introduced. The line port of the 112SNA10 has tuning capability that supports
the full 88-channel C-Band with integrated Wavetracker encoder, and industry
leading performance for dispersion and nonlinearity tolerance. The 112SNA1
supports the add and drop of OCh services to or from the optical line. The line
interface supports the OTU4 digital structure compliant with ITU-T G.709/G.798.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The client port uses a CFP pluggable module to support direct connectivity to a
100GbE LAN interface. The 100GbE LAN signal is transparently mapped into an
ODU4 structure and transported via an OTN network. The 112SNA1 OT is a three
slot wide, full height circuit pack supported on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
• Feature enhancements
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports extended single span transmission (over 53 dB)
via interworking with Alcatel-Lucent 1621 SLE with auto power reduction (APR)
support for safety protection.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports AnyDirection/colorless configurations based
on WR8-88A circuit packs. Local A/D is managed as a single TID with automated
commission, power control, optical monitoring provision, and in-service upgrade
from existing WR8-88A based mesh node via addition of add/drop block is
supported. The AnyDirection/colorless add/drop channels can be managed by the
GMPLS control plane.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports unidirectional, bidirectional, and non-revertive
1+1 Y-cable protection for two adjacent 100Gb/s coherent optical muxponders.
The Y-cable protection support is available for 112SCX10 or 112SNX10 on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
– Fast Ethernet client service is supported on the pluggable 12xGbE optical
muxponders (11DPE12 and 11DPE12E) via optical physical client ports.
– The electrical physical client interface is supported on the pluggable 12xGbE
optical muxponder (11DPE12E) for the Fast Ethernet client service via electrical
SFPs.
– The pluggable 12xAny optical muxponders (11DPM12) supports the OPTSG
cascading for STM-1/OC-3 and STM-4/OC-12 client services and allows clients
from different port groups to be aggregated onto the single ODU1PTF. OPTSG
mapping is a proprietary sub-OPU1 timeslot mapping implementation. The
11DPM12 allows a maximum of 12xSTM-1/OC-3 services into one ODU1 or a
maximum of 4xSTM-4/OC-12 services into one ODU1.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports cross-connections between two adjacent optical
transponders via the backplane. Services can be switched between the client port
of one OT and the line port of another OT, and between the line port of one OT
and the line port of another OT. This feature support is available for dual
pluggable 12xGbE muxponder (11DPE12E) on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports dual-stage multiplexing with 12xAny
muxponder (11DPM12) cascading with 10x10Gb/s coherent muxponder
(112SCX10). The low bit rate client services can be aggregated onto OTU2 line
port via 11DPM12 OT and then added at the client ports of an 112SCX10 and
multiplexed onto OTU4 line port. Fault correlation support for dual stage
multiplexing with 11DPM12 and 112SCX10 will be available in future releases.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– The 10Gb/s AnyRate optical transponder (11STAR1) is enhanced to support
GCC0 processing on the line port of the 11STAR1.
– An Auto-refresh option for Performance Monitoring is available from user
interface (WebUI) to enhance operation, and the ability to generate Ping requests
from theWebUI to facilitate troubleshooting of DCN networks is supported in
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ROADM nodes support open loop tilt control, allowing
channel power profile to be launched at the ROADM with a configurable tilt,
calculated on channel loading and coefficient passed through commission for
improved transmission performance.
– Intra-node channel trace via inferred power monitoring is introduced for TOADM
nodes equipped with WTOCM, to support per-channel visibility and monitoring.
– The option to disable auto power reduction (APR) for configuration with amplifier
modules not exceeding Class 1M safety limit is introduced. Extended DCN is
supported for spans with OSC disabled. The APR disable option is prevented for
configurations including amplifier modules exceeding Class 1M safety limit.
– Automatic power reduction (APR) is enhanced in configurations with RA2P
(Raman) modules preceding unidirectional EDFA amplifiers (AM2125x or
AM2318A) in an 1830 PSS node by adding loss of Wavetracker tones as a second
trigger for APR. Both loss of OSC and loss of tones must occur before APR
occurs.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS allows customers to upload network configuration from
a network element to the EPT including Brownfield design support for network
deployment audit and/or incrementally expanding the network based on actual
deployed hardware.
– Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the commissioning of configurable target
power per transponder type, generated by EPT for improved transmission
performance.
• GMPLS Control Plane Features in R3.6.51
– GMPLS support for following WR8-88A based DLS/CLS NE configurations:
- Color-less directionless node, implemented into two NEs with up to 8 colorless
channels per add/drop blocks
- Color-less directionless node, implemented in a single NE with up to 64 channel
colorless channels per add/drop blocks
- Color-less directionless node, implemented in a single NE with up to 8 colorless
channels per add/drop blocks
– GMPLS supports for 43SCA1 optical transponder
– GMPLS supports back-to-back 3R Regeneration of 43STX4P optical muxponder
– GMPLS supports unidirectional 3R regeneration of coherent optical transponders,
including 112SCX10, 112SCA1, 43SCX4, 43SCA1
– Improved GMPLS single SBR restoration for both consistency and reduced
restoration time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Improved GMRE routing computation by using Target Line Port Power level per
transponder type
– 1830 PSS allows partial disjointedness (aka, maximal disjoint) in GMPLS
computation to provide additional restoration flexibility routing computation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
2 Features
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter highlights the key features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch-36 (1830 PSS-36), the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-32 (1830
PSS-32) Central Office Switch, and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-16
(1830 PSS-16) End Office Switch. Together these three shelves, referred to as 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16, share many components and attributes. 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16 shelves are part of the 1830 PSS WDM product family, which also includes
the 1830 PSS-1 GBEH, PSS-1 MD4H, PSS-1 AHP, and PSS-1 MSAH edge devices.
Not all features or cards are targeted for use on all 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves.
When specific shelves are mentioned, that feature or card is targeted for use only on the
shelves mentioned. See “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 hardware application”
(p. 2-116) to identify the cards supported on each shelf in this release.
For complete information about the 1830 PSS-1 edge devices, refer to the respective User
Guide for that product (see Table 1, “Supporting documentation” (p. xxviii)).
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS36/PSS-32/PSS-16 2-3

OADM architectures 2-3
DWDM filter architectures 2-4
Bidirectional CWDM single-fiber transmission 2-13
Optical amplification and dispersion compensation 2-18
Automatic power reduction (APR) 2-22
Optical transponders 2-40
Wavelength Tracker 2-68
Alien wavelengths 2-76
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection 2-77

Optical protection for 40G OTs 2-88
CWDM 2-91
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves and equipage 2-93
Operation, administration, and maintenance 2-123
DWDM topologies 2-130
Ethernet EPL and EVPL services 2-132
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OADM architectures
Overview
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 is designed as a set of highly modular wavelength
division multiplexing (WDM) multi-service multi-reach platforms that cost-effectively
meet the initial demands of metro networks, easily support upgrades to meet future
demands, and also provide support for long-haul applications. At the same time, it
employs advanced “Zero Touch Photonics” management and control features, simplifying
WDM system management so that it approaches the ease-of-use usually associated only
with SDH/SONET technology. Several basic optical add/drop multiplexer architectures
are supported.
FOADM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) FOADM is based on a low-cost
fixed static filter, providing colored add/drop capability. The SFD/C-based FOADM
provides less operational flexibility, but greater CAPEX savings than a TOADM.
FOADM configurations can support both DWDM and CWDM.
ROADM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) ROADM is based on the
88-channel Wavelength Router (WR8-88A and WR8-88AF). The WR8-88A(F) provides
increased performance and can be used for Anydirection configurations. The
WR8-88A(F) does not support colorless ports. Like the TOADM, this configuration
supports automated commissioning, power control, optical monitoring, provision, and
in-service upgrade.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) ROADM with Anydirection
Add/Drop is based on the Wavelength Router (WR8-88A or WR8- 88AF) and 8-channel
Colorless Wavelength Router (CWR8-88). This configuration supports colorless
Anydirection add/drop channels, with automated commission, power control, optical
monitoring provision and in-service upgrade
TOADM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) TOADM is based on the
8-channel Colorless Wavelength Router (CWR8 and CWR8-88). This configuration
supports colorless add/drop, with automated commission, power control, optical
monitoring, provision, and in-service upgrade.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features DWDM filter architectures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM filter architectures

DWDM filter overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 can be equipped to
support DWDM C-band wavelength channels from the standardized optical grid specified
by the ITU-T G.692 recommendation with spacings of 100 or 50GHz..
Channels and wavelengths for 100GHz spacing are described in Table 8-29, “DWDM
wavelengths (100-GHz spacing)” (p. 8-51). Up to 88 channels are supported with 50
GHZ spacing. They are composed of 44 “even” channels supported by the SFD44, and 44
“odd' channels, supported by the SFD44B. Channels are combined by an ITLB
interleaver. The resulting 50 GHz channel spacing is described in Table 8-30, “DWDM
wavelengths (50-GHz spacing)” (p. 8-52).
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS shelves supports a wide range of DWDM filter
architectures that allow the operator to optimize for lowest first equipment cost (capex) or
lowest operating cost (opex). In fact, nodes with different types of filters can be mixed in
the same network to allow even more granular optimization, if desired.
The different filter architectures are characterized by the optical technologies employed in
the multiplexing/demultiplexing and, in some cases, switching of optical channel
wavelengths.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports:
• A CWDM FOADM node with optical interconnections of 1 and 2 degrees.
• A DWDM FOADM node with optical interconnections of up to 4 degrees.
• A TOADM node with optical interconnections of up to 8 degrees.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 supports:
• A DWDM FOADM node up to 2 degrees. (Software does not preclude up to 4
degrees, but this is not supported by EPT and SVT.)
• A TOADM node up to 6 degrees. (Software does not preclude up to 8 degrees, but
this is not supported by EPT and SVT.)
Note: CWDM FOADM is not supported on a NE with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
shelves. Software does not preclude a CWDM FOADM, but it is not supported by
EPT and SVT.
FOADM
Fixed OADM (FOADM) optimizes for lowest first cost by using static optical filters for
multiplexing/demultiplexing. Further optimization is obtained by offering four FOADM
filter choices:
• 5-channel filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Not all filters are required for configurations on all shelves. See “1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 hardware application” (p. 2-116).
This can be expanded to an 80 or 88-channel architecture by using a pair of 40 or
44-channel filters. One filter that supports channels on the standard 100GHz wavelength
intervals, and a second filter that supports channels at a 50GHz offset. The 80/88-channel
architecture also requires a channel interleaver, to combine the two sets of channels. (See
Figure 3-32, “Degree 2 DWDM FOADM (80-channel/50GHz spacing)” (p. 3-49).)
Static filters require that optical transponders be fibered to the correct wavelength ports
on the filter faceplates, any reconfigurability requires manual rearrangement of the fibers.
5-channel static filter (SFD5)
The eight 5-channel filters shown in Table 2-1, “SFD5 channel coverage” (p. 2-5) cover
40 of the 88 DWDM wavelengths listed in Table 8-30, “DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz
spacing)” (p. 8-52).
Table 2-1 SFD5 channel coverage
ITU Freq.. SFD5 ITU Freq.. SFD5 ITU Freq.. SFD5 ITU Freq.. SFD5
Ch. filter Ch. filter Ch. filter Ch. filter
17 191.7 — 39 193.9 —
18 191.8 — 40 194.0 —
19 191.9 SFD5A 29 192.9 SFD5C 41 194.1 SFD5E 51 195.1 SFD5G
20 192.0 30 193.0 42 194.2 52 195.2
21 192.1 31 193.1 43 194.3 53 195.3
22 192.2 32 193.2 44 194.4 54 195.4
23 192.3 33 193.3 45 194.5 55 195.5
24 192.4 SFD5B 34 193.4 SFD5D 46 194.6 SFD5F 56 195.6 SFD5H
25 192.5 35 193.5 47 194.7 57 195.7
26 192.6 36 193.6 48 194.8 58 195.8
27 192.7 37 193.7 49 194.9 59 195.9
28 192.8 38 193.8 50 195.0 60 196.0
Each SFD5 filter card has a 5-channel optical multiplexer and 5-channel demultiplexer,
plus a two-fiber expansion port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-1, “FOADM 5-channel static-filter architecture (2-degree)” (p. 2-6).
Figure 2-1 FOADM 5-channel static-filter architecture (2-degree)
Expansion ports can be used to cascade up to 3 filters in any combination, allowing for a
maximum of 15 individually demultiplexed/multiplexed channels. Each of these 15
locally accessible channels can be either locally add-dropped, transparently passed
through, or regenerated if necessary. All other channels are band-passed through.
For lowest start-up cost, a node would start with a single SFD5x filter (with x being any
of the 8 variants). As more local add/drop channels are required, a second or third SFD5
can be cascaded.
8-channel static filter (SFD8)
The SFD8 filter card supports Add/Drop of 8 out of 40 wavelengths in 1830 CO shelf.
Each SFD8 filter card has a 8-channel optical multiplexer and 8-channel demultiplexer.
An SFD8 supports all FOADM configurations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SFD8 filter has four hardware variants (SFD8A, SFD8B, SFD8C, SFD8D) to provide
32 DWDM channel support.
Table 2-2 SFD8 channel coverage
ITU Channel Frequency SFD8 filter ITU Frequency SFD8 filter

Channel
17 191.7 -
18 191.8 -
19 191.9 - 40 194.0
20 192.0 SFD8A 41 194.1
21 192.1 42 194.2 SFD8C
22 192.2 43 194.3
23 192.3 44 194.4
24 192.4 45 194.5
25 192.5 SFD8A 46 194.6
26 192.6 47 194.7 SFD8C
27 192.7 48 194.8
28 192.8 49 194.9
29 192.9 50 195.0
30 193.0 SFD8B 51 195.1
31 193.1 52 195.2 SFD8D
32 193.2 53 195.3
33 193.3 54 195.4
34 193.4 55 195.5
35 193.5 SFD8B 56 195.6
36 193.6 57 195.7 SFD8D
37 193.7 58 195.8
38 193.8 59 195.9
39 193.9 60 196.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
40-channel static filter (SFD40/40B)
Each SFD40/40B filter card has a 40-channel optical multiplexer and 40-channel
demultiplexer. The SFD40 provides access to 40 standard “even” channels at 100Ghz
spacing, and the SFD40B provides access to 40 “odd” channels at a 50Ghz offset from
the standard “even” channels. An SFD40/40B has Thermal Version AWG requiring
temperature control. This requires 10 minutes stabilization time from start-up.
An SFD40/40B has the following application interfaces:
• One Wire Interface (RJ11) for remote inventory retrieval
• Management Interface (RJ45, [email protected])
• Reset button
• Self management without an Equipment Controller (EC)
• Alarm LEDs on the front panel of SFD40/40B indicates the alarm status for the
following alarms: PWRA, PWRB, LOS, TOR (temperature)
Performance monitoring of optical power at SFD40/40B Transmit/Receive ports is not
supported.
Channel Plan
• Even Channel Version: 9210-9600 (SFD40)
• Odd Channel Version: 9215-9605 (SFD40B)
44-channel static filter (SFD44/44B)
Each SFD44/44B filter has a 44-channel optical multiplexer and demultiplexer. An
SFD44 gives local access to 44 channels from day 1. This gives the greatest flexibility
and simplifies planning, but at a slightly higher first cost than a single 5-channel filter.
Each of the 44 channels can be locally add-dropped, transparently passed through, or
regenerated if necessary. No expansion port is required as all 44 channels are available.
The SFD44 provides access to 44 standard “even” channels at 100Ghz spacing, and the
SFD44B provides access to 44 “odd” channels at a 50Ghz offset from the standard “even”
channels. When combined, these filters provide access to 88 channel configurations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 FOADM 44-channel static filter architecture (2-degree)
ROADM
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS reconfigurable OADM (ROADM) is based on the
88-channel Wavelength Router (WR8-88A and WR8-88AF). The WR8-88A(F) provides
increased performance and can be used for Anydirection configurations. Like the
TOADM, this configuration supports automated commissioning, power control, optical
monitoring provision and in-service upgrade.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ROADM with Anydirection Add/Drop is based on the
Wavelength Router (WR8-88A and WR8-88AF) and 8- channel Colorless Wavelength
Router (CWR8-88). This configuration supports colorless anydirection add/drop
channels, with automated commission, power control, optical monitoring provision and
in-service upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 ROADM filter architecture (2-degree)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-4 ROADM filter architecture w/growth beyond 8 add-drop channels
Support for 100GHz and 50 GHz channel spacing

Up to 2 degrees are supported at either 100 or 50 GHz channel spacing. For 50 GHz
channel spacing the ITLB is required along with the appropriate filter.
The following hardware combinations are supported for 100 and 50 GHZ channel
spacing:
• 100 GHz spacing
– SFD5
– SFD8
– SFD40
– SFD44
• 50 GHZ spacing
– ITLB+SFD5
– ITLB+SFD8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– ITLB+SFD40
– ITLB+SFD40B
– ITLB+SFD40+SFD40B
– ITLB+SFD44
– ITLB+SFD44B
– ITLB+SFD44+SFD44B
TOADM
The tunable OADM (TOADM) is based on the 8-channel Colorless Wavelength Router
(CWR8 and CWR8-88). A TOADM is a refinement to the ROADM that yields the
ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in conjunction with transponders
with tunable wavelength lasers, and SVACs (single-port variable attenuator cards) to add
alien wavelengths. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 does not currently support SVAC
with CWR cards for associated TOADM applications.
Note: PSS-16 does support CWR for Automatic Gain Equalization (no add/drop
filters).
Refer to Figure 2-5, “TOADM filter architecture (2-degree)” (p. 2-12).
Figure 2-5 TOADM filter architecture (2-degree)
In a 2-degree TOADM, transponders can be connected to any of the 8 “colorless” ports

on the same CWR8 or CWR8-88 regardless of transmission wavelength—simplifying
wavelength adds. During reconfiguration, tunable transponders can tune to a new
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
wavelength without the need for any manual re-fibering. This combination of wavelength
switching, colorless add/drop, and tunable transponders yields a fully remotely
reconfigurable optical node, of which the ROADM was only a first step.
Additionally, the start-up cost of the TOADM is less than the ROADM because no static
filters are required; colorless add-drop ports are inherently part of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 CWR8/CWR8-88 wavelength router architecture.
Colorless ports are also used for interconnection of additional CWR8/CWR8-88 packs for
higher degree TOADM nodes. Therefore, for a 3-degree TOADM, there is one less
colorless port for transponders: seven; for 4-degree TOADM: six.
In future releases, CWR8/CWR8-88 wavelength routers will be optionally cascaded for
up to a 44-colorless-channel TOADM.
Also in a future release, a CWR8/CWR8-88 cascade will be able to effect a
“directionless” TOADM. In the “standard” TOADM of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32,
each CWR8/CWR8-88 is associated with a particular WDM line (degree), and a
transponder connected to that CWR8/CWR8-88 is also associated with that line. In a
directionless TOADM, a transponder can be switched to different optical lines without
any re-fibering.
Note: The CWR8B is interchangeable with the CWR8 and can be used in the
applications described here.
Bidirectional CWDM single-fiber transmission

Bidirectional CWDM overview
Some applications require bi-directional transmission over a single fiber. A
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 FOADM CWDM node can
be configured to support such an application using CWDM filters. Each bidirectional
transmission requires different CWDM wavelengths in each direction.
This is accomplished with 2 fiber connections (transmit and receive) from the OT to two
adjacent wavelength connections on the MUX (in) side of the filter. The wavelengths pass
between the MUX side of the filter and the OMD out port in both the receive and transmit
directions. The single fiber connected to the OMD out port carries signals in both
directions on their assigned wavelengths.
Bidirectional transmission over a single fiber is supported with any of the following
filters and OTs:
• SFC2(A, B, C, or D)
• SFC4(A or B)
• SFC8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Bidirectional CWDM single-fiber transmission
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 4DPA4
• 4DPA2
• 11STAR1
• 11STMM10
Configurations
An Alcatel-Lucent1830 PSS FOADM CWDM node can be configured to support the
following CWDM bidirectional configurations:
• Single-Fiber Bidirectional Terminal Node (1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1)
• Single-Fiber bidirectional 2-Degree OADM Node, Symmetrical (1830 PSS-1)
• Single-Fiber bidirectional CWDM-DWDM regeneration (1830 PSS-32)
Single-fiber CWDM bidirectional terminal node
Single-fiber bidirectional transmission is supported in a terminal (1-degree) OADM
configuration using a single CWDM filter. Any of the supported filters may be used as
illustrated in the following illustrations.
Figure 2-6 Line terminal with SFC2 filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
With SFC4 and SFC8 filters, receive and transmit channels must be specially arranged to
reduce the crosstalk. A channel selected for one direction (receive or transmit), must not
have both adjacent channels selected for the same direction. For example, a correct
channel arrangement is shown above for SFC8 single-fiber configuration: 1471 Tx, 1491
Rx, 1511 Rx, 1531 Tx, 1551 Tx, 1571 Rx, 1591 Rx, 1611 Tx.
Single-fiber CWDM bidirectional 2-Degree OADM node, symmetrical
The 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 support single-fiber bidirectional transmission for a
2-degree OADM configuration, where two identical CWDM filters are used. The
supported SFC types are (E)SFC2 and (E)SFC4. Band pass-through and channel loop
connections are allowed in this node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-9 Single-fiber bidirectional 2-degree OADM
Single-fiber CWDM bidirectional to dual-fiber DWDM regeneration

Bidirectional DWDM operation is not supported. However, configuration for CWDM
bidirectional transmission with CWDM-DWDM (dual-fiber) regeneration is supported,
where regeneration OTs are equipped. The supported SFC types are SFC2, SFC4 and
SFC8. Unidirectional connections are supported on the OT client ports, as shown below.
Figure 2-10 Single Fiber bidirectional CWDM-DWDM regeneration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Optical amplification and dispersion compensation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical amplification and dispersion compensation

Optical amplifiers
The following bidirectional optical amplifiers (OA) (also referred to as line drivers) are
supported in 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 for Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51.
• ALPHG — Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier with mid-stage access, for
application in 88 channel short spans
• AHPHG — High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier with mid-stage access, for
application in 88 channel long spans
• AHPLG — High Power Low Gain DWDM Amplifier with mid-stage access.
An 88 channel Egress Amp, for application in an ILA and Ingress for spans < 20 dB,
or ILA and Ingress with an RA2P Pre-Amp.
• A2325A — Amplifier, 23db power, variable gain, C-band, with mid-stage access, for
application in an 88 channel ILA and Ingress for spans > 20 dB.
The following OAs are supported on 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16, but not required in
1830 PSS-36 configurations. Software does not preclude these cards on 1830 PSS-36, but
they are not supported by EPT and SVT.
Bidirectional:
• ALPFGT — Low Power Fixed Gain Amplifier Total Power, with mid-stage access,
for application in 16 channel Metro applications.
Unidirectional:
• AM2125A — High power (+21 dBm), 25 dB gain optical amplifier with mid-stage
access, for application in DCU free applications and FBG DCU's, or ILA and Ingress
for spans > 20 dB.
• AM2125B — High power (+21 dBm), 25 dB gain optical amplifier without mid-stage
access.
• AM2318A — Low variable gain amplifier with no DCM access
• MESH4 — The 4 ouput MESH pack (MESH4) is a uni-directional LD type pack that
monitors and amplifies an input signal then splits it into 4 outputs. It is used to split a
WR pack MESHOUT into 4 signals.
• RA2P — Long Haul - 2 pump Raman module, no mid-stage access, for application as
an External booster for long spans, or Raman Preamp for long reach.
These OAs have the following features:
• Support for all Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS universal shelf configurations in the C-band
• Variable gain amps: no LBOs are required except at mid-stage when there is no DCM
• Integrated, provisionable tilt control (necessary for FOADM nodes; in TOADM nodes
the CWR8/CWR8-88 performs optical equalization)
• Transient support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unidirectional and bidirectional amplifiers
Amplifiers that are bidirectional carry optical signals in both directions, however only one
direction has amplification. The other direction is a through connection without
amplification. As a result bidirectional amplifiers in an ILA are used in a schematic
“back-to-back” arrangement where the amplified signal from one amplifier passes
through the non-amplified path of its partner. The connections for this arrangement are
shown in Figure 3-37, “ILA with bidirectional LDs and optional RA2Ps ” (p. 3-54).
Amplifiers that are unidirectional have a single amplified path through them. As a result
unidirectional amplifiers in an ILA are used in a schematic “side-by-side” arrangement
where only a single signal, in one direction, passes through each amplifier and is
amplified. The connections for this arrangement are shown in Figure 3-38, “ILA-2: ILA
with unidirectional LDs and optional RA2Ps” (p. 3-55).
Optical supervisory channel (OSC)

Inter-node management and control information is communicated over the OSC. The
OSC wavelength is at 1510 nm and is terminated on the amplifiers, or non-amplified OSC
card, via SFP PTM. Three different OSC SFPs support three different ranges of span
losses.
Note: RA3P amplifiers in the span can extend OSC reach up to 43 dB, depending on
the fiber plant and available Raman gain. PB1 and RA3P, used together, can extend
this up to 50 dB, again depending on the fiber plant and available raman gain. (See the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 3.5.0 RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA User
Guide.)
Refer to Table 2-3, “OSC SFP span loss support” (p. 2-19).
Table 2-3 OSC SFP span loss support
OSC SFP Span loss range (dB)

(measured at 1545 nm)
Short reach 3 to 16
Long reach 11 to 26
Ultra-long reach 14 to 33
Amplifier node configuration

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 optionally uses an optical amplifier at the ingress to the
node, and optionally at the egress. The ingress amplifier also provides OSC termination in
both directions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-11, “Node optical architecture” (p. 2-20)
Figure 2-11 Node optical architecture
Any of the ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, and A2325A can be used in either
position, allowing for a wide range of flexibility. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Engineering
and Planning Tool will determine the optimal combination of amplifiers.
Note: An A2325A amplifier in the ingress position is only supported in TOADM and
ILA nodes. It is not supported in FOADM configurations.
Note: An AM2125A, AM2125B, or AM2318A amplifier is only supported in
TOADM and ILA nodes. They are not supported in FOADM configurations. In
TOADM applications where the ingress amplifier is AM2125A or AM2125B, the
egress amplifier must the same type amplifier as the ingress, or can be an AM2318A.
In TOADM applications where the ingress amplifier is AM2318A, the egress
amplifier must an AM2125A, AM2125B, or AM2318A.
For a complete list of supported amplifier combinations in FOADM DFOADM, and ILA
configurations, see “Valid LD combinations” (p. 8-86).
For spans with more than 40-dB loss, an external Raman amplifier can be used with an
EDFA booster.
The Optical Supervisory Card Total Power (OSCT) card is also available to provide OSC
termination, but without any amplifiers. It is cost-optimized for very short spans not
requiring amplification. (See “OSCT termination card” (p. 4-45).)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Chromatic dispersion compensation
For long all-optical routes, the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 uses dispersion
compensating modules (DCMs) to compensate for chromatic dispersion on the line fiber.
The granularity of the DCM lengths ensures that proper compensation can be achieved
flexibly. Depending upon fiber type, DCMs are available for compensating at increments
as shown in the following table:
Fiber Granularity (km) Span (km)

SSMF 10 10-140
SSMF (negative) 10 10-30
TWRS 20 20-120
ELEAF 20 20-120
DCMs are installed at the mid-stage of optical amplifiers and compensate for the line
associated with the amplifier.
In-line amplifier (ILA) node

In some physically larger networks, the distance between two add/drop nodes may exceed
the system’s single span optical reach. In such a case, an ILA can be installed at a
mid-point, thereby creating two shorter spans and boosting the signal strength before it
gets too close to the noise floor.
Like an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 add/drop node, an ILA node is an individually
managed network element, but without channel add/drop capabilities. It uses a subset of
the same hardware to provide bidirectional line amplification and dispersion
compensation only.
In very long distance applications, multiple ILAs can be installed at multiple points along
the line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Automatic power reduction (APR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic power reduction (APR)

APR overview
APR is a mechanism that responds to a span cut, a fiber disconnection between nodes, or
any combination of events that provide a similar indication. APR will also occur in
response to certain circuit pack failures or to fiber cuts within a node when needed to
meet safety requirements. APR automatically reduces power to prevent levels at an open
fiber that could result in injury to personnel, or damage to equipment.
As currently implemented, APR will shut down the egress amplifier whenever there is a
span cut or fiber disconnection, irrespective of the egress amplifier's output power prior to
the cut. The software does not check whether the egress amplifier is capable of exceeding
17 dBm, or whether it is currently operating at a level that above 17 dBm. In this release
APR is always on.
However, if OSC is disabled without breaking the line, only partial APR capability is
available. Because the A2325A is capable of exceeding class 1M safety limits, and
requires APR, it will be shut down when the OSC is disabled at a node. In this case, a user
may see an APR-Active-Line or APR-Active-OSC Disabled alarm. There is no APR when
there is no egress LD. If an egress LD's output power cannot exceed class 1M limits, it
can still run when the OSC is disabled. However, it will still shut down if there is a full
span break.
Note: When an egress amplifier is shut down due to APR, an egress adjustment or add
loop adjustment is not possible, and will fail.
APR on the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 operates under the following conditions:
• APR is performed on the egress amplifier that launches into a span that has been cut
or disconnected.
• APR is performed on the amplifier at an ILA site that launches into a span that has
been cut or disconnected.
• A span without an egress amplifier is cut or disconnected from an add/drop or
terminal node, there is no impact on the output power of the node.
• The time between determining that APR is required for one or more amplifiers and the
completion of APR for that set of amplifiers is less than 3 seconds.
• Power will be restored to an egress amplifier that has been shut down due to an APR
condition, no earlier than 100 seconds after detection of the event that triggered APR.
LD protective cover switches

Starting in R3.5.0, packs that contain amplifiers that can emit power levels exceeding
Class 1M have protective covers. When the cover is removed, a switch will detect the
removal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Output port (AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A)
When a cover is removed from the output port of an LD equipped with a protective cover
switch, the optical amplifier in the LD will shut down. The shut down will occur within
150 ms of the time that the cover is removed. An APR-Active Port Switch condition will
be raised against the output port of the LD. This behavior currently applies to the
AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A LINE OUT ports.
Input port (RA2P)
When a cover is removed from the LINE IN port of Raman card equipped with a
protective cover switch, the Raman pumps in the card will shut down. The shut down will
occur within 150 ms of the time that the cover is removed. An APR-Active Port Switch
condition will be raised against the LINE IN port. This behavior currently applies to the
RA2P.
OSC requirements
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS APR relies on the OSC. The OSC carries a remote defect
indicator in its SONET overhead to indicate if the originating nodes see a fiber cut.
Detection of the RDI, in the case of a single fiber cut, will indicate the need to shut down.
When the RDI clears, it indicates that the egress amplifier can be turned on again.
OSC/APR limitation provisioned as 1000baseFX
The OSC can be provisioned to operate as a 1000baseFX signal. When the OSC is
provisioned in this way, the RDI signaling used to detect a span cut is not available. APR
cannot function properly in response to span cuts when the OSC is provisioned in this
way.
APR examples
The following examples illustrate how 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 APR functions to
shut down and restore power in response to single and dual fiber cuts.
Single fiber cut shutdown
A span cut on the transmission path from Node 1/ILA 1 to Node 2/ILA 2, as shown in
Figure 2-12, “Single fiber cut” (p. 2-24), will result in LOS for both the DWDM channels
and the OSC at the detection points indicated in the illustration. In some failure cases,
noise might be present on the OSC channel, but not signal, so other OSC failures are also
used to trigger APR (LOF, LOL). The presence of both DWDM and OSC defects will
trigger a shutdown.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This shutdown will occur as a result of the following conditions:
• DWDM LOS is detected at the input to the line driver (LD) card in Node 2/ILA 2
• An OSC failure, measured by LOS, LOL, or LOF is detected at the input to the LD
card in Node 2/ILA 2
• The DWDM and OSC defects continue for 10 ms
Figure 2-12 Single fiber cut
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As a result of these conditions the following procedure steps will take place to implement
APR:
1. The output power will be turned completely off in the Node 2/ILA 2 amplifier that
amplifies DWDM channels that are transmitted back to Node 1/ILA 1, as indicated in
Figure 2-12, “Single fiber cut” (p. 2-24).
2. The OSC transmitter in Node 2/ILA 2 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI)
back to Node 1/ILA 1.
3. The OSC receiver in Node1/ILA 1 detects the RDI
4. The output power is turned completely off in the amplifier in Node1/ILA 1 that
amplifies the DWDM channels that are transmitted to Node 2/ILA 2.
5. Software will raise the APR-Active - Line condition against the output ports of the
amplifiers that are shut off.
RAMAN behavior (external RA3P)
When a single direction is cut on a span containing Raman amplifiers, the Raman
amplifier on the node ingress from span where there is fiber cut (Raman [B]), will see
OSC loss. Its pumps will be turned off. However, Raman (A) on the side where there is
no fiber cut, does not see OSC loss and does not turn the pumps off. Raman packs are
completely dependent on OSC loss for APR.
Raman behavior within NE (RA2P)
The RA2P is a Raman amplifier card that can be used with either unidirectional or
bidirectional LD’s. The RA2P counterpumps the span, so it is always used at the input to
a node or ILA. Unlike the RA3P, the RA2P is part of the network element.
A span that is pumped with a Raman amplifier will have a large amount of ASE noise
generated within the C-band. Because the received ASE can mask the LOS condition, it is
not possible to use the DWDM payload LOS to detect a fiber cut. Different triggers are
used depending on the ingress LD that follows the Raman amplifier. For some LD’s, APR
is triggered from OSC failure (LOS, LOL, LOF) alone. For other LD’s, OSC failure and
Loss of Tones (LOT-Out) are used to trigger APR. The OSC and, if applicable, the
LOT-OUT detection are performed in the line-facing LD card, not in the Raman amplifier
card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-13 Raman RA2P single fiber cut examples
OSC LOS will occur when there is a fiber cut on a span or between the Raman amplifier
and the line-facing LD, as shown in the illustration above. Therefore, the response to each
event will be the same.
An OSC failure of 10ms or longer, measured by LOS, LOL, or LOF at the input to the LD
card in node or ILA2 (at the OSC SFP shown in blue in Fig. 19) will result in the
following:
1. Output power will be turned off in the node or ILA 2 amplifier that amplifies DWDM
channels that are transmitted back to node 1. (This is the amplifier that is colored gold
in node 2 or ILA2 in the illustration above.)
2. The Raman pumps are shut down in the Raman amplifier in node/ILA 2 that
counterpumps the span that has been cut.
3. The OSC transmitter in node or ILA 2 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI)
back to node or ILA 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. When the OSC receiver (shown in pink) in node or ILA 1 detects the RDI, output
power will be turned of. This is the amplifier that is colored gold in the illustration
above.
5. Software will raise the APR-Active-Line condition against the amplifiers that are shut
off. These are the gold-colored amplifiers in the LD’s of nodes/ILA's 1 and 2 and the
LINE IN port of the Raman amplifier in node/ILA2.
Beginning in Release 3.6.50, software will use a second trigger, loss of tones (LOT-Out),
along with OSC LOS to determine when shutdown is needed. This second trigger will be
used only on AM2318A, AM2125A, and AM2125B ingress LD’s. For other LDs the
previous Raman RA2P single fiber cut behavior, described above, still applies.
On AM2318A, AM2125A, and AM2125B ingress LD’s, a single fiber cut will be detected
when all of the following are present:
• An OSC failure, measured by LOS, LOL, or LOF at the input to the LD card in node
or ILA2 (the OSC SFP colored blue in the illustration above)
• LOT-OUT is detected at the WT detector following the amplifier module in the same
LD card in node/ILA2, or there is a failure of the WT DSP
• The OSC and the LOT-OUT defect (if applicable) remain for at least 10 ms
When these conditions are observed, the following will occur:
1. The output power will be turned off in the node or ILA 2 amplifier that amplifies
DWDM channels transmitted back to node 1.
2. The Raman pumps are shut down in the Raman amplifier in node/ILA 2 that
counterpumps the span that has been cut.
3. The OSC transmitter in node or ILA 2 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI)
back to node or ILA 1.
4. When the OSC receiver in node or ILA 1 detects the RDI, output power will be turned
completely off in the amplifier in node or ILA 1 that amplifies the DWDM channels
transmitted to node 2.
5. Software will raise an APR-Active-Line condition against the amplifiers that are shut
off.
Restart after repair of a single fiber cut
When the cut fiber from Node 1 to Node 2 is repaired, the following procedure will take
place. (Power is restored between ILAs following the same procedure.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-14 Single fiber restoration
1. The OSC receiver at the incoming LD in Node 2 detects the OSC from Node 1.
2. In response, the LD in Node 2 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward
Node 1 is turned back on.
3. Also in response to detection of the OSC, the RDI is removed from the OSC that is
transmitted from Node 2 to Node 1.
4. After the OSC without an RDI is detected at Node 1.
5. The amplifier in Node 1 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward Node
2 is turned back on.
6. The APR-Active - Line condition is cleared.
Double fiber cut shutdown
The algorithm that is followed when both fibers are cut or disconnected between two
nodes/ILA's is the same as for a single fiber cut. The response is described below. A span
cut on both fibers between Node 1/ILA 1 to Node 2/ILA 2, as shown in Figure 2-15,
“Double fiber cut” (p. 2-29), will follow the same general procedure as for a single fiber
cut.
This shutdown will occur as a result of the following conditions:
• DWDM LOS is detected at the input to the LD cards in Node 1/ILA 1 and Node
2/ILA 2
• OSC failures, measured by LOS, LOL, or LOF are detected at the input to the LD
cards in Node 1/ILA 1 and Node 2/ILA 2
• The DWDM and OSC defects continue for 10 ms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-15 Double fiber cut
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As a result of these conditions the following procedure steps will take place to implement
APR:
1. The output power will be turned completely off in the Node 1/ILA 1 amplifier that
amplifies DWDM channels transmitted to Node 2/ILA 2, and in the Node 2/ILA 2
amplifier that amplifies DWDM channels transmitted to Node 1/ILA 1.
2. The OSC transmitter in Node 1/ILA 1 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI) to
Node 2/ILA 2 and the OSC transmitter in Node 2/ILA 2 will transmit an RDI to Node
1/ILA 1.
3. Software will raise the APR-Active - Line condition against the output ports of the
amplifiers that are shut off.
RA2P LDs with double fiber cut
When an fiber cut is detected at the input to one of the line-facing LD cards, as shown
above, the following events will take place:
1. The output power will be turned off in the node/ILA 1 amplifier that amplifies
DWDM channels transmitted to node 2, and in the node/ILA2 amplifier that amplifies
DWDM channels transmitted to node/ILA1.
2. The Raman pumps in the two Raman amplifier packs that pump the spans will be
completely shut down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. The OSC transmitter in node/ILA 1 will transmit a remote defect indicator (RDI) to
node/ILA 2 and the OSC transmitter in node/ILA 2 will transmit an RDI to node/ILA
1.
4. Software will raise the APR-Active-Line condition against the outputs of the LD’s
with the gold-colored amplifiers, and against the LINE IN ports of both Raman
amplifier packs.
Restart after repair of a double fiber cut
When the fibers that carry traffic between Node 1 and Node 2 are repaired in the order
indicated in the following illustration, the following procedure will take place: (Power is
restored between ILAs following the same procedure.)
Figure 2-16 Double fiber restoration
1. After the first fiber is repaired, the OSC receiver at the incoming LD in Node 1
detects the OSC from node 2. This receiver detects the RDI from Node 2. The two
nodes are now experiencing only a single fiber cut, similar to what was described
previously in, “Restart after repair of a single fiber cut” (p. 2-27).
2. When the second fiber is repaired, the OSC receiver at the incoming LD in Node 2
detects the OSC from Node 1.
3. In response, the LD in Node 2 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward
Node 1 is turned back on.
4. Also in response to detection of the OSC, the RDI is removed from the OSC that is
transmitted from Node 2 to Node 1.
5. After the OSC without an RDI is detected at Node 1.
6. The amplifier in Node 1 that amplifies the DWDM channels transmitted toward Node
2 is turned back on.
7. The APR-Active - Line condition is cleared.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disabled OSC
Figure 2-17 RA2P ILA with OSC disabled
In Figure 2-17, “RA2P ILA with OSC disabled” (p. 2-32), if the OSC is disabled at Node
2, then Node 1 will detect OSC LOS. This detection will occur whether the OSC in node
1 is set to OC-3, 100base-FX, or disabled. In this event, or if an OSC loss is detected by
the ingress LD in Node 2, or OSC loss with LOT-OUT is detected by the ingress LD at
Node 1, as described in “Raman behavior within NE (RA2P)” (p. 2-25), the following
steps will occur:
1. The output power will be turned completely off in the node 1 amplifier for the
DWDM channels that are transmitted back toward Node 2.
2. The Raman pumps in the Raman amplifier in Node 1 that counterpump the span will
be completely shut down.
3. If the OSC transmitter in Node 1 is set to OC-3, it will transmit a remote defect
indicator (RDI) back to Node 2.
off. These are the RA2P and the egress LD in Node 1.
Note: The RDI may not be detectable in node 2. The RA2P and egress LD in node 2
may or may not shut down, and APR-Line may or may not be raised against the
node/ILA2 amplifiers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Figure 2-17, “RA2P ILA with OSC disabled” (p. 2-32), if the OSC is disabled at Node
2, then Node 1 will detect OSC LOS. This detection will occur whether the OSC in Node
1 is set to OC-3, 100base-FX, or disabled. In this event, or if an OSC loss with loss of
tones is detected by the ingress LD at Node 1, as described in “Raman behavior within
NE (RA2P)” (p. 2-25), the following steps will occur:
1. The output power will be turned completely off in the node 1 amplifier for the
DWDM channels that are transmitted back toward Node 2.
2. The Raman pumps in the Raman amplifier in Node 1 that counterpump the span will
be completely shut down.
3. If the OSC transmitter in Node 1 is set to OC-3, it will transmit a remote defect
indicator (RDI) back to Node 2.
off. These are the RA2P and the egress LD in Node 1.
In Figure 2-17, “RA2P ILA with OSC disabled” (p. 2-32), if the OSC is disabled in node
1 as well as in node 2, then the procedure for a double fiber cut will be followed.
Other failures that result in APR
APR can lead to shutdowns in certain cases when the span has not been cut. In these
cases, APR may occur as a by-product of a failure. If a failure other than a span cut or
disconnection leads to an APR shutdown, transmission will restart automatically using the
standard restart procedure.
The following are examples of failures that may cause an APR shutdown:
• A Raman amplifier is being used at a node or ILA, and the fiber is disconnected
between the Raman amplifier and the ingress amplifier.
• A booster amplifier is being used at the node or ILA, and the fiber is disconnected
between the booster amplifier and the ingress amplifier.
• An OSC transmitter failure at one node or ILA leads to the shutdown of a Raman card
at an adjacent node or ILA. If the channel count is small, the shutdown of the Raman
card can result in DWDM LOS, in addition to OSC failure, at the ingress OA.
ALPFGT behavior
The behavior of the ALPFGT is similar to other LD circuit packs when there is a single
fiber cut, except that the ALPFGT serves as an egress amplifier when it terminates an
optical line.
For example:
• If an ALPFGT terminates an optical line, and the input fiber to the ALPFGT from the
optical line is cut or disconnected, the optical supervisory channel for the return path
will transmit the full set of RDI bytes back to the far end and the optical amplifier in
the ALPFGT will shut down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the fiber cut is a single-fiber cut, and there is an egress amplifier at the far end that
launches into the span, it will shut down.
• If an ALPFGT terminates an optical line, and the OSC on the ALPFGT detects RDI,
the ALPFGT will shut down.
• If an ALPFGT is used as an egress amplifier at an add/drop node, and the ingress LD
at the add/drop node detects the triggers that cause an APR shutdown of the egress
amplifier, then the ALPFGT will shut down.
In each of the above instances, the APR-Active-Line condition will be raised against the
LINE OUT port of the ALPFGT.
OSCT card behavior

The OSCT cards do not provide full support for APR. They should not be used in
configurations that include amplifiers with output powers that can exceed class 1M.
OSCT cards may also not be suitable for use by customers that require APR shutdowns,
even when safety standards can be met without APR.
If an OSCT card terminates an optical line, and the input fiber from the line to the OSCT
card is cut or disconnected, the optical supervisory channel for the return path will not
transmit the full set of RDI bytes back to the far end.
If there is a single-fiber cut, and if there is an egress amplifier that launches into the span
at the far end, it will not shut down.
When there is a fiber cut, the OSCT card will detect the loss of signal for the supervisory
channel and send out RDI-O back upstream. It will not, however, send back RDI-P, which
indicates loss of the DWDM channels. Both RDI-O and RDI-P must be received at the
upstream node or ILA in order to cause APR for a single fiber cut.
1830 APR with RAMAN and booster amplifiers

1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 can use Raman and high-power booster amplifiers as an
option on long spans. These amplifiers have output power that exceeds the class 1M
limits. So APR is required when these amplifiers are used. These amplifiers have their
own internal APR algorithms, independent of NE software. The NE-based software is
considered an essential addition to the booster's internal APR mechanisms.
APR behavior on removal of ingress line driver LD

Removal of an ingress LD from a node does not result in an APR condition on that node.
The following illustration and description provides details of this behavior.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Node (A) Node (B)

Ingress LD Egress LD
Egress LD Ingress LD
CWR8 OSC OSC

OSC CWR8
OSC
When an ingress LD is removed from Node (A), APR is declared on Node (B) as
expected. No APR condition is declared on Node (A) because, with the ingress LD
removed, no OSC is working on this node. So there is no way for this node to interpret
the RDI from Node (B).
APR behavior with LD reset or loss of power
Figure 2-18 Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier
APR will occur when a line-terminating amplifier at a node that has an egress OA, or an
amplifier at an ILA, loses power or is subjected to a reboot. The line terminating amplifier
may be an ingress amplifier, an ALPFGT. If the loss of power or reboot occurs in Node2,
as shown in Figure 2-18, “Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier” (p. 2-35), then the
amplifier that launches into the span from Node 2 to Node 1 will shut down, and the
APR-Active Line condition will be raised at Node 2.
During the outage or reboot, the ingress LD at Node 1 will detect both OSC LOS and
DWDM payload LOS. As a result:
• In Node 1, the amplifier that transmits toward Node 2 will shut its power off
completely.
• The OSC that is transmitted from Node 1 to Node 2 will contain an RDI.
• Software will raise the APR-Active Line condition against the output port of the
amplifier in Node 1 that shuts down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the ingress amplifier at a node or ILA loses power, it is unable to detect defect that
can cause APR on the span. APR is required during this time because the power launched
from the far end could be in excess of class 1M. So, when an LD that terminates a line
has a cold or hard reboot, the OSC transmitter in the LD will remain off until the pack is
fully booted, and the LD that launches into the return span will remain shut down. When
rebooting has been completed, the OSC will transmit normally, with RDI transmitted only
if LOS conditions exist at the input to the LD. Also, when rebooting has been completed,
recovery from APR can occur.
In Figure 2-18, “Cold or hard reboot of an amplifier” (p. 2-35), while the ingress LD in
Node 2 is rebooting, its OSC transmitter remains off and the egress amplifier in Node 2
remains shut down.
APR behavior on LD reset with RAMAN/EDFA

With Raman and EDFA packs in a span, a reset of an ingress LD will trigger APR in the
span. The following illustration and information describe this behavior.
Figure 2-19 LD reset with RAMAN/EDFA
If the loss of power or reset occurs in Node 2, as shown in Figure 2-19, “LD reset with
RAMAN/EDFA” (p. 2-36), then the amplifier that launches into the span from Node 2 to
Node 1 will shut down. The booster EDFA at Node 2 (if equipped) will shut down. The
Raman amplifier at Node 2 will not shut down because it will still detect the OSC from
Node 1. An APR-Active Line condition will be raised at Node 2.
The Raman amplifier at Node 1 will shut down because of LOS of the OSC. Node 1
experiences both DWDM and OSC LOS, so Node 1 will experience an APR condition.
• In Node 1, the amplifier that transmits toward Node 2 will shut its power off
completely.
• In Node 1, the EDFA booster, if equipped, will shut its power off completely.
• The OSC that is transmitted from Node 1 to Node 2 will contain an RDI.
• Software will raise the APR-Active Line condition against the output port of the
amplifier in Node 1 that shuts down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber cuts and disconnects within a node or ILA
The following information describes APR behavior for disconnections within a node or
ILA in cases in which power levels can exceed class 1M levels within the node. This
information applies to A2325A amplifiers.
Eye-safe mode support
The A2325A provide support for a low-power mode of operation. This is known as
eye-safe mode. When the amplifier output power is placed in eye-safe mode, the output
power will not exceed 10 dBm. If the output power of the amplifier is less than 10 dBm
prior to being placed in eye-safe mode, then the output power does not change. In
addition, if the amplifier output power is fully shut down for any other reason, such as an
existing APR condition from a span cut or a loss of input channels to the amplifier, then
the power will remain shut down.
ILA, FOADM, ROADM, or TOADM egress LD
If the power level can exceed class 1M levels at point A in Figure 2-20, “ILA fiber cut
between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit” (p. 2-37), the output power must be reduced if
the connection is broken between the high power output of one port and the port that
follows.
Note: With an ILA the high power output must be reduced to a safe power level, but
not be shut off. Some output power is provided by the OA so that a reconnection can
be detected, and the OA can be restarted.
Figure 2-20 ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit
If an A2325A LD is used in an ILA or as egress LD for a FOADM, ROADM, or TOADM

node, fibered as shown in Figure 2-20, “ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M
limit” (p. 2-37), power will be reduced within 3 seconds of a cut on the Sig Out port of
the high power LD. The existence of the cut is determined by an LOS threshold at the
Line Out port of the LD that follows the cut. The power will be reduced using the
eye-safe output mode of the amplifier. The amplifier will exit eye-safe mode and restore
full power after an LOS clearing threshold has been exceeded.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TOADM or ROADM ingress LD
If the power level can exceed class 1M levels at point A or at point B in Figure 2-21,
“Fiber cut after ingress LD” (p. 2-38), output power must be reduced if the connection is
broken between the high power output of one port and the port that follows.
Figure 2-21 Fiber cut after ingress LD
If an A2325A LD is used as an ingress LD at a TOADM or ROADM node, and an egress

LD is present fibered as shown in Figure 2-21, “Fiber cut after ingress LD” (p. 2-38),
output power will be reduced within 3 seconds when there is a cut after the Sig Out port
of the high power LD. The existence of the cut will be determined by an LOS threshold at
the Line Out port of the LD that follows the cut. The power will be reduced using the
eye-safe output mode of the amplifier. The amplifier will exit eye-safe mode and restore
full power after an LOS clearing threshold has been exceeded.
Topology download
Software validates the topology of the node or ILA. If the amplifier in the LD is capable
of exceeding the class 1M safety limit, then the pumps on that amplifier shall remain shut
off until a valid topolgy has been provisioned. Until the valid topology has been received,
the APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition shall be raised. The amplifiers that are
subject to this requirement are shown below, along with the port against which the
condition is raised.
Software will download the topology of the node or ILA to a LD when it undergoes a
hard reboot, and validates the topology of the node or ILA. If the amplifier in the LD is
capable of exceeding the class 1M safety limit, the pumps on that amplifier will remain
shut off until a valid topology is provisioned. An APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition
will be raised on the SIG OUT port until a valid topology has been received or
provisioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an A2325A undergoes a hard reboot, and the node topology that has been downloaded
does not describe a fiber cut or disconnect within a Node or ILA, then the output power of
the amplifier in the LD will remain completely off, and an APR-Active-Invalid Topology
condition will be raised.
The APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition will also arise when partial topologies are
downloaded, for example when only the internal connections within the ILA have been
provisioned. In Figure 2-20, “ILA fiber cut between OA’s exceeding class 1M limit”
(p. 2-37), where the LD on the left has a high-power amplifier, that amplifier must remain
turned off with the APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition raised, until the external
connection is provisioned at the LINE OUT port of the right-hand LD.
If the LD undergoes a hard reboot, and the node topology that has been downloaded
describes a fiber cut or disconnect within a Node or ILA, then the LD will turn on at its
eye-safe level. The APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition will be cleared, the
APR-Active-Node condition will be raised, and the recovery from APR will be governed
by the requirements for the topology, as described elsewhere in this section. After a new
topology is created and downloaded, the APR-Active-Invalid Topology condition will be
cleared, and APR recovery can proceed in accordance with the requirements for the new
topology.
If a connection that is monitored for intranode APR is deleted, APR will result. The
amplifier output power will be turned completely off, and the APR-Active-Invalid
Topology condition will be raised.
Circuit pack failure or removal

APR will occur under the following conditions
• An A2325A used as an LD at an ILA, or a line-terminating ingress LD at a node that
has an egress optical amplifier, fails or is removed
A failed LD will transmit RDI upstream if possible. In other respects, the APR activity
is similar to that for a single fiber cut. The APR-Active-Line condition will be raised.
• An A2325A, used as an LD at an ILA, or a line terminating ingress LD at a node with
an egress OA, has an FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition)
The APR-Active-Node condition will be raised.
• An A2325A used as an egress LD at a node fails, is removed, or has an active
FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition).
• an ALPFGT that terminates a line at a node fails, is removed, or has an active
FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition).
If the LD has failed, then the failed LD will transmit RDI upstream if possible.
• A CWR or WR fails or is removed, if the ingress LD that supplies power to the SIG
IN port of the CWR or WR is an A2325A.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APR will also occur if the FpgaClkNotSync defect (EQPTDGR condition) is active
for the Wavetracker decoder DSP.
If the OSC SFP on a line-terminating LD fails or is removed, APR will not occur.
However, the APR Limited - OSC SFP failure condition will be raised against the OSC
SFP port on the line terminating LD.
If an OSC SFP has been removed or has failed, APR will not function fully. As illustrated
in Figure 2-12, “Single fiber cut” (p. 2-24), if the OSC SFP fails in node/ILA 1, after the
single fiber cut shown in the figure, node/ILA 1 will not be able to receive RDI from
node/ILA 2. Therefore, the egress amplifier in node/ILA 1 will not shut down. If the OSC
SFP failure occurs in node/ILA 2, or if there is a double fiber cut, then a shutdown may
still occur properly.
Note: To ensure the highest level of reliability for APR operation, optical amplifiers
and RA2P must be on the same shelf for each optical line. For example, for an optical
line comprised of RA2P + AM2125A for Ingress, and an AM2318A for Egress, all 3
amplifiers shall reside in the same shelf.
Optical transponders
Optical transponder overview
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 includes a family of highly flexible transponders that
cover a wide range of client signals and support high levels of multiplexing to achieve
maximum optical efficiency.
These transponders share many common features.
• Line-side ITU-T G.709 OTU2 standards-compliant digital wrapper (10.709 Gb/s).
Supports transparent transport, optical channel level performance monitoring and fault
management, and standardized FEC for increased optical reach. (In some special
cases, described below, extended OTU2 at approximately 11 Gb/s is supported).
• Support for industry-leading FEC option, providing 8.5dB OSNR coding gain, higher
than provided by the standard, is available on all sub-100G transponders (15.2dB on
112SN.X10 and 112SNA1)
• Tunable line wavelength. Each tunable transponder is able to tune to any of the 88
wavelengths that Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports. This drastically improves
operations and inventory.
• On-board variable optical attenuator to control optical line transmit power and allow
automatic channel power balancing. (Not available on 4DPA4.)
• Wavelength Tracker encoder. Adds a unique WaveKey to the line transmit wavelength
for network-wide monitoring.
• Optical 1+1 protection for services requiring high availability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Optical transponders
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• PTM client optics. All client ports use SFPs or XFPs for maximum flexibility of
service and reach, and for lowest cost.
• Tunable DWDM XFPs are available for line side optics (50 GHz spacing)
• Facility and terminal loopbacks, provisionable error handling, client side digital
performance monitoring.
• Performance monitoring available on all optical ports.
• LC connectors are used on all optical connections in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32,
for low cost and high density.
• Dual XFP pluggable transponder variants are available for some OT models, offering
optional E-SNCP
11G Single port tunable AnyRate transponder (11STAR1)

The 11STAR1 transponder accepts one of several types of 10G client signals via XFP
optics and wraps it into the 11G DWDM line signal.
The following client signals are supported.
• OTU2 [ITU-T G.709]
• STM-64, OC-192 [ITU-T SDH, Telcordia/ANSI SONET]
• 10G Ethernet WAN PHY [IEEE]
• 10G Ethernet LAN PHY [IEEE].
Several mappings are supported.
– G.7041 compliant GFP-F mapping
– Semi-transparent GFP-F mapping that includes Ethernet frame preamble
– Fully transparent mapping into over-clocked OTU-2e (11.049 or 11.096 Gb/s)
• 10G Fibre Channel [ANSI]
• GCC0 for connection to the 1830 PSS-1 GBEH
11STAR1 transponders can be used back-to-back, as a regenerator for any of the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 line signals, and can also interwork with 1830 PSS-1 GBEH (see
“Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 networks”
(p. 3-89)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-22, “11STAR1 block diagram” (p. 2-42) for a high-level transmission
block diagram.
Figure 2-22 11STAR1 block diagram
11G Single port tunable multirate muxing transponder (11STMM10)

The 11STMM10 transponder accepts up to ten sub-10G client signals of several types via
SFP optics and multiplexes them into the 11G DWDM line signal.
• STM-1/-4/-16, OC-3/-12/-48 [ITU-T SDH, Telcordia/ANSI SONET].
• Gigabit Ethernet (IEEE) — mapping via GFP-T
• Fibre Channel 1G (FC-100), 2G (FC-200), 4G (FC-400) [ANSI] — mapping via
GFP-F or GFP-T
• GCC0 for connection to the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
This card supports the mixing of any combination of the above client signals on any
combination of client ports, as long as the aggregate client bandwidth does not exceed the
payload of the G.709 line signal. For additional details about its ability to interwork with
1830 PSS-1 MD4H see “Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1 networks” (p. 3-89).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As an example, when uniform clients are offered, the maximum capacity of the
11STMM10 is as follows:
• 4 x OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48
• 8 x STM-1/ OC-3/ STM-4/ OC-12
• 9 x Gigabit Ethernet
• 10 x FC-100
• 4 x FC-200
• 2 x FC-400
Refer to Figure 2-23, “11STMM10 block diagram” (p. 2-43) for a high-level transmission
block diagram.
Figure 2-23 11STMM10 block diagram
11G single port tunable GbE muxing transponder (11STGE12)

The 11STGE12 transponder accepts up to ten Gigabit Ethernet client signals via SFP
optics and performs non-blocking multiplexing into the 11G DWDM line signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Although the 11STMM10 card also multiplexes Gigabit Ethernet signals into an 11G line
signal, the 11STGE12 card is cost-optimized specifically for Gigabit Ethernet, and allows
for muxing of up to 10 (vs. 9) non-blocking signals. Instead of muxing GFP-framed
Gigabit Ethernet traffic, the 11STGE12 uses an Ethernet switch. The switch terminates
the Ethernet physical layer and so is not fully transparent (the switch drops, pauses, and
terminates auto-negotiation but is otherwise transparent). On the other hand, the
11STMM10 card has the option of GFP-T mapping for transparent Gigabit Ethernet
transport.
Refer to Figure 2-24, “11STGE12 block diagram” (p. 2-44) for a high-level transmission
block diagram.
Figure 2-24 11STGE12 block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11G quad port tunable AnyRate 4-client transponder (11QPA4/11QPA4A)
The 11QPA4 and the hardened 11QPA4A support various protocols at ~10Gb/s rate on
client ports. It contains four independent transponders. Each transponder has one PTM
client port and one PTM line port, with a fixed association between them. There is no
multiplexing function. The board supports E-SNCP (intra-board). Slow eVOA for output
power equalization, and fast eVOA for WT encoding are supported. Terminal loopback
and facility loopback are supported independently for each port (except VOA). B&W or
CWDM XFP interfaces are used in client ports, and CWDM and DWDM XFP interfaces
are used in line ports.
• OTU2 [ITU-T G.709] with the ability to provision the GCC communication channel
type as GCC0 (default), GCC1, or GCC2
• STM-64, OC-192 [ITU-T SDH, Telcordia/ANSI SONET]
• 10Gb Ethernet WAN PHY [IEEE}
• 10Gb Ethernet LAN PHY [IEEE]
Several mappings are supported.
– G.7041 compliant GFP-F mapping
– AMCC proprietary GFP
– Overclocking at (11.049 or 11.096 Gb/s)
– 10G/8G Fibre Channel
See Table 8-7, “11QPA4(A) XFPs” (p. 8-21) for details of the supported XFPs and
interfaces of 11QPA4(A).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-25, “11QPA4(A) block diagram” (p. 2-46) for a high-level transmission
block diagram.
Figure 2-25 11QPA4(A) block diagram
Dual pluggable 12xGbE OT (11DPE12/11DPE12E)

The 11DPE12(E) transponder is a single slot wide, full height card supporting a mix of 12
Ethernet interfaces and two 10G line interfaces. This card is also the foundation of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1930 PSS-1 GBEH device. Its use in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
allows for complete interworking between platforms (see “Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 networks” (p. 3-89)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 11DPE12(E) card supports the following features:
• Supports Full rate GbE and Sub-rate GbE Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
cross-connect provision
– CE-VLAN ID Mapping provision
– CIR/EIR bandwidth profile provision for 0 to 10Gbps at steps of 50Mbps for the
10Gbe line port (Q-in-Q mode)
– Switching based on proprietary Higig tag for 32 sub-GbE signal flow at Line port,
or Q-in-Q (MEF 6.1) for 4096 sub-GbE signal flow at line port.
• Full 88 channel C-band DWDM support
• Terminal loopback and facility loopback
• VA1 and VA2 port supports power adjustment with slow SFP VOAs
• eVOA management and WT encoding functions
• DWDM/CWDM/B&W fixed and tunable XFP Modules at Line port, and SFP
modules at Client port
• G.709 monitoring, alarming and consequent actions
• RSFEC, and EFEC2 is user-provisionable, Bit Rate (11.049G/11.097G) is user
provisionable
• G.709 interface monitoring at line side port and RMON statistics at both line and
client side port
• GCC0 processing for DCN extension to the 1830 PSS-1
• Each channel supports the Add/Drop operational mode.
ADM between 11DPE12E pairs via 1830 PSS-36/32 backplane is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-26 11DPE12 block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-27 11DPE12(E) block diagram
Dual-port pluggable Multirate Mux 12-client OT (11DPM12)

The 11DPM12 transponder is a single slot wide, full height card supporting dual
pluggable line ports with flexible any-rate client signal aggregation, which is able to
add/drop clients from the line ports, and pass through service between two line ports. It
can also be used as a mux-ponder in point-to-point configurations. All client signals can
be transported in a bit-transparent or character-transparent manner over OTN.
The 11DPM12 card supports the following features:
• Twelve client interfaces with B&W or CWDM PTM optics (SFPs)
• Support for the following client interfaces:
– OC48/STM16
– OC12/STM4
– OC3/STM1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– 1GbE
– OTU1
– SD-SDI, HD-SDI, 3G-SDI
– FC 1G/2G/4G
• Drop and continue for GbE and video services
• Dual Line Side PTMs:
– Dual Pluggable DWDM & CWDM XFPs
– Full 88 channel C-band DWDM support (44 channel if using 100GHz XFP, 88
with 50GHz XFP )
– EFEC Type (AMCC FEC, ALU FEC implemented in HyPHY-Flex )
• Transparent Transport of all the supported services (including OC3/OC12)
Figure 2-28 11DPM12 block diagram
43G DPSK single port tunable muxing transponder with DPSK modulation (43STX4)
The 43STX4 DPSK transponder accepts up to four bi-directional 10G client signals and
multiplexes them into the 43G DWDM line signal. It is targeted for application on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32. The module has XFP PTM modules on the client interface
ports, and uses LC type optical connectors on all interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• OC192/STM64 (nominal bit rate: 9.9532 Gb/s [±20ppm])
Full SONET/SDH maintenance capabilities are supported when the client signal type
is provisioned to OC192/STM64.
• OTU2 (nominal bit rate: 10.709 Gb/s [±20ppm])
Full OTUk section maintenance (including FEC provisioning (noFEC, RSFEC) is
supported when the client signal type is provisioned to OTU2.
• 10GbE (nominal bit rate: 10.3125 Gb/s [IEEE 802.3ae])
Up to 4 independent client signals can be multiplexed and sent out on the line side. Any
combination of client signals is supported.
On the line side, the 43STX4 OT supports full-band tunable optics, capable of supporting
all 44 even channels (100GHz spacing). The frequency of the channel can be provisioned
manually or automatically. It supports standard OTU3 transport overhead access,
processing, and maintenance, and is hardware ready to support GCC communication and
Tandem Connection Monitoring in a future Release.
The 43STX4 OT line side receiver includes its own Optical Amplifier (OA), Tunable
Dispersion Compensator (TDC), Delay Line Interferometer (DLI), and differential
front-end and drive/control electronics. The TDC allows the 43STX4 OT to be deployed
in 1830 networks designed with Engineering Rules for 10G interfaces. Tunable dispersion
compensation, with a tuning range of -100 ps/nm to +1000 ps/nm, is implemented on a
per-channel basis. (Every 43STX4 OT has a TDC for its optical channel.) The OT uses
feedback from the uncorrected bit error rate to tune the TDC to an optimum value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-29 43STX4/43STX4P block diagram
43G single port tunable muxing transponder with PDPSK modulation (43STX4P)
The 43STX4P transponder accepts up to four bi-directional 10G client signals and
multiplexes them into the 43G DWDM line signal. It is targeted for application on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32. The module has XFP PTM modules on the client interface
ports, and uses LC type optical connectors on all interfaces.
The following client signals are supported:
• OC192/STM64 (nominal bit rate: 9.9532 Gb/s [±20ppm])
Full SONET/SDH maintenance capabilities are supported when the client signal type
is provisioned to OC192/STM64.
• OTU2 (nominal bit rate: 10.709 Gb/s [±20ppm])
Full OTUk section maintenance (including FEC provisioning (noFEC, RSFEC) is
supported when the client signal type is provisioned to OTU2.
• 10GbE
Up to four independent client signals can be multiplexed and sent out on the line side.
Any combination of client signals is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the line side, the 43STX4P OT supports full-band tunable optics, capable of
supporting all 88 C-band DWDM channels. The frequency of the channel can be
provisioned manually or automatically. It supports standard OTU3 transport overhead
access, processing, and maintenance, and is hardware ready to support GCC
communication and Tandem Connection Monitoring in a future Release. It also supports
eVOA management and WT encoding functions.
The 43STX4P OT line side receiver includes its own Optical Amplifier (OA), Tunable
Dispersion Compensator (TDC), Delay Line Interferometer (DLI), and differential
front-end and drive/control electronics. The TDC allows the 43STX4P OT to be deployed
in 1830 networks designed with Engineering Rules for 10G interfaces. Tunable dispersion
compensation, with a tuning range of -100 ps/nm to +1000 ps/nm, is implemented on a
per-channel basis. (Every 43STX4P OT has a TDC for its optical channel.) The OT uses
feedback from the uncorrected bit error rate to tune the TDC to an optimum value. In
addition to this the 43STX4P includes a NRZ-PDPSK transponder, which is a separate
child card connected to the main card.
Facility loopback and terminal loopback functions are supported at both client and line
ports.
The basic internal block diagram of the 43STX4P is functionaly identical to the 43STX4,
see Figure 2-29, “43STX4/43STX4P block diagram” (p. 2-52).
43G single port tunable coherent muxing transponder (43SCX4)

The 43SCX4 is a 4x10G MUX OT with a single 45 Gb/s (OTU-3e2 = 44.583355576 Gb/s
± 20ppm) tunable line port and 4 client ports. It supports multiplexing of up to four 10G
client signals into the single OTU-3e2 line interface.
Note: The 43SCX4L version of this OT operates in the extended L-band (XL band)
and is used in High Speed Optical Transponder shelf applications with 1625
LambdaXtreme® Transport. This is a specialized drop-shelf application of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelves. The 43SCX4L
and High Speed Optical Transponder shelf application are described in the
Alcatel-Lucent Photonic Service Switch (PSS-32/36) High speed Optical Transponder
Shelf User Guide.
The 43SCX4 OT uses a Polarization Division Multiplexing NRZ Binary Phase Shift
Keying (PDM NRZ BPSK) pulse format on the line interface. A line side coherent
receiver, combined with a digital signal processor (DSP), provides compensation of linear
transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD) and reduction of intra-channel
non-linear transmission impairments (Self Phase Modulation [SPM] and non-linear phase
noise). The line side optics of the 43SCX4 OT can be tuned to any of the 99 wavelengths
in the extended C-band, according to the following table:
Range Minimum Maximum

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operating wavelength 1529.163 nm 1568.362 nm

Operating frequency 191.150 THz 196.050 THz
Wavetracker is supported on the line interface for optical power auto-management in

1830 PSS. For the interoperability application with LambdaXtreme, Wavetracker is
turned off.
The client interfaces support XFP pluggable modules (B&W, CWDM and DWDM). The
following client signal types are supported:
• OC-192/STM64
• 10GBE (GFP-F, GFP-P, CBR11096, CBR11049)
• OTU2 (10.709, 11.049, 11.096)
• FC 800
Figure 2-30 43SCX4 block diagram
43G single port tunable add/drop transponder (43SCA1)

The 43SCA1 OT supports one client port and one, single OTU3 line interface. This pack
is referred to as a “40G Add/Drop” or more simply “40G A/D” OT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Like the 43SCX4 OT, the 43SCA1 OT uses a pulse format with Polarization Division
Multiplexing NRZ Binary Phase Shift Keying (PDM NRZ BPSK) on the line interface. It
has a line side coherent receiver, combined with a digital signal processor (DSP), that
provide compensation for linear transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD)
and reduction of intra-channel non-linear transmission impairments (Self Phase
Modulation (SPM) and non-linear phase noise). The line side optics of the 43SCA1 OT
can be tuned to any of the 99 wavelengths in the extended C-band, according to the
following table:

The following client signal types are supported:
Client signal Bit rate Standard

OC-768 39.813 Gbs GR-253-CORE
STM-256 39.813 Gbs ITU-T G.707
OTU3 43.018 Gbs ITU-T G.709
Figure 2-31 43SCA1 block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43G single port tunable AnyRate A/D OT with PDPSK modulation (43STA1P)
The 43STA1P is a 3-slot wide, full height 43G Single Port Tunable Anyrate Add/Drop
Transponder. It is supported on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 in this release. It contains
transmit and receive optics as well as multiplexer, driver, clock/data recovery,
demultiplexer, and control functionality.
The 43STA1P accepts a single OC-768/STM-256 client signal and an OTU3 Line
interface with full-band tunable optics. The line interface can be used to select any one of
88 channels (50 GHz spacing). Channel frequency can be provisioned automatically or
manually.
The 43STA1P pack supports transport in the C-band.
The following signals are supported on the line side:
• OTU3
– 43.018413 Gb/s, (±22ppm)
– Full-band tunable optics
– P-DPSK modulation
– Supports colorless tunable dispersion compensation
– Wavelength Tracker encoding on line transmit
– Supports Ultra FEC (UFEC)
The following signals are supported on the client side:
• OTU3 - 43.018413 Gb/s, (±22ppm)
• OC-768/STM-256 - 39.8132 Gb/s (±20ppm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-32 43STA1P block diagram
The 43STA1P supports Y-cable protection, but not OPS. Although there is no software
denial of protection group creation, Y-cable protection cannot be used with an OTU3
(OTM0.3) client. (The ODU3 layer is handled transparently, APS/PCC bytes are not
available for protection signaling.)
Facility loopback and terminal loopback functions are supported at both client and line
ports.
4G dual-port pluggable AnyRate 4-client OT (4DPA4)

The 4DPA4, sometimes referred to as an MSC (Multi-Service Card), is a half-height,
single-wide card that accepts up to four client signals via SFP optics, and performs
non-blocking multiplexing into one or both line ports. It has dual pluggable OTU1 line
ports that support B&W, CWDM, or DWDM line signals, and supports a variety of
sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder mappings.
• OC3/STM1
• OC12/STM4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• OC48/STM16
• 1GbE
• FE
• SyncE
• FC100 (1.0625G)
• FC200 (2.125G)
• FC400
• FICON(4.25G)
• HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI HDTV)
• SDSDI (270Mb/s, SMPTE 292M)
• DVBASI (270Mb/s, SMPTE 292M)
Figure 2-33 4DPA4 block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4G dual-port pluggable AnyRate 2-client OT (4DPA2)
The 4DPA2 is a half-height, single-wide dual transponder that has two client with SFP
optics, directly associated with two line ports. It also supports a single E-SNCP protection
group, with uses both line ports to protect one of the two client ports. With E-SNCP only
one client port is supported. The 4DPA2 is an optimized version of the 4DPA4 for
application in the 1830 PSS-16. The dual pluggable line ports that support B&W (850,
1310, and 1550) and CWDM (1471-1611) line signals.
• OC48/STM16
• 1GbE
Figure 2-34 4DPA2 block diagram
100G Single port tunable mux OTs with 10 universal clients (112SCX10, 112SNX10)
The 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 OTs are a three-slot-wide full-height packs, that support
multiplexing of up to ten 10G client signals into one OTU4 line interface. The 112SCX10
and 112SNX10 support one line interface (non-pluggable) and ten client interfaces with
XFP modules (B&W, CWDM). The line side optics of the 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 OT
can be tuned to utilize all 88 channels in the C-band. The 112SNX10 provides improved
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
optics components that provide 15.2 dB OSNR, improved from 16.2 dB supported on
112SCX10. Each port has a dedicated port status LED and a dynamic Ethernet activity
LED. When Ethernet data is transmitted or received, the LED blinks Green. When no
Ethernet data is moving (idle), the LED is off.
The 112SCX10 OT supports the following functional features:
• Facility and Terminal Loopbacks, Optical Performance Monitoring (OPR, OPT),
Digital Performance Monitoring (RMON, SONET/SDH, OTN - Client Side,
OTUk/ODUk Monitoring – Line Side)
• Hardware ready to support full ITU-T G.709 functionality, including GCC0 and TCM
• Line side supports the following features:
– PDM NRZ QPSK pulse format (Polarization Division Multiplexing NRZ
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
– Line side coherent receiver, combined with a DSP to compensate for linear
transmission impairments (CD & PMD) and mitigate non-linear impairments
(SPM and non-linear phase noise)
– Support Alcatel-Lucent Enhanced FEC (~9.2 dB coding gain at 1E-15 for ~7-%
overhead)
– OSNR: 16.2 db (112SCX10), 15.2 dB (112SNX10)
– Wave tracker supporting optical power auto-management. User configurable
option to disable the WT for the interoperability application with other systems
without WT
• Client side supports the following features:
– Standard FEC (RS-FEC)
– Supports OC-192/STM-64, 10 GbE and OTU2 client interfaces
The following illustration shows a block diagram of the 112SCX10/112SNX10 OT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-35 112SCX10/112SNX10 OT block diagram
The 112SCX10/112SNX10 supports Client access is through the ten XFP modules (B &
W, CWDM, DWDM). Short, long, and extended reach XFP modules are supported.
Client signal processing includes: Status, Alarms, PM, FEC, and pre-mapping of the
client signal into p-ODTU24.
Note: In TOADM applications the 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 may not be connected
to a CWR8 or CWR8-88 CLS port.
112 Gb/s single-line Coherent AnyRate OT with 1 client (112SCA1, 112SNA1)

The 112SCA1 and 112SNA1 OTs are three-slot-wide full-height packs, that support one
hot-pluggable Compatible Front panel PTM (CFP) on the client interface. The 112SCA1
and 112SNA1 OTs also support one OTU4 line interface (non-pluggable). The 112SCA1
and 112SNA1 OTs are similar in all respects, except that the112SNA1 uses improved
optics components that provide 15.2 dB OSNR, improved from 16.2 dB supported on the
112SCA1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 112SCA1/112SNA1 OT supports the following functional features:
• Facility and Terminal Loopbacks, Optical Performance Monitoring (OPR, OPT - Line
Side) Digital Performance Monitoring (OTUk/ODUk - Line Side)
• Line side features:
– Line side coherent receiver, combined with a DSP to compensate for impared
linear and non-linear transmission (CD, PMD, SPM and non-linear phase noise).
– Supports Alcatel-Lucent Enhanced FEC (~9.2 dB coding gain at 1E-15 for ~7-%
overhead)
– OSNR: 16.2 db (112SCA1), 15.2 dB (112SNA1)
– Wave tracker supports optical power auto-management. User configurable option
to disable the WT for the interoperability application with other systems without
WT
• Client side features:
– Supports client interfaces up to 100 GbE through a CFP
The following illustration shows a block diagram of the 112SCA1/112SNA1 OT with a
CFP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-36 112SCA1/112SNA1 OT block diagram
Note: In TOADM applications the 112SCA1/112SNA1 may not be connected to a

CWR8 or CWR8-88 CLS port.
OT compatibility
An end-to-end service on 1830 PSS nodes must have OTs on the end points with the same
types of ports. Both ends must have either tunable transceiver modules, fixed channel
SFP/XFPs, or tunable XFPs.
The following tables specify OTs that are compatible for originating and terminating an
end-to-end service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4PDA2 PSS1GBE
GbE
GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PSS1MD4
4DPA4/
STM16
HDSDI
SDSDI
OC12/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
1GbE
OC3/
NC
NC
NC
NC
11DPM12 11DPE12 11DPE12E 11QPA4(A)11STAR1 1STGE12 11STMM10
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OT compatibility for 2.5G and 10G OTs
GbE
GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
FE
GbE
GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
STM16
HDSDI
SDSDI
OC12/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
OTU1
1GbE
OC3/
NC
NC
NC
STM16
HDSDI
SDSDI
Client
OC12/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
OTU1
11DPM12 1GbE
OC3/
type
GbE
11DPE12E GbE
FE
Table 2-4
11DPE12
OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4PDA2 PSS1GBE
1GbE
1GbE
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PSS1MD4
4DPA4/
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
All clients
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1GbE
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
FC1200
OC192/
STM64
10GbE
clients
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
LAN
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
All
(continued)
FC1200
OC192/
STM64
10GbE
FC800
clients
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
LAN
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
All
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
clients
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
All
FC1200
FC1200
OC192/
OC192/
STM64
STM64
10GbE
11QPA4(A) 10GbE
Client
FC800
OTU2
OTU2
1GbE
type
LAN
LAN
Table 2-4
11STAR1
STGE12
OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4PDA2 PSS1GBE
NC
NC
NC
OC48/ NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
STM16
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PSS1MD4
4DPA4/
clients
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
All
OC3/ STM1
CBR2G5
STM16
FC100
FC200
FC400
OC12/
OC48/
STM4
OTU1
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
NC
NC
(continued)
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
CBR2G5 NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
STM16
STM16
Client
FC100
FC200
FC400
OC12/
OC48/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
OTU1
11STMM10 1GbE
1GbE
OC3/
type
Table 2-4
4DPA2
OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4PDA2 PSS1GBE
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PSS1MD4
DVBASI
4DPA4/
STM16
HDSDI
SDSDI
FC100
FC200
FC200
OC12/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
1GbE
OC3/
NC
FE
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
NC
NC
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
OTU2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
(continued)
OTU2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1GbE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
STM16
HDSDI
SDSDI
OC12/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
1GbE
OC3/
PSS1MD4 DVBASI NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
STM16
HDSDI
SDSDI
Client
FC100
FC200
FC400
OC12/
OC48/
STM1
STM4
1GbE
PSS1GBE 1GbE
OC3/
type
FE
Table 2-4
4DPA4/
OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker
Overview
Carriers need tools for managing the WDM layer that are similar in effectiveness to those
at the SDH/SONET layer. The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 has been designed with a
unique Wavelength Tracker capability, which enables every wavelength to be traced as it
passes through the WDM network.
How Wavelength Tracker works

Wavelength Tracker architecture is based on the principle of “encode once, decode many
times.” It uses a unique optical signature known as a “WaveKey” pair, which is encoded
into each service wavelength at the transponder’s transmitter before it enters the WDM
layer. Combinations of keys that create these signatures can provide up to 113 signatures
per OCh frequency supported by the system. Bi-directional services use a WaveKey pair
per direction; therefore 56 bi-directional services are possible from the Wave Key
signature pool per OCh frequency.
Optical taps and DSP-based WaveKey decoders in optical modules throughout the optical
network, and in dedicated Wavelength Tracker Optical Channel Monitors (WTOCMs) on
long-haul spans, “read” the WaveKeys. These units can provide the optical power level
for each wavelength, allowing complete optical layer visibility for network fiber
connectivity and faults at multiple points in each NE, regardless of whether the
wavelengths are added, dropped, or simply passed through.
Note: Where more than 113 Wavelength Tracker key pairs are needed in a network
per optical channel frequency, key reuse is possible if the network has isolated
pockets of NEs. The isolated NEs can form a separate optical domain, which can be
managed as a separate network. The OAMP port of one of the NEs in this separate
network is used to provide the management interface to the network. The pool of 113
WaveKey pairs is then available again within the separate network. Each separate area
can be assigned a different OSPF area number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-37, “Wavelength Tracker coding and encoding points” (p. 2-69).
Figure 2-37 Wavelength Tracker coding and encoding points
The key to Wavelength Tracker’s cost-effectiveness is that it accomplishes all this totally
within the optical domain. Therefore, no expensive optical-to-electrical-to-optical
(O-E-O) conversions or optical spectrum analyzers are needed, reducing overall system
cost.
The assignment of WaveKeys is managed by the network elements (NEs), which maintain
a database of the WaveKeys used in the network.
With the exception of the WR, OPSA and WTOCM cards, all other cards support
Wavelength Tracker encoder or decoder functionality.
Long haul Wavelength Tracker

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports both "standard" Wavelength Tracker (WT), for
regional applications, and Long-Haul Wavelength Tracker (LH-WT), for long haul
applications. LH-WT is supported by the WTOCM card, which is connected to the
external facing LD on an optical line, as shown in the figure below. In long-haul
applications with the presence of SRS (stimulated RAMAN scattering) Wavelength
Tracker WTOCM is required to accurately control power levels.
The following figure shows how a WTOCM card is connected to a module to enhance
embedded baseline Wavelength Tracker capabilities for long-haul application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-38 WTOCM addition for long haul WT
The WTOCM is supported with the following LDs:

• A2325A
• AHPHG
• AHPLG
• ALPHG
• AM2125A
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
• RA2P
Each WTOCM can provide LH-WT for any 2 LDs.
Unkeyed optical channels are not supported by the WTOCM. Software will not allow the
provisioning of an unkeyed service across an LD with a WTOCM, and will not allow a
connection between a WTOCM and LD if there are unkeyed services on the LD.
Each line within an optical node, and each endpoint on an OMS span, must be configured
with the same WT capability, either long haul (with WTOCM), or standard (without
WTOCM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WTOCM is used on the following node types for long haul configurations:
• TOADM
• FOADM end terminal with DGE in path
The WTOCM is optional for the following node types:
• 2D+FOADM
• FOADM end terminal, with no DGE in path
WT to WTOCM network upgrade

One of three reasons could indicate the need to deploy the WTOCM packs in a network:
• The EPT analysis of the network indicates that WTOCM packs are required to
provide sufficiently accurate power measurements to minimize transmission penalty
from inaccurate power settings.
As the distance reach of the network and channel count of the network increases, the
Stimulated Raman Scattering limit of detection by embedded Wavelength Tracker
detectors may be reached.
• In anticipation of the previous scenario, it may be advantageous to take advantage of
an opportunity to add WTOCM packs to the network.
• There may be a need to take advantage of new features offered only with WTOCM
equipped networks.
In all cases a switch-over from WTD-only monitored network to a WTOCM monitored
network must be done carefully. When the switch is made, per channel power levels used
by the system will shift. Optical power level control loops must react to the new power
levels, therefore a phased approach to WTOCM rollout is required. Within each phase
time must be allocated to allow for power level settling. The procedure for an in-service
upgrade to WTOCM is detailed in Appendix C of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide, ISSUE 2. Failure to follow this procedure could result in
impacts to services.
Applications
Wavelength Tracker includes several applications.
Wavelength path trace
The WaveKey acts as an “Optical J0” Trace Identifier. Wavelength Tracker traces the
end-to-end path of each wavelength, distinguishing each from all other
wavelengths—even multiple instances of the same wavelength when wavelength reuse is
employed on a network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical power management
In ROADM/TOADM systems, power management is fully automated. Target optical
power levels are calculated for critical points in the system. Actual per-channel optical
power is measured by Wavelength Tracker. Algorithms then feed back to control power at
the transponder transmitter and at the CWR8/CWR8-88 wavelength router. (On the
former, a variable optical attenuator [VOA] is used; on the latter. the power control is
built-in to the optical switching fabric).
This is a process that operates continuously to keep optical levels at ideal set points and
minimize optical power divergence throughout the life of the system. The result is
zero-touch power management at node commission and when adding or removing
wavelengths, and optimization of engineering rules.
Fault isolation
Whenever one or more optical powers fall outside their target zones, the occurrence is
alarmed and provides a highly effective GUI that aids in troubleshooting. The data can be
viewed in two different dimensions. One is the optical path view, which allows the
operator to trace the power of a single wavelength from the point it enters the network
until when it leaves. The other view is the optical fiber view, which shows the power of
all wavelengths at a single point.
Refer to Figure 2-39, “Wavelength Tracker fault isolation” (p. 2-72).
Figure 2-39 Wavelength Tracker fault isolation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The first example shows the power trace of a wavelength through two nodes (horizontal
scrolling allows viewing of the entire wavelength path), and the point in the first node
where the power falls out of the target zone. The second example shows a point at which
all but one of the wavelengths are within their target power range.
With this data, fiber bends, dirty connectors, incorrectly connected fibers, etc., can be
isolated to a specific node and also to particular interconnect points within that node.
This capability brings fault isolation out of the complex domain of analog optics with its
expensive test equipment and highly skilled craft, and into the domain of
SDH/SONET-like manageability.
APR support
APR is normally triggered by a combination of two triggers, OSC LOS and DWDM LOS.
However, on spans that are pumped with a RAMAN amplifier, DWDM LOS becomes
difficult to detect. due to amplified spontaneous emission (ASE) noise created by the
RAMAN within the fiber span. The ASE propagates to the input detector of the ingress
LD, and provides a high enough power reading to prevent DWDM LOS detection.
Starting in R3.6.50, Wavelength Tracker tone detection is supported as a second trigger
for APR, but only on Raman-pumped spans.
Keyed and unkeyed optical channels

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports both keyed and unkeyed optical channels. For
keyed optical channels, Wavelength Tracker functionality is enabled. For unkeyed
(unmanaged) optical channels, Wavelength Tracker functionality is not enabled. With
unkeyed channels, encoders/fVOAs on OTs are not populated or enabled for integrated
eVOAs, and decoder points are not used for monitoring or maintenance functions.
Note: All CWDM optical channels are unkeyed.
An NE can support both keyed and unkeyed optical channels. An NE with PSS-36
shelves will not support unkeyed optical channels. SW does not preclude support for
unkeyed optical channels, but this is not supported by EPT or SVT.
The following external VOAs are supported on the pluggable OTs for keyed and unkeyed
services.
For keyed services
• On the 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11QPA4(A) and 4DPA4 OTs, the VA port is
equipped with an fVOA.
• On the MVAC, the G{1-8} port is equipped with an fVOA.
• For unkeyed services on the 11DPE12, 11DPM12 and 11QPA4(A) OTs, the VA port is
optionally equipped with a sVOA. If a sVOA is not used, attenuators are installed in
the transmission path for power control.
• For unkeyed services on the 11DPE12E, the VA port is equipped with an fVOA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• For unkeyed services on the 4DPA4, the VA port is not equipped. Attenuators are
installed in the transmission path for power control. fVOAs and sVOAs are not
supported for unkeyed services on the 4DPA4.
• For unkeyed services on the 4DPA2, the VA port is not equipped. Attenuators are
installed in the transmission path for power control; sVOAs and fVOAs are not
supported. The 4DPA2 does not support keyed services.
For unkeyed services
• On the 11DPE12, 11DPM12 and 11QPA4(A) OTs, the VA port is optionally equipped
with a sVOA. If a sVOA is not used, attenuators are installed in the transmission path
for power control.
• On the 11DPE12E, the VA port is equipped with an fVOA.
• On the 4DPA4, the VA port is not equipped. Attenuators are installed in the
transmission path for power control. fVOAs and sVOAs are not supported for
unkeyed services on the 4DPA4.
• Oon the 4DPA2, the VA port is not equipped. Attenuators are installed in the
transmission path for power control; sVOAs and fVOAs are not supported. The
4DPA2 does not support keyed services.
The table below summarizes the supported eVOAs per card type.
Table 2-5 DWDM OT VOA usage
Card Service fVOA sVOA No eVOA

11DPE12 Keyed Y — —
Unkeyed — Y Y
11DPE12E Keyed Y — —
Unkeyed Y — —
11DPM12 Keyed Y — —
Unkeyed — Y Y
11QPA4(A) Keyed Y — —
Unkeyed — Y Y
4DPA2 Unkeyed — — Y
4DPA4 Keyed Y — —
Unkeyed — — Y
MVAC Keyed Y — —
Unkeyed Y — —
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unmanaged (unkeyed) services
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports the addition of optical channel trails that are
intentionally without wave keys. These trails are known as unkeyed Optical Channels
(uOCh). Currently, configurations with unmanaged OCH services are intended for
point-to-point end terminal networks and linear chains with up to 4 nodes, and are not
supported on the WTOCM.
Unkeyed optical channel trails have the following characteristics:
• No per-channel power monitoring is provided for these trails by a network element.
Manual intervention may be required by field personnel with optical spectrum
analyzing equipment to determine channel power.
• No per-channel trail identification is provided at the optical layer. The user must rely
on a termination point trail trace identifier.
• Little or no fault localization is provided.
• No automated adjustment for per-channel power changes.
• Limited manual adjustments for per-channel power changes.
• Manual optical channel trail construction requires external test equipment and
personnel at multiple sites.
Optical channel trails (the combination of termination transponders, optical spans and
OCh cross-connects) are either managed or unkeyed for their entire length. An unkeyed
optical channel cannot be provisioned with OPS protection. NE software will prevent this
configuration. The system will not allow unkeyed optical channels to be provisioned
through an OPSA or CWR card. Unkeyed Optical Channels are only supported on
FOADM lines, not TOADM lines.
With the exception of the WR, OPSA and WTOCM cards, all other cards that support
Wavelength Tracker encoder or decoder functionality support both keyed and unkeyed
optical channels.
Unkeyed optical channel trails can be mixed with keyed optical channel trails in an
Optical Transport Stream on a span. However, an unkeyed connection to a span which is
provisioned as auto-power-managed is not allowed. An unkeyed optical channel is only
supported on a manually power managed line. Attempts to provision a span as
auto-power-managed when an unkeyed connection to that span exists are also not
allowed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Alien wavelengths
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alien wavelengths
Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, as is typical with all
WDM systems, accepts “black and white” (B&W) client optical signals and converts
them into ITU-T grid-compliant DWDM line signals. The line card that performs this
function is the optical transponder. Among other functions, it performs O-E-O conversion
and provides a manageable demarcation between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (transport)
and client switching equipment.
However, if the client equipment is capable of supporting native ITU-T grid-compliant
DWDM interfaces, it may not be necessary to use an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical
transponder: the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can accept such “alien wavelengths” without
any O-E-O conversion. Even in this case, there are many advantages to using optical
transponders, but sometimes there is a prevailing advantage in the economics of alien
wavelengths.
In some systems, alien wavelengths are directly launched into the DWDM filters. With no
demarcation, this practice is fraught with operational problems.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS offers a mediating card creating a demarcation point between
the client and DWDM system. The card establishes a monitoring point and has a VOA to
control launch power. Uniquely, the card also has a WaveKey encoder that enables optical
performance monitoring and wavelength tracing of the alien wavelength as it traverses the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS domain—providing for unrivalled management of alien
wavelengths. Currently, the cards that provide this capability are the SVAC and multi-port
MVAC.
Note: The SVAC and MVAC are not required for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
configurations. They are not precluded by software, but are not supported by EPT and
SVT on 1830 PSS-36.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Optical protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection
Optical protection overview
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports optical 1+1 protection on a per-wavelength
basis over any network topology where diverse routes are available. 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 provides a choice of 1+1 architectures that allow the network
operator to make capex vs. service availability trade-offs. In other words, the amount of
line and transmission equipment redundancy can be adjusted to restrict the number of
single points of failure commensurate with a targeted availability requirement.
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection options share several common features.
• Channels are protected on an individual basis
• Protected and unprotected channels can be mixed in nodes and in fiber paths.
• Protection switching is performed in less than 50 ms.
• Lockout, forced, and manual switching are supported.
Examples include: full digital PMs on client and line side, facility and terminal
loopbacks, muxing of lower speed clients into single wavelength, wider range of optical
1+1 protection options, better support of remote clients, guaranteed engineering rules
under all operating conditions and over the lifetime of the equipment.
Per-channel optical line protection (with OPS)

This 1+1 option protects the optical line only. However, because the optical transponder is
not duplicated, it is the lowest cost option.
Refer to Figure 2-40, “Per-channel optical line protection” (p. 2-77)
Figure 2-40 Per-channel optical line protection
Following the left to right signal path, an unprotected client signal is converted to a WDM
line signal by a transponder. An Optical Protection Switch (OPS) pack is inserted between
the transponder and WDM filter. The OPS head-end bridges (passive optical splitting) the
line signal to a pair of diversely routed fibers. At the far end of the network, the two line
signals are received by the far-side OPS. The OPS switches (optically) a valid line signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
to the far-end transponder, which forwards the signal to the far-end client. In the event of
a line fiber cut on the working path, the far-end OPS switches to the alternate signal. The
switching criteria is based on loss of optical power. The OPS also monitors the health of
the protect path so that if there is a fiber cut, the signal will be switched to a known good
path. The reverse path operates in the same but independent manner, i.e., the OPS
supports unidirectional switching.
Only non-revertive mode is currently supported by the OPS in 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-
16. Revertive switching is planned for support in a future release of 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16.
OPS protection configurations
For protection configurations, the working and protection lines may be both auto-power
managed, both manual-power managed, or one auto-power and one manual-power
managed.
The following combinations are supported:
• OT OPS protection: TOADM auto-auto paths with and without SFDs (see Figure
2-41, “OT OPS protection - TOADM auto-auto paths” (p. 2-79))
• SVAC OPS protection: TOADM auto-auto paths with and without SFDs
• OT OPS protection: FOADM manual-manual paths
• SVAC OPS protection: FOADM manual-manual paths (see Figure 2-42, “SVAC OPS
protection - FOADM manual-manual paths” (p. 2-79))
• OT OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual paths (see
Figure 2-43, “OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual
paths” (p. 2-80))
• SVAC OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual paths
• OT OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto paths (see Figure 2-44, “OT OPS protection -
FOADM auto-auto paths” (p. 2-80))
• SVAC OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto paths
• OT OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths (see Figure
2-45, “OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths”
(p. 2-80))
• SVAC OPS protection: FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths
The following figures show examples of power management combinations supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-41 OT OPS protection - TOADM auto-auto paths
Auto Th Th
Auto
LD CWR8 ru ru CWR8 LD
Line 1 Line 2
SFD SFD Th Th
44 44 Auto Auto
LD CWR8 ru ru CWR8 LD
Line 1 Line 2
OPSA
SFD SFD
44 44
T
Plus dual OT->OPSA->SFD44-> OPSA

CWR8 OMD add path
Figure 2-42 SVAC OPS protection - FOADM manual-manual paths
S S S S
Manual F F Manual Manual F F Manual
LD LD LD LD
D D D D
Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2
5 5 5 5
SVACSVAC SVACSVAC
OPSA OPSA
Alien Tx Alien Tx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-43 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and FOADM manual-manual
paths
Express Express
S S S S
Auto F
Manual Manual F Auto
F F
LD LD LD LD
D D D D
Line 1 Line 3 Line 3 Line 2
5 5 5 5
Plus Alien tx->OPSA->SVAC add

OPSA
OPSA path
T
T
Figure 2-44 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto paths
S S S S
Auto Auto Auto Auto
F F F F
LD D D LD LD D D LD
Line 1 44 44 Line 2 Line 1 44 44 Line 2
Plus Alien tx->OPSA->SVAC add

OPSA OPSA
path
T T
Figure 2-45 OT OPS protection - FOADM auto-auto and TOADM auto-auto paths
Auto Th Th Auto
ru S S ru CWR8 LD
LD CWR8 Auto Auto
F F Line 2
Line 1 LD LD D
D
Line 3 Line 3 44
44
SF SF
D44 D44
Plus Alien tx ->OPSA ->SVAC ->SFD
add path x
OPS
OPSA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical sub-block network connection protection (O-SNCP)
This option 1+1 protects both the optical line and the transponders for higher service
availability.
Refer to Figure 2-46, “Optical sub-network connection protection (O-SNCP)” (p. 2-81)
Figure 2-46 Optical sub-network connection protection (O-SNCP)
Following the left to right signal path, an unprotected client signal is passively head-end
bridged by the Y-cable to a pair of redundant transponders. Each transponder transmits a
WDM line signal onto a diversely routed fiber. One signal is the primary, and one signal
is the secondary. At the far end, the primary and secondary signals are received by
another pair of redundant transponders. The transponder receiving the primary line signal
converts it to a client signal and passes it through the Y-cable to the client equipment. The
secondary transponder has its client interface turned off. In the event of a primary line
fiber cut orprimary transponder failure the primary transponder in the failed path will
disable client signal transmission and the secondary transponder will turn on its client
signal transmission.
A major advantage to O-SNCP vs. using an OPS card is that the transponders perform the
switching. Because the transponders are O-E-O devices, protection switching can be
triggered by digital performance monitoring. Excessive BER is monitored by a
provisionable parameter, sfth, that the user can set to BER=10-3, or 10-4, or 10-5, when
an 11STAR1 or 11STMM10 client port is provisioned to SONET/SDH. (See
theAlcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.5.60
and 3.6.51 User Provisioning Guide for complete parameter details.) Defects that
contribute to a switch of 10G LAN clients are Loss of Signal, Loss of Synchronization,
HIBER, and line-side OTN defects (LOS, LOF, LOM, etc.). The HIBER threshold is not
a provisionable parameter. The secondary path is monitored in an identical manner.
Switching can be provisioned as unidirectional or bi-directional, the latter required to
support Gigabit Ethernet auto-negotiation with client switches/routers. Revertive and
non-revertive switching are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Although the Y-cable is a single point of failure, it is only a passive component with a
very low failure rate. Note that there are three versions of the Y-cable: one supports
single-mode fiber connections (YSMF), and two support multi-mode client fiber: 50/125
(YMMF50) and 62.5/125 (YMMF62).
One restriction that applies to O-SNCP is that the transponder pair in each node must
reside in the same shelf, as they communicate over the shelf backplane for the protection
switching protocol.
Electrical sub-block network connection protection (E-SNCP)

E-SNCP, supported on the 4DPA4, 4DPA2, 11QPA4(A), and 11DPM12 OTs, is a line side
(network side) protection mechanism which protects against loss of the line signal due to
an OTM failure, fiber interruption, or a malfunction of an intermediate NE node.
E-SNCP protection is implemented by permanent head-end bridging and dynamic tail-end
selection
E-SNCP on 4DPA4
E-SNCP bridging for the 4DPA4 (1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16) is illustrated in Figure
2-47, “E-SNCP on 4DPA4 OT” (p. 2-83). Each client port (plus the two line ports) form
an independent protection group. The bridging is performed at the ODU1 level. As a
result, all client ports assigned to the working line are bridged simultaneously to the
protection line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-47 E-SNCP on 4DPA4 OT
In the outgoing direction, traffic from the client ports is aggregated into one ODU1 line
signal, then the ODU1 signal is bridged into two parts, one for Working Path and another
for Protection Path. Both parts are inserted with OTU1 overhead and FEC code being sent
to the lines. The optical wavelengths are then modulated with WT encoder/eVOA before
sending to the SFD or FOADM.
In the incoming direction, the OT receives two OTU1 line signals (working and
protection). After FEC error correction and OTU1/ODU1 overhead termination
respectively, client traffic is extracted independently from the two line signals according
to the OPTS mapping structure determined for the outgoing direction. Then, depending
on the external switch commands for individual protection groups, or signal quality, the
traffic for each client port is selected independently from the working or protection line
port.
For the 4DPA4, the automatic switch decision is made based on Loss of optical
signal/Loss of lock, or by monitoring the following defects:
• OTU:
– Loss of Signal
– Loss of Frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Loss of Multiframe
– Trace identifier mismatch
• ODU:
– AIS related to Server Signal Failure
– Open connection indication
– Trace identifier mismatch
– Payload mismatch
• TDM RS/MS:
– dLOS
– dLOF
• 1GBE LAN PCS/MAC
– dLANLOS
– dLANLSS
• Eqpt:
– dEQPT
– dFACTERM-DEV
– dREPLUNTMISS
E-SNCP on 4DPA2
E-SNCP bridging for the 4DPA2 (1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16) is illustrated in Figure
2-48, “E-SNCP on 4DPA2 OT” (p. 2-85). The client port (plus both line ports) form an
single protection group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-48 E-SNCP on 4DPA2 OT
In outgoing direction, the client signal from the specified client port is bridged onto the
two line ports, one for Working Path and the other for Protection Path.
In incoming direction, the OT receives two line signals, one is working, the other is
protection. On 4DPA2, the line signal format is identical to the client signal format.
Depending on external switch commands and signal quality, the client traffic is selected
from either the working line port or the protection line port.
For the 4DPA2, the automatic switch decision is made based on Loss of optical
signal/Loss of lock, or by monitoring the following defects:
• TDM RS/MS:
– dLOS
– dLOF
• 1GBE LAN PCS/MAC
– dLANLOS
– dLANLSS
• Eqpt:
– dEQPT
– dFACTERM-DEV
– dREPLUNTMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-SNCP on 11QPA4(A)
E-SNCP protection is implemented by permanent head-end bridging and dynamic tail-end
protection. The 11QPA4(A) E-SNCP function is realized with 8x8 matrix component on
the board. Figure 2-49, “11QPA4(A) E-SNCP examples” (p. 2-86) provides two examples
of E-SNCP configuration in an 11QPA4(A). Each client port and two line ports form an
independent protection group. Protected client(s) and unprotected client(s) co-exist on the
board.
With E-SNCP configuration, the 11QPA4(A) ingress client signal is broadcast by the 8x8
matrix. The Optical signal is sent out by the two XFPs and transported via diverse optical
paths through a DWDM domain. The two received signals are processed by the two OTN
mappers. The automatic switch decision is made based on Loss of optical signal/Loss of
lock, or by monitoring LOF/LOM/TIM/SSF/PLM/SD/CSF, as detected by the OTN
mapper.
On 11QPA4(A) OT, any one client port and its corresponding line port, and any one of
other line ports can form a protection group (see, Figure 2-49, “11QPA4(A) E-SNCP
examples” (p. 2-86)). An idle client port that corresponds with a line port involved in a
protection group, for example port C2 or C4 in Example 1 below, does not need to be
equipped with a PTM as no traffic will pass through this client port. Although the
E-SNCP protection examples shown are bi-directional, uni-directional transmission is
also possible, depending on the Operational Mode setting of the line ports.
Figure 2-49 11QPA4(A) E-SNCP examples
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The signal from the client involved in a protection group is split into two parts in the
matrix component, each goes to one line OTN mapper/framer for signal mapping, OTN
overhead insertion, and FEC coding, and is transmitted after E/O conversion. The optical
wavelength is then modulated with WT encoder or attenuated by slow eVOA before
entering the SFD or CWR.
In the other direction, the OT receives signals (working and protection) from SFD or
CWR associated with the line ports in the protection group. After FEC decoding, OTN
overhead termination and client signal demapping, the two client signals enter the 8x8
switch. Depending on automatic protection switching criteria or an external switching
command, one client is selected and sent to the client port
Protection of alien wavelengths

Alien wavelengths are admitted into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 at the
SVAC. To support 1+1 optical layer protection for alien wavelengths, the OPS card is
used on the client side of a pair of redundant SVACs.
Refer to Figure 2-50, “Protection of alien wavelengths” (p. 2-87)
Figure 2-50 Protection of alien wavelengths
The OPS card operates in the same manner with the same features as in optical line
protection, but since it is on the client side of redundant SVACs.
Protection above the optical layer

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical 1+1 protection architectures include a tool kit that
provides an alternative to protection above the optical layer by the client equipment. For
protection above the optical layer, SDH/SONET ADMs and XCs, Ethernet switches, and
IP routers can offer the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 redundant client
interfaces and perform protection switching at their respective higher layers.
For protection at the optical layer, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 treats
the two interfaces independently and routes them diversely.
Although protection above the optical layer can often provide the highest availability, it is
generally the most expensive to deploy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Optical protection for 40G OTs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical protection for 40G OTs

1+1 optical protection support
The 40G OTs support 1+1 optical protection via a Y-cable. In this configuration, two
physically adjacent packs have Y-cables equipped on the protected client ports. Y-cable
protection is a network protection mechanism which protects the transponder card, client
side laser, network side laser, and network side fibers (assuming diverse fiber routes).
1+1 Y-cable configuration
Other line-interface based protection schemes, using an OPS pack are not supported. The
40G packs contain a Tunable Dispersion Compensator (TDC) on line-side receive ports.
The amount of time required for this TDC to tune to its optimum dispersion compensating
value does not meet protection switch time requirements.
Y-cable protection is based on permanent head end bridging and dynamic tail-end
selection, with a pair of redundant OT cards at each end. A passive Y-cable (optical
splitter/joiner) is attached to a pair of working/protection ports, one port on the OT card at
each end. The head-end bridge is done by the Y-cable splitter on the Rx of the client-side
ports at the near end. The incoming signal from the client equipment is split and received
by both near end OT cards (working and protection).
Figure 2-51 Y-cable protection
The tail-end selection is done by having one of the far end working/protection OT cards
turn its transmit client-side laser on, while the other turns its laser off. This transmit signal
is channelled through the Y-cable joiner (splitter in reverse direction) and sent to the client
equipment. Either the working or the protection card can drive the signal through the
joiner.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The same configuration is used in the reverse direction to also provide protection in that
direction.
Local protection negotiations at each end are done between paired Y-cable OTs through a
dedicated backplane communication channel for quick signalling. This channel does not
require that a shelf control card be present. Remote end-to-end protection information is
exchanged using the standard GR-253 1+1 APS K-byte protocol, carried in a proprietary
manner in the APS/PCC channel of the 40G ODU3 overhead.
1+1 Y-cable switching
Y-cable protection 1+1 uni-directional switching is supported. Each end makes an
independent switching decision based on defects affecting the direction of transmission
received from the line side, or based on user commands. One end may select from the
working line while the other end is selecting from protection. The K-byte APS protocol
carries fault status and protection information from end to end, but this information does
not contribute to the near end switching decision. Bi-directional switching may be
considered for future releases.
43G Y-cable protection is currently non-revertive only.
Y-cable pack installation and connection
Both the working and protection OT cards must be installed in the same 1830 PSS shelf
to allow for the necessary backplane communication between the paired Y-cable cards.
Within each shelf, there are specific pairs of slot locations which support this backplane
communication between the cards. This allows considerable flexibility in card location,
and does not limit the number of cards per shelf.
Each Y-cable must connect corresponding client ports on the working and protection OT
cards. For example, working port C1 must be connected to protection port C1, or C2 to
C2, etc.
For half height OTs, the 2 OTs must be positioned in vertically adjacent slots. For full
height, 1-slot wide OTs on a PSS-32 and PSS-16 shelf, the 2 OTs must be positioned in
horizontally adjacent slots. However for PSS-36, the area around the matrix cards is
different. In this area, horizontal adjacency is shown in Table 2-6, “PSS-36 Y-cable slot
pairs for full-height 1-slot wide cards” (p. 2-89).
For full height, 1-slot wide OTs on a PSS-36 shelf, the 2 OTs may be positioned as shown
in the table below.
Table 2-6 PSS-36 Y-cable slot pairs for full-height 1-slot wide cards
OT #1 OT#2
2 3
3 4
4 5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-6 PSS-36 Y-cable slot pairs for full-height 1-slot wide cards (continued)
OT #1 OT#2
5 6
6 7
7 8
8 9
9 12
10 14
12 13
13 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20 21
Table 2-7 PSS-32 Y-cable slot pairs for 3-slot wide cards
OT #1 OT#2
2 5
2 6
2 7
3 6
3 7
4 7
10 13
10 14
10 15
11 14
11 15
12 15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-8 PSS-36 Y-cable slot pairs for 3-slot wide cards
OT #1 OT#2
2 5
3 6
4 7
5 8
12 16
16 19
CWDM
CWDM Overview
Compared to DWDM networks, CWDM networks have lower capacity and shorter
optical reach; however they are also lower in cost for certain applications where they are
suitable. 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 support for CWDM is another instance of the
product’s flexibility to cost-optimize for any application, in this case usually for Metro
Access.
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports up to eight CWDM wavelength channels from
the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.694.2 recommendation. Channel
spacing is 20 nm. The 8 channels are 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, and
1611 nm.
When 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 is configured to support CWDM, it shares all the
same hardware as DWDM and is supported out of the same shelf. That is, a node can be
on a DWDM ring with a CWDM spur. The major hardware differences are that a CWDM
line uses CWDM filters, is not amplified, and uses an embedded GCC channel instead of
an OSC for supervisory communications.
CWDM filters
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 includes three filter types.
• SFC8: 8 add/drop channels; no pass-through channels. 1 variant.
• SFC4x: 4 add/drop channels; 4 pass-through channels. 2 variants: x=A, B
• SFC2x: 2 add/drop channels; 6 pass-through channels. 4 variants: x=A, B, C, D.
Note: The filters listed above are not required in 1830 PSS-36 configurations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features CWDM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Table 2-9, “CWDM filter scheme” (p. 2-92)
Table 2-9 CWDM filter scheme
Wavelength (nm) SFC2 SFC4 SFC8

1471 SFC2A SFC4A SFC8
1491
1511 SFC2B
1531
1551 SFC2C SFC4B
1571
1591 SFC2D
1611
These filters do not support an OSC channel. Management information is communicated

node-to-node using the embedded GCC channel.
CWDM optical interface

In 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51, a CWDM spur off of a
DWDM ring can be realized by plugging a CWDM SFP or XFP into a client port of an
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponder, which can connect to CWDM
sub-tending equipment on the spur’s far end.
Two cases can be considered:
• A CWDM XFP can be used on the client side of the 11STAR1 transponder. Two
reaches are available: 40 and 80 km. In this case, if the sub-tending device is an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH or 1830 PSS-1 MD4H edge device, then the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS management domain can be extended via the embedded
GCC channel.
• A CWDM SFP can be used on the client side of the 11STGE12 and 11STMM10
transponders. 80-km reach is available.
Transponders with tunable line-side lasers support DWDM wavelengths. Transponders
with PTM line-side interfaces can support DWDM or CWDM XFPs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves and

equipage
Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-16 shelves are described in this section, along with the supporting components
associated with each shelf.
Shelf Descriptions
The following information describes the physical layout of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-36, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32,and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelves. All three
1830 PSS shelf variants support application cards that utilize an 1830 PSS Universal Slot
interface to the backplane. All application card slots on the 1830 PSS-16 and 1830
PSS-32 support provide two card interfaces per slot, allowing them to accept two half
height cards in each slot, when that slot is also equipped with a half-slot adapter
(HSLAD). All slots in the 1830 PSS-36 can also support two universal interfaces per slot,
except slots 10,11,14, and 15. This is illustrated in the following information.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 universal shelf supports:
• Up to 32 half height application cards (or up to 18 full height application cards)
• 2 switch fabrics
• 2 first level controllers (FLC) for rudundancy
• 2 shared slots for bus termination cards (BTC) & timing expansion cards (TC).
Timing expansion will be supported in a future release
• 2 redundant power input filters
• 1 fan tray
Switching support for 1830 PSS-36 will be provided in a future realease. Currently, for
photonic-only applications the 2 switch slots support:
• 2 matrix controller (MT0C)
• 1 full height application card
The overall depth of the installed 1830 PSS-36 , including cabling, fibers, and optional
shelf cover is 325 mm (12.8 in.). Shallower cable ducts are available for installations
required to fit in an ETSI 300mm deep footprint. However, these ducts provide less cable
capacity. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 is 650mm (25.6 in) in height, including the
high capacity fan tray.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Two 1830 PSS-36 universal shelves may be installed in a rack. All maintenance can be
performed at the front of the chassis, allowing back-to-back installation when mounted in
ETSI 300mm cabinets. (See Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation and System Turn-Up
Guide for full installation details.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-52 1830 PSS-36 shelf - physical design
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The shelf supports redundant power, and all office interfaces (management, maintenance,
synchronization, and alarm). The backplane provides for control, management, power,
and is capable of supporting switching application in a future release.
The 1830 PSS-36 contains 36 universal slots. In addition to the power filter, bus
termination card, and first level controller card slots, it has 32 switch-capable half height
slots that can also be used in pairs to support full height cards, and 2 non-switched full
height slots. Figure 2-53, “1830 PSS-36 shelf slot numbering” (p. 2-96) shows the
application card slots in blue and the switching control slots in yellow.
Figure 2-53 1830 PSS-36 shelf slot numbering
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 central office shelf (COSHF)

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf supports:
• 32 paired half height application cards (or 16 full height application cards)
• 2 equipment controllers (EC)
• 1 user panel
• 1 fan tray
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The overall depth of the installed shelf, including cabling, fibers, and optional shelf cover
is 300mm (12 in.). It is 14 RU (621.8 mm [24.48 in.]) high. An extended cover kit is
available that increases the overall depth of the 1830 PSS-32 shelf from 300mm to
330mm. This cover creates more space when needed, to allow the use of LBOs on the
face plates of the circuit packs.
The 1830 PSS-32 subrack has an integrated air baffle, allowing for three subracks to be
installed in a rack. For installations requiring one or two subracks in a rack an optional
1RU (44.5 mm[1.75 in]) top air baffle should be used to allow for proper subrack
ventilation.
All fibering and subrack maintenance can be performed at the front of the chassis, thus
allowing back-to-back installation when mounted in ETSI 300mm cabinets. (See
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for full details).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 2-54, “1830 PSS-32 central office shelf - physical design” (p. 2-98)
Figure 2-54 1830 PSS-32 central office shelf - physical design
The shelf supports redundant control, redundant power, 32 universal slots, and all office
interfaces (management, maintenance, synchronization, and alarm) required for a central
office/government/enterprise application. The backplane provides for control and
management, power, and transponder-transponder communication in support of O-SNCP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 32 universal slots are shown in blue in Figure 2-55, “1830 PSS-32 CO shelf slot
numbering” (p. 2-99).
Figure 2-55 1830 PSS-32 CO shelf slot numbering
There are also dedicated slots for duplex ECs (1 and 18), duplex power filters (19 and
36), fan (37), and user interface panel (40). Slots 38 and 39 are for future use.
Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 end office shelf (EOSHF)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf supports:
• 16 paired half height application cards (or 8 full height application cards)
• 2 equipment controllers (EC)
• 1 user panel (occupies one of the paired application card slots)
• 1 fan tray
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 End Office Shelf, is 8RU (355.6 mm [14 in.]) high and
280mm [11in.] deep as shown in Figure 2-56, “1830 PSS-16 end office shelf - physical
design” (p. 2-100). It is suitable for installation in 19" or 23" EIA/WECO racks with 12
inch depth or 300mm deep ETSI racks.
All fibering and maintenance can be performed at the front of the chassis, allowing
back-to-back installation in ETSI 300mm cabinets. (See Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide for full details.)
Refer to Figure 2-56, “1830 PSS-16 end office shelf - physical design” (p. 2-100)
Figure 2-56 1830 PSS-16 end office shelf - physical design
The shelf supports redundant control, redundant power, 16 universal slots, and all office
interfaces (management, maintenance, synchronization, and alarm) required for an
end-office application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 16 universal slots are arranged in two rows of 8, on either side of each other. There
are 21 total slots, including slots for Equipment Controllers, Power Filters, and fans. Slots
are numbered 1 through 21 as illustrated in Figure 2-57, “1830 PSS-16 EO shelf slot
numbering” (p. 2-101).
Figure 2-57 1830 PSS-16 EO shelf slot numbering
Individual universal slots or combinations of universal slots are used to house cards of
varying height and width, enabling great flexibility and future-proofing the shelf.
Universal slots support amplifier cards, filter cards, transponders, SVACs and OPSs. The
description of cards as half- or full-height, and full-, double-, or triple-width is derived
from the 1830 PSS-32 platform where cards are installed vertically. In the 1830 PSS-16
cards are installed horizontally. Consequently, the designation full- or half-height should
be understood as referring to the horizontal dimension of the cards as installed in the 1830
PSS-16, and full-, double-, and triple-width should be understood as referring to the
vertical dimension of the cards as installed in the 1830 PSS-16.
Each horizontally adjacent pair of universal slots is separated by a Half Slot Adaptor
(HSALD) that can be installed or removed by the user. The HSALD provides mechanical
support for application card edges as they slide into the center of the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
With an HSALD installed, an individual universal slot can house a half-height,
single-wide circuit packs. Without an HSALD to separate them, two horizontally adjacent
universal slots can be combined into a single full-height, single-wide slot. Then two
adjacent full-height single-wide slots can be combined to form a single full-height
double-wide slot.
Slots 2 and 12 are dedicated for duplex ECs. Slots 1 and 11 house the duplex power
filters, and slot 21 houses the fan module. Currently, the 1830 PSS-16 is only supported
as a master shelf. In this role, it must be equipped with a user interface panel in the slot
10.
Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 basic components

The following information describes the basic components and cards associated with the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf. This includes hardware components needed to support
basic operation of the shelf, but not associated with specific WDM network
configurations.
Slot equipage requirement
All slots in the shelf must be occupied with circuit packs or blanks, and all packs must be
fully inserted into the shelf to maintain proper air flow. The shelf must not have an empty
slot. Empty slots or partially inserted cards will decrease air flow across installed circuit
packs and will decrease their cooling. Circuit packs could potentially be subject to failure
as their temperatures increases.
Card installation caution
When a circuit pack is inserted, the system will automatically determine if a FPGA
software upgrade is required. If a FPGA software upgrade is required, the system will
automatically initiate the upgrade on the circuit pack. If the circuit pack is removed
before the upgrade is completed, it will result in the pack becoming inoperable.
First level controller (FLC)
The First Level Controller (FLC36EA) is the node controller for an 1830 PSS-36, and
applied to the main shelf only. It functions like the EC on the 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16
platforms. The 1830 PSS-36 FLC is installed in slot 23 or 40 for redundancy.
Matrix controller
In the current release (R3.6) the MT0C is available for the 1830 PSS-36. It is not required
or supported on 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16.
The MT0C is a switch-less card that functions as a second level controller (SLC) in 1830
PSS-36, intended for use in photonic-only applications. It is required in both main and
extension shelves. The MT0C must be installed in slots 11 or 15. Redundant MT0C cards
are supported in Release 3.6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: An MT0C pack is a required pack in the 1830 PSS-36 shelf. All transmission
packs that are plugged in a 1830 PSS-36 shelf can lose transmission if there is no
MT0C pack is running in the shelf.
The extension shelf ports (ES1 and ES2) on the matrix controller card are internal ports
only and can be used to connect to 1830 PSS-36 extension shelves. The MAC addresses
of ES1 and ES2 ports are not retrievable.
Redundant controllers
Beginning in Release 3.6, the 1830 PSS-36 supports redundant controllers along with
1830 PSS-32/16 shelves. Table 2-10, “Controller redundancy with mixed main/subtendng
shelves” (p. 2-103) shows the possible redundant controller combinations for NEs with
combinations of 1830 PSS main and subtending shelves.
Table 2-10 Controller redundancy with mixed main/subtendng shelves
Main shelf Main shelf controllers PSS-36 subtending PSS-32 subtending

shelf controllers shelf controllers
PSS-36 1 FLC 1 MT0C 1 EC
1 MT0C
2 FLC 1 MT0C 1 EC
1 MT0C
1 FLC 2 MT0C 2 EC
2 MT0C
2 FLC 2 MT0C 2 EC
2 MT0C
PSS-32 1 EC — 1 EC
2 EC — 2 EC
PSS-16 1 EC — 1 EC
2 EC — 2 EC
Bus termination card (BTC)

The BT36 bus termination card is necessary for the operation of the internal
communication bus in the 1830 PSS-36. There are two BTC slots physically installed in
slots 42 and 43 (lower connectors in slots 1 and 22). An inter-shelf timing card will be
available in a later release for installation in slots 1 and 22, and will be physically
installed over the BTC modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Both BTCs must be installed, because each of the BTCs has one of the two Shelf ID
rotary dials required to generate the complete Shelf ID. (The Shelf ID lower nibble is on
BTC1 in slot 42, and the higher nibble is on BTC2 in slot 43.) The System EEPROM is
located on the BTCs, but can be accessed by the FLC only on BTC2 in slot 43. It will
contains the Shelf RIM and MAC addresses, TID, and provisioned IP address.
If a BTC is removed, which is unlikely, no card containing a CPU should be inserted or
restarted until the BTC is replaced. Any card with a CPU which initializes while a BTC is
missing must be restarted again after the BTC is replaced to properly read the Shelf ID.
Administrative and supporting (USRPNL) functions
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 does not support a separate USRPNL module like that
found on 1830 PSS-32/16. Instead, interfaces and functions found on the USRPNL of
1830 PSS-32/16 are distributed across the 1830 PSS-36 FLC, MT0C, PF, and BTC cards.
With the exceptions that, a serial craft interface is not supported, and there is no craft
USB port.
The administrative and support interfaces are distributed on 1830 PSS-36 cards as
follows.
• PSS-36 FLC includes:
– OAMP LAN port for management connectivity
(Note that, a management LAN port and the device to which it is connected must
both be configured in the same way, either with a fixed speed/duplex setting for
both, or auto/auto for both. If the management LAN port is configured as
auto/auto and the device at the other end is configured to a fixed speed/duplex
setting, the management LAN port will default to half duplex operation.)
– CIT LAN port which also supports debug access
– 6 LEDs for node-level alarm summary
– LED test button
– ACO button
– MiniUSB serial port (not used)
– USB-A port (not used).
• 1830 PSS-36 MT0C includes 6 LAN ports:
– SCN/AUX
– VOIP
– ES1 and ES2 (for extension shelf connections)
– E1 and E2 (for general-purpose external connections)
• 1830 PSS-36 PF includes:
– HOUSEKEEPING input ports (16)
– HOUSEKEEPING output ports (8)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The HOUSEKEEPING ports are independent on each PF, so there are total of 32
input ports and 16 output ports available on each shelf. However, the use of
HOUSEKEEPING ports is currently restricted to 8 inputs and 4 outputs, located
on the first PF (slot 44) of the 1830 PSS-36 main shelf only.
– Rack Lamp or Remote Alarms control port (single interface provisioned for one
function or the other)
Rack Lamp is on the first PF (slot 44) on the 1830 PSS-36 main shelf only.
Remote Alarms are controlled by the second PF (slot 45) on the 1830 PSS-36
main shelf only.
– External Timing Interface input/output (not used)
• 1830 PSS-36 BTC includes a software-controlled System EEPROM containing MAC
addresses, TID, provisioned IP address, etc. (On 1830 PSS-32 this is on the USRPNL.
On 1830 PSS-1 this is on the FAN.)
Power filters (PFC)
The 1830 PSS-36 PFC power filter supports three 50A inputs, and does not provide
circuit breakers as part of the power filter card. Circuit breaker protection for this power
filter must be provided from the power distribution unit. (See Figure 4-13, “1830 PSS-36
power filter faceplate” (p. 4-34).)
The shelf supports optionally redundant DC power filters. Slot 44 and slot 45 are each
dedicated for the installation of one power filter. Both power filter slots must be
populated for redundancy. Each power filter is capable of sustaining the entire load of the
system.
Power distribution units (circuit breaker protected)
The power distribution units provide power connections to the power filters. These
connections must use circuit breakers which are installed in association with the power
distribution units. The power distribution units also contain rack lamps which can be
connected to the Rack Lamp Control port on a power filter, if desired. These units are
separate passive shelves. One unit is mounted at the top of each bay, and serves multiple
1830 PSS-36 shelves. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
Guide for additional information about power filter connections. Available circuit
breakers are listed in Table A-14, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous
equipment” (p. A-31).
Fan (FAN3T8)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 is cooled by an in-service, field-replaceable fan tray.
The FAN3T8 houses three variable-speed fans and a controller, which communicates with
the FLC to control the FAN speed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 Basic components
The following information describes the basic components and cards associated with
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelves. This includes
hardware components needed to support basic operation of the shelf, but not associated
with specific WDM network configurations.
Slot equipage requirement
All slots in the shelf must be occupied with circuit packs or blanks, and all packs must be
fully inserted into the shelf to maintain proper air flow. The shelf must not have an empty
slot. Empty slots or partially inserted cards will decrease air flow across installed circuit
packs and will decrease their cooling. Circuit packs could potentially be subject to failure
as their temperatures increases.
Card installation caution
When a circuit pack is inserted into an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16, the system will
automatically determine if a FPGA software upgrade is required. If a FPGA software
upgrade is required, the system will automatically initiate the upgrade on the circuit pack.
If the circuit pack is removed before the upgrade is completed, it will result in the pack
becoming inoperable.
Equipment controller (EC)
The Equipment Controller on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16 shelves
provides all node and shelf control and management functions. The functions performed
by the EC depend in which shelf it resides.
The first active EO shelf is the “master” shelf. The EC in the master shelf is the master
EC, and it provides the LAN interfaces to external management systems and sub-tending
shelves. The EC maintains the persistent database and configures all shelves and packs in
the NE accordingly, and it also monitors their health.
An EC in a sub-tending shelf is called a sub-tending EC, which coordinates all
communication within its shelf and communicates fault and performance data back to the
master EC. Flash cards (required) in subtending EC's will be automatically upgraded
along with the master when software upgrades are performed. (See the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.6.50 and
3.6.51 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for upgrade details.)
Management connectivity between shelves is done via Ethernet ports on the ECs or
PSS-36 MTC. Refer to Figure 2-58, “Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-36 NE connectivity”
(p. 2-107) for an illustration of 1830 PSS-36 connectivity, Figure 2-59, “Sample
multi-shelf 1830 PSS-32 NE connectivity” (p. 2-108) for an illustration of 1830 PSS-32
connectivity, and Figure 2-60, “Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-16/32 NE connectivity”
(p. 2-109) for an illustration of 1830 PSS-16 connectivity. Configurations for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 are supported for 1, or zero sub-shelves. Configurations with
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 as the main shelf and one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 sub-shelves are also supported. However, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 as a
subshelf is not supported
Figure 2-58 Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-36 NE connectivity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-59 Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-32 NE connectivity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-60 Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-16/32 NE connectivity
Note: Currently, 1830 PSS-16 only supports use as a master shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power filters (PFDCxx)
The shelf supports optionally redundant DC power filters, which terminate the -48VDC /
-60VDC power feeders from the office power supply and provides the requisite DC/DC
conversion and power filtering for the shelf. Each PF is capable of sustaining the entire
load of the system.
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, power filters come in 20A, 30A, 50A, 60A, and 70A
sizes (PFDC20, PFDC30, PFDC50, PFDC60, and PFDC70, respectively). The power
supplies are available with, or without, voltage monitoring ports. Power filters with input
power monitoring are compatible with the power filters of the same size without input
power monitoring. There is also a cost-optimized 20A power filter (PFDCA) that does not
include a circuit breaker or WaveLength Tracker capability.
For the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 20A (PFDC20K) and 35A (PFDC35K) power filters
are available.
Power filters for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 must be installed in the platform for which they are
designated. They cannot be installed interchangeably between platforms.
User interface panel (USRPNL)
The User Interface Panel provides craft access, extra LAN connections, the VoIP
orderwire, housekeeping inputs/outputs, rack alarm/lamp outputs, system status
indicators, lamp test, and audible alarm cut-off push buttons. It mounts into the master
shelf, but it is not used by the sub-tending shelves (if any).
Note: A management LAN port on the USRPNL and the device to which it is
connected must both be configured in the same way, either with a fixed speed/duplex
setting for both, or auto/auto for both. If the management LAN port is configured as
auto/auto and the device at the other end is configured to a fixed speed/duplex setting,
the management LAN port will default to half duplex operation.
Note: User Interface Panels for the 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16 are not
interchangeable.
Fan (FAN)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is cooled by an in-service, field-replaceable fan tray.
The FAN houses three variable-speed fans and a controller, which communicates with the
EC to control the FAN speed. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 uses a similar FAN unit
with five fans.
Common 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 wired equipment

The following information describes wired equipment that is available to support the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-16 shelves.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber storage tray (FST)
The Fiber Storage Tray is rack-mountable and is used for managing excess cable lengths
within the boundaries of the rack.
DCM shelf (DCMSHFxx)
The DCM shelf is a rack-mountable tray used for holding multiple DCM modules. There
is one version that is mountable in 19-inch racks (DCMSHF19) and one in ETSI and
ANSI (23-inch) racks (DCMSHF23). The number of DCMs that a shelf can house
depends on the rack type and DCM type (length).
Attenuator drawer (ATTNDRW)
The attenuator drawer is a 1 RU-high rack-mountable tray for storage of up to 24
attenuators of any size, if/when attenuators are needed for FOADM nodes.
Flex shelf (FLEXxxxx)
The Flex Shelf is a mounting kit with cover that accepts the rack-mountable SFD44,
DCMSHFxx, ATTNHDRW, ITLB, and FST. It occupies 6 RU of rack space (10.5 in.
[266.7mm]), and comes in three variants: FLEX19 for 19-inch racks, FLEX23 for 23-inch
racks, and FLEXETSI for 300-mm ETSI racks.
Card list
Table 2-11 Card list
Acronym Description Variants Size

Optical filters
SFD5x Static Filter DWDM 8: x=A, B, C, D, E, F, Single-width,
5 channel G, H half-height
SFD8x Static Filter DWDM 4: x=A, B, C, D Single-width,
8 channel full-height
SFC4x Static Filter CWDM 2: x=A, B Single-width,
4 Channel half-height
SFC2x Static Filter CWDM 4: x=A, B, C, D Single-width,
SFC4x Static Filter CWDM 2: x=A, B Single-width,
SFC8 Static Filter CWDM 1 Single-width, full
8 Channel height
SFD40 (even 40 Channel Optical 2 Rack-mounted, 1 RU
channels) Mux/Demux height
SFD40B (odd
channels)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-11 Card list (continued)

SFD44 (even 44 Channel Optical 2 Rack-mounted, 2 RU
channels) Mux/Demux height
SFD44B (odd
channels)
ITLB 88-channel interleave 1 —
card for SFD40,
SFD44 & SFD40B,
SFD44B
ITLU Unidirectional 1 —
interleaver card
CWR8 (or CWR8B) 8 Channel Colorless 1 Double-width, full
Wavelength Router height
CWR8-88 Colorless Wavelength 1 Double-width, full
Router with height
88-channel, 50GHz
spacing
WR8-88A 8 Channel 1 Double-width, full
Wavelength Router height
Card with Add-Side
9x1 WSS Supporting
50GHz Channel
Spacing
MESH4 1x4 Mesh Extension 1 Single-width, full
Pack (External height
Coupler Card)
WTOCM Wavelength Tracker 1 Single-width, half
Optical Channel height
Monitoring Card
Amplifiers
ALPHG Low Power High 1 Single-width, full
Gain DWDM height
Amplifier with
mid-stage access
AHPHG High Power High 1 Single-width, full
Gain DWDM height
Amplifier with
mid-stage access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AHPLG High Power Low 1 Single-width, full
Gain DWDM height
Amplifier with
mid-stage access
ALPFGT Low Power Fixed 1 Single-width, half
Gain Amplifier Total height
Power with mid-stage
access
AM2125A Variable gain 1 Single-width, full
amplifier with DCM height
access
AM2125B Variable gain 1 Single-width, full
amplifier with no height
DCM access
AM2318A Low variable gain 1 Single-width, full
amplifier with no height
DCM access
A2325A Amplifier, 23dB 1 Single-width, full
power, variable gain, height
C-band, with
mid-stage access
RA2P Raman amplifier, 2 1 Single-width, full
pumps height
Dispersion compensation modules
DMSMFxxx DCM single-mode 14: xxx=010, 020, —
fiber (C-band G.652) 030, 040, 050, 060,
070, 080, 090, 100,
100, 120, 130, 140
DMTWRxxx DCM True Wave 6: xxx=020, 040, 060, —
Reduced Slope fiber 080, 100, 120
(C-band)
DMLEFxxx DCM Expanded 6: xxx=020, 040, 060, —
Large Effective Area 080, 100, 120
fiber (ELEAF -
C-band)
Optical transponders and associated cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11STAR1 11G Single Port 1 Single-width,
Tunable AnyRate (1 half-height
client)
11STMM10 11G Single Port 1 Single-width, full
Tunable Multirate height
Mux (10 universal
clients)
11STGE12 11G Single Port 1 Single-width,
Tunable GBE Mux full-height
(12 client)
11QPA4(A) 11G Quad Port 1 Single-width,
Tunable AnyRate 4 full-height
Client Transponder
11DPE12(E) 11G Dual Port 1 Single-width,
Pluggable 12xGbE full-height
OT
11DPM12 11G Dual Port 1 Single-width,
Pluggable MultiRate full-height
MUX OT
4DPA2 4G Dual Port 1 single-width,
Pluggable AnyRate (2 half-height
clients)
4DPA4 4G Dual Port 1 single-width,
Pluggable AnyRate (4 half-height
clients)
43STX4 43G Single Tunable 1 Triple-width,
MUX OT with DPSK full-height
modulation
43SCA1 43G single Port 1 Triple-width,
Tunable AnyRate full-height
Coherent (1 client)
A/D OT
43STX4P 43G Single Tunable 1 Triple-width,
MUX OT with full-height
PDPSK modulation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

43STA1P 40G Single Port 1 Triple-width, full
Tunable Anyrate (1 height
client) - optimized for
44 channels C-band,
PDPSK
43STA1PB 40G Single Port 1 Triple-width, full
Tunable Anyrate (1 height
client) - optimized for
44 channels C-band,
PDPSK
112SCX10 100G Single port 1 Triple-width, full
tunable mux (10 height
universal clients),
coherent
112SNX10 100G Single port 1 Triple-width, full
tunable mux (10 height
universal clients),
coherent, w/Enhanced
OSNR for extended
reach
112SCA1 100G anyrate A/D, 1 Triple-width, full
Coherent height
112SNA1 112G Single Port 1 Triple-width, full
Tunable Coherent height
AnyRate Transponder
w/enhanced OSNR (1
client) for extended
reach
OSCT Optical Supervisory 1 Single-width,
Card Total Power half-height
OPSA Enhanced Optical 1 Single-width,
Protection Switch half-height
Pack
SVAC Single Port Variable 1 Single-width,
Attenuator Card half-height
MVAC Multiple Variable 1 Single-width,
Attenuator Card half-height
Keyed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wired equipment
EC Equipment controller 1 1 EC slot
(PSS-32/16)
FLC First level controller 1 Single-width,
half-height (in
PSS-36 controller
slot)
BTC Bus termination card 1 1 BTC slot (PSS-36)
MT0C Null fabric module 1 Single-width,
full-height (in PSS-36
reserved slot)
FAN Fan 2 (1 each - PSS-32 1 FAN slot
and PSS-16)
PFDCxx Power Filter 4(PSS-32): x=20, 30, 1 PF slot
50, 60, 70
1(PSS-16): x=20, 35
PFC Power Filter 1 1 PSS-36 PF slot
USRPNL User Interface Panel 2 (1 each - PSS-32 1 USRPNL slot
and PSS-16)
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 hardware application

The following table describes the applications for each card that have been validated and
is supported by the NE, EPT, and PhM.
Table 2-12 Supported 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 card applications
Card Function PSS-36 PSS-32 PSS-161 TOADM, ROADM,

AnyDir,
DFOADM,
CFOADM
11DPE12 11G Dual Port Pluggable GBE Y Y Y All
Mux (12 client)
11DPE12E 11G Dual Port Pluggable GBE NR/NP Y Y All
Mux, enhanced (12 client)
11DPM12 11G Dual Pluggable 12-anyrate NR/NP Y Y All
Mux OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

AnyDir,
DFOADM,
CFOADM
11QPA4 11G Quad Port Pluggable Y Y Y All
Anyrate (4 clients)
11QPA4A 11G Quad Port Pluggable Y Y Y All
Anyrate HARDENED (4 clients)
11STAR1 11G Single Port Tunable Y Y Y All
AnyRate Transponder (1 client)
11STGE12 11G Single Port Tunable GBE Y Y Y TOADM,
Mux Transponder (12 clients) ROADM, AnyDir,
DFOADM
11STMM10 11G Single Port Tunable Y Y Y TOADM,
Multirate Mux Transponder (10 ROADM, AnyDir,
universal clients) DFOADM
43STA1P 43G Single Port Tunable Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
AnyRate (1 client) with PDPSK ROADM, AnyDir,
modulation DFOADM
43SCA1 43G Single Port Tunable Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
Coherent AnyRate Transponder ROADM, AnyDir,
(1 client) DFOADM
43STX4 43G Single Port Tunable Mux (4 NR/NP Y NR/NP TOADM,
clients) ROADM, AnyDir,
DFOADM
43STX4P 43G Single Port Tunable Mux (4 Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
clients) with PDPSK modulation ROADM, AnyDir,
DFOADM
43SCX4 43G Single Port Tunable Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
Coherent Mux Transponder (4 ROADM, AnyDir,
clients) DFOADM
4DPA2 4G Dual Port Pluggable AnyRate NR/NP Y Y DFOADM,
(2 clients) CFOADM
4DPA4 4G Dual Port Pluggable AnyRate NR/NP Y Y All
(4 clients)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

AnyDir,
DFOADM,
CFOADM
112SCA1 112G Single Port Tunable Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
(1 client) DFOADM
112SNA1 112G Single Port Tunable Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
w/enhanced OSNR (1 client) for DFOADM
extended reach
112SCX10 100G Single port tunable mux Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
(10 universal clients), coherent ROADM, AnyDir,
DFOADM
112SNX10 100G Single port tunable mux Y Y NR/NP TOADM,
(10 universal clients), coherent, ROADM, AnyDir,
w/Enhanced OSNR for extended DFOADM
reach
AHPHG High Power High Gain Amp Y Y Y3 TOADM,
with mid-stage access ROADM, AnyDir,
AHPLG High Power Low Gain Amp with DFOADM
mid-stage access
A2325A 23dB Variable Gain Amp with
mid-stage access
ALPHG Low Power High Gain Amp with NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
mid-stage access ROADM,
DFOADM
AM2318A +23 dBm output power, 18 dB NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
gain optical amplifier with no ROADM, AnyDir
mid-stage access
AM2125A +21 dBm output power, 25 dB NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
gain optical amplifier with ROADM
mid-stage access
AM2125B +21 dBm output power, 25 dB
gain optical amplifier without
mid-stage access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

AnyDir,
DFOADM,
CFOADM
ALPFGT Low Power Fixed Gain Amp NR/NP Y Y DFOADM
Total Power with mid-stage
access
RA2P Raman Amplifier, 2 pumps Y Y Y TOADM,
ROADM, AnyDir,
DFOADM
CWR8 (or 8 channel Colorless Wavelength NR/NP Y NR/NP TOADM
CWR8B) Router (44 channel)
CWR8-88 8 channel Colorless Wavelength Y Y NR/NP TOADM, AnyDir
Router (88 channel)
WR8-88A 8-degree Wavelength Router, 88 Y Y NR/NP ROADM, AnyDir
channel
MESH4 1x4 Splitter card with optical Y Y Y ROADM, AnyDir
amplifier
EC Equipment Controller N Y Y All
FLC First Level Controller Y N N All
FAN Fan Subsystem Y Y Y All
ITLB Interleaver Card Y Y N TOADM,
DFOADM
ITLU4 Unidirectional Interleaver Card N N N TOADM,
DFOADM
OPSA Bidirectional Optical Protection Y Y Y TOADM,
Switch2 ROADM,
DFOADM
PFDC20 Power Filter N Y N All
PFDC30
PFDC50
PFDC60
PFDC70
PFDC20K Power Filter N N Y All
PFDC35K
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(continued)

AnyDir,
DFOADM,
CFOADM
PFDCA Power Filter Y N N All
WTOCM Wavelength Tracker Enhanced Y Y Y TOADM,
w/OCM (optical channel ROADM, AnyDir,
monitoring) DFOADM
OSCT Optical Supervisory Card Total NR/NP Y Y DFOADM
Power
SVAC Single port Variable Attenuator NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
Card ROADM,
DFOADM
MVAC Single port Variable Attenuator NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
card ROADM,
DFOADM
SFC2 2 channel static CWDM filter NR/NP Y Y CFOADM
SFD5 5 channel static DWDM filter NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
ROADM,
DFOADM
SFD8 8 channel static DWDM filter NR/NP Y Y TOADM,
ROADM,
DFOADM
SFD40 40 channel static DWDM filter, Y Y Y DFOADM
even channels
SFD40B 40 channel static DWDM filter, Y Y Y DFOADM
odd channels
SFD44 44 channel static DWDM filter, Y Y Y TOADM,
even channels DFOADM
SFD44B 44 channel static DWDM filter, Y Y Y TOADM,
odd channels DFOADM
USRPNL User Interface Panel Y Y All
BTC Bus Termination Card Y N N All
MT0C Matrix Zero Card Y N N All
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. Cards marked NR/NP are not required in configurations on the designated shelf, but are not precluded by
software, and , not supported by EPT and SVT.
2. OPSA not allowed with unkeyed services.
3. Supported only for ILA configurations on 1830 PSS-16
4. Mounted in external shelf
Example shelf configurations

Figure 2-61, “Example TOADM shelf configuration” (p. 2-121) shows examples of 2-
and 4-degree TOADM shelf configurations. As slot assignments are fully flexible (other
than EC and PF), other configurations are equally valid. Unassigned slots are used for
growth cards, e.g., transponders and static filters.
Figure 2-61 Example TOADM shelf configuration
A ROADM starts with the TOADM configuration and adds static filters, either
SFD5/SFD8 filters into the shelf and/or SFD40/SFD44 filters miscellaneously mounted in
the rack.
A FOADM would not have any CWR8/CWR8-88/WR8-88A cards. It would only have
either SFD5/SFD8 filters in the shelf and/or SFD40/SFD44 filters miscellaneously
mounted in the rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In all cases, once the first shelf is filled, additional sub-tending shelves are added as
needed.
A special case is a transponder-only node that does not have any optical amplifiers or
filters. This configuration is used when Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS transponders are used in
conjunction with an existing and compatible DWDM line system, e.g., the Alcatel-Lucent
1696 ROADM.
Compliance
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 complies with the follow regulatory standards for
Environmental, Safety, EMC, ESD, and Hazardous Substances
North America Region:
• Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 “Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical
Safety - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment”
• Telecordia GR-63-CORE, Issue 3 “NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection.
• CSA Certified (US and Canadian) UL 60950-1, Second Edition / CSA C22.2 No.
60950-1-07, Second Edition, “Information Technology Equipment – Safety – Part 1 :
Generic Requirements”
• 21 CFR 1040.10, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Performance Standards for
Light Emitting Products”
• 21 CFR 1040.11, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Specific Purpose Laser
Products”
• FCC Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47 – Telecommunications, Part 15 – “Radio
Frequency Devices”, Class A
• ICES-003, Issue 4 ”Industry Canada Spectrum Management and Telecommunications
Policy, “Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus”, Class A
European Market:
• Directive 2004/108/EC, “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)”
• Directive 2006/95/EC, “Low Voltage Electrical Equipment”
• Directive 93/465/EEC, “CE Marking Directive”
• IEC 60950-1:2005 (2nd Edition) / EN 60950-1:2006 “Information Technology
Equipment – Safety – Part 1 : Generic Requirements”
• EN 60825-1: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements, and Users Guide”
• EN 60825-2: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber
Communication Systems”
• EN 300 386 “Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
requirements”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• EN 55022: "Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics -
Limits and methods of measurement". Class A
• ETSI ES 201 468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Additional Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific
applications
• EN 300 019 2-1 Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment; Part 2-1: Specification Of
Environmental Tests; Storage
• EN 300 019 2-2: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-2: Specification Of
Environmental Tests; Transportation
• EN 300 019 2-3: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-3: Specification Of
Environmental Tests - Stationary Use At Weather Protected Locations
• ETS 300 753: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Acoustic Noise Emitted By
Telecommunications Equipment
Operation, administration, and maintenance

Management interfaces
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE supports a range of management interfaces.
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system supports the following SNMP functions.
• Provisioning interface for all equipment and parameters via SNMPv3.
• Reporting of all alarms/traps and ability to define trap destination.
Transaction language 1 (TL1)
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system supports a TL1 command interface for all
provisioning, reporting, and alarming.
Web GUI interface
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network element (NE) includes a web server so that
craft can manage an NE from any Windows-based PC with a web browser, without the
need for any other special software. Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0, or 8.0 updated to the most
recent patch level, and Mozilla FireFox 3.6.13 or later are supported.
Command line interface (CLI)
A CLI supports all 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system functionality.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Operation, administration, and maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The CLI should not be used for configuration if the network is managed by
GMPLS using 1350 OMS.
Gateway network element (GNE)

The network management system can manage an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network
while only connecting to a single NE. That NE is called a GNE and provides the
management connectivity to all other 1830 PSS-36, 1830 PSS-32, and 1830 PSS-16 NEs
in the network.
Optical supervisory channel (OSC) inter-node communication

The OSC is a separate optical channel, operating at the STM-1/OC-3 rate of 155 Mb/s,
that transfers management and control information between the ECs of two adjacent
nodes, regardless of whether any of the DWDM payload channels are terminated between
those two nodes. The channel is capable of transporting both IP and OSI PDUs.
General communications channel (GCC) inter-node communication

OSC is not available in CWDM transmission, so the GCC is used for inter-node
communication.
GCC0
All OT packs with a OTUk signal interface terminate the OTUk GCC0 channel.
When the GCC0 channel is disabled, communication information is not transmitted over
the GCC0 channel. In the transmitting direction, the GCC0 bytes are set to all zeros, and
in the receiving direction, the GCC0 is ignored and the GCC data link is disabled.
GCC1/GCC2
Two types of COMMS functions are defined for the communication channel within
ODUk layer:
• ODUkp Termination Mode: The GCC1/GCC2 overhead is inserted/extracted at the
ODUkp access point. This function is applied to OT’s Line port with OTUk interface
carrying the CBR/Ethernet clients.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This mode is applied to the following OT ports:

– 11QPA4(A) Line Port with non-OTU2 Client Signal (OC-192, 10GbE, 10GFC)
– 11STAR1 Line Port with non-OTU2 Client Signal (OC-192, 10GbE, 10GFC)
– 43STX4(p) Line Port with all types of client signals
– 43STA1P(B) Line Port with OC-768 Client
– 11DMM12 Line Port with all types of client signals
– 11DPE12E Line Port with all types of client signals
• ODUk Regeneraion Mode: The GCC1/GCC2 overhead is inserted/extracted at the
connection point of one ODUk with another ODUk. This function is applied to the
OT’s Line/Client port with the interface in the configuration of the OTUk
regeneration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The GCC functions in OTUk regeneration model are applied to the following OT
ports:
– 11QPA4(A) Line/Client Port with OTU2 Client Signal
– 11QPA4(A) (Line Port) in Cross-Regen mode
– 11STAR1 Line/Client Port with OTU2 Client Signal
– 43STA1P Line Port with OTU3 Client
– 11DMM12 Client Port with OTU1 Client
– 11STMM12 Client Port with OTU1 Client
GCC0/GCC1/GCC2 provisioning
The following OTs shall support GCC0/GCC1/GCC2 type provision:
• 11STAR1 Line/Client Port
• 11QPA4(A) Client/Line Port
• 11DPE12E Line Port
• 11DPM12 Line/Client Port
• 43STX4P Line /Client Port
• 43STA1P Line/Client Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Management resiliency
Duplex equipment controllers
An 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 node can be provisioned with a single EC or with
duplex EC for 1+1 redundancy. In the latter case, an EC failure will cause an automatic
protection switch to the backup EC. In either case, an EC failure does not affect
transmission or service availability.
This same type of management resiliency with FLCs on the 1830 PSS-36 will be
supported in future releases. In R3.6 redundant FLC equipage of the 1830 PSS-36 is
supported.
Multiple gateway NEs
More than one NE in an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network can be designated to be a
GNE. In this way, management connectivity can be maintained in the event of DCN
and/or 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE failures.
Redundant optical supervisory channel
For ring and collapsed ring topologies, OSC communications to all nodes will be
maintained in the event of a fiber break on any single span.
Performance monitoring
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports Performance Monitoring on 100 percent of all
points of termination and adaptation on the boundaries of the system and between
subsystems.
Optical PM
The system supports the monitoring and reporting of received and transmitted optical
power on client and DWDM line-side interfaces.
OTN
The line signal is G.709-framed and the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 monitors the
section and path performance parameters shown in Table 2-13, “OTN performance
monitoring” (p. 2-127).
Table 2-13 OTN performance monitoring
PM parameter Section Path

Errored seconds (ES) Yes Yes
Severely errored seconds Yes Yes
(SES)
Unavailable (UAS) Yes Yes
Background block errors Yes Yes
(BBE)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-13 OTN performance monitoring (continued)
PM parameter Section Path

FEC: corrected bits Yes NA
FEC: uncorrected bytes Yes NA
Performance monitoring complies to ITU-T G.874 and G.798.

SDH/SONET client
The B1 and B2 overhead bytes are monitored. There are counters for code violations
(CV), ES, SES, and severely errored framing seconds (SEFS).
Ethernet client
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports the non-intrusive monitoring of Ethernet per
RFC-2819, including ingress counters for CV, valid bytes and valid frames, and a wide
array of RMON performance monitoring statistics.
Fibre channel client
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 counts ingress code violations.
Optical supervisory channel digital PMs
The system supports the monitoring and reporting of these OSC PMs: CV and BBE.
Fault management
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 is provisionable on a per-port basis to detect/process,
and report faults, failures, and performance. It is able to diagnosis equipment faults down
to a field replaceable unit (FRU) or interface. Transport fault processing is performed as
defined in G.783 and EN 300 417. The system allows provisioning for the
SONET-specific LOS/LOF handling to satisfy Telcordia GR-253 issue 3 (2000) and
ANSI T1.231.
There is one system default alarm profile that contains all alarms/conditions supported in
the system and their severity: Critical, Major, Minor. The user can change the severity of
alarms on each port/facility independently or point to the system profile. The system
profile can be modified or reset to factory defaults
Optical line
Optical line fault processing is supported.
OTN
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 complies to G.709 for defect/fault processing of
OTUk/ODUk overhead at all OTUk/ODUk interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following is a short summary of the main functions of the OTN.
• Loss of frame (LOF) detected, causes signal fail (SF) condition and Alarm Insertion
Signal (AIS) insertion.
• Source and Destination Access Point Identifiers (SAPI and DAPI) are monitored.
When trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) is detected, it causes a signal fail (SF)
condition and AIS insertion.
• Bit-interleaved parity (BIP-8) is inserted at the source. When parity violations are
detected, indicating that the signal has degraded, a backward error indication (BEI) is
inserted on the return to the source.
• The OTN checks for error conditions and inserts the following when appropriate: AIS,
Incoming Alignment Error (IAE), Backward Incoming Alignment Error Indication
(BIAE), and Backward Defect Information (BDI).
SDH/SONET
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 complies to G.707 and GR-253 for defect/fault
processing at all STM-n/VC-m and OC-n/STS-m interfaces, respectively. For transparent
transport of these client signals, the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports non-intrusive
monitoring in the source and sink directions.
The following is a short summary of the main functions.
• A1, A2 bytes monitored; LOF declared when appropriate
• B1, B3 bytes monitored; degraded signal conditions declared when appropriate
• J0 byte monitored; TIM and SF declared when appropriate
Customer LAN
A customer-usable virtual LAN is supported, whereby the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
network transports operator traffic between any NEs, via an Ethernet port (specifically the
VoIP jack on USRPNL). This traffic is carried over the OSC.
Customer LAN includes the following capabilities and behaviors.
• Enabled by default
• Disabled when OSC is configured as 100base-FX
• Auto-negotiation for 10/100 speed
• MDI/X auto-sensing and duplex (half/full)
• When OSC is working in OC3 mode (155Mbps):
– The upper bitrate limit is 80Mbps
– The upper limit for Unidirectional path switched ring (USPR) traffic is 20Mbps
– The VoIP port can be used as a 10BASE-T interface
• Transport of externally tagged packets
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Currently, Customer LAN has the following limitations.
• Not functional (disabled) when OSC mode is configured as 100base-FX (100Mbps)
• QoS to guarantee traffic quality is not currently supported
• Alarm and performance monitoring at the Customer LAN port not currently
supported, including port status (up/down)
• Ability to prioritize the Customer LAN port differently from USPR traffic is not
currently supported
DWDM topologies
DWDM topology overview
The supports an almost unlimited number of DWDM network configurations and
combined network configurations. Some of these configurations are listed below. For
more detailed information, refer to Chapter 3, “Topologies and configurations”. The
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 is targeted primarily for FOADM applications.
• Simple point-to-point and linear topology with optical add-drop
• Ring topology with optical add-drop
• Transparent ring interconnection using multi-degree nodes with local add-drop
• Additional mesh networking, e.g., in dual-node ring interconnection.
In these networks, each of the nodes can be FOADM, ROADM, or TOADM, although
the multi-degree nodes that perform ring interconnection would normally be ROADM or
TOADM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features DWDM topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples of these topologies are shown in Figure 2-62, “Example: DWDM networks for
FOADM, ROADM, and TOADM” (p. 2-131).
Figure 2-62 Example: DWDM networks for FOADM, ROADM, and TOADM
From such networks, spurs and dual-homed nodes can be added, as shown in Figure 2-63,
“Spurs and dual-homed nodes” (p. 2-132).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features DWDM topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In these cases there is no need for reconfigurability at the access node, so typically
FOADMs are deployed.
Figure 2-63 Spurs and dual-homed nodes
Ethernet EPL and EVPL services

EPL/EVPL overview
EPL service is the most popular service provided by the transport network due to its
simplicity. With EPL, each Ethernet port can only contain a single Ethernet Virtual
Connection (EVC). This type of service interconnects two Ethernet interfaces and
generally provides fully transparent transport of customer frames.
EVPL service allows multiple EVCs within each Ethernet port. With EVPL, multiple
Ethernet services can be multiplexed to a single port. VLAN IDs are generally used to
distinguish between different services within the same port.
In 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16, the 11DPE12(E) and 11STGE12 support both the
standard EPL and EVPL services, as illustrated in Figure 2-64, “EPL and EVPL services”
(p. 2-133).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Features Ethernet EPL and EVPL services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-64 EPL and EVPL services
EVPL tagging (HiGig and Q-in-Q)

A proprietary HiGig tagging method, initially supported on 1830 PSS shelves, has been
supplemented with the addition of support for Q-in-Q tagging, compliant with MEF 6.1.
The frame formats supported by these two methods of tagging are shown in the following
illustration.
Figure 2-65 HiGig vs. Q-in-Q frame formats
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Higig header uses 1-byte for Start of Frame and 11 bytes for proprietary S-VLAN
Management. It also differs from the Q-in-Q frame in the following ways:
• Different usage of Preamble bytes
• Different usage of CRC bytes
Q-in-Q uses CRC to protect frame bytes excluding Preamble. Higig uses CRC to
protect all frame bytes.
• Uses the Port-ID value embedded in HiGig Header instead of the S-VLAN Tag
• Has a short IPG (8 Bytes vs. standard 12 Bytes)
• Higig supports Port ID value of 0~31 vs. S-VLAN Tag value of 0~4095
HiGig and Q-in-Q advantages
HiGig tagging has a higher data transport efficiency than Q-in-Q at the same line bit rate.
It supports Full Rate GbE Service at 10 xGbE signal flow per Line Port, and Sub Rate
GbE Service at 32 xGbE signal flow per Line Port.
Q-in-Q can have advantages over HiGig in the following applications:
• When NNI interconnection applications require the standard Q-in-Q interface
• It is well supported by ITU/IEEE Ethernet OAM , and protection standards.
Q-in-Q application scenario
The 11DPE12(E) OT can aggregate the GbE traffic within an 1830 PSS-32 network, and
send it to 10GbE Routers/Switches with 10GbE interfaces, processing the GbE packets
based on Q-in-Q switching. This scenario is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 2-66 Interworking with 10GbE Router/Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this application all the 11DPE12(E) cards along the service path must use Q-in-Q
tagging mode. HiGig tagging is not allowed in any part of the service path. The
11DPE12(E) cards switch the packets based on the Q-in-Q tag. The tag is added by
11DPE12(E) companions or directly by the 10GbE switch. The preferred Line interface is
OTU2 format for 1830 PSS-32 internal interconnections, and 10GbE format for
interworking with 10GbE router.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
3 3opologies and
T
configurations
Overview
Purpose
This chapter identifies 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network topologies and
configurations. Interconnect between 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1 Edge Devices is also highlighted. For topologies and configurations that are
specific to the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Devices, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide, and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.8.0 MD4H Edge
Device User Guide.
Contents
Network topology overview 3-2

Network elements 3-5
TOADM configurations 3-8
ROADM configurations 3-16
40G and 100G OT regeneration configurations 3-22
Anydirection configurations 3-23
FOADM configurations 3-42
In-line amplifier (ILA) 3-53
TOADM networks 3-57
FOADM networks 3-64
Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies 3-67
Inventory configurations 3-68
Variable Attenuator Cards in OADM configurations 3-73
Long Haul Wavelength Tracker (WTOCM) configurations 3-76
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Single-fiber bi-directional nodes 3-86

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH networks 3-87
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 3-89
networks
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 and Alcatel-Lucent 1696 networks 3-92
DWDM extended link configurations 3-104
Network topology overview

background
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network consists of single, standalone network element
(NE), or two or more interconnected network elements that provide SDH/SONET/GigE
aggregation and transport, 10G, FC, or transponderless wavelength services in a
metropolitan, regional, or long-haul networking environment. The following high-level
schematics illustrate the types of configurations that are supported by 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16.
Linear configuration
Figure 3-1, “Linear network configuration” (p. 3-2) shows network elements connected in
a linear fashion. While protection may be added by providing working and protection
fiber pairs between network elements, a cut in the fiber conduit used to connect two
network elements (assuming the working and protection fibers share the same conduit)
would isolate one or more network elements. This configuration is also bandwidth
limiting, since intermediate network elements must carry extensive pass-through traffic.
Figure 3-1 Linear network configuration
Ring configuration
Figure 3-2, “Ring network configuration” (p. 3-3) shows network elements connected in a
ring. This configuration assures that in the case of a fiber cut, traffic can be safely
rerouted. However, in the case of a fiber cut, the ring configuration effectively becomes a
point-to-point linear configuration, with all of its inherent limitations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Network topology overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 Ring network configuration
Interconnected rings
In order to pass traffic between two or more rings, the rings can be connected using a
multi-degree NE that is capable of passing traffic around each of the rings and between
the two rings, as illustrated in Figure 3-3, “Interconnected ring network configuration”
(p. 3-4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 Interconnected ring network configuration
Mesh configuration
A mesh network contains at least one network element that provides more than two
degrees of connectivity to other NEs in the network. For example, in the network
illustrated in Figure 3-4, “Mesh network configuration” (p. 3-5), NEs 2, 3, 5, and 6 , each
connect to four different network fibers, and provide four degrees of network
connectivity. Because they provide multiple links and data paths between NEs, mesh
networks are highly resilient.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 Mesh network configuration
Network elements
Introduction
The network element (NE) is the basic building block for a network. Networks can
comprise hundreds of network elements
Each NE consists of a single shelf, or two or more interconnected shelves that are
equipped with the service cards required to provide network services. An NE, whether it
consists of one or more 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves, is viewed as a single entity
by the network management system.
Transmission between NEs

Within the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network, data is carried between the NEs over
optical fiber pairs as a single wavelength, or as multiple wavelengths, using wavelength
division multiplexing (WDM). Because WDM allows you to transmit several signals over
a single fiber pair, efficient use of the optical fiber plant is ensured.
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports dense wavelength division multiplexing
(DWDM) which allows you to carry up to 44 or 88 channels over a single fiber pair.
Operation at 100Ghz spacing supports up to 44 channels and filters as described in Table
8-29, “DWDM wavelengths (100-GHz spacing)” (p. 8-51). Operation at 50Ghz spacing
supports up to 88 channels as shown in Table 8-30, “DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz
spacing)” (p. 8-52). Operation for 88 channels at 50Ghz spacing is supported on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 by the SFD44 in combination with the SFD44B, ITLB, and
CWR8-88. Operation for 80 channels at 50Ghz spacing is supported on the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 by the SFD40 in combination with the SFD40B, ITLB, and
CWR8-88. 50GHz offset wavelengths from the SFD44B/SFD40B, designated “odd,” are
combined with “even” wavelengths from the SFD44/SFD40 through the ITLB interleaver
and then can be fibered to the CWR8-88.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Network elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM), which allows you to carry up to eight
channels over a single fiber pair, is also supported on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 as described in Table 3-2, “CWDM wavelengths and filters”
(p. 3-8).
Table 3-1 DWDM wavelengths and filters (100Ghz spacing)
44 λ 10 λ 5λ ITU Freq. Wave- Port SFD5 SFD8 SFD44 CWR8

Ch. # (THz) length Label
(nm)
17 191.7 1563.86 9170 SFD44
18 191.8 1563.05 9180

L2 L21 19 191.9 1562.23 9190 SFD5A
20 192.0 1561.42 9200 SFD8A
21 192.1 1560.61 9210
22 192.2 1559.79 9220

23 192.3 1558.98 9230
L22 24 192.4 1558.17 9240 SFD5B
25 192.5 1557.36 9250 SFD8A
26 192.6 1556.55 9260
27 192.7 1555.75 9270
28 192.8 1554.94 9280
L1 L11 29 192.9 1554.13 9290 SFD5C

30 193.0 1553.33 9300 SFD8B
31 193.1 1552.52 9310

32 193.2 1551.72 9320
33 193.3 1550.92 9330
L12 34 193.4 1550.12 9340 SFD5D

35 193.5 1549.32 9350 SFD8B
36 193.6 1548.51 9360
37 193.7 1547.72 9370
38 193.8 1546.92 9380

39 193.9 1546.12 9390
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1 DWDM wavelengths and filters (100Ghz spacing) (continued)
44 λ 10 λ 5λ ITU Freq. Wave- Port SFD5 SFD8 SFD44 CWR8

Ch. # (THz) length Label
(nm)
40 194.0 1545.32 9400 SFD44
S2 S21 41 194.1 1554.53 9410 SFD5E

42 194.2 1543.73 9420 SFD8C
43 194.3 1542.94 9430

44 194.4 1542.14 9440
45 194.5 1541.35 9450

S22 46 194.6 1540.56 9460 SFD5F
47 194.7 1539.77 9470 SFD8C

S2 S22 48 194.8 1538.98 9480 SFD5F
49 194.9 1538.19 9490
50 195.0 1537.40 9500
S1 S11 51 195.1 1536.61 9510 SFD5G
52 195.2 1535.82 9520 SFD8D

53 195.3 1535.04 9530
54 195.4 1534.25 9540

55 195.5 1533.47 9550
S2 S12 56 195.6 1532.68 9560 SFD5H
57 195.7 1531.90 9570 SFD8D
58 195.8 1531.12 9580
59 195.9 1530.33 9590
60 196.0 1529.55 9600
Notes:
1. 88-channel 50GHz spacing, supported by the SFD44 in combination with the SFD44B, is
detailed in Table 8-30, “DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz spacing)” (p. 8-52).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2 CWDM wavelengths and filters
Label Center SFC1 SFC2 SFC4 SFC8

Wave-
length (nm)
1471 1471 E-SFC1A SFC2A& SFC4A & SFC8 &

E-SFC2A E-SFC4A E-SFC8
1491 1491 E-SFC1B
1511 1511 E-SFC1C SFC2B &
E-SFC2B
1531 1531 E-SFC1D
1551 1551 E-SFC1E SFC2C & SFC4B &
E-SFC2C E-SFC4B
1571 1571 E-SFC1F
1591 1591 E-SFC1G SFC2D &
E-SFC2D
1611 1611 E-SFC1H
TOADM configurations
Introduction
There is no specific type for a particular node, such as TOADM or In Line Amplifier
(ILA). A node's configuration is determined by its topological interconnections. A node
acts as a TOADM if CWR cards are included in its topological configuration. A node acts
as an in-line amplifier if its topological links are configured to include one or more
amplifiers with no CWR or SFD/SFC cards.
Some transponders cannot be connected directly to a CWR. These transponders require an
SFD (SFD5, SFD8, SFD40, or SFD44), inserted between the transponder and the CWR to
pre-filter the signal. Because the connection to the SFD filter does not allow wavelength
tuning, this configuration is not actually considered a TOADM configuration.
The following transponders require pre-filtering:
• 43STA1P
• 43STX4P
• 43SCX4
• 112SCA1
• 112SNA1
• 112SCX10
• 112SNX10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations TOADM configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TOADM end terminal
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 supports dense wavelength division multiplexing
(DWDM) with 100Ghz or 50Ghz channel spacing. This provides up to 44 channels at
100Ghz spacing, and up to 88 channels at 50Ghz spacing.
Multiplexing at 100Ghz spacing is supported by the SFD44 and CWR8. For 44 channel
spacing, a 1-degree TOADM can be built using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, one
CWR8, and one or two line drivers (LDs). It can be upgraded in-service to a higher
degree.
Refer to Figure 3-5, “44 channel TOADM end terminal block diagram” (p. 3-9) for an
example.
Figure 3-5 44 channel TOADM end terminal block diagram
Multiplexing at 50Ghz spacing is supported by the SFD44 in combination with the

SFD44B, ITLB, and CWR8-88. 'Offset' wavelengths from wavelengths from the SFD44B
are combined with wavelengths from the SFD44 through the ILB interleaver and then
fibered to the CWR8-88 for transmission.
The following illustrations show a configuration for 88-channel end terminal TOADM
operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 88 channel TOADM end terminal block diagram
TOADM OADM and Mesh (Degree 2+)

The TOADM OADM (degree 2) faces both the East and West directions. Some traffic
from the optical lines may be added or dropped and at least one single wavelength passed
through transparently. This configuration can be used as an optical add/drop multiplexer
in both linear and ring networks.
The TOADM OADM mesh node line (degrees 3 through 8) faces more than 2 line.
Individual channels come in from one line and may be added, dropped, or transit
transparently to any one of the other lines.
2-Degree TOADM
The basic configuration for an 8-channel, 2-degree TOADM is capable of adding and
dropping up to eight colorless CWR8/CWR8-88 (non-WDM-specific) channels per
optical line. The node can be upgraded while in-service to 44-channel or 88-channel
colored (WDM-specific) A/D and mesh.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 3-7, “44 channel 2-Degree TOADM block diagram” (p. 3-11) and Figure
3-8, “88 channel Degree 2 TOADM block diagram” (p. 3-12) for examples that depict
both directions of transmission with one and two OAs. Note that in the egress direction,
the OA is optional.
Figure 3-7 44 channel 2-Degree TOADM block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-8 88 channel Degree 2 TOADM block diagram
3-Degree TOADM mesh

For a 3-degree or greater TOADM configurations, each CWR in the through path must be
of the same type. Mesh-connected CWRs may be of different types (CWR8 or
CWR8-88). The following figure shows an example of a degree 3 TOADM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 3-9, “3-Degree TOADM block diagram with mixed CWRs” (p. 3-13) for
an example.
Figure 3-9 3-Degree TOADM block diagram with mixed CWRs
TOADM spur with regeneration

TOADM colorless or colored add/drop ports may be connected to DWDM and CWDM
spurs using OEO regeneration as shown in the following figures. The following figures
show examples of a TOADM node with DWDM and CWDM spurs. Note that the OTs
used for regeneration may be connected to the CWR CLS port or SFD port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-10 TOADM with DWDM spur and OEO regeneration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 TOADM with CWDM spur and OEO regeneration
100G OT TOADM restriction

The 100G OTs (112SCA1, 112SNA1, 112SCX10, and 112SNX10) may not be connected
to a CWR8 or CWR8-88 CLS port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations ROADM configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ROADM configurations
Introduction
The WR8-88A(F) configurations in this section are required for the 1830 PSS-32 and
PSS-36 shelves, except where noted. There are no committed WR8-88A(F) ROADM
configurations for the 1830 PSS-16 shelf. However, software does not preclude
supporting these ROADM configurations on the PSS-16.
ROADM End Terminal (Degree 1)

A ROADM end terminal (degree 1 ROADM) with a WR8-88A(F) is supported.
The following ITLU+SFD combinations are supported in the drop direction
(DROPOUT):
• ITLU+SFD44
• ITLU+SFD44B (Not required for NE with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLU+SFD44+SFD44B
The following SFD combinations are supported in the add direction (ADDIN{1-8}):
• SFD44
• SFD44B (Not required for NE with PSS-36 main shelf)
Figure 3-12 ROADM end terminal with WR8-88A(F)
ROADM OADM and Mesh (Degree 2+)

The ROADM OADM (degree 2) faces both the East and West directions. Some traffic
from the optical lines may be added or dropped and at least one single wavelength passed
through transparently. This configuration can be used as an optical add/drop multiplexer
in linear networks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ROADM OADM Mesh (degree 3 through 8) faces more than 2 line directions.
Individual channels come in from one line and may be added or dropped or transit
transparently to any one of the other lines.
The following ITLU+SFD combinations are supported in the drop direction
(DROPOUT):
• None
• ITLU+SFD44
• ITLU+SFD44B (Not required for NE with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLU+SFD44+SFD44B
The following SFD combinations are supported in the add direction (ADDIN{1-8}):
• None
• SFD44
• SFD44B (Not required for NE with PSS-36 main shelf)
Figure 3-13 Degree 2 88-channel ROADM with WR8-88A(F)
The WR8-88A(F) supports up to degree 5 mesh connections without additional mesh

cards. For this connectivity, the mesh output port (MESHOUT{1-3}) of a WR8-88A(F)
card is connected directly to the add input port (ADDIN{1-8}) of another WR8-88A(F).
Three mesh outputs are required for degree-5 connectivity. The following figure shows an
example of a degree 4 ROADM with WR8-88A(F). Note that the figures below shows
unidirectional LDs, but bidirectional LDs could be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-14 Degree 4 88-channel ROADM with WR8-88A(F)
For ROADMs greater than degree 5, MESH4 cards are needed to expand the mesh
outputs of the WR8-88A(F). The add-side provides enough connections for degree 8
mesh inputs, without additional packs. The mesh outputs of either the WR8-88A(F)
(MESHOUT{1-3}), or the MESH4 cards (SIGOUT{1-4}), are connected directly to the
add input ports (ADDIN{1-8}) of the WR8-88A(F). Six mesh outputs are required for
degree-8 connectivity. This leaves two add inputs for even and odd SFDs. To maintain the
option of a hitless increase of ROADM connectivity beyond degree 5, the MESH4 card
must be added for degree 5 connectivity. The following figure shows an example of a
degree 6 ROADM with WR8-88A(F).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a 2+ degree ROADM, each WR must be a WR8-88A(F). A WR8-88A(F) cannot be
optically interconnected with a CWR8 or CWR8-88 in the same node. A node with a
WR8-88A(F) may be connected through a span to another node with one of these other
CWR options.
The ROADM add/drop (DROPOUT/ADDIN) ports of a WR8-88A(F) may be connected
to DWDM and CWDM spurs using OEO regeneration. Examples are shown in the
following figures.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-15 WR8-88 ROADM with DWDM spur/OEO regeneration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-16 WR8-88 ROADM with CWDM spur/OEO regeneration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations 40G and 100G OT regeneration configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
40G and 100G OT regeneration configurations

Regeneration using 40G and 100G OTs
When required, regeneration for 40G and 100G lines is currently supported by the
following OTs:
• 112SCX10
• 112SNX10
• 112SCA1
• 112SNA1
• 43SCX4
OT regeneration is accomplished by using the line loopback capability of an OT to
provide OEO regeneration for the line in each direction of transmission. This is illustrated
in the following diagram.
Figure 3-17 OT regeneration configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Anydirection configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Anydirection configurations
Introduction
The degree N+M Anydirection Add/Drop configuration is composed of N Connection
blocks and M Add/Drop blocks. The components of these blocks depends on the node
degrees and is detailed in the following information. In the current release, the
Anydirection configuration is split between 2 NEs, as is shown in Figure 3-18,
“Two-node Anydirection A/D degree 4+2 example” (p. 3-24).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-18 Two-node Anydirection A/D degree 4+2 example
Connection block
The connection block is based on WR8-88A(F).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The connection block may have a local add/drop, as specified in the following
requirement. Ingress and egress LDs used in the connection blocks can be any supported
LD combinations described in “Valid LD combinations” (p. 8-86).
The following configurations are supported for the local Add/drop connection in a
Connection block. The NE supports the same SFD and ITL+SFD combinations with the
WR8-88A(F) in this configuration, as is supported in the ROADM configurations.
Figure 3-19 WR8-88 with ITLU on drop port
The following configurations are supported in the Connection block:

• No mesh card in the Connection block
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If local add/drop is used with this configuration, the limitations in terms of degrees is:
– N+M <=5 (with configuration not allowing in-service upgrade to higher degrees)
– N+M <=4 (with configuration allowing in-service upgrade to higher degrees)
If local add/drop is not used with this configuration, the limitations in terms of
degrees is:
• One mesh card in the Connection block
If local add/drop is used with this configuration, the limitations in terms of degrees is:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If local add/drop is not used with this configuration, the limitations in terms of
degrees is:
• Two mesh packs in Connection block
This connection block allows a configuration up to degree 10 (N+M=10), with no

local add/drop.
Add/drop block
In the Add/Drop block, the following cards may be used in the "top" position:
• WR8-88A(F)
In a two-node configuration, the card in the “top” position is connected to the WR in the
connection block and the WR in the "bottom" position. The same type of WR must be
used in both the connection blocks and the "top" position of the Add/Drop block. The
Add/Drop blocks are connected to all connection blocks but not to each other.
In the Add/Drop block, the following cards may be used in the "bottom" position:
• CWR8-88A
In a two-node configuration, the card in the “bottom” position is connected to the WR in
the "top" position.
The following ingress LDs are supported in the Add/Drop block in the Drop direction:
• A2325A
For a two-node configuration, this is the ingress LD on Node B in, Figure 3-18,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following LDs are supported in the Add/Drop block in the Add direction:
• AHPLG
• A2325A
For a two-node configuration, this is the ingress LD on Node A in, Figure 3-18,
The following egress LDs are supported in the Add/Drop block in the Drop direction:
• AHPHG
• ALPHG
The following cards are not supported in the Add/Drop block.
• OPSA
• MVAC
• SVAC
Regeneration in the add/drop blocks
Regeneration is possible inside the A/D blocks. The following illustrations show the
configuration for regeneration with Two OTs in different A/D Blocks, and for two OTs in
the same A/D Block. With two OTs in the same A/D Block, the OTs must use different
colors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 Two-node regeneration with OTs in Different A/D Blocks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-21 Two-node regeneration with OTs in the same A/D Block
Add/drop block configurations

The add/drop block configurations are supported with no mesh card in add path, or one
mesh card in add path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-22 Two-node add/drop with no MESH4 card in the Add path
With this add/drop block configuration, the following degrees are supported:
• N<=5 with configuration not allowing in-service upgrade to higher degrees
• N<=4 with configuration allowing in-service upgrade to higher degrees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-23 Two-node add/drop with one MESH4 card in the Add path
This Add/Drop block allows a configuration up to degree 8.
Two-node Anydirection Connectivity

The following tables specify the valid connections between cards in the Anydirection
configuration. The WRs in the Add/Drop block are referred to by their position: WR (top)
and CWR (bottom), as shown in the following reference figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-24 AnyDirection two-node diagram
The following chart shows connections that are supported in the Add direction.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following chart shows typical connections in the Add direction
The following chart shows the connections that are supported in the Drop and Thru
directions.
The following charts show connections in the connectivity block for the Drop and Thru
directions for 5+3 degree with local add/drop.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
directions for 3 degree with up to 3 add/drop blocks without local add/drop.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Single-node Anydirection Connectivity

The following tables specify the valid connections between cards in the Anydirection
configuration. The WRs in the Add/Drop block are referred to by their position: WR
(top), WR (middle) and CWR (bottom), as shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-25 AnyDirection single-node diagram
The following chart shows connections that are supported in the Add direction.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following chart shows typical connections in the Add direction: Even Degree (N=2,
4, 6, or 8)
The following chart shows typical connections in the Add direction: Odd Degree (N=3, 5,
or 7)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following chart shows the connections that are supported in the Drop and Thru
directions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following chart shows example connections in the Drop and Thru directions for a
Single-node 6 Degree with up to 2 Add/Drop blocks with Local Add/Drop.
The following charts show connections in a Single-node 5 Degree with up to 4 Add/Drop

blocks with Local Add/Drop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FOADM configurations
Introduction
A CWDM FOADM supports optical interconnections of 1 and 2 degrees. CWDM
FOADMs are not supported on an NEs with PSS-36 shelves. Software does not preclude
this configuration, but it is not supported by the EPT or SVT.
A DWDM FOADM node supports optical interconnections of up to 4 degrees. An NE
with PSS-36 shelves supports a DWDM FOADM node up to 2 degrees. Software does
not preclude supporting up to 4 degrees, but this configuration is not supported by the
EPT or SVT. Because the SFD40B and SFD44B are not supported for FOADM
configurations > 2 degree, 3 and 4 degree FOADM configurations will only support even
channels.
The supported signal paths for a FOADM OADM are:
• Add/Drop
• Loop — single channel connectivity for the purpose of passing from east to west
transparently (without regeneration).
Loop connections can only be made between ports of the same wavelength. For a
DWDM loop connection, an attenuator is used to pad the signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations FOADM configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Pass-through — multi-channel connectivity for the purpose of cascading filters or
passing from east to west via the Expansion port on the OMD. This is not supported
for SFD44 or SFD44B filters. On these filters pass-through is done on a per-channel
basis via a loop connection.
• Regeneration
FOADM end terminal (Degree 1)

A FOADM end terminal configuration has one optical line at the ends of a point-to-point
link where OT(s) terminate all wavelengths. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS FOADM support
several types of end terminal configurations, as described in the following information.
DWDM OMD-based end terminal
This end terminal may contain a single SFD or cascaded SFDs, as shown in Figure 3-26,
“OMD-based 44 channel DWDM end terminal” (p. 3-44), and Figure 3-27, “OMD-based
15 channel DWDM end terminal” (p. 3-45).
For PSS-32 and PSS-16 shelves, FOADM end terminals with 100 GHz channel spacing
are supported by the following SFD combinations:
• SFD5
• SFD5+SFD5
• SFD5+SFD5+SFD5
• SFD8
• SFD8+SFD8 (PSS-16 shelf only)
• SFD40 (not supported on NE with PSS-36 main shelf)
• SFD44
• ITLB+SFD40+SFD40B (not supported with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLB+SFD40 (not supported with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLB+SFD5
• ITLB+SFD40+SFD40B (not supported with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLB+SFD40 (not supported with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLB+SFD40B (not supported with PSS-36 main shelf)
• ITLB+SFD5+SFD5
• ITLB+SFD5
• ITLB+SFD44
• ITLB+SFD44B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For PSS-36 shelves, FOADM end terminals with 50 GHz channel spacing are supported
by the following SFD combinations:
• ITLB+SFD44
• ITLB+SFD44+SFD44B
Auto power management is supported for these configurations.
Note: Because the SFD40 and SFD40B are thermal components, not passive modules,
they take minutes to warm-up. This can cause alarms and failures during auto power
adjustment.
Figure 3-26 OMD-based 44 channel DWDM end terminal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWDM OMD-based end terminal

A CWDM OMD-based end terminal configuration with a single SFC is supported. It can
be:
• SFC2
• SFC4
• SFC8
Cascaded SFCs are not supported. The following illustration shows a valid configuration
for an SFC end terminal.
Figure 3-29 OMD-based 4 channel CWDM end terminal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FOADM Hub (ring terminal)
A FOADM hub, also called a ring terminal, is a configuration of two lines in a ring where
OTs terminate all wavelengths. No channels cross transparently between these two lines.
A FOADM hub can be viewed as an East line terminal and a West line terminal in a single
NE.
Any symmetrical or asymmetrical combination of OMD-based line terminal
configurations is supported. Auto power management is also supported for this
configuration.
Refer to Figure 3-30, “FOADM hub block diagram” (p. 3-47) for an example of a Hub
node that uses dual line terminals. Either end terminal can have one or two line drivers
(LDs). The ingress and egress line drivers are both optional.
Figure 3-30 FOADM hub block diagram
Degree 2 FOADM
Traffic from the optical lines can be added or dropped, and at least one single wavelength
transits transparently as permitted by the engineering rules (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.50 Engineering and Planning Tool User
Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM filter support
Refer to Figure 3-31, “Degree 2 DWDM FOADM (100GHz spacing)” (p. 3-48) for an
example showing both directions of transmission in a FOADM with one or two OAs.
Static filter DWDMs (SFDs) can be SFD5, SFD8, SFD40, or SFD44.
Figure 3-31 Degree 2 DWDM FOADM (100GHz spacing)
For a Degree 2 FOADM with 100 GHz spacing, any symmetrical or asymmetrical
combination of OMD-based end terminal configurations is supported.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 also supports dense wavelength division multiplexing
(DWDM) at 50Ghz spacing, supporting up to 80 channels with SFD40/SFD40B filters, or
up to 88 channels with SFD44/SFD44B filters.
88 channel operation at 50Ghz spacing is supported by the SFD44 in combination with
the SFD44B and ITLB. 'Offset' wavelengths from the SFD44B are combined with
wavelengths from the SFD44 through the ITLB interleaver. 80 Channel operation at
50Ghz spacing is supported by the SFD40 in combination with the SFD40B and ITLB.
Support is provided for 1 degree 88-channel FOADM, and 1 or 2 degree 80-channel
FOADM configuration. The following illustration shows an example of an 80-channel
Degree 2 FOADM configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-32 Degree 2 DWDM FOADM (80-channel/50GHz spacing)
Figure 3-33 Degree 2 DWDM FOADM with ITLB thru connection
For a Degree 2 FOADM with 50 GHz spacing, the tables below list all possible east-west
SFD combinations.
Table 3-3 Supported SFD combinations for PSS-32/16 Degree 2 FOADMs with
50GHz spacing
East/WestITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+

SFD5 SFD5+ SFD40 SFD40B SFD40 SFD44 SFD44B SFD44
SFD5 +SFD40B +SFD44B
ITLB+ Sym Y Y N Y Y Y Y
SFD5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-3 Supported SFD combinations for PSS-32/16 Degree 2 FOADMs with
50GHz spacing (continued)
East/WestITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+ ITLB+

SFD5 SFD5+ SFD40 SFD40B SFD40 SFD44 SFD44B SFD44
SFD5 +SFD40B +SFD44B
ITLB+ Y Sym Y N Y Y Y Y
SFD5+
SFD5
ITLB+ Y Y Sym N Y Y Y Y
SFD40
ITLB+ N N N Sym Y N Y Y
SFD40B
ITLB+ Y Y Y Y Sym Y Y Y
SFD40+
SFD40B
ITLB+ Y Y Y N Y Sym N Y
SFD44
ITLB+ N N N Y Y N Sym Y
SFD44B
ITLB+ Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Sym
SFD44+
SFD44B
Notes:
1. Sym = symetrical: Y= supported: N = not supported
Table 3-4 Supported SFD combinations for PSS-36 Degree 2 FOADMs with 50GHz
spacing
East/West ITLB+SFD44 ITLB+SFD44+SFD44B

ITLB+SFD44 Y Y
ITLB+SFD44+SFD44B Y Y
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CWDM filter support
Degree 2 CWDM FOADMs are supported on 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16. Any
symmetrical combination of OMD-based end terminal configurations is supported. The
following combinations are supported:
• SFC2-SFC2
• SFC4-SFC4
• SFC8-SFC8
Figure 3-34 CWDM degree 2 FOADM
CWDM FOADMs support add/drop configurations with the following OTs:

• 4DPA2
• 4DPA4
• 11DPE12
• 11DPE12E
• 11DPM12
• 11QPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Degree 3 and Degree 4 FOADM (mesh)
A 3-degree FOADM configuration is a mesh node with three or four valid DWDM line
terminals. Individual channels (100GHz spacing only) enter from one line and can be
added or dropped, and wavelengths transit transparently as permitted by the engineering
rules (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.50
Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide).
Refer to Figure 3-35, “Degree 3 44-channel FOADM block diagram” (p. 3-52) for an
example of a FOADM mesh node.
Figure 3-35 Degree 3 44-channel FOADM block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-36 Asymmetrical Degree 4 DWDM FOADM
In-line amplifier (ILA)

Introduction
There is no specific type for a particular node, such as In Line Amplifier (ILA) or
TOADM. A node's configuration is determined by its topological interconnections. A
node acts as an in-line amplifier if its topological links are configured to include one or
more amplifiers with no CWR or SFD/SFC cards. A node acts as a TOADM if CWR
cards are included in its topological configuration.
ILA node
An ILA amplifies the optical channels and terminates the OSC for two optical lines. The
ILA consists of two LDs with optional Raman amplifiers, and the necessary DCMs,
power, and control cards in a standard shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations In-line amplifier (ILA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following amplifiers can be used in an ILA configuration:
• Unidirectional:
– AM2125A - High power (+21 dBm), 25 dB gain optical amplifier with mid-stage
access
– AM2125B - High power (+21 dBm), 25 dB gain optical amplifier with no
mid-stage access
– AM2318A - Variable low gain amplifier with no mid-stage access
• Bidirectional
• ALPHG (Low Power High Gain Amplifier) - Provides 10 to 30 dB of gain, with flat
(tilt within ±0.5dB) outputs available over a gain range of 10-23dB, with mid-stage
access.
• AHPHG (High Power High Gain Amplifier) - Provides 13 to 33dB of gain, with a flat
gain range of 13 to 26dB, with mid-stage access.
• AHPLG (High Power Low Gain Amplifier) - Provides 6 to 24dB of gain, with a flat
gain range of 6 to 17dB, and mid-stage access.
• A2325A (23dBm variable gain amplifier) - Used for span losses between 13 dB to 24
dB with an extend span loss range from 24 dB to 31 dB, with mid-stage access
An RA2P is optional on each line of an ILA. A WTOCM is also optional on an ILA. See
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.6.50 Engineering and
Planning Tool User Guide for further information.
Note: For information on ILA nodes using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP see
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.0.0 AHP
Amplifier User Guide.
The following diagram illustrates an example of an ILA configuration. Note that the SIG
OUT ports of both LDs are connected to the span.
Figure 3-37 ILA with bidirectional LDs and optional RA2Ps
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-38 ILA-2: ILA with unidirectional LDs and optional RA2Ps
Unidirectional topology connection assignments

With unidirectional LDs, topology and port connection assignments are required. Manual
external and internal topology assignments are required for the following LD ports
• AM2125A ingress LineIn and AM2125A egress LineOut
• AM2125B ingress LineIn and AM2125B egress LineOut
• RA2P LineIn and RA2P LineOut
Note: OSC SFP and WTOCM topology assignments are not required.
Note: AM2125A has DCM ports that need to be connected to DCM or looped back
directly.
For topology using AM2125A or AM2125B as an example, users can assign the correct
unidirectional external topology based on the following diagram.
• Node 1: 1-3 LineOut to Node 2: 1-2 LineIn
• Node 2: 1-3 LineOut to Node 1: 1-2 LineIn
Note: Delete the external topology first if both nodes have been connected to outside
fiber plant.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-39 AM2125A/B topology assignments
For topology using AM2125A or AM2125B and RA2P as an example, users can assign
the correct unidirectional external and internal topology based on the following diagram.
• External: Node 3: 1-3 LineOut to Node 4: 1-7 LineIn, Node 4: 1-3 LineOut to Node 3:
1-7 LineIn
• Internal: Node 3: 1-7 LineOut to 1-2 LineIn, Node 4: 1-7 LineOut to 1-2 LineIn
Figure 3-40 AM2125A/B topology assignments with RA2P
Line Driver opposing port connections need to be manually assigned. Assign the correct
opposite port connections based on the following diagram.
• No RA2P: 1-3 LineOut to 1-2 LineIn
• With RA2P: 1-3 lineOut to 1-7 LineIn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-41 LD opposing port assignments with and without RA2P
TOADM networks
Introduction
Tunable OADM (TOADM) networks are designed such that any wavelength can be
added or dropped at any site, and the network can also be reconfigured in-service to alter
the wavelength routing. Because final wavelength routing is unknown at the time of
network design and deployment, this network design approach requires an
any-network-element- to-any-network-element analysis for all possible wavelength
routes.
In particular,
• Light path link budget analysis must be calculated in advance to ensure that receive
powers and OSNR sensitivities are satisfied for all possible transponder types and all
possible wavelength routes
• Dispersion compensation must be allocated in such a way that no matter where
wavelengths are added and dropped, the residual dispersion after compensation
remains within the dispersion tolerances for all possible transponder types
The Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool provides a simple way to both specify
a TOADM network design and to perform full network synthesis and analysis of these
constraints. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release
3.6.50 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide for information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations TOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The primary advantage of the TOADM design philosophy is to allow a “design once,
provision forever” model, in which:
• No engineering analysis is required at light path turn-up, as all connectivity is
pre-verified
• No service disruptions occur as new services are commissioned, or as capacity is
added.
• No service disruptions occur for moves, adds, and changes to wavelength routes.
In order to accomplish this, it is important that the entire network element through-path
be installed during ring commissioning, so that through-wavelengths are not disturbed
during network element and network growth.
The secondary advantage of the TOADM model is the automated adaptation to physical
variations in the network; either variations in fiber plant losses from planned values, or
the natural variation of the various optical elements themselves.
TOADM rings
The typical TOADM topology is a ring in which light paths all begin and end on TOADM
network elements. The light paths may be created using either 1830 TOADM
transponders, or directly connected third-party ITU transponders. A TOADM ring
consists of two-degree TOADM NEs and, optionally, in-line amplifier.
In order to support any-to-any connectivity in the ring, the through path around the ring is
automatically balanced during network commissioning. The automatic balancing adjusts
amplifier gains around the ring through-path to ensure all channels leaving a given node
do so at the designed power level. After the ring has been commissioned, automatic
power management adapts to changes in the network to keep a given channel within
provisioned ranges, as described in the “Automatic power management” section in
Chapter 5, “Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-42, “TOADM ring network topology” (p. 3-59) is an illustration of TOADM
ring network topology.
Figure 3-42 TOADM ring network topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interconnected TOADM rings
TOADM rings can be connected using a common NE that has four degrees of network
connectivity. TOADM rings can also be connected using two TOADM 4-degree NEs.
Refer to Figure 3-43, “Interconnected TOADM rings” (p. 3-60)
Figure 3-43 Interconnected TOADM rings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NEs used in the rings are equipped with four connected TOADM CWR8 cards as
shown in Figure 3-44, “NE with connected TOADM CWR8 or CWR8-88 cards”
(p. 3-61).
Figure 3-44 NE with connected TOADM CWR8 or CWR8-88 cards
Linear TOADM networks

A linear TOADM network consists of a chain of two-degree TOADM NEs and,
optionally, an in-line amplifier and NEs that are terminated by single-degree NEs at either
end of the network, as shown in Figure 3-45, “Two-degree TOADM NE linear network”
(p. 3-62). The single-degree FOADM terminal NEs typically employ SFD filtering, since
they contain no through path and add/drop all of the wavelengths at the site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-45 Two-degree TOADM NE linear network
Split TOADM networks

The supports split TOADM configuration. This is a degree 2 TOADM node with the two
CWR cards placed in separate shelves, on separate NEs, with the NEs normally separated
by a few kilometers for physical redundancy. This configuration differs from two full
TOADM shelves in that the interior CWR cards are removed. However, “interior” OSCT
or LD cards are used to provide OSC connectivity between the two sites. Only manual
power management is supported for this configuration.
Figure 3-46 Split TOADM configuration
TOADM with DWDM or CWDM Spur

TOADM colorless or colored add/drop ports may be connected to DWDM and CWDM
spurs using OEO regeneration as follows:
• DWDM spurs: a single OT regeneration per channel, using an 11QPA4(A) or 4DPA4
OT.
• DWDM spurs: back to back OT regeneration per channel, using 11STAR1,
43STX4(P) or 43STA1P. OTs. Note: for the 43STA1P, the client port rate must be
OC768/STM256 for the regeneration; OTU3 cannot be used.
• CWDM spurs: a single OT regeneration per channel, using an 11QPA4(A), 11STAR1
or 4DPA4 OTs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figures show examples of a TOADM node with DWDM and CWDM
spurs. Note that the OTs used for regeneration may be connected to the CWR CLS port or
SFD port.
Figure 3-47 DWDM TOADM spur
Figure 3-48 CWDM TOADM spur
Note: The 4DPA4 may only be used with the CWR8.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The 11QPA4(A) must be configured with the tunable line-side XFP when used
with the CWR8-88.
FOADM networks
Introduction
FOADM networks consist of one or more interconnected FOADM NEs. The possible
configurations are limited only by the number of channels allowed at an NE or allowed
on a network fiber.
The general rule for configuring FOADM networks is if a network can be connected, it
can be built. Therefore, FOADM networks can assume almost any configuration, such as
ring, linear, hub and spoke, or mesh. The limiting factor when designing FOADM
networks is the finite number of wavelengths that can be carried on a fiber.
A network fiber can carry up to 44 wavelengths at 100GHz ITU spacing (using the
SFD44 filter) or 88 wavelength at 50GHz spacing (using SFD44/SFD44B filters and the
ITLB interleaver). A similar 40 channel configuration is supported by the SFD40, and an
80 channel configuration with SFD40/SFD40B and ITLB interleaver. 40 DWDM
wavelengths are supported with SFD5 and SFD8 filters, or 8 CWDM wavelengths with
SFC2/4/8 filters.
Only one instance of a particular channel is allowed on a fiber. Multiple instances of the
same channel may be reused in the network, provided they are on different fibers. Signal
amplification is performed for all DWDM channels on the fiber, but not for CWDM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations FOADM networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A FOADM ring is shown in Figure 3-49, “FOADM HUB ring” (p. 3-65). Note that a
FOADM HUB is needed in the ring to terminate each wavelength at least once to prevent
lasing.
Figure 3-49 FOADM HUB ring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A FOADM spur connection is shown in Figure 3-50, “FOADM spur connection”
(p. 3-66).
Figure 3-50 FOADM spur connection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A FOADM network includes a one 3-degree FOADM NE, as shown in Figure 3-51,
“3-Degree FOADM” (p. 3-67).
Figure 3-51 3-Degree FOADM
Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies

Introduction
In a mixed TOADM/FOADM network, FOADM network segments (spurs) are connected
to a TOADM ring or linear network using the TOADM add/drop or Line ports to create a
hybrid network such as that illustrated in Figure 3-52, “TOADM ring with static network
spurs” (p. 3-68).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-52 TOADM ring with static network spurs
Inventory configurations
Configurations and connections for 100Ghz networks
Supported inventory connections for nodes with 100 Ghz channel spacing is shown in the
following figures.
Note: An OSCT card may be used in place of the LD card for FOADM
configurations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Inventory configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-53 44-channel TOADM
Figure 3-54 FOADM/DCM/SFD40/SFD44
Figure 3-55 FOADM without DCM on LD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-56 FOADM without SFD40/SFD44
Configurations and connections for 50GHz networks

Because SFD40, SFD40B, SFD44, SFD44B, DCM and ITLB modules EEPROM data is
read by other cards, the electrical connections for these modules must be cascaded. LD
and CWR8-88 cards support daisy chaining. (CWR8 does not support daisy chaining.)
The SFD40, SFD40B, SFD44B and ITLB have multiple inventory ports to facilitate daisy
chaining. However, the SFD44 and DCM only have one inventory port, and so can only
be at the ends of the daisy chain. CWR8-88 hardware will only support a daisy chained
device that is attached to INV OUT1. There is no electrical connection between the
CWR8-88 driver and any device attached to INV OUT2.
Note: The WTOCM card also has an inventory connector for reading the EEPROM
data from the modules noted above. None of the configurations required currently
need the additional connectivity this extra inventory port offers, therefore its usage is
not required.
configurations.
There are many possible combinations of inventory configurations. The following will be
supported by EPT and verified by SVT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-57 FOADM with DCM, SFD40/SFD44, SFD40B/SFD44B
configurations.
Figure 3-58 FOADM without a DCM on the LD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-59 FOADM without a DCM or SFD40B/SFD44B
Figure 3-60 88-channel TOADM with optional SFD44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-61 88-channel TOADM without SFD44B
Note: The maximum distance between the inventory port at the LD/WR faceplate and
the location of the furthest inventory port is 40m.
Variable Attenuator Cards in OADM configurations

Overview
Variable Attenuator Card (VAC) type packs are used to control the power level and insert
WaveTracker keys onto optical signals from client equipment.
• The Single Variable Attenuator Card (SVAC) contains a fast optical VOA and
WaveTracker encoder to condition a single alien wavelength to pass through a
TOADM system. The SVAC is a bidirectional pack.
• The Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) contains an array of eight fast optical
VOA and WaveTracker encoders to condition up to eight alien wavelengths to pass
through a TOADM, ROADM, or FOADM system. The MVAC is a unidirectional
pack.
SVAC cards
An SVAC is used to add or drop alien wavelengths. Although an SVAC could be
connected directly to a CWR colorless port, in a TOADM, configuration it is
recommended that an SVAC be connected to an SFD.
Note: In the current release, SVAC cards are not supported on the PSS-36 shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Variable Attenuator Cards in OADM configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-62 SVAC in TOADM
MVAC cards
An MVAC is used for adding and dropping alien wavelengths. Although an MVAC could
be connected directly to a CWR colorless port, in a TOADM, configuration it is
recommended that an MVAC be connected to an SFD.
Note: In the current release, MVAC cards are not supported on the PSS-36 shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-63 MVAC in TOADM
Figure 3-64 MVAC in FOADM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-65 MVAC in ROADM
Long Haul Wavelength Tracker (WTOCM) configurations

WTOCM LD support and configurations
The WTOCM is supported with the following LDs:
• A2325A
• AHPHG
• AHPLG
• ALPHG
• AM2125A
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
Note: Unkeyed optical channels are not supported by the WTOCM. Software will not
allow provisioning of an unkeyed service across an LD with a WTOCM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Long Haul Wavelength Tracker (WTOCM) configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bidirectional LDs
The WTOCM is connected to the external facing ingress LD on an optical line, as shown
in Figure 3-66, “WTOCM/LD Connectivity with Bidirectional LDs” (p. 3-77). Each
WTOCM can provide LH-WT for 2 LDs. The connectivity between the WTOCM IN port
and LD MON RX or TX port will be specified as an attribute(s) on the WTOCM port
(topological links are not created for this connection). The MON TX and RX ports on an
LD must connect to the same WTOCM.
Figure 3-66 WTOCM/LD Connectivity with Bidirectional LDs
Unidirectional LDs
The WTOCM is connected to the external facing ingress LD and egress LD on an optical
line, as shown in Figure 3-67, “ROADM WTOCM/LD connectivity with unidirectional
LDs” (p. 3-78). Each WTOCM can provide LH-WT for 4 uni-directional LDs, or 2
uni-directional LDs and one bi-directional LD. The connectivity between a WTOCM IN
port and a LD MON port will be specified as an attribute on the WTOCM port
(topological links are not created for this connection). The MON ports for each LD on an
optical line must connect to the same WTOCM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-67 ROADM WTOCM/LD connectivity with unidirectional LDs
Figure 3-68 ILA WTOCM/LD connectivity with unidirectional LDs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Long haul WTOCM configurations
• TOADM
• FOADM end terminal, when DGE in path
WTOCM is optional for the following node types:
• 2D+ FOADM
• ILA
Each ILA on an OMS span may be optionally equipped with a WTOCM when each
endpoint of the span uses WTOCM.
On an OMS span, each endpoint must be configured with the same WT capability.
Note: The numbers of ILAs in the configurations below are for illustration purposes
only and are not a requirement for the number of ILAs between OADMs.
Figure 3-69 TOADM Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-70 FOADM configurations
Figure 3-71 FOADM/TOADM configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LD and OSCT configurations
In order to provide OSC support, one of the following is required for all DWDM optical
lines:
• A2325A
• AHPHG
• AHPLG
• ALPHG
• AM2125A ingress amplifier with a AM2125A egress amplifier
• AM2125B ingress amplifier with a AM2125B egress amplifier
• AM2318A
• ALPFGT egress amplifier
• OSCT card
The following amplifiers cannot be used in the egress position if OSC is not configured
on the LD in the ingress position:
• A2325A
• AM2125A
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
The NE will trigger APR for this configuration. (See, “Automatic power reduction
(APR)” (p. 2-22).)
The following constraints and requirements apply:
• An A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, or AM2318A amplifier in the ingress position is
only supported in TOADM and ILA nodes. It is not supported in FOADM
configurations.
• ALPFGT and OSCT cards only support unkeyed optical channels. They are not
supported on TOADM lines.
• LD and OSCT cards are not used for CWDM optical lines.
• With an A2325A, AHPHG, ALPHG and AHPLG ingress LD, an egress amplifier is
optional.
• With an AM2125A ingress LD, an AM2125A egress amplifier is required.
• With an AM2125B ingress LD, an AM2125B egress amplifier is required.
• With an AM2318A ingress LD, an AM2125A, AM2125B, or AM2318A egress
amplifier is required.
For details describing valid LD combinations, see “Valid LD combinations” (p. 8-86).
The following figures show how these LDs are configured for ingress/egress applications.
Note that the ingress LD is facing the external line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the following configuration illustrations, the label “AxPyG” is used to
indicate that an AHPHG, ALPHG, or AHPLG can be used.
Figure 3-72 AxPyG Ingress LD with optional egress LD (TOADM or FOADM)
Figure 3-73 AxPyG ingress LD with ALPFGT egress LD (FOADM only)
Figure 3-74 A2325A ingress LD with optional egress LD (TOADM only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-75 AM2125A ingress LD with AM2125A or AM2318A egress LD (TOADM
only)
Figure 3-76 AM2125B ingress LD with AM2125B or AM2318A egress LD (TOADM

only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-77 AM2318A ingress LD with AM2125A, AM2125B, or AM2318A egress LD
(TOADM only)
With an ALPFGT egress LD, an ingress amplifier (AHPHG, ALPHG, AHPLG or

ALPFGT) is optional. The following figure shows how the ALPFGT is configured for
ingress/egress applications. Note that the egress LD is facing the external line when both
ingress and egress LDs are ALPFGTs.
Figure 3-78 ALPFGT egress LD with optional ALPFGT ingress LD (FOADM only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An ingress or egress LD is not supported with an OSCT card.
Figure 3-79 OSCT card (FOADM only)
An RA2P Raman amplifier card is optional on the ingress line with the following LDs:
A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A
Figure 3-80 RA2P card with bidirectional LDs (T/R/FOADM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-81 RA2P card with unidirectional LDs (T/ROADM only)
Single-fiber bi-directional nodes

Overview
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports nodes with CWDM bi-directional
transmission over a single fiber.
Note: DWDM single fiber transmission is not supported.
Bidirectional transmission over a single fiber is supported with any of the following
filters and OTs:
• SFC2(A, B, C, or D)
• SFC4(A or B)
• SFC8
• 4DPA4
• 4DPA2
• 11STAR1
• 11STMM10
For details about optical connections to provision single-fiber operation see “Bidirectional
CWDM single-fiber transmission” (p. 2-13).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH networks

Introduction
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH edge device is a next-generation,
high-density Ethernet transport device with up to twelve 1-GbE client ports and two
10-GbE uplink ports. Each shelf also has slots reserved for SFD DWDM and SFC
CWDM filter pack. The uplink ports use XFP modules to support single channel, DWDM
and CWDM transportations. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH/GBEH can be
deployed at the customer premises for Ethernet aggregation and access.
The 11DPE12 card in 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 provides the same functionality as
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH and provides full interworking between 1830 PSS-1
GBEH and 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH linear network

The typical Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH topology is a standalone-linear
network or a spur of 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16.
An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH linear network consists of a two-degree 1830
PSS-1 GBE/GBEH OADM configuration and one-degree 1830 PSS-1 terminal
configuration. For details of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH node
configurations, please refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1)
Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH NEs support both CWDM and black and white
(B&W) linear topologies; no optical amplifier is used between the NEs. Refer to Figure
3-82, “Linear network topology” (p. 3-87) for topology examples.
Figure 3-82 Linear network topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH ring network
An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH ring network consists of interconnected
two-degree 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH OADM nodes. Figure 3-83, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-1 GBE/GBEH ring network” (p. 3-88)shows the network and physical view of a
CWDM 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH ring topology.
Figure 3-83 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH ring network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1 networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/16 and Alcatel-Lucent

1830 PSS-1 networks
Introduction
An interconnected 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 network
configuration provides a total flexible and cost-effective edge optical network. This
mixed network configuration can be accomplished by equipping the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 with an 11DPE12, which provides the same capabilities as an
1830 PSS-1 GBEH, or by extending one or more wavelengths from the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 down to the 1830 PSS-1 edge devices over single fiber pairs. The
1830 PSS-1 AHP can be used as an ILA node to support these optical connections.
In 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51, interconnection between 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 is supported as shown in Table
3-5, “1830 PSS-1/1830 PSS-32 interconnecting ports” (p. 3-89), including support for
GCC0 (General Communications Channel 0). When equipped with various XFPs, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 supports black and white (B&W), CWDM, or DWDM
transportation. For more detailed information about configuring connections between the
1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 in these types of networks, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.5.60 and 3.6.51 User
Provisioning Guide.
Table 3-5 1830 PSS-1/1830 PSS-32 interconnecting ports
PSS-1 port PSS-32 OT port

PSS-1 GBEH Line Port 11STAR1 Client Port
PSS-1 GBEH Line Port 11STGE12 Line Port
PSS-1 GBEH Line Port 11DPE12(E) Line Port
PSS-1 GBEH Line Port 11QPA4(A) Client Port1
PSS-1 MD4H Line Port 11STMM10 Client Port
Notes:
1. In R2.5.1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
1830 PSS-1 networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-84, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 interconnected with Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-1 ” (p. 3-90) illustrates the physical connection between the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 network via single-channel and multiple
channels.
Figure 3-84 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 interconnected with Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PSS-1
The 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device supports point-to-point, linear and ring configurations. The
configuration of each node can be either a Degree-1 Line terminal or a Degree-2 OADM
node (symmetrical or asymmetrical). The typical network configurations are listed as
following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
1830 PSS-1 networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE mixed networks
provide various flexible topologies, as illustrated in Figure 3-85, “Examples of Mixed
1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE topologies” (p. 3-91)
Figure 3-85 Examples of Mixed 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
1830 PSS-1 networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network configuration for transition from access to core is supported between 1830
PSS-32 11STMM10 module client and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H line ports. This OTU-1
interworking via GCC0 provides low cost access, and eases 1830 PSS-1 management by
leveraging the OTN GCC management channel.
Figure 3-86 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 OTU-1 interworking
Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 and Alcatel-Lucent 1696 networks

OT interworking between 1696ROADM and 1830 PSS
In this release, interworking is supported between selected 1830 PSS and 1696 OTs, as
shown in the following table.
Table 3-6 Supported 1830/1696 OT combinations
1830 OT 1696 OT
11STAR1 10GELAN
1
11QPA4(A) 10GELAN
11STGE12 10xGE
11DPE12(E) 10xGE
PSS-1 GBEH 10xGE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations Mixed Alcatel-Lucent 1830 and Alcatel-Lucent 1696
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. In R2.5.1
Generic OT interworking scenarios are based on connecting an OT module in one NE to a

compatible OT module in another type of NE within the same network. The simplest form
of OT interworking is Point-to-Point configuration, providing bidirectional services
between the OT connection points. Bidirectional OT Interworking is supported in
unprotected Pt-Pt configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-87 Basic 1696-1830 transponder interoperability configuration
Signal digital structure on interconnected OT ports is exclusively OTU2V, with G.709

functionality and compliant digital structure with FEC field.
11STAR1 to 10GELAN interworking

Interworking of the 11STAR1 module with 10GELAN is supported only when the client
port on the 11STAR module is configured to 10GbE, and CBR11.049 mode is configured.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-88 11STAR1 to 10GELAN configuration
11STGE12 to 10xGE interworking

The 11STGE12 module interworks with a 10xGE line port by supporting the HiGig
10GbE LAN format on the line port. Line port bit rates on 11STGE12 and 10xGE
modules are 11.049Gb/s. This bit rate is obtained by applying an OTU2-like structure to
the base 10.3125Gb/s stream with stuffing columns in ODU2 payload area.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STGE12 module interworks with 10xGE on all 10 client GE ports using the following
connections:
• 11STGE12 port #1 [hArr ] 10xGE port #1
• Other intervening ports, in sequence
Ports 11 and 12 on 11STGE12 module are not used.
Note: Internal GbE flow segregation is performed using the HiGig header field named
Dest port ID. Mapping between physical port IDs and HiGig Dest port ID field is
identical in 1696 and 1830 implementation.
1830 PSS-1 GBEH to 10xGbE interworking

The basic interworking scenario between a 1830 PSS-1 GBEH and a 10xGE multiplexing
module in a 1696 shelf, is Gigabit Ethernet service aggregation over a single fiber pair
from an access location to the 1696R network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-89 1830 PSS-1 GBEH to 10xGE interworking scenario
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 edge device provides the ability to connect either the L1
or L2 port with the line port of a 10xGE card in a 1696R shelf. The digital structure and
GE service processing, including individual GE time slot mapping, is compatible between
the modules.
Management and communication between the 1696ROADM network and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH is established by connecting DCN LAN to one of the
GE services transported between the two modules. Since the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1
GBEH supports only 1000BASE-X on client ports, the port dedicated to carrying DCN
traffic can't be directly connected to a 100BASE-X LAN interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-90 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH to 10xGE GE transparent service

transport
1830/1696 mid-span-meet configurations

1830 PSS supports the following mid-span-meet network interconnections with 1696
networks.
Single line port interconnection
1830 PSS supports configuration of an 1830 PSS network interconnected with a 1696
network by a single line port between a 1696 NE and an 1830 PSS NE. The 1696 NE can
be a WSS-based ROADM, a blocker-based ROADM, or a static 1696 node. The 1830
PSS NE can be TOADM or FOADM.
Figure 3-91, “1830/1696 single line interconnections” (p. 3-99) shows the network and
shelf view of the interconnection. Only WSS based 1696 and TOADM are shown.
However the WSS can be replaced with blocker or filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-91 1830/1696 single line interconnections
Multi-line port interconnection

1830 PSS supports configuration of an 1830 PSS network interconnected to a 1696
network by multiply line ports between a 1696 and an 1830 PSS NE. The 1696 NE can be
a WSS-based ROADM, blocker-based ROADM, or static 1696 node. The 1830 PSS NE
can be TOADM or FOADM.
Figure 3-92, “1830/1696 multi-line interconnections” (p. 3-100) shows the network and
shelf view of the interconnection. Only WSS based 1696 and TOADM are shown.
However the WSS can be replaced with blocker or filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-92 1830/1696 multi-line interconnections
Mid-span-meet Interworking
The 1830 EPT is able to accept 1696 NE as part of a nodal configuration. It is also able to
provide both 1696 and 1830 commissioning files that can be used for commissioning this
interconnected network.
PhM provides a commission, node add/delete, re-adjustment wizard for the the combined
1696 and 1830 PSS networks.
The default power-management type setting for interconnecting line ports is shown in
following table:
1696 ROADM-wss 1696 ROADM-block 1696 Static

1830-TOADM Auto Auto Manual
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830-FOADM Manual Manual Manual
The following table identifies the 42 channels in common between the 1696R and 1830
PSS.
1696R ITU Wave- Freq. Band Channel 1930

CMD42 Channel length (THz) SFD44
Port (100GHz) (nm) Port
1 60 1529.55 196 9600
2 59 1530.33 195.9 1 1 9590
3 58 1531.12 195.8 2 9580
4 57 1531.9 195.7 3 9570
5 56 1532.68 195.6 4 9560
6 55 1533.47 195.5 9550
7 54 1534.25 195.4 2 1 9540
8 53 1535.04 195.3 2 9530
9 52 1535.82 195.2 3 9520
10 51 1536.61 195.1 4 9510
11 50 1537.4 195 9500
12 49 1538.19 194.9 3 1 9490
13 48 1538.98 194.8 2 9480
14 47 1539.77 194.7 3 9470
15 46 1540.56 194.6 4 9460
16 45 1541.35 194.5 9450
17 44 1542.14 194.4 4 1 9440
18 43 1542.94 194.3 2 9430
19 42 1543.73 194.2 3 9420
20 41 1544.53 194.1 4 9410
21 40 1545.32 194 9400
22 39 1546.12 193.9 5 1 9390
23 38 1546.92 193.8 2 9380
24 37 1547.72 193.7 3 9370
25 36 1548.51 193.6 4 9360
26 35 1549.32 193.5 9350
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1696R ITU Wave- Freq. Band Channel 1930

CMD42 Channel length (THz) SFD44
Port (100GHz) (nm) Port
27 34 1550.12 193.4 6 1 9340
28 33 1550.92 193.3 2 9330
29 32 1551.72 193.2 3 9320
30 31 1552.52 193.1 4 9310
31 30 1553.33 193 9300
32 29 1554.13 192.9 7 1 9290
33 28 1554.94 192.8 2 9280
34 27 1555.75 192.7 3 9270
35 26 1556.55 192.6 4 9260
36 25 1561.42 192.5 9250
37 24 1558.17 192.4 8 1 9240
38 23 1558.98 192.3 2 9230
39 22 1559.79 192.2 3 9220
40 21 1560.61 192.1 4 9210
41 20 1561.42 192 9200
42 19 1562.23 191.9 9190
Dangling OT configuration
The line interface of1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 OTs can be fibered directly to a 1696R
node for transport in a 1696-based network. For this application, the 1830 OT provides a
signal, with WaveTracker encoding and power management, to the 1696R node. The OT
itself is installed in an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf, and is managed by the 1830
node.
A dangling OT is an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS optical transponder, plugged into an 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf, and managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS node, but
connected on the line side to a 1696R node. Because the line side optical ports (transmit
and receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex (OMD)
pack in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE, this OT is characterized as a dangling OT on
the 1696 network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
networks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-93 1830 dangling OT
The system supports connection of the line port on the OT in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS shelf, to the 1696R node via the CMD-42 card. Figure 3-93, “1830 dangling
OT” (p. 3-103) shows interconnection for this application. The WaveTracker™ encoding
function and power control management are enabled on the OT. The 1696R and 1830
shelves each have a TID.
The following Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS OTs support Dangling OT interworking:
• 11STAR1
• 11STMM10
• 11STGE12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Topologies and configurations DWDM extended link configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM extended link configurations

Extended single span reach with 1621 submarine link extender (SLE)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and PSS-36 shelves are supported with a specific
sub-set of modules for use with the Alcatel-Lucent 1621 SLE to provide repeaterless links
up to 500km. The 1621SLE provides amplification on both ends of the span, and it is not
part of the 1830 network element. In these respects it is similar to the PB1 amplifier.
Figure 3-94 1621 SLE
The 1621SLE does not support the all 88 channels of the 1830 PSS channel plan.
Depending on the 1621SLE model used, 85 to 50 of the longest-wavelength channels are
supported. The set of supported channels can be further reduced by the receive-side
amplification.
The 1621SLE can be managed via external DCN connectivity. DCN extension across the
long span can be done via GCC0 channel configured on the Line port of an 11STAR1
card.
Note: Detailed information about the 1621 SLE is not contained in this document.
Please refer to 1621SLE Compact Shelf Technical Manual for detailed description
about 1621 SLE.
The following schematic illustrates the kinds of mid-range and premium extended link
configurations that are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS supported components

The following components are supported in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and PSS-36
shelves for use with 1621 SLE applications.
• Optical transponders
– 11STAR1 (EFEC)
– 11STMM10 (EFEC2)
– 11STGE12 (EFEC2)
– 43STA1P (AFEC)
– 43STX4 (AFEC)
– 43SCA1 (AFEC)
– 112SCX10 (AFEC)
– 112SNX10 (AFEC)
– 112SCA1 (AFEC)
– 112SNA1 (AFEC)
• Amplifiers
– AHPHG
– AHPLG
(modular amplifiers are not included)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• FOADM configurations
– SFD44
– SFD44B
– ITLB
DCM1 DCM2
SMF LEAF SMF LEAF
DCF (km) 120 120 DCF (km) [0;120] [0;120]
FBG (km) 240 480 max FBG (km) [0;240] [0;480]
G.652 and G.654 fiber types are supported. For a reach beyond 240km DCMX FBG is
required. APR must be disabled for this configuration, and it cannot be part of the
GMPLS network.
Figure 3-95 1621 SLE configuration with 1830 PSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
4 Product description
4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 hardware architecture, product
functionality, and the individual modules supported by each shelf.
Descriptions are provided for common hardware components (such as shelf, equipment
controller, power distribution module, etc.), core optics modules (such as line
drivers/optical amplifiers, colorless wavelength routers, SFDx, DCM modules, etc.),
optical transponders (OTs), and miscellaneous modules.
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE 4-2

Overview of shelf types 4-2
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Shelf 4-3
Shelf variants and hardware overview 4-3
Mandatory module details 4-27
Non-mandatory modules 4-38
DCM shelf 4-136
DCM shelf overview 4-136
Non-COS/EOS shelves 4-140
Description of non-COS/EOS shelves 4-140
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Overview of shelf types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview of shelf types

1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system supports three types of shelves:
• Universal shelves (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16) that accept universal OT, LD, and Filter modules
• DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module) shelves
• OMD (Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex) shelves
Universal shelves
A universal shelf is the basic building block for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network
element (NE) in either an End- or Central-Office environment. It provides a framework
for all active modules in a system (such as controller, interface cards, etc.). Although
targeted for specific office environments, the deciding factors for utilizing an 1830
PSS-36, 1830 PSS-32, or 1830 PSS-16 shelf are footprint size, cost, and anticipated node
requirements. Each 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Network Element (NE) includes up to
24 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 shelves, or 2 1830 PSS-36 shelves, and up to 40
DCM/OMD shelves.
DCM and OMD shelves
DCM and OMD shelves are shelves that hold passive DCM and
SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B OMD modules. The modules in the DCM shelf provide
dispersion compensation for line drivers in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf. The
SFD40/SFD44 in the OMD shelf provides the optical mux/demux function for
CWR8/CWR8-88 modules in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Shelf variants and hardware overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf variants and hardware overview

Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, 1830 PSS-32, and 1830 PSS-16 shelves provide the
framework upon which all configurations of the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NEs are
constructed. The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves provide card slots, fiber
management trays, backplane, power distribution, and cooling for the NE. Network
elements can be deployed in a single shelf or expanded as the need arises to multiple
interconnected universal shelves.
The first 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf of an NE becomes the master shelf and
provides the management and control connections to the operations systems for the
cluster of shelves in a multi-shelf NE. Expansion shelves connect to the master shelf via
protected internal LAN communication links and provide extended slot capacity managed
by the single database that resides in the master shelf.
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf description

Each 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf contains several universal slots for function
cards, two reserved for controller cards that are configured for redundant control (1830
PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16), and two slots reserved power filter cards. In addition each
shelf houses a fan tray for cooling, a customer interface panel (1830 PSS-32 and 1830
PSS-16), and a rotary switch to configure the shelf ID for multiple shelf installations (see
“Master/multiple shelf description” (p. 4-6)).
1830 PSS-36 shelf details
In addition to the power filter, bus termination card, and first level controller card slots,
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf supports up to 18 full height slots and 32
switch-capable half-height slots. The top of the shelf houses a fan tray for cooling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

In addition to the slots for the two power filters and two controller cards, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf contains 32 function card slots. The top of the shelf
houses a fan tray for cooling, a customer interface panel, and two timing interface cards
that provide a redundant connection to synchronization references.
Figure 4-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 central office shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to the slots for the two power filters and two controller cards, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf contains 16 function card slots. Slot 10 (and Slot 11) at
the top of the shelf holds the user interface panel on units that are used as main shelves
(see Figure 4-6, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 Shelf slot layout” (p. 4-12)). A fan tray for
cooling is located at the bottom of the shelf in Slot 21.
Figure 4-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 end office shelf
Master/multiple shelf description

When used in a multiple-shelf configuration, each 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf has
a shelf ID Number that can be configured via a physical mechanism (2 rotary dials on
each shelf). Up to eight bits of information can be set. On 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16
shelves, the rotary dial is located on the backplane. On the 1830 PSS-36 shelf, a rotary
dial is located on each of the two the BTC modules. The lower nibble is set on BTC1 in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
slot 1 (42), and the higher nibble is set on BTC2 in slot 22 (43). The Shelf ID determines
the identity and role of each universal shelf in a cluster. The most significant bit of the
rotary dial determines its role (main or extension shelf).
The rotary dial for each shelf must be set to a valid value; this value must be unique
within the same NE. The values of the rotary dial shall be interpreted as follows.
Bits 4-3-2-1-0 code the Shelf ID Number, an integer in the range 1-8.
• Bit 7 = zero >> Shelf role = not-Main Shelf
• Bit 7 = one >> Shelf role = Main Shelf
Bits 6-5 of the rotary dial must be set to 0 (zero).
The following tables lists the shelf combinations that are supported for Main and
Extension shelves.
Table 4-1 Main and Extension supported shelf combinatons
Main shelf Extension shelves1 Non-universal shelves

1830 PSS-36 0 to 3 PSS-36 shelves DCM
ITLB, ITLU
SFD44, SFD44B
2
Mixed: DCM
0 to 23 PSS-32 shelves ITLB, ITLU
0 to 2 PSS-36 shelves SFD40, SFD40B,
SFD44, SFD44B
1830 PSS-32 0 to 23 1830 PSS-32 shelves DCM
ITLB, ITLU
SFD40, SFD40B,
SFD44, SFD44B
Mixed:2 DCM
0 to 23 PSS-32 shelves ITLB, ITLU
SFD40, SFD40B,
SFD44, SFD44B
1830 PSS-16 0 to 23 1830 PSS-32 shelves DCM
ITLB
ITLU
SFD40
SFD40B
SFD44
SFD44B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. Numbers in this column indicate the number of extension shelves possible, not the Shelf ID
number of the shelves. The Main shelf is always shelf ID 1. Extension shelves can have ID
2-24.
2. Maximum of 23 combined shelves
Single-shelf layout
A single-shelf network element (NE) consists of one 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf
acting as a main shelf. One shelf in each NE has the role of main shelf. This designation
is by a backplane rotary dial setting of 0x81 (Shelf Role = Main Shelf, Shelf ID = 1).
When a shelf boots up and finds that its rotary dial is set to 0x81, it automatically
provisions itself with AID = SHELF-1 and TYPEID = UNV. The shelf then begins to
perform the role of the main shelf, relative to control and communication functions within
an NE.
Note: Two main shelves (i.e., two NEs) can not be connected by internal LAN cable
as if they belonged to a single NE (that is, as if one was subordinate to the other).
Mandatory shelf equipment overview

Each shelf contains mandatory modules with which it must be equipped. Some of the
shelves can also be equipped with optional modules.
1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16
Mandatory equipment must be automatically provisioned whether present or not. Each
shelf includes the following mandatory equipment.
• One shelf controller (EC) (can be in either EC slot)
• Two power modules (PF)
• A fan module (FAN)
• User interface panel (USRPNL) — mandatory on the main shelf only, and not allowed
on other shelves
Mandatory equipment is provisioned without AINS state. (AINS = Automatic In Service,
which allows newly provisioned entities to be inserted at the later time without generating
alarms). Therefore, if mandatory equipment is not present, it will be alarmed (assuming
its absence is detected).
Note: Automatic provisioning of mandatory equipment differs from the
"auto-provisioning" defined for non-mandatory equipment. Mandatory equipment is
provisioned regardless of module presence detection. Non-mandatory equipment is
auto-provisioned only upon equipment detection and validation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36
Mandatory equipment must be automatically provisioned whether present or not.
Mandatory equipment is provisioned without AINS state. Therefore, if mandatory
equipment is not present it will be alarmed if detected. Each shelf includes the following
mandatory equipment.
• 1 First Level Controller (FLC)
Only on a Master shelf. The FLC is not allowed on Extension shelves.
• 1 matrix zero controller (MT0C)
• 2 bus termination cards (BTC)
• 2 power modules (PF)
• 1 fan module (FAN)
Shelf controllers
The universal shelves support redundant controllers. Valid combinations are shown in the
following table.
Main Shelf Type Main Shelf PSS-36 Subtending PSS-32 Subtending

Controllers Shelf Controllers Shelf Controllers
PSS-36 1 FLC 1 MT0C 1 EC
1 MT0C
2 FLC 1 MT0C 1 EC
1 MT0C
1 FLC 2 MT0C 2 EC
2 MT0C
2 FLC 2 MT0C 2 EC
2 MT0C
PSS-32 1 EC - 1 EC
2 EC - 2 EC
PSS-16 1 EC - 1 EC
2 EC - 2 EC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf slot layout
Refer to Figure 4-4, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf slot layout” (p. 4-10) for an
illustration for the 1830 PSS-36 shelf slots.
Figure 4-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf slot layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-5, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Shelf slot layout” (p. 4-11) for an
illustration of the 1830 PSS-32 shelf slots.
Figure 4-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Shelf slot layout

The 16 universal slots are arranged in two rows of 8, on either side of each other. There
are 21 total slots, including slots for Equipment Controllers, Power Filters, and fans. Slots
are numbered 1 through 21 as illustrated in Figure 4-6, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16
Shelf slot layout” (p. 4-12).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 Shelf slot layout
Supported packs
The supported packs and slot location for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf are
shown in Table 4-2, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 card list and limits” (p. 4-12).
Note: Cards not noted otherwise, are targeted for installation in 1830 PSS-32 only
(also see, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 hardware application” (p. 2-116)).
Note: When a circuit pack is inserted into an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16, the
system will automatically determine if a FPGA software upgrade is required. If a
FPGA software upgrade is required, the system will automatically initiate the upgrade
on the circuit pack. If the circuit pack is removed before the upgrade is completed, it
will result in the pack becoming inoperable.
Table 4-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 card list and limits
Card Func- Re- Max. per shelf Card Slots

tion quired PSS-36 PSS-32 PSS-16 PSS-36 PSS-32 PSS-16
USRPNL User 1 per — 1 1 — 40 10
Interface main
Panel shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-2 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 card list and limits (continued)

PF Power 2 (1 2 2 2 44, 45 19, 36 1, 11
Filter w/alarms)
FAN Fan 1 1 1 1 41 37 21
Sub-
system
EC Equip- 1 — 2 2 — 1, 18 2, 12
ment
controller
FLC PSS-36 1 11 — — 23 — —
First
Level
Control-
ler
BT36 PSS-36 2 2 — — 42, 43 — —
Bus
Termina-
tion Card
MT0C PSS-36 1 1 — — 11 or 15 — —
Null
Fabric
Module
11STAR1 11G 0 32 32 14 2-9, 12, 2-17, 3-9,
Single 13, 20-35 13-19
Port 16-21,
Tunable 24-39
AnyRate
Tran-
sponder
(1 client)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11STGE12 11G 0 18 16 7 2-10, 2-17 3-9
Single 12-14,
Port 16-21
Tunable
GBE
Mux
Tran-
sponder
(12
clients)
11DPE12 11G Dual 0 — 16 7 — 2-17 3-9
Port
Plug-
gable
GBE
Mux
Tran-
sponder
(12
clients)
11DPE12E 11G Dual 0 — 16 — — 2-17 —
Port
Plug-
gable
GBE
Mux
Transponder,
Enhanced
(12
clients)
11DPM12 11G Dual 0 — 16 7 — 2-17 3-9
Plug-
gable
12-
anyrate
Mux OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11STMM10 11G 0 18 16 7 2-10, 2-17 3-9
Single 12-14,
Port 16-21
Tunable
Multirate
Mux
Tran-
sponder
(10
universal
clients)
11QPA4(A) 11G 0 18 16 7 2-10, 2-17 3-9
Quad 12-14,
Port 16-21
AnyRate
(4
clients)
4DPA4 4G Dual 0 — 32 14 — 2, -17, 3-9,
Port 20-35 13-19
Plug-
gable
AnyRate
(4
clients)
4DPA2 4G Dual 0 — 32 14 — 2, -17, 3-9,
Port 20-35 13-19
Plug-
gable
AnyRate
(2
clients)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

43STX4 4x10Gb/s 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
MUX 16-19
Tran-
sponder
Multirate
Multipro-
tocol
MUX
Tunable
Tran-
sponder
(4
universal
clients)
43STX4P 4x10Gb/s 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
MUX 16-19
Tran-
sponder
Multirate
Multipro-
tocol
MUX
Tunable
Tran-
sponder
(4
universal
clients)
with
dPSK at
line port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

43STA1P 40G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19,
Port
Tunable
Anyrate
(1 client)
- PDPSK
modula-
tion
43STA1PB 40G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19,
Port
Tunable
Anyrate
(1 client)
- PDPSK
modula-
tion
43SCA1 43G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19,
Port
Tunaable
Anyrate
Coherent
(1 client)
A/D
43SCX4 43G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19,
Port
Tunable
Coherent
Mux
Tran-
sponder
(4
clients)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SCA1 112G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19
Port
Tunable
Coherent
AnyRate
Tran-
sponder
(1 client)
112SNA1 112G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19
Port
Tunable
Coherent
AnyRate
Tran-
sponder
w/enhanced
OSNR (1
client)
for
extended
reach
112SCX10 100G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19
port
tunable
mux (10
universal
clients),
coherent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112SNX10 100G 0 6 5 — 2-8, 12, 2-15 —
Single 16-19
port
tunable
mux (10
universal
clients),
coherent,
w/Enhanced
OSNR
for
extended
reach
CWR8 Colorless 1 per — 8 — — 2-16 —
Wave- degree
length for
Router TOADM/
(44 ROADM
channels)
CWR8B 8 1 per — 8 — — 2-16 —
Channel degree
Colorless for
Wave- TOADM/
length ROADM
Router
(Supple-
mental
Vendor)
(44
channels)
CWR8-88 Colorless 1 per 15 8 — 2-9, 12, 2-16 —
Wave- degree 13, 16-20
length for
Router TOADM/
(88 ROADM
channels)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WR8-88A 8-channel 1 per 15 8 — 2-9, 12, 2-16 —
wave- degree 13, 16-20
length for
router - ROADM,
add side AnyDir
WSS
WTOCM Wave- 0 32 32 14 2-9, 12, 2-17, 3-9,
length 13, 20-35 13-19
Tracker 16-21,
optical 24-39
channel
monitor
MESH4 1x4 0 17 16 — 2-10, 13, 2-17 —
splitter 16-20
with
optical
amplifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LD AHPHG 1 ingress 18 16 72 2-10, 2-17 3-9
(High LD per 12-14,
Power degree 16-21
High
Gain
Amp, w/
mid-stage
Acc.)
AHPLG
(High
Power
Low
Gain
Amp, w/
mid-stage
Acc.)
A2325A
(23dB
Variable
Gain
Amp,
w/mid-
stage
Acc.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LD AM2125A 1 ingress 18 16 72 2-10, 2-17 3-9
+21 dBm LD per 12-14,
output degree 16-21
power,
25dB
gain
optical
amplifier
w/mid-
stage
Acc.
AM2125B
+21 dBm
output
power,
25dB
gain
optical
amplifier
no
mid-stage
Acc.
LD ALPHG 1 ingress — 16 72 — 2-17 3-9
(Low LD per
Power degree
High
Gain
Amp, w/
mid-stage
Acc.)
AM2318A
(Low
variable
gain
amplifier
no
mid-stage
Acc.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LD ALPFGT 0 — 32 14 — 2, -17, 3-9,
(Low 20-35 13-19
Power
Fixed
Gain
Amp, w/
mid-stage
Acc.)
LD RA2P 0 — 16 3 — 2-17 7-9
Raman
Amplifier,
2 pumps,
no
mid-stage
Acc.
OPSA Bidirec- 0 32 32 14 2-9, 12, 2-17, 3-9,
tional 13, 20-35 13-19
Optical 16-21,
Protec- 24-39
tion
Switch
OSCT Optical 0 — 32 14 — 2-17, 3-9,
Supervi- 20-35 13-19
sory Card
Total
Power
SVAC Single 0 — 32 14 — 2-17, 3-9,
Port 20-35 13-19
VOA
Card
MVAC Multiple 0 — 32 14 — 2-17, 3-9,
port 20-35 13-19
VOAC-
ard
SFD5 5 channel 0 — 32 14 — 2-17, 3-9,
static 20-35 13-19
DWDM
filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SFD8 8 channel 0 — 16 7 — 2-17 3-9
static
DWDM
filter
SFC2 2 channel 0 — 32 14 — 2-17, 3-9,
static 20-35 13-19
CWDM
filter
SFC4 4 channel 0 — 32 14 — 2-17, 3-9,
static 20-35 13-19
CWDM
filter
SFC8 8 channel 0 — 16 7 — 2-17 3-9
static
CWDM
filter
Notes:
1. Duplex/redundant modules will be supported in a later release.
2. Use of 7 LDs assumes PSS-16 is equipped with a user panel.
3. Drop shelf configurations only
LEDs
The following information describes the LEDs found on 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
shelves and their indications.
Each variant of the has set of 6 LEDs that display node-level alarm information.
Individual Packs are also equipped with LEDs that indicate the status of the pack, and can
also indicated the status of ports on the pack.
Alarm status LED behaviors
Each variant of the has set of 6 LEDs for a node-level alarm summary. These LEDs are
located on the First Level Controller of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, and on the User
Interface Panel of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16.
The following is a listing of visual indicators for node-level alarm summary LEDs.
• CR/PROMPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A critical alarm: indicates a severe, service-affecting condition has occurred and that
immediate corrective action is imperative, regardless of the time of day or day of the
week.
• MJ/PROMPT
A major alarm: indicates a serious disruption of service or the malfunctioning or
failure of an important NE entity. This alarm requires the immediate attention and
response of a craftsperson to restore or maintain system capability. The urgency is less
than in critical situations because of a lesser immediate or impending effect on service
or system performance.
• MN/DEFRD
A minor alarm: indicates a condition that does not have a serious effect on service, or
for a condition that is not essential to NE operation.
• WARNING
Not currently used.
• ATTENDED
A standing alarm has been silenced by the ACO command, or button. When the most
recent alarm silenced by the ACO command is retired, this LED will be extinguished.
• ABNORMAL
Not currently used.
Alarm summary LEDs are activated when at least one condition in the NE with associated
severity exists.
Pack status LED behaviors on FAN, USRPNL, and PF
The status LEDs that appear on the Fan, user panel, and power filter packs have the
following indications:
• OFF: No power, or LED is defective.
• Green: The card is administratively in-service, and has no alarm.
• Amber: The card is administratively in-service and has a minor alarm.
• Red: The card is administratively in-service and has a major or critical alarm.
Pack status LED behaviors for OTs and other packs
The status LEDs that appear on OT, LD, SFD, SFC, and EC individual packs have the
following indications:
• OFF: administratively out-of-service or in a maintenance state.
• Green blinking: in-service with boot/load in progress.
• Green solid: in-service, no alarms
• Amber blinking: administratively in-service with a minor port alarm
• Amber solid: administratively in-service with a minor pack alarm and possibly a
minor port alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Red blinking: administratively in-service with a major or critical port alarm, and
possibly a minor pack alarm
• Red solid: administratively in-service with a major or critical pack alarm
OT Port status LED behaviors
The Port status LEDs listed above in R:EM-33510 have the following behavior.
• OFF: Port is in administratively out-of-service state (or LED is defective).
• Green blinking: Port is in an administrative maintenance state.
• Green: Port is administratively in-service, and has no alarm.
• Amber: Port is administratively in-service, and has a minor alarm.
• Red: Port is administratively in-service, and has a major or critical alarm.
OT Ethernet activity LED behaviors
The OT Ethernet port activity LEDs listed above in R:EM-33510 have the following
behavior.
• Green blinking: The port is provisioned for Ethernet traffic, and there is currently
active movement of Ethernet data packets on the port (either transmit or receive
packets). Note on green blinking: The LED should cycle on/off at least once (and if
possible twice) during every second in which Ethernet packet(s) are transmitted or
received. However the rate of blinking is subject to limitations of OT FPGA LED
control.
• OFF: All other cases. (Or LED is defective.)
Note: When blinking green, the LED should cycle on/off at least once or twice during
every second in which Ethernet packet(s) are transmitted or received. Beyond this, the
rate of blinking is subject to the limitations of the OT FPGA LED control.
SFD40/SFD40B temperature and signal LED behaviors
The SFD40 and SFD40B are the only multiplex/demultiple (filter) modules that have
active powered temperature stablization, and LEDs to indicate its status. They also have
an LOS LED.
The following indications are found on the SFD40/SFD40B:
• PWRA: Green when power is present on PWR A, otherwise OFF.
• PWRB: Green when power is present on PWR B, otherwise OFF.
• TOR: Red indicates there is at lease one MUX or DEMUX AWG temperature alarm,
otherwise OFF.
• LOS: Red when there is at lease one LOS alarm of MUX output or DEMUX input,
otherwise OFF.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Mandatory module details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mandatory module details

Description of mandatory modules
Mandatory modules are those modules that are required to support the basic operation of
the shelf, but do not support or define a specific NE configuration. The mandatory set of
modules required to support an 1830 PSS-36 shelf are slightly different from the set of
modules required to support 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16 shelves.
Mandatory equipment modules include the following..
• 1830 PSS-36:
– First Level Controller (FLC)
– Matrix Controller (MTC)
– Bus Termination Card (BTC)
– Fan module (FAN)
– Power Filter (PF)
• 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16:
– Equipment Controller (EC)
– User Interface Panel (USRPNL)
– Fan module (FAN)
– Power Filter (PF)
First level controller (FLC)

The First Level Controller (FLC) module is the 1830 PSS-36 node controller, and is
installed in slot 23 of a 1830 PSS-36 main shelf only. The FLC accesses and uses system
information from the 1M EEPROM located on BTC2 in slot 22 (43). It also provides an
OAMP LAN port for management connectivity, a CIT LAN port, a set of 6 LEDs for a
node-level alarm summary, an LED test button, and an ACO button. Figure 4-7,
“FLC36EA faceplate” (p. 4-27) illustrates the faceplate of an EC.
Figure 4-7 FLC36EA faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Matrix controller card (MTC0C)
In Release 3.6, the "matrix zero" card (MT0C) is supported in 1830 PSS-36. This matrix
controller card contains a second level controller function (SLC), but no switch fabric.
The MT0C also provides 6 LAN ports for application use, SCN/AUX, VOIP, ES1 and
ES2 for extension shelf connections, and E1 and E2 for general-purpose external
connections.
The MTC is installed in both main and extension shelves. There are two MTC slots, 11
and 15. The use of both MTC slots for redundancy is supported in Release 3.6.
Figure 4-8 MT0C faceplate
Bus termination card (BTC)

The BT36 bus termination card (BTC) is necessary for operation of the 1830 PSS-36
internal communication bus, Slot ID determination, and Shelf ID determination. There are
two BTC slots physically located in slots 1 and 22. (Logically the BTC slots are identified
as slots 42 and 43. The logical designation for slots 1 and 22 will be assigned to an
inter-shelf timing card that will be available in a later release, and physically installed
over the BTC modules. See Figure 2-53, “1830 PSS-36 shelf slot numbering” (p. 2-96).)
For Shelf ID generation, both BTCs must be populated, since there is one Shelf ID rotary
dial on each BTC. The (lower nibble of Shelf ID is set on BTC1 in slot 1 (42), and higher
nibble is set on BTC2 in slot 22 (43). A 1M System EEPROM is located on the BTCs, but
is only accessed by the FLC on BTC2 (slot 22 [43]). It contains system information,
including the Shelf RIM and MAC addresses, TID, and provisioned IP address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-9 BT36 bus termination card
Note: The BT36 provides the connection point for an inter-shelf timing card (TC),
which is not supported in the current release.
Equipment controller (EC)

The Equipment Controller (EC) module provides main processing and communication
function in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 shelf and provides system
storage resource when the EC is located in the main shelf. Figure 4-10, “EC faceplate”
(p. 4-30) illustrates the faceplate of an EC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-10 EC faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 shelf contains at least one active EC.
A standby EC can be configured (and equipped) to provide controller redundancy. The
NE can operate normally (without alarms) with a single EC in each Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 shelf.
Active and standby controllers operate in non-revertive protection arrangement. In this
context, non-revertive switching means that if an EC switch over occurs for any reason,
including a fault, the system will not switch back to the original EC after the fault is
cleared.
EC protection provides both automatic switch and user-initiated switch capability.
When both EC modules are present in the shelf and they take Active or Standby
relationship:
• Active EC: This EC is responsible for all runtime EC operations in the system.
• Standby EC (when present): This EC is responsible for monitoring the operation of
the Active
Shelf ID
If the shelf ID is set to one (1), the shelf is designated as a main shelf.
On Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16 the Active and Standby ECs in the
main shelf are designated as Master ECs. There is always one (and only one) main shelf
per node. This shelf will always contain an Active Master EC and connectivity to the
USRPNL panel. If the node has only one shelf, the Active Master EC performs the
functionality of both the Master and the Sub-tending EC. If the node consists of multiple
shelves, the Master shelf contains the Master EC, and all subsequent shelves contain
Sub-tending ECs.
Note: The circuit pack hardware is identical for both the Master and Sub-tending EC.
Only the behavior of the pack changes based on the slot position and the shelf ID.
Active master EC
The Active Master EC performs the following functions.
• Maintains a “heartbeat” mechanism with its companion EC
• Provides the external LAN interface for management of all shelves in a multi-shelf
node
• Terminates and or generates all communications with the management system. This
includes communications intended to/from the Sub-tending shelves. It forwards
information intended for a Sub-tending shelf to the proper EC.
• Maintains persistent database and configures all shelves and packs in the node using
data in the persistent database.
• Maintains the power state of all cards in the local shelf and monitors voltage from the
power filters in the same shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Monitors the health of all packs in the same shelf and monitors the health of all
shelves in the node.
• Monitors the operation of the Active EC, provides access to all shared resources, and
updates its own persistent storage
Sub-tending EC
The Sub-tending EC performs the following functions.
• Provides protected communication with the EC in the main shelf (Master EC for a
node)
• The Active Sub-tending EC maintains the power state of all local cards in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 shelf and monitors the voltage output
from the power filters in the that shelf.
• The Active Sub-tending EC monitors the health of all packs in the local shelf and
forwards fault, and performance information to the Active Master EC.
• The Active Sub-tending EC monitors all services performed by a shelf and forwards
fault, and performance information to the Active Master EC.
• The Active Sub-tending EC coordinates all communication within a shelf and
communication to the master shelf.
• The Active Sub-tending EC stores LC application images in its local mass storage and
provides the application images from its mass storage unit to the LC cards in the same
shelf at boot time (when an LC card is reset or on request from the Master EC).
• The Standby Sub-tending EC monitors the operation of the Active EC, provides
access to all shared resources, and updates its own persistent storage.
Power filter
Power Filter cards condition the DC power feeds that power the network element (NE)
and protect against surge currents, low supply voltage, and other electromagnetic
interference.
Power filter modules
Battery plant redundant feeds are brought into the system through the power filter (PF)
modules and distributed to each slot through the backplane pins. External (typically,
battery generated) DC voltages are filtered by the two PFs and distributed within the shelf
by a copper power plane. Each PF provides the 3.6V service voltage that is distributed by
the backplane. PFs also provide power to the USRPNL panel in the main shelf.
The PF contains a circuit breaker on its faceplate that protects the battery feed. The PF
module is also the source of a shared (Stratum 3 accuracy, +4.6 ppm) precision clock
source that is used to generate the Wavelength Tracker modulation and serve as a high
precision clock source for other transmission-related services.
Note: The PFDCA is the only power filter that does not include a circuit breaker or
Wavelength Tracker capability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Point-to-point connections from each PF slot to all function slots, as well as the controller
slots, carry this clock signal. Providing these clock sources on the PF eliminates the need
to add highly stable 4.6-ppm oscillators on every circuit card that provides a Wavelength
Tracker encode or decode function. The PF module also contains a temperature sensor
that measures inlet air temperature which is then used to provide input into FAN control
algorithm (adjusting FAN speed based on inlet temperature).
There are four types of PF modules available for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 (based
on the maximum current supported by embedded circuit breaker): 20A, 30A, 50A 70A,
and 20A (without circuit breaker or WL Tracker). Also, 20A and 35A power filters are
available for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16.
The required PF module type depends on equipage in the shelf (refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide). Typical implementation is that
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 30A module is used for ILA (in-line amplifier, optical
regeneration sites) configurations; 50A module used for most universal shelves; 70A
module is used for shelf densely equipped with high power consumption packs such as
11STMM10 OTs. The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Engineering and Planning Tool
provides information about the required PF module type to be used in the specific shelf
(according to the entered services to be supported by the shelf).
The following figures illustrate the power filter faceplates of power filters with and
without voltage monitoring available for use in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 sub-racks .
Figure 4-11 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 power filter faceplate (without voltage
monitoring)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-12 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-16 power filter faceplate (with voltage
monitoring)
The following figures illustrates the power filter faceplate of power filters available for
use in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 sub-racks .
Figure 4-13 1830 PSS-36 power filter faceplate
FAN module
The fan tray plugs directly into the backplane and connects to the power, control, and
monitoring leads.
A temperature sensor that is located within each PF measures the inlet temperature.
During operation of the fan unit, the EC adjusts the speed of each fan according to the
algorithm that optimizes airflow and noise level to maintain required thermal profile in
the shelf. The EC also monitors the status of FANs in the FAN module and provides
Alarmed condition to inform users of a possible malfunction.
1830 PSS-36
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 the fan tray is located directly above the function card
slots. The 1830 PSS-36 fan tray contains three powerful FAN modules, each individually
monitored and speed-controlled by network element (NE) software.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-14, “1830 PSS-36 fan tray ” (p. 4-35) for an illustration.
Figure 4-14 1830 PSS-36 fan tray
1830 PSS-32
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 the fan tray is located directly above the function card
slots. The 1830 PSS-32 fan tray contains three powerful FAN modules, each individually
A high capacity fan tray, FAN32H (PN 8DG59606AB), is available for the 1830 PSS-32,
and must be installed in the shelf if one or more of the following packs are installed in the
shelf:
• 43SCX4 OT
• 112SCA1 OT
• 112SNA1 OT
• 112SA1L OT (XL band OT for drop-shelf configuration only)
• 112SCX10 OT
• 112SNX10 OT
• 112SCX10L OT (XL band OT for drop-shelf configuration only)
• RA2P Raman amplifier module
1830 PSS-16
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 the fan tray is located directly below the function card
slots. The 1830 PSS-16 fan tray contains five powerful FAN modules, each individually
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interface panel (USRPNL)

USRPNL is a module that is installed in an 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 main shelf in
the network element (NE) and provides the following functions.
• Visual status indication (node LED indication)
• Management and communication physical access points
• External Input/Output access points
• Miscellaneous interactive buttons
Management and communication access points consist of the following interfaces.
• Craft Ports
– The 1830 PSS-16 has a single USB-B craft port
– The 1830 PSS-32 has two craft ports. One is designed as a female (DB-9) and the
other a USB-B port.
Both support local RS-232C serial interface (support setting: 38,400 baud, 1 stop
bit, no parity) for connection to craft terminal via a serial link. When USB-B port
and DB9 ports are simultaneously connected, preference is given to the USB-B
port. The USB-B port becomes active, and the DB-9 port is rendered inactive.
– Four general-purpose switched auto-sensing LAN ports (10/100BaseTX), for
connection to EMS/NMS, VoIP, and externally managed devices.
The OAMP port connect NE to the External Management System (EMS). The
VoIP port connect an IP phone to an IP managed DCN within 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 domain. The two external LAN ports, E1 and E2, connect
to externally managed devices, like RAMAN or EDFA power booster amplifiers.
These ports are auto-sensing, so either a crossover or straight-through Ethernet
cable can be used.
One User Panel is supported on the Master Shelf of an NE. This provides a
maximum of 2 LAN ports for external RAMAN or Booster devices per NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: A management LAN port and the device to which it is connected must both be
configured in the same way, either with a fixed speed/duplex setting for both, or
auto/auto for both. If the management LAN port is configured as auto/auto and the
device at the other end is configured to a fixed speed/duplex setting, the management
LAN port will default to half duplex operation.
External input/output access points are implemented as DB-9, DB-15, DB-25, and USB
connectors. They are dedicated to rack lamps (RL), rack alarm (RA), and housekeeping
(HKP) interfaces. Housekeeping interface represents four relay contacts used as
controlled outputs and eight miscellaneous external inputs.
• Rack lamps (RL): One DB-9 connector
• Rack alarms: One DB-15 connector
Rack lamps and Rack alarms are implemented as relay contacts controlled by network
element software (NE SW) to indicate presence of conditions of specified severity in
the NE.
• Housekeeping:
– The 1830 PSS-32 has a DB-25 connector associated with four relay contacts used
as controlled outputs and eight miscellaneous external inputs.
– The 1830 PSS-16 has a DB-15 connector associated with four relay contacts used
as controlled outputs and six miscellaneous external inputs.
Refer to Figure 4-17, “1830 PSS-32 USRPNL faceplate” (p. 4-37) for an illustration.
Figure 4-17 1830 PSS-32 USRPNL faceplate
Refer to Figure 4-18, “1830 PSS-16 USRPNL faceplate” (p. 4-37) for an illustration.
Figure 4-18 1830 PSS-16 USRPNL faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36 USRPNL functions

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 is not equipped with a separate USRPNL. The functions
found on the USRPNL of the 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16 are distributed across the
FLC, MT0C, PF, and BTC modules on the 1830 PSS-36. See “Administrative and
supporting (USRPNL) functions” (p. 2-104) for details.
Non-mandatory modules
Description of non-mandatory modules
Non-mandatory modules can be grouped into three categories, consisting of the following
components:
• Core optics modules
– Line Drivers (LDs) and optical amplifiers
(ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, A2325A, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, RA2P)
– Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) Total Power transmission pack
– Wavelength Tracker optical channel monitor (WTOCM)
– Wavelength routers: CWR8, and CWR8-88 (colorless), and WR8-88
– Static DWDM filter and interleaver modules (SFD5, SFD8, SFD40,
SFD40B,SFD44, SFD44B, ITLB, ITLU, MESH4)
• Optical transponder modules
– 11STAR11
– 11STMM10
– 11QPA4 and 11QPA4A (Hardened)
– 11STGE12
– 11DPE12 and 11DPE12E (enhanced)
– 11DPM12
– 4DPA4
– 4DPA2
– 43STX4 and 43STX4P (PDPSK)
– 43STA1P and 43STA1PB
– 43SCX4
– 43SCA1
– 112SCA1
– 112SNA1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Non-mandatory modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– 112SCX10
– 112SNX10
• Miscellaneous modules
– Optical Protection Switch (OPS) module
– Single Variable Attenuator Card (SVAC)
– Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)
Note: Most modules have applications on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36,
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelves, but some
modules are not targeted for applications on all shelves. For application details, see
“1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 hardware application” (p. 2-116).
Line driver (LD) modules

LD modules provide several important functions that comprise optical transport section of
a DWDM optical line, including:
• Unidirectional optical amplification
• Optical supervisory channel (OSC) generation/termination
• Dispersion compensation access points
• Optical line and individual optical channel monitoring points
• Optical monitoring access point (OSA access point for non-intrusive monitoring with
external equipment)
• Electrical access point for remote passive module inventory monitoring (DCM and/or
SFD44/SFD44B modules)
LD modules as optical amplifiers
Optical amplification function is performed via multistage EDFA amplifiers, most with
mid-stage DCM access. These amplifiers are implemented as integrated variable gain
optical amplifier modules (VGOAM) that include fast feedback for transient control.
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 includes the following VGOAMs:
• Low Power High Gain, with mid-stage access(ALPHG)
• High Power High Gain, with mid-stage access (AHPHG)
• High Power Low Gain Amplifier, with mid-stage access (AHPLG)
• Variable gain 23dB Amplifier, with mid-stage access (A2325A )
• Variable medium gain amplifier with mid-stage access (AM2125A)
• Variable medium gain amplifier with no mid-stage access (AM2125B)
• Variable low gain amplifier with no mid-stage access (AM2318A)
• High gain integrated 2 pumps RAMAN amplifier without mid-stage access (RA2P)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High gain generally indicates that the amplifier is capable of gain in the range of 30dB.
Low gain indicates that the gain of the amplifier is generally targeted to be less then 20
dB, although the AHPLG can provide gain in the range from 13 to 33dB.
A Low Power Fixed Gain Keyed Amplifier (ALPFGT) is also available. This is a
half-height module that provides 18dB of gain.
The LD/optical amplifiers (ALPHG, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPFGT, and 23dB-variable) are
used in various configurations, depending on target power and OSNR values in the
network. The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Engineering and Planning Tool is used to
design the DWDM network and select the type and number of LD modules on each
optical transport section (OTS) line. Each OTS line has at least an ingress (receive)
amplification module while some lines may have both ingress and egress (transmit)
amplification modules.
Each ingress LD module provides an optical supervisory channel (OSC) access point. On
short spans that do not require an optical amplifier an OSCT card is used to provide the
OSC access point. For additional information on the OSCT card, see “OSCT termination
card” (p. 4-45).
OSC provides high-speed data communication channel between adjacent OTS lines as
well as maintenance, monitoring, and customer clear channel communication function.
OSC is implemented as OC3 compliant digital structure with ~149 Mb/s payload capacity
for data communication and clear-channel transport. Physical layer of OSC channel is
implemented as 1510-nm OC3 SFP. An OSCT card is used to for applications where the
optical span is so short, that an optical amplifier is not required.
Each LD also contains two MON ports that can be connected to customer monitoring
equipment for monitoring the optical signal after the amplifier and output to the span.
Optional dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) are fibered to the mid-stage access
ports of amplifiers that support mid-stage access. The number and type of DCM modules
needed in particular points in an 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network is determined by
the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Engineering and Planning Tool, based on target
dispersion map required to support 10G services between any two points in the DWDM
network.
A DCM is expected for the following amplifiers. When a DCM is not equipped, a 10 dB
pad must be equipped for proper operation of the amplifier.
• ALPHG
• AHPHG
• AHPLG
• ALPFGT
• A2325A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the following amplifiers, while a mid stage access point does exist equipage of a 4dB
pad is not necessary for proper operation. These amplifiers are designed to be used with a
either short fiber loopback or a low loss/low latency DCM.
• AM2125A
The following amplifiers do not have a mid-stage access point.
• AM2125B
• AM2318A
Card Mid-stage DCM In-line DCM No DCM

A2325A, AHPHG, Yes No Yes
AHPLG, ALPHG
AM2125A
ALPFGT No Yes Yes
AM2125B, No No Yes
AM2318A
OSCT No No Yes
The following illustrations show the typical faceplates of full and half-height LDs. They
also show the difference between LDs with and without DCM access, and LDs with and
without the protective Line latch.
Figure 4-19 Full-height LD module faceplate (typical w/DCM access)
Figure 4-20 AM2125A faceplate (typical of DCM access and protective latch)
Figure 4-21 AM2318 faceplate (typical of no DCM with protective latch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-22 Half-height ALPFGT LD module
RA2P module
The RA2P is a full-height pack that occupies one slot. The C-band two-pump Raman
amplifier module (RAM-2) consists of two counter propagating Raman pumps and a Gain
Flattening Filter (GFF). The pump powers are automatically adjusted to maintain flat gain
for varying operating conditions and fiber types.
The RA2P Raman module has three modes:
• MaxPower
• AGC
• Manual
Note: Currently, the RA2P supports only Max power and AGC modes.
Functional description
Figure 4-23, “RA2P optical module block diagram” (p. 4-43) shows the optical block
diagram of the RAM-2 module. The two counter propagating Raman pumps have
wavelengths of about 1425 nm and 1454 nm. The total delivered output power at the
input port is at least 680 mW.
Note: To support the one or more RA2P Raman modules installed in a 1830 PSS-32
shelf, a high capacity fan tray (PN 8DG59606AB) must be installed in the shelf. The
fans should never be removed for longer than two minutes.
In the AGC mode, the module automatically adjusts the pump ratios to maintain flat gain
at the provisioned value. An on/off Raman gain value is determined during power on. The
Raman gain is then continuously monitored and the pumps are adjusted if required in the
event that Raman gain drifts from the provisioned value. In Max Power mode, the pumps
are adjusted to give the maximum possible flat gain on the given plant fiber.
Instantaneous on/off gain is also reported by system software.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-23 RA2P optical module block diagram
Figure 4-24 RA2P module
RA2P site planning

For optimum performance, it is critical to minimize the near-end fiber point losses due to
connectors, splices, etc. It is recommended that customers ensure the following general
guidelines are met during site planning and installation.
• Maximum of 0.5 dB office loss (from NE to OSP fiber).
• Maximum losses due to splices within 10 km (depending on total span loss) of the
R-NE should be < 0.5 dB.planning tool.
• ORL from any single point reflection should be greater than 33 dB.
• Total ORL from the OSP fiber (as measured at the NE using OTDR trace) should be:
greater than 26 dB for NZ-DSF fibers and greater than 29 dB for SSMF fibers.
Higher office losses and lower quality fiber can be supported with reduced reach. The
exact reach reduction is dependent on the magnitude of the deviation from the optimum
target and can be modeled in the Alcatel Lucent planning tool.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RA2P LAN Port
Connect the Ethernet port of the RA2P to the local PC (using an RJ45 cross-over cable)
or to the LAN (using a standard RJ45 straight-through cable).
Figure 4-25 RA2P LAN connector
MESH4 splitter with optical amplifier

The MESH4 is a uni-directional LD type pack that monitors and amplifies an input signal
and splits it into 4 outputs. It is used to split the MESHOUT signal from a WR8-88 pack
into 4 signals. The MESH4 contains a VGOAM-MLG optical amplifier module, and
meets the same eye safe requirements as other VGOAM equipped cards.
The VGOAM in the MESH4 supports a gain range of 7 to 24 dB. The VGOAM output
tilt can be adjusted from +4 to -4 dB. Tilt can be accurately controlled when the amplifier
gain is between 7 and 18 dB. Between 18 and 24 dB 8 gain, output tilt may be more
negative than indicated by the control setting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MESH4 ports
The SIG Input port is uni-directional and managed separately from the output ports.
Normal input power levels into the SIG Input port are designed in the Engineering and
Planning Tool. However, the Sig Input port generally operates over an input power range
of: -27 to +6 dBm.
The MESH4 has four SIGOUT Output ports. The SIGOUT Output is uni-directional and
managed separately from the SIG Input port.
The MESH4 SIG Output ports have maximum output power level of +17.0 dBm. This
limit is imposed by the VGOAM hardware and firmware minus the 1x4 splitter loss. In
operation software will determine actual output power.
The MESH4 provides a WaveTracker monitoring point for the SIG Input port.
OSCT termination card

The Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) Total Power transmission pack (OSCT) does not
contain any amplifiers. It is a single slot full-heigth card, cost optimized to provide OSC
termination for very short spans not requiring amplification.
The OSCT card terminates the OSC channel for OAM&P data transmission on lines not
requiring amplification. It provides an OC3/Ethernet link between adjacent nodes for
inter-node communications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-26 OSCT card faceplate
The OSCT card supports interworking between the 1696 and 1830 via the optical
supervisory channel in the same manner as the ALPHG/AHPHG pack. In this application,
the OSC format must be set to 100BASE-FX to interwork with 1696.
Wavelength Tracker optical channel monitor (WTOCM)

The WTOCM is a single-slot, half-height pack that provides per-channel power
measurements, and WT decoding for long-haul spans. It provides the ability to measure
channels that do not carry WT modulation, such as alien wavelengths, and control
channel power by looking directly at the power of the channel. The WTOCM can use a
tunable filter to detect the power levels of individual channels.
Figure 4-27 WTOCM faceplate
The connectivity between a WTOCM IN port and a LD MON RX or TX port is specified

as an attribute(s) on the WTOCM port. Topological links are not created for this
connection.
The MON TX and MON RX on an LD must connect to the same WTOCM. Once a
connection has been provisioned between a LD MON port and a WTOCM IN port,
software will not allow connection of the second MON port to a different WTOCM card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unkeyed optical channels are not supported by the WTOCM. Software will not allow the
provisioning of an unkeyed service across an LD with a WTOCM, and will not allow a
connection between a WTOCM and LD if there are unkeyed services on the LD.
Each line within an optical node, and each endpoint on an OMS span, must be configured
with the same WT capability, either long haul (with WTOCM), or standard (without
WTOCM).
• TOADM
• ROADM
• FOADM end terminal with DGE in path
The WTOCM is optional for the following node types:
• 2D+ FOADM
Note: Switch-over from WTD-only monitored network to a WTOCM monitored
network must be done carefully. The procedure for an in-service upgrade to WTOCM
is detailed in Appendix C of the , ISSUE 2. Failure to follow this procedure could
result in impacts to services.
Wavelength routers (CWR8/CWR8-88/WR8-88A)

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TOADM configurations are based on the 8-channel Colorless
Wavelength Router (CWR8 and CWR8-88). This configuration supports colorless
add/drop, with automated commission, power control, optical monitoring provision and
in-service upgrade.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ROADM configurations are based on the 88-channel
Wavelength Router (WR8-88A). The WR8-88A provides increased performance and can
be used for Anydirection configurations. The WR8-88A does not support colorless ports.
Like TOADM configuration, this configuration also supports automated commissioning,
power control, optical monitoring provision and in-service upgrade.
Colorless wavelength router (CWR8)
The Colorless Wavelength Router (CWR8) module provides one of the major functions
among the core optics packs which involves routing of optical channels (single
configurable wavelength or a set of configurable wavelengths) between OTS lines and
Colorless Add/Drop points. CWR8 module provides essential function for tunable optical
add/drop (TOADM) architecture. The main sub-module of the CWR8 is 1x9 Wavelength
Selective Switch (WSS), which allows configurable add/drop of selected wavelength(s).
As shown in Figure 4-28, “Functional diagram of CWR8 module within an optical line”
(p. 4-48), WSS is positioned in the ingress optical flow of the CWR8 module, while
egress optical flow consists of combiners and EDFA.
Figure 4-28 Functional diagram of CWR8 module within an optical line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Colorless 8-channel Wavelength Router (CWR8) packs support drop, through, and add
path.
• Incoming channels go through the first coupler, and part of the signal goes to
broadband drop port that connects to the demux port of the SFD44/10/5 for colored
drop.
• Signal can connect to a test port at the input to verify the connectivity during
commission.
• Up to eight (8) colorless drops are routed to service ports 1-8 of the 1x9 WSS. When
mesh is supported, one or more of these ports become mesh output ports. No
limitation exists on which of colorless ports are being used as mesh from optical
architecture point of view.
• Through channels are routed to through port 9 of the 1x9 WSS.
• The WSS has adjustable per-channel attenuation for equalizing drop and through
channels.
• Colorless add channel comes into the CWR8 from the OT via an 8x1 combiner and
are coupled with the colored add channel that comes from the SFD before the
add-amplifier.
• The add-amplifier is a fixed gain C-band EDFA. The output of this amplifier goes
through a VOA and is then combined with the through channel on a single fiber to
feed into the LD.
Figure 4-29 CWR8 faceplate
In addition to optical ports, the CWR8 module includes an electrical port that is used to
monitor remote passive module inventory (SFD44 modules). For additional optical port
information see Table 8-40, “CWR8/CWR8B insertion loss” (p. 8-62).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-30 CWR8 block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restrictions
The following list some of the restrictions to which the wavelength routers are subject:
• Because the CWR8 supports 44 even channels on a 100 GHz grid, the SFD40B and
SFD44B, which only support odd channels, cannot be used with a CWR8.
• The CWR8-88 supports 88 channels on a 50 GHz grid. An ITLB is required for all
CWR8-88 configurations with a SFD44 or SFD44B. It cannot only be equipped with
an even-channel SFD (SFD44), an odd-channel SFD (SFD44B), or both even and odd
SFDs for colored add/drop.
• The WR8-88A supports 88 channels on a 50 GHz grid. An ITLU is required for all
WR8-88A configurations with an SFD44 or SFD44B. Valid configurations for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 are, Odd channels only (SFD44B), /Even channels only
(SFD44), or Odd and Even channels (SFD44 with SFD44B) for colored/local
add/drop. On Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 configuration for only Even channels
(SFD44 only) are not supported.
88-channel colorless wavelength router (CWR8-88)
The CWR8-88 routes optical channels (a single configurable wavelength or a set of
configurable wavelengths) between OTS lines and Colorless Add/Drop points. Like the
CWR8. the CWR8-88 is a full-height module that plugs into 2 slots of space in the 1830
PSS-32 chassis. However, the CWR8-88 provides 88 channel support, with 50GHz
spacing, for tunable optical add/drop (TOADM) architecture. The main sub-module of the
CWR8-88 is 1x9 Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS-50G), which allows configurable
add/drop of selected wavelength(s) at 50GHz spacing.
As shown in Figure 4-31, “Functional diagram of CWR8-88 module within an optical
line” (p. 4-52), the WSS-50G is positioned in the ingress optical flow of the CWR8-88
module, while egress optical flow consists of combiners and EDFA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-31 Functional diagram of CWR8-88 module within an optical line
Colorless 8-channel Wavelength Router (CWR8-88) packs support drop, through, and add
path.
• Incoming channels go through the first coupler, and part of the signal goes to
broadband drop port that connects to the IN port of the ITLB for colored drop.
• Signal can connect to a test port at the input to verify the connectivity during
commission.
• Up to eight (8) colorless drops are routed to service ports 1-8 of the 1x9 WSS-50G.
When mesh is supported, one or more of these ports become mesh output ports. No
limitation exists on which of colorless ports are being used as mesh from optical
architecture point of view.
• Through channels are routed to through port 9 of the 1x9 WSS-50G.
• The WSS-50G has adjustable per-channel attenuation for equalizing drop and through
channels.
• A colorless add channel comes into the CWR8-88 from the OT via an 8x1 combiner
and is coupled with the colored add channel that comes from the SFD before the
add-amplifier.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The add-amplifier is a fixed gain C-band EDFA. The output of this amplifier goes
through a VOA and is then combined with the through channel on a single fiber to
feed into the LD.
• CWR8-88 also contains three IPDs that are integrated with WTD for optical channel
monitoring.
Figure 4-32 CWR8-88 faceplate
In addition to optical ports, the CWR8-88 module includes an electrical port that is used
to monitor remote passive module inventory (SFD44 , SFD44B, and ITLB modules). For
additional optical port information see Table 8-40, “CWR8/CWR8B insertion loss”
(p. 8-62).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-33 CWR8-88 block diagram
88-channel Wavelength Router (WR8-88A)

The 88-channel, 8 degree wavelength router (WR8-88A) is used in a ROADM to provide
bi-directional transmission of the optical signals. The WR8-88A broadcasts all received
channels to the DROP Out port and the three (3) MESH OUT ports, and selects channels
from the eight (8) ADD IN ports onto a single outgoing fiber connected to the LD Type
Pack. The WR8-88A will support 8 optical lines and 88 channels from the 88 channel
grid.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-34 WR8-88A faceplate
The WR8-88A is a pack that, in the drop direction, passes the OMS signal received on the
SIG port from the optical line to the MESH OUT 1-3 ports, the DROPOUT port, and the
THRU port. In the add direction, the WR8-88 circuit pack combines the signals input to
the THRU and ADD IN 1-8 ports through the WSS. The WR8-88 contains an additional
laser to simulate 3 channels on the line. The WR8-88A will manage all 88 channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-35 WR8-88A block diagram
Static DWDM filter and interleaver modules (SFD5, SFD8, SFD40, SFD40B,SFD44, SFD44B, ITLB)
Static Filter DWDM modules perform the following functions.
• Optical multiplexer function: receives colored optical signal from the transponder
subsystem, multiplexes the signal (together with other bands) into a WDM signal, and
launches the WDM signal to the OTS line directly (with or without an amplification).
Or, depending upon application, the signal may be sent to the colorless port of CWR8,
or through an ITLB to a CWR8-88 module.
• Optical demultiplexer function: receives the WDM line signal, demultiplexes this
signal, and sends the individual optical channels to the transponder subsystem.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports six types of Static Filter DWDM modules.
• Static Filter DWDM 5 channel (SFD5) module which can be inserted in one
half-height, single-width slot of the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf.
• Static Filter DWDM 8 channel (SFD8) module, which can be inserted in one
half-height, single-width slot of the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf.
• Static Filter DWDM 40 channel (SFD40) module that is implemented as an external
module, mounted in a rack outside the universal shelf. The inventory port of the
SFD40 is connected to the inventory port on a LD or OSCT card. The inventory port
should be connected to the same LD/OSCT as the Line to which it is connected.
• Static Filter DWDM 40 channel (SFD40B) module with 40 channel optical
mux/demux with channels at 50GHz offset from SFD40. It is implemented as an
external module, mounted in a rack outside the universal shelf. The inventory port of
the SFD40B may be connected to an inventory port on a LD or OSCT card. The
inventory port is connected to the same LD/OSCT as the Line to which it is
connected.
• Static Filter DWDM 44 channel (SFD44) module that is implemented as a passive
module mounted in a rack outside the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf. Inventory
monitoring for SFD44 is accomplished via CWR8 or LD electrical inventory access
points.
• Static Filter DWDM 44 channel (SFD44B) module with 44 channel optical
mux/demux with channels at 50GHz offset from SFD44. It is implemented as a
passive module mounted in a rack outside the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
Inventory monitoring for SFD44 is accomplished via CWR8 or LD electrical
inventory access points.
SFD5 module
SFD5 modules support set of five DWDM wavelengths from C-band. To cover the whole
C-band spectrum, eight types of SFD5 modules are supported: SFD5A, SFD5B, SFD5C,
SFD5D, SFD5E, SFD5F, SFD5G, and SDF5H.
The SFD5 card performs optical wavelength multiplex/demultiplex operations for five
consecutive ITU channels to/from an optical band. In addition, the SFD5 performs a
pass-through of all other bands from the SFD ingress port to the SFD egress port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-36, “SFD5 functional diagram” (p. 4-58)for an illustration
Figure 4-36 SFD5 functional diagram
The SFD5 module includes five bidirectional DWDM ports. These ports add designated
wavelengths to the DWDM line, to the multiplexed OMD port, to the Expansion port
(EXP), and to the monitoring port. The OMD port is connected to a CWR8 or LD in order
to access the DWDM line. The expansion port cascades multiple SFD5 modules to extend
the multiplexing/demultiplexing port range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD8 module
SFD8 modules support set of eight DWDM wavelengths from C-band. To cover the
whole C-band spectrum, four types of SFD8 modules are supported: SFD8A, SFD8B,
SFD8C and SFD8D.
The SFD8 card performs optical wavelength multiplex/demultiplex operations for eight
consecutive ITU channels to/from an optical band. In addition, the SFD8 performs a
pass-through of all other bands from the SFD ingress port to the SFD egress port.
Refer to Figure 4-37, “SFD8 functional diagram” (p. 4-59)for an illustration
Figure 4-37 SFD8 functional diagram
The SFD8 module includes eight bidirectional DWDM ports. These ports add designated
wavelengths to the DWDM line, to the multiplexed OMD port, to the Expansion port
(EXP), and to the monitoring port. The OMD port is connected to a CWR8 or LD in order
to access the DWDM line. The expansion port cascades multiple SFD8 modules to extend
the multiplexing/demultiplexing port range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD40 module
The SFD40 is a unit, which multiplexes and de-multiplexes up to 40 C-band DWDM
channels onto a single fiber. The SFD40 is a 1RU device, containing thermal AWGs, and
mounted externally to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf. The SFD40 requires
electrical power for internal heaters that maintain a target temperature within the device.
When used with other hardware to support an 88 channel environment, the SFD40
channels are referred to as the “even” channels.
Remote inventory information (EEPROM data such as module name, part number, serial
number) is monitored by the CWR8 or LD module that belongs to DWDM optical line to
which SFD40 is connected. Presence of an SFD40 module is monitored by an electrical
inventory connection to the CWR8 or LD module.
Figure 4-38 SFD40 module diagram
The SFD40 can be used with a companion SFD40B and other hardware to support up to
80 channels at 50GHz spacing.
Figure 4-39 SFD40/SFD40B faceplates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFD40B module
The SFD40B is a unit, which multiplexes and de-multiplexes up to 40 C-band DWDM
channels onto a single fiber. These channels are offset 50GHz from the channels of the
SFD40. The SFD40 is a 1RU device, containing thermal AWGs, mounted externally to
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
The SFD40B is designed for use with the SFD40 and an interleaver (ITLB), to support 80
DWDM channels at 50GHz spacing. In this environment, the channels of the SFD40B are
referred to as the “odd” channels.
Refer to Figure 4-40, “SFD40B module diagram” (p. 4-61)for an illustration.
Figure 4-40 SFD40B module diagram
number) is monitored by CWR8-88 (required for 50GHz spacing) or LD module that
belongs to DWDM optical line to which ITLB is connected.
The presence of the modules is monitored by electrical inventory connection to the
CWR8 or LD module. This connection can be daisy-chained through the SFD40/40B and
ITLB. (See Figure 4-47, “ITLB inventory port application” (p. 4-65))
SFD44 module
The SFD44 is a unit which multiplexes and de-multiplexes up to 44 C-band DWDM
channels onto a single fiber at 100GHz spacing. The SFD44 is a passive device mounted
externally to the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf in its own 2RU (two rack unit height)
OMD shelf. When used with other hardware to support an 88 channel environment, the
SFD44 channels are referred to as the “even” channels.
number) is monitored by the CWR8 or LD module that belongs to DWDM optical line to
which SFD44 is connected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-41 SFD44 module diagram
Figure 4-42 SFD44 faceplate view
Note: The INV1 port is the active inventory port on the SFD44. Some SFD44 filters
display an INV2 port, which is unused.
SFD44B module
The SFD44B is a unit which multiplexes and de-multiplexes up to 44 C-band DWDM
channels onto a single fiber. These channels are also at 100 GHz spacing, but are offset
50GHz from the channels of the SFD44. The SFD44B is a passive device mounted
externally to the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf in its own 2RU (two rack unit height)
OMD shelf.
The SFD44B is designed for use with the SFD44 and an interleaver (ITLB) that combines
the two sets of 44 channels to support 88 DWDM channels at 50GHz spacing. In this
environment, the channels of the SFD44B are referred to as the “odd” channels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-41, “SFD44 module diagram” (p. 4-62)for an illustration.
Figure 4-43 SFD44B module diagram
Figure 4-44 SFD44B faceplate view
number) is monitored by CWR8-88 (required for 50GHz spacing) or LD module that
belongs to DWDM optical line to which ITLB is connected.
The presence of the passive modules is monitored by electrical inventory connection to
the CWR8 or LD module. This passive connection can be daisy-chained through the
SFD44B and ITLB. (See Figure 4-47, “ITLB inventory port application” (p. 4-65))
88 channel interleaver (ITLB)

The ITLB is designed to be used in combination with the SFD44 and SFD44B. The
SFD44 and SFD44B each combine and demux 44 wavelength signals at 100GHz spacing.
However, the signals of the SFD44B are offset 50GHz from the signals of the SFD44.
The 44 wavelengths of the SFD44 are referred to as the 'even' group of signals, and the
wavelengths of the SFD44B are referred to as the 'odd' group of signals.
The ITLB combines and demuxes the odd and even sets of signals into a single group of
88-channel group of signals with 50GHz spacing. Add/Drop capability for the 88 signals
is provided by the CWR8-88.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-45 ITLB block diagram
Figure 4-46 ITLB faceplate view
The ITLB is a passive module that is installed in the same shelf as the DCMs. It has an
inventory port that can be connected to the inventory port of a CWR8-88 or LD card. It
also has two inventory ports that can serve as an inventory hub for a DCM, and one end
of an SFD44/SFD44B, as shown in Figure 4-47, “ITLB inventory port application”
(p. 4-65).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-47 ITLB inventory port application
Static filter CWDM modules (SFC2/4/8 )

The Static Filter CWDM 2/4/8 (SFC2/4/8) card performs optical wavelength
multiplex/demultiplex operations for 2/4/8 consecutive ITU coarse channels out of total
eight channels. There are 4/2/1 SFC2/4/8 variants. In addition, the SFC2/4 performs a
pass-through of all other channels from the OMD In port to the OMD Out port (and the
reverse).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-48, “SFC4 module” (p. 4-66) for an illustration that shows this with the
SFC4 module.
Figure 4-48 SFC4 module
SFC2/4/8 module has two, four, or eight bidirectional CWDM ports, respectively, for
adding designated wavelengths to the CWDM line, multiplexed OMD port, and to the
expansion port (EXP) port. OMD port is connected to the outside plant CWDM line while
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expansion port is used for cascading multiple SFC modules to extend the
multiplexing/de-multiplexing port range. SFC2 & 4 are implemented as half-height
modules. SFC8 is a full-height universal slot module.
Optical transponder (OT) modules

The traditional function of optical transponder (OT) modules is to provide
optical-electrical-optical (O-E-O) signal processing and adaptation of a colorless signal to
a specific optical channel wavelength within a DWDM/CWDM domain. In addition to
O-E-O signal regeneration, OTs perform various other functions in an electrical domain,
such as adaptation of client information structure to a carrier information structure,
multiplexing of client signals onto a carrier, cross-connection or protection function,
maintenance/monitoring function, data communication function, etc.
Generic OT model can be described through an interaction with other subsystems
(through a backplane electrical connections) and external world (through a front faceplate
access).
Typical OT function provides O-E-O conversion. All transmission interface is through a
front access via optical transceivers. Some OT applications such as “ADM on a blade”
might require some type of switching sub-function and transmission interface in the
backplane towards a companion ADM OT. Furthermore, hybrid OT/TDM/IO
implementation might require transmission interfaces on the backplane side. Besides
transmission interfaces, ADM on a blade might require protection control signals between
the ADM and companion OTs.
Front side of the OT also provides status indication via a set of LEDs and possible other
indicators.
OT function also requires control, power, communication—and in some
applications—timing interfaces in the backplane (note that COM indicates
communication interface to the system control infrastructure).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-49, “Generic OT functional model” (p. 4-68) for an illustration.
Figure 4-49 Generic OT functional model
Specific OT module descriptions

This section provides a functional view of all OT functions supported by 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51. Internal hardware architecture for
specific OTs, their transmission interfaces, signal processing, protection capability, status
indication, and to a certain extent, control and timing interface are also described.
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 supports optical transponder
modules:
• 11STAR11 client port multi-service module with 11G tunable line side
• 11STMM10 — client port multi-service module with 11G tunable line side
• 11QPA4 and 11QPA4A (Hardened) — 2 OTU-2 line interfaces for Regen/CrossRegen
operation, or add/drop multiplexing of 4 multi-rate multi-protocol client interfaces
• 11STGE12 — 12 client Ethernet port with 11G tunable line side
• 11DPE12 and 11DPE12E (enhanced)— 12 client interfaces (11G Dual Port Pluggable
GBE) that can be muxed onto two 10G DWDM paths
• 11DPM12 — 12 multirate client interfaces that can be muxed onto two OTU2
DWDM or CWDM paths
• 4DPA4 — 4 multi-service client ports (SFP optics) for non-blocking multiplexing to
one or both line ports
• 4DPA2 — 2 multi-service client ports (SFP optics) for non-blocking multiplexing to
one or both line ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 43STX4 and 43STX4P (PDPSK) — 4 multi-rate multi-protocol client interfaces for
multiplexing client signals to an OTU-3 line
• 43STA1P — 43G Single Port Tunable Anyrate Add/Drop Transponder - optimized for
88 C-band channels, PDPSK
• 112SCA1 — 1 100GBE hot-pluggable client and 1 OTU4 non-pluggable line
interface
• 112SNA1 — 1 100GBE hot-pluggable client and 1 OTU4 non-pluggable line
interface with improved OSNR for extended reach
• 112SCX10 — 10Gb/s universal client interfaces multiplexed into one-OTU4 line
Interface
• 112SNX10 — 10Gb/s universal client interfaces multiplexed into one-OTU4 line
interface with improved OSNR for extended reach
All OT modules support the following basic functionality.
Transmission
• OTs provide multi-rate and multi-protocol interfaces. Signal types, rates, or protocol
types configurable through a user interface.
• OT physical interfaces are implemented as either tunable transceiver modules or as
PTMs (SFPs/XFPs).
• OTs provide inventory, monitoring, and digital diagnostics for XFP and SFP modules.
[PTMs that provide this function are qualified, and their EEPROM format/content and
monitoring capability will comply to appropriate mid-stage access amplifier (MSA).]
• Line-side signal digital structures are compliant with pertinent ITU-T G.709
structures.
• Line-side FEC is provisionable for standard G.709 FEC [(Reed-Solomon (255,239)
codec] and EFEC, for higher coding gain.
• Line-side tunability: All 88 channels (44 channels on 43STX4). Optical frequency can
be configured by network element software (NE SW).
Faults and maintenance
• Fault processing is performed consistent with ITU-T functional models pertinent to
OT implementation (fault processing includes defect detection/clearing, correlation,
and consequent actions).
• Fault processing not explicitly defined in standard documents (such as provisionable
consequent action type towards the client, Laser_off, and Unframed_AIS).
• Ethernet services support all PDU sizes, including jumbo frames.
• Transport of Ethernet services support link fault propagation for Remote Fault
Indication as well as loss of signal and loss of character/block synchronization. GFP
transport modes use Client Management frames to transfer fault indication to the
far-end. As a result of detecting client management frame with fault indication,
associated transmitter will be turned off or maintenance signal generated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Loopbacks: Each OT supports terminal and line loopback type on each of the ports.
Facility loopback is defined as ability for the received optical/electrical external
transmission signal of being looped back from the port function input back toward the
port function output. Terminal loopback is defined as ability for the electrical
transmission signal (on optical interface port functions) of being looped back from the
port function output back toward the port function input
• Each of the OT ports that can be configured as a DWDM line port and provides
ability to encode Wavelength Tracker label.
• Status indicators are implemented as LEDs. There is a dedicated OT pack status and
individual port status indicators (LEDs).
• OTs are designed to support software upgrades that can be implemented in non-traffic
affecting manner.
• Firmware upgrade capability.
4DPA4 OT module
The 4DPA4, sometimes referred to as the MSC (Multi-Service Card), is a half-height,
single-wide card that accepts up to four client signals via SFP optics, and performs
non-blocking multiplexing into one or both line ports.
There are four PTM client interfaces: two at the top, and two at the bottom. The middle of
the faceplate has sockets for the dual line interfaces: two eVOA SFPs and two line port
SFPs. Line transmit fibers are externally connected through the eVOA ports for
Wavetracker functionality. There is a pack status LED in the upper right corner of the
faceplate. Each port has a dedicated port status LED, and each port also has a second
LED. The second LED is used on client ports is used to indicate dynamic Ethernet
activity, and is not used on line ports and eVOA ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-50 4DPA4 faceplate
4DPA4 functional description

The 4DPA4 is a half-height, single-wide card that accepts up to four client signals via
SFP optics, and performs non-blocking multiplexing into one or both line ports. It has
dual pluggable OTU1 line ports that support B&W, CWDM, or DWDM line signals, and
supports a variety of sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder
mappings. To identify specific PTMs and their application, see Table 8-2, “4DPA4 and
1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (FlexMux)” (p. 8-8), and Table 8-3, “4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1
MD4H SFPs (DualTran)” (p. 8-11).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line ports
The 4DPA4 ODU1 line ports must be manually provisioned, They are not automatically
provisioned when the card is installed as is the case for other OTs on the 1830 PSS-32.
Each ODU1 is divided into 16 proprietary time slots. Signals from the client ports can be
assigned to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements by the internal switch in
the 4DPA4.
Note: Pluggable line port OTs only support 44 even channels. The SFPs supported on
4DPA4 line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from the pluggable OTs
may only traverse 100 GHz systems, unless muxed with a tunable OT (11STMM10).
The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on the 4DPA4 can be provisioned as
ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN, as described in “Line port utilization” (p. 4-72).
Line port utilization
The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on the 4DPA4 can be provisioned as
ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN (see Figure 4-51, “Add/Drop operational mode”
(p. 4-72) and Figure 4-52, “CROSSREGEN operational mode” (p. 4-73)).
Figure 4-51 Add/Drop operational mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-52 CROSSREGEN operational mode
eVOA ports
The eVOA ports are used for Wavetracker encoding in some configurations. In other
configurations, the eVOA ports are not used. For example, the eVOA ports are not used
when the line is connected to an 11STMM10 or SFC client port. The eVOA ports are
provisioned and managed separately from the line ports. When used, the eVOA ports
must be manually created in the system. There is no automatic creation of these ports.
Client ports
The client ports are not configured automatically and must be manually configured. They
remain in the unassigned state until the user assigns a specific client signal type. Each line
port ODU1 is divided into 16 logical time slots. Signals from the client ports can be
assigned by the operator, to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements. The
types of client signals supported in this release, their operating bit rate, and the number of
time slots required for each signal are shown in Table 4-3, “Client signal time slot
requirements” (p. 4-74).
Client port mapping
Each line port ODU1 is divided into 16 logical time slots. Signals from the client ports
can be assigned by the operator, to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements.
The types of client signals supported in this release, their operating bit rate, and the
number of time slots required for each signal are shown in Table 4-3, “Client signal time
slot requirements” (p. 4-74).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the following table, all signal types support optical interfaces only, unless
stated otherwise.
Table 4-3 Client signal time slot requirements
Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time

slots
OC-3/STM-1 155.52Mb/s 1
OC-12/STM-4 622.08 Mb/s 4
OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gb/s Full ODU1/OTU-1
(no assignment needed)
1GbE 1.25 Gb/s 8 (electrical)
FE (100M Fast Ethernet) 125Mb/s 1 (optical only)
FC100 (1.0625G) 1.0625 Gb/s 7
(8B/10B, includes FICON.)
FC200 (2.125G) 2.125 Gb/s 14
(8B/10B, includes
FICON_Express and ISC-3
Peer Mode)
FC400 4.25 Gb's Mapped directly to
overclocked ODU1/OTU1
without timeslots.
Applies to cardmode=
DualTran only
(8B/10B, includes FICON.)
HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI 1.485 Gb/s 10
HDTV) (Optical interfaces)
SDSDI 270Mb/s 2
(SMPTE259M, Optical
interfaces)
DVBASI 270Mb/s 2
(8B/10B Optical interface)
Any of the four client ports can be mapped either of the two lines, bandwidth
permitting. As a result, flexible client-to-line configurations such as the following are
possible.
• 1:1 + 1:1 — dual transponders
• 1:1 + 2:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 1:1 + 3:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line
• 2:1 + 2:1 — dual mux
• 4:1 — all clients muxed onto one line
Examples of some of these configurations are shown in Figure 6. All connections are
bi-directional
Figure 4-53 4DPA4 client signal mapping examples
4DPA2 OT module
This card is intended for application in the 1830 PSS-16. It provides two client interfaces,
and two line interfaces for low-cost transport of OC-48, STM-16, and 1GBE signals, with
bit-transparent 3R regeneration and non-intrusive performance monitoring. The target
application is unprotected point-to-point services.
Figure 4-54 4DPA2 faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4DPA2 functional description
The 4DPA2 is a half-height, single-wide card. It is a 4G low-cost dual-transponder OT
with two PTM client interfaces and two PTM line interfaces, without OTN framing. (See
Table 8-1, “4DPA2 SFPs” (p. 8-7) to identify supported PTMs.)
In unprotected mode, the two independent bit-transparent transponders each have a fixed
association between one PTM client port and one PTM line port. There is no muxing,
encapsulation, G.709 framing, or OTN overhead communication.
In E-SNCP protected mode, only one client port is used. A bridge/selector function is
implemented in the matrix between this client port and the two line ports.
Although the eVOA SFP cages are present for future support, Wavetracker is not
supported in the current release. Consequently, optical power must be managed manually.
Client and line interfaces
The following client and line signal types are supported by the 4DPA2 OT. Client and line
signal types are identical.
Client/Line Signal Bit Rate Standard

OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gb/s GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.707
1GbE 1.25 Gb/s IEEE 802.3
Line ports
The 4DPA2 line ports are not automatically provisioned when the card is installed as is
the case for OTs that have a single line port. And, they are not created by direct manual
provisioning, as is the case with dual line port OTs (4DPA4 on 1830 PSS-32, PSS1GBE
and PSS1MD4 on 1830 PSS-1). Creating a 4DPA2 client port automatically creates the
corresponding line port, with the same signal type. For example, manually creating C1 as
OC-48 automatically creates L1 as OC-48, and likewise for C2 and L2.
Note: The 4DPA2 line ports only support 44 even channels. Odd channel SFPs are not
supported. The SFPs supported on the line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore
traffic may only traverse 100 GHz systems, unless muxed with a tunable OT
Client ports
The 4DPA2 client ports must be created manually. Upon pack insertion or
pre-provisioning, the client ports remain in the “unassigned” state until the user assigns a
specific client signal type. Even SFP insertion will not trigger provisioning of an
unassigned port.
Manually creating a 4DPA2 client port automatically creates the corresponding line port,
with the same signal type. For example, manually creating C1 as OC-48 automatically
creates L1 as OC-48.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manually deleting a 4DPA2 client port automatically deletes the corresponding line port.
For example, manually deleting C1 automatically deletes L1. Both ports must be
administratively down.
If one client port belongs to an E-SNCP protection group, creation of the other client port
will be denied.
11STAR1 module
The 11STAR1 module is implemented as a half-half slot multi-rate and multi-protocol
interface blade capable of supporting Tunable Transponder on the line side. It supports the
following client signals: OC-192, STM-64, 10GbE WAN PHY, 10GbE LAN PHY,
OTU-2 with G.709 FEC, and 10G Fibre Channel. Client signals are transported as
constant bit rate (CBR) signals, in which case transport is transparent to the client bit
stream and timing or encapsulated (using GFP encapsulation method). For information
identifying PTMs supported by the client ports of this OT, see Table 8-8, “11STAR1
XFPs” (p. 8-23).
When GFP encapsulated transport method is used, the pack is transparent for client signal
characteristic information, (Ethernet PDUs, preamble and semitransparent for sequence
ordered sets.)
11STAR1 pack allows user-configurable consequent action to the fault indication detected
on the line side signal. The consequent actions are Laser_OFF, Framed AIS (LFI ordered
set for 10GbE LAN), and Unframed AIS (Generic-AIS). Software and firmware upgrade
are non-service affecting. Latency through this OT is outside of FEC processing and is
negligible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer Figure 4-55, “11STAR1 faceplate” (p. 4-78) to for an illustration.
Figure 4-55 11STAR1 faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STAR1 functional description

Refer to Figure 4-56, “11STAR1 block diagram” (p. 4-79) for an illustration.
Figure 4-56 11STAR1 block diagram
The RS FEC encode/decode module performs the following add/drop functions.

Add direction (from client to line port):
• Terminates RS FEC field of an incoming OTU2 client stream
• Corrects errors using Reed Solomon error-correction algorithm
• Provides performance monitoring (PM) statistics for FEC correctable and
uncorrectable errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop direction (line to client port):
• Generates FEC field of an OTU2 information structure for an OTM-0.2 provisioned
client interface type when FEC is enabled
The SDH/SONET, G.709 and 10-GbE LAN processing module performs the following
add/drop functions.
• Maps incoming OC-192/STM-64 signal using asynchronous or bit-synchronous
method into an ODU2 information structure
• Encapsulates incoming 10-GbE LAN signal using GFP method (both GFP-F
compliant with G.7041 and proprietary GFP-P with preamble transparency) and maps
into a standard or extended OPU2 information structure (Extended OPU2 information
structure consists of seven unused OPU2 OH bytes in columns 15 and 16. Extended
OPU2 structure is used for preamble transparent GFP encapsulation mode.)
• Generates ODU2 and OTU2 OH fields (except for OTM-0.2 client signal
provisioning)
• Provides non-intrusive monitoring of incoming OC-192/STM-64 10-GbE LAN or
ODU2 streams
• Performs fault processing following relevant requirements compliant with G.798
Drop direction (line to client port):
• Terminates OTU2 OH fields
• Terminates ODU2 OH fields
• Bit-synchronously or asynchronously de-maps CBR10G signal from ODU2
information structure
• Provides PCS layer monitoring for CBR mapped 10-GbE LAN or 10-GFC signals
• Extracts 10-GbE LAN bit PDUs from GFP stream and generates PCS layer following
IEEE802.3ae
• Generates OTU2 OH for an outgoing OTM-0.2 provisioned signals.
• Provides non-intrusive monitoring of incoming OC-192/STM-64 or ODU2 streams
• Provides RMON statistics for 10-GbE LAN traffic in egress direction
The RSFEC/EFEC module performs the following add/drop functions.
• Generates FEC field of an OTU2 formatted signal based on either Reed Solomon or
EFEC algorithm (user provisioning determines which of the two will be used)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop direction (from line to client port):
• Terminates FEC field of an incoming OTU2 signal
• Corrects errors using Reed Solomon or EFEC error correction algorithm
The Tunable Transmitter (Tx) and Receiver (Rcvr) modules perform the following
add/drop functions:
• Takes the signals from the parallel data path
• Transmits the signals onto the line-side fiber
• Receives the line signal
• Recovers the line signal's clock
• Takes the signals onto the parallel data path to the next module, implementing the
tunable (44-/88-channel tunable) line-side interface
The eVOA (electronic variable optical attenuator) & Tap module performs the functions:
• Acts as an optical attenuator
• Provides input for Wavelength Tracker modulation
• Provides optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker
Wavelength Tracker module provides encoder function for optical path trace. It uses a
closed loop to maintain the modulation depth by monitoring the optical signal after the
modulation.
The XO module is an oscillator that provides a clock signal with an accuracy of ±20 ppm.
The PLL modules are phase-locked loops that condition the clock to be used as a
reference in appropriate module.
CLK reference is a pair of ±4.6 ppm reference clocks that are received from the shelf PF
modules.
Common CTL circuitry block provides adaptation between the system and local control
interfaces, allows shelf controller access to the on-board monitoring HW, points etc.
11STMM10 module
The 10xMultiRate MUX OT cards support multi-service multiplexing platform that uses a
time-slot structure, similar to the 4DPA4 to aggregate various lower rate client services
onto a 10G DWDM path. The pack is designed to be used in either point-point MUX
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
configuration to provide private line services to supported client data, SDH/SONET or
OTN signals, or add/drop MUX configuration to allow ring or SNC/UPSR type
protection for transported services.
In addition to the common OT features, the following set of features is supported by
multi-protocol client muxing OT – 11STMM10:
• A single-slot-wide, full-height card supporting 10x multi-service type interfaces
(GbE, FC, 2FC, 4GFC, OC-3/12/48, and CBR2G5)
• GFP-T encapsulation and VCAT mapping for Ethernet signals (Pack provides an
Ethernet private line service.)
• GFP-T encapsulation and VCAT mapping of FC signals
• Section (RSn) and Line (MSn) termination for OC-M/STM-N clients
• In addition to Section (RSn) and Line (MSn) termination for OC-48/STM16 this pack
also supports bit transparent transport of OC-48/STM16 when signal type gets
configured to CBR2G5.
• Card contains a 40G TDM Fabric (STS-1/VC3 switching granularity. Au3 level
management is not supported in SDH mode.)
• Two-level Transparent Muxing
If fewer than four client ports are used for OTU-1 connections to 4DPA4 or 1830
PSS-1 MD4H line ports, other available client ports on the 11STMM10 can be used
for other connection provided that sufficient bandwidth is available in the line. OTU-1
lines are transparently transported.
• Flexible port configuration: Any port-any service
Note: When the 11STMM10 card is used in transparent mode, the local onboard
oscillator is used for timing which may result in pointer justification events (PJEs)
being generated over time. This card is not suitable for transparent STM-4 operation.
For information identifying PTMs supported on 11STMM10 client interfaces, see Table
8-10, “11STMM10 SFPs” (p. 8-25).
Refer to Figure 4-57, “11STMM10 faceplate” (p. 4-82) for an illustration.
Figure 4-57 11STMM10 faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STMM10 functional description
The following description refers to Figure 4-58, “11STMM10 OT block diagram”
(p. 4-83) for illustration.
Figure 4-58 11STMM10 OT block diagram
The SFP module performs the following functions:

• Provides optical-electrical signal conversion in the ingress direction and forwards
serial bit stream to the SERDES in Line INF module
• Provides Electrical-Optical signal conversion and sends optical signal towards the
client
• Provides monitoring of analog parameters (OPR, OPT, LBC) and detects loss of
optical power dLOS
The Framer & PP module performs the following add/drop functions
• Forwards data signal types (8B/10B encoded signals) to GFP+VCAT module for
further processing
• Encapsulates and passes OTU1 structure received at the client port towards the
ODU1/ODU12 multiplexing function
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Provides RS and MS termination for SDH/SONET signals
• Monitors RS and MS layers as well as non-intrusive monitoring of Path layer
• Aggregates/interleaves SDH/SONET tributaries with VCG tributaries carrying data
signals onto an interface towards the “SONET TSI” module
• De-interleaves tributaries received from the SONET TSI module and forwards VCG
member tributaries to Jake for further processing
• De-encapsulates OTU1 digital structure
• Generates MSn and RSn layer for SDH/SONET ports
The MAC, GFP, and VCAT performs the following add/drop functions.
• Performs and maintains code-word alignment based on 8B/10B synchronization state
diagram IEEE802.3 and ANSI INCITS 352 (HW shall detect loss of code-word
synchronization according to clause 36.2.2.)
• Performs 64B/65B encoding and GFP-T encapsulation according to the rules specific
to client signal type and defined in G.7041 (GFP-T stream is forwarded to allocated
VCAT processing function.)
• Monitors PCS and MAC layers
• Performs VCAT processing and creating Virtual Concatenation Group for each client
signal processed (Up to ten VCGs are supported in the module.)
• Generates Path layer OH for VCAT tributary members
• Terminates VCGs: processes Path OH of the VCG tributaries, aligns tributaries
members of VCG, and extracts GFP streams from VCG containers
• Extracts MAC PDUs from GFP-F stream and generates PCS layer for GbE ports.
(Generation of PCS layer includes Auto-negotiation.)
• Extracts code-word bit stream from 64B/65B stream and generates of 8B/10B data
stream
• Egress PCS and MAC layer monitoring
The TSI block performs the following functions:
• Provides STS1/VC3 granular non-blocking switch fabric with at least 768x768
STS1/VC3 capacity
• Provides transparent transport of OTU1 and CBR2G5 signals
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PP block performs the following functions:
• Provides 10G Pointer Processing and Framer function
• Provides RSn, MSn, and Sn monitoring for incoming STS-48 structure
• Encapsulates/de-encapsulates transparent OTU1/OC-48 signals received from
DWDM line/TSI module
The G.709 & FEC block performs the following add/drop functions.
• Maps incoming signal using asynchronous or bit-synchronous method into an
ODU2/ODU1 information structure
• Multiplexes 4x ODU1 structures into and ODU2
• Generates ODU2 and OTU2 OH
• Provides non-intrusive monitoring of incoming STS48 or OTU1/ODU1 streams
• Terminates OTU2 & ODU2 OH fields
• Demultiplexes ODU1s from an ODU2
• Bit-synchronously or asynchronously de-maps CBR10G signal from ODU2 or
CBR2G5 from ODU1 information structure
• Provides non-intrusive monitoring of ODU1 and STS48 RS layer
The Tunable MSA module performs the following add/drop functions.
• Transmits signals onto the line-side fiber
• Receives the line signal
• Recovering line signal's clock
• Takes clock signals onto the parallel data path to the next module, implementing the
tunable (44/88 channel tunable) line-side interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Wavelength Tracker module provides an encoder function for optical path trace. It
uses a closed loop to maintain the modulation depth by monitoring the optical signal after
the modulation.
The CLK block selects the shelf timing source and distributes it to SDH/SONET
processing and TSI modules.
The PLL modules are phase-locked loops that are used to condition the clock to be used
as a reference in appropriate module. Number of PLLs is decided by the number of
independently timed signals carried within the OTU2 structure.
Common CTL circuitry block provides adaptation between the system and local control
interfaces, allows shelf controller access to the on-board monitoring hardware points, etc.
FEC latency
Enhanced FEC and RS-FEC both allow greater span distances without regeneration. But,
Enhanced FEC adds delay to signal transport. Each 5 μs of delay is equivalent to 1 km of
fiber. These delays must be accounted for in the Fibre Channel switch buffer credit
calculation. The expected delays are shown in the following table.
Signal Type RS-FEC EFEC2

FC-100 101μs 243μs
FC-200 93μs 235μs
FC-400 89μs 231μs
11QPA4(A) OT module
The 11QPA4 is a 10G, Quad port, any rate module with four client interfaces. This
module supports four independent multi-rate 10G channels. The 11QPA4A is the
temperature hardened version of this module.
The 11QPA4(A) has four pluggable client interfaces (C1, C2, C3, and C4), four pluggable
line interfaces (L1, L2, L3 and L4) and four VOA sockets (VA1, VA2, VA3 and VA4).
The pack has a status LED, but does not support status LEDs for the optical ports and
VOA ports due to physical limitations on the faceplate, but the WEBUI does support LED
status for all ports.
The 10G pluggable line port of the 11QPA4(A) supports 88 channels when configured
with a tunable XFP. When configured with a fixed channel XFP, only 44 even channels
are supported. Fixed odd channel XFPs are not supported. The fixed channel XFPs
supported on these line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from these XFPs
may only traverse 100 GHz systems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The client side supports the following functional features:
• The client side supports four B&W or CWDM XFPs
• The following Client signal types are supported for each channel: OC-192, STM-64,
10GbE WAN PHY, 10GbE LAN PHY, OTU-2 with G.709 FEC (10.709,
11.04,11.09,11.31,11.27), 10G/8G Fibre Channel (8G FC requires SFP+ or 8G
FC-capable XFP)
The line side supports the following functional features:
• The module is equipped with four SFP cages, which are shared by slow eVOA for
output power equalization, and fast eVOA for WT encoding.
• The line signal of each channel is OTU2 with provisionable RS-FEC or EFEC
(AMCC EFEC and ALU EFEC).
• In the bit synchronous mapping mode, the TX side is able to send out AIS when RX
side signal is lost and no frame phase discontinuity shall be introduced.
• 10G LAN transport supports three modes: G.7041 GFP-F, AMCC proprietary GFP
(now standardized), Overclocking (11.04Gbps and 11.09Gbps).
For complete information identifying PTMs for client and line interfaces, see Table 8-7,
“11QPA4(A) XFPs” (p. 8-21).
Figure 4-59 11QPA4(A) module
FEC provisioning
Depending on the required FED, the card can be used as a dual regenerator, using all 4
line side XFPs. However client-side XFPs cannot be used to have the card function as a
quad regenerator.
On the client side, RSFEC or No FEC can be selected when client signal is provisioned to
OTM-0.2. With No FEC: on the transmit end, the equipment will insert code based on RS
codec (on the client side) or EFEC codec (on the line side) in the OTU2 FEC area. On the
receive end, the equipment will ignore the content of the OTU2 FEC.
On the line side, one of the triple supported Forward Error Correction modes RSFEC or
AMCC EFEC (EFEC: G.795.1 I4) or ALU EFEC (EFEC2) can be selected. The fectype
parameter in CLI command is used to provision the FEC mode.
11QPA4(A) operational modes

The 11QPA4 and the hardened 11QPA4A support the following operational modes:
• ADD_DROP mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this mode, the circuit pack is processing signal in both transmission directions
(ingress, from client port towards the line side, from line side to client port). The
board supports C1 to L1 ADD_DROP. The board supports C2 to L2 ADD_DROP.
The board supports C3 to L3 ADD_DROP. The board supports C4 to L4
ADD_DROP.
• CrossRegen mode
In this mode, the Line port input signal is looped towards another line port output
through 8x8 matrix. The client XFP is not necessarily provisioned or equipped, and no
alarm or performance monitoring is associated with those client port. The circuit pack
supports CrossRegen between any two line ports.
Protected configurations
The 11QPA4(A) supports bi-directional Y-Cable protection for Ethernet client ports
(10GBE).
Bi-directional and uni-directional Y-Cable protection are supported for 8GFC/10GFC and
OC192/STM64 client ports. Currently, the 11QPA4 does not support uni-directional
Y-cable protection with CBR/GFP-F client mapping.
The 11QPA4 OT does not support Y-cable protection with an OTM0.2 client.
The 11QPA4(A) OT supports 1+1 E-SNCP protection configuration and O-SNCP
(Y-cable for up to 4 ports, or OPS). See “Electrical sub-block network connection
protection (E-SNCP)” (p. 2-82), or “Optical sub-block network connection protection
(O-SNCP)” (p. 2-81) for details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11QPA4(A) functional description
The 11QPA4(A) OT functional block diagram is as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-60 11QPA4(A) functional diagram
11STGE12 OT module
The 10xGbE MUX OT card provides an Ethernet multiplexing platform that aggregates
up to ten full-rate GbE client services onto a 10G DWDM path. By providing unrestricted
throughput and MAC PDU transparency for up to ten GBE clients. This pack also offers
Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service transport with proprietary Higig tagging, or
Q-in-Q tagging as defined in MEF and ITU-T documents.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to the common OT feature list, the following set of high level features are
available with the 11STGE12 OT.
• A single-slot-wide, full-height card supporting a multiplexing of 10 Ethernet
interfaces and a single 10G line interface
Line interface:
• DWDM tunable transponder with Wavelength Tracker encoder functionality
• 10-GbE LAN transport as CBR in 11.096-Gb/s bit rate structure
• Supports Sub-rate GbE Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) cross-connect provision
– CE-VLAN ID Mapping provision
– CIR/EIR bandwidth profile provision for sub-rate GbE signal flow
– Switching based on proprietary Higig tag for 32 sub-GbE signal flows at Line
port, or Q-in-Q (MEF 6.1) for 4096 sub-GbE signal flows at line port.
• Optical layer protection using OPS module
• Digital structure specification and G.709 monitoring, alarming, and consequent
actions
• Forward Error Correction mode configurable (RSFEC, EFEC) so that solution can be
flexible and take advantage of additional coding gain based on EFEC
• Performance Monitoring supports the following:
– G.709 interface monitoring
– Full RMON statistics
• GCC[n] processing for DCN extension to the access box (1830 PSS-1 GBE).
Client interface:
• Ten SFP pluggable client ports (Two unused SFP sockets will be used in the future
when statistical multiplexing and MAC bandwidth management is introduced.)
• Full throughput for up to ten (10) 1-GbE clients
• Mapping performed with simple port-to-VLAN mapping of incoming client PDUs
(No traffic shaping or rate limiting for ten ports.)
• Optical layer protection provided
• Performance monitoring (PM) supports the full RMON statistics
• Supports bidirectional Ethernet private line services
• Supports LOS Propagation to support diverse routes
See Table 8-9, “11STGE12 SFPs” (p. 8-24) for information about specific SFPs
supported by 11STGE12 client interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 4-61, “11STGE12 faceplate” (p. 4-91) for an illustration.
Figure 4-61 11STGE12 faceplate
11STGE12 functional description

Refer to Figure 4-62, “11STGE12 block diagram” (p. 4-91) for an illustration.
Figure 4-62 11STGE12 block diagram
The SFP module performs the following functions.

• Provides Optical-Electrical signal conversion in the ingress direction and forwards
serial bit stream to the SERDES into the Layer 2 switch module
client
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Provides monitoring of analog parameters (OPR and OPT) and detecting loss of
optical power dLOS
• Provides HW/SW control for laser ON/OFF consequent action and Y-cable (Y-cable
support for up to 4 ports)
The L2 Switch module performs the following functions.
• Aggregates client GbE MAC PDUs to dual 10-GbE line interfaces and to two other
10GbE interfaces to companion OT (Note that only error free MAC PDUs are
aggregated.)
• Provides 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet ports for both copper and fiber connections
• Provides ingress client PDU tagging and removal of tag at the egress without
bandwidth enlargement using headers
• Configures aggregation 64B/66B encoded stream by providing an effective data rate
of 10-Gbps with the ability to add provider tags without restricting client bandwidth
for up to 10-GbE ports [12-byte header is inserted before each Ethernet packet. This
header is used to segregate and forward PDUs within the L2 switch module. The
header uses 4 bytes of the IFG and the packet preamble (8 bytes), for a total of 12
bytes to avoid bandwidth reduction on aggregation link.]
• Provides PAUSE based flow control and auto-negotiation
• Provides RMON
The G.709 Framer module performs the following add/drop functions.
• Maps incoming 64B/66B encoded bit stream using asynchronous method into an
ODU2 information structure.
• Provides PM statistics for FEC Correctable and Uncorrectable errors
• Terminates OTU2 and ODU2 OH fields
• Asynchronously de-maps HiGig signal from ODU2
The FPGA module performs the following functions:
• Processes the ODU2 PCC/APS bytes in order to present them to software
• Provides GCC insert/extract from the TOH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 10G LAN/WAN PHY module performs the following functions:
• Converts the XAUI interface from the L2 switch to 10-GbE LAN over SF14
The Tx/Rx module performs the following add/drop functions:
Add direction (from client to port):
• Receives the signal
• Recovers the signal clock
• Takes the clock signals onto parallel data path to next module
• Implements the tunable (44/88-channel tunable) line-side interface
11DPE12(E) module
The 11DPE12 and 11DPE12E (enhanced) are 12xGbE MUX OT cards, providing an
Ethernet multiplexing platform that aggregates up to twelve full-rate GbE client services
onto two 10G paths, supported by B&W/CWDM/DWDM line-side PTM optics. By
providing unrestricted throughput and MAC PDU transparency for up to ten GBE clients,
this pack offers Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service transport with Q_in_Q
tagging mechanism, as defined in MEF and ITU-T documents. To identify PTMs
supported on client and line ports, see Table 8-4, “11DPE12 SFP/XFPs” (p. 8-12).
The 10G pluggable line port of the 11DPE12(E) supports 88 channels when configured
with a tunable XFP. When configured with a fixed channel XFP, only 44 even channels
are supported. Fixed odd channel XFPs are not supported. The fixed channel XFPs
supported on these line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from these XFPs
may only traverse 100 GHz systems.
Note: The 11DPE12E contains a more sophisticated switch which enables the
development of advanced features in future releases.
Although the full-rate mode of operation is the default for the 11DPE12 and 11DPE12E,
it supports full-rate, sub-rate, and Q-in-Q modes of operation as follows:
• Full-rate mode—The pack provides a full rate GbE service on each client port. Each
Line port can transport full 10 GbE services.
• Subrate mode—The pack provides more than one sub-GbE service on each client
port. The CE-VLAN ID is used to distinguish up to 10 sub-GbE services in HIGIG
mode. Each line port can transport up to 32 sub-GbE services using HIGIG for
transporting.
• Q-in-Q mode—The CE-VLAN ID is used to distinguish up to 10 sub-GbE services in
Q-in-Q mode. Each line port can transport up to 100 sub-GbE services using Q-in-Q
for transporting. Services can be provisioned from 0 to 10Gbps in steps of 50Mbps.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table identifies the functions supported by each of the three pack modes.
Service Full -rate (HiGig) Sub -rate (HiGig) Q-in-Q

EPL Supported Supported Supported
EVPL Supported Supported
CE-VLAN / VTS Supported Supported
mapping
SVLAN / line VTS Supported
mapping
VTS XC Supported Supported
LOS prog Supported Supported Supported
Double tag Supported
In addition to the common OT features list, the following set of high level features are
assigned to the 10xGbE OT.
• A single-slot-wide, full-height card supporting a multiplexing of 12 Ethernet
interfaces and two 10G line interfaces
• Supports statistical L2 multiplexing
Line interface:
• 2 x 10G line ports (B&W, CWDM, or DWDM PTMs)
• 10-GbE LAN transport as CBR in 11.049-Gb/s and 11.096-Gb/s bit rate structure
• Digital structure specification and G.709 monitoring, alarming, and consequent
actions
• Forward Error Correction mode configurable (RSFEC, EFEC) so that solution can be
flexible and take advantage of additional coding gain based on EFEC
• Performance Monitoring supports the following:
– G.709 interface monitoring
– Full RMON statistics
• GCC[n] processing for DCN extension to the access box (1830 PSS-1 GBEH).
Client interface:
• Twelve SFP pluggable client ports
• Full throughput for up to twelve 1-GbE clients
• Mapping performed with simple port-to-VLAN mapping and CEVLANID/VTS
mapping of incoming client PDUs
• Optical layer protection provided
• Performance monitoring (PM) supports the full RMON statistics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Supports bidirectional Ethernet private line services
• Supports LOS Propagation to support diverse routes
• VA1 and VA2 ports support power adjustment with SFP VOAs
• Supports eVOA management and WT encoding functions
Figure 4-63 11DPE12(E) faceplate
11DPE12(E) functional description

Refer to Figure 4-64, “11DPE12(E) block diagram” (p. 4-95) for an illustration.
Figure 4-64 11DPE12(E) block diagram
The SFP module performs the following functions.

• Provides Optical-Electrical signal conversion in the ingress direction and forwards
serial bit stream to the SERDES into the Layer 2 switch module
client
• Provides monitoring of analog parameters (OPR and OPT) and detecting loss of
optical power dLOS
• Provides HW/SW control for laser ON/OFF consequent action
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The L2 Switch module performs the following functions.
• Aggregates client GbE MAC PDUs to dual 10-GbE line interfaces and to two other
10GbE interfaces to companion OT (Note that only error free MAC PDUs are
aggregated.)
• Provides 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet ports for both copper and fiber connections
• Provides ingress client PDU tagging and removal of tag at the egress without
bandwidth enlargement using headers
• Configures aggregation 64B/66B encoded stream by providing an effective data rate
of 10-Gbps with the ability to add provider tags without restricting client bandwidth
for up to 10-GbE ports.
A 12-byte header is inserted before each Ethernet packet. This header is used to
segregate and forward PDUs within the L2 switch module. The header uses 4 bytes of
the IFG and the packet preamble (8 bytes), for a total of 12 bytes to avoid bandwidth
reduction on aggregation link.
• Provides RMON
The G.709 Framer module performs the following add/drop functions.
• Maps incoming 64B/66B encoded bit stream using asynchronous method into an
ODU2 information structure.
• Provides PM statistics for FEC Correctable and Uncorrectable errors
• Terminates OTU2 and ODU2 OH fields
• Asynchronously de-maps HiGig signal from ODU2
The FPGA module performs the following functions:
• Processes the ODU2 PCC/APS bytes in order to present them to software
• Provides GCC insert/extract from the TOH
The 10G LAN/WAN PHY module performs the following functions:
• Converts the XAUI interface from the L2 switch to 10-GbE LAN over SF14
The Tx/Rx module performs the following add/drop functions:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add direction (from client to port):
• Receives the signal
• Recovers the signal clock
• Takes the clock signals onto parallel data path to next module
11DPM12 OT module
The 11DPM12 transponder is a single slot wide, full height card supporting dual
pluggable line ports with flexible any-rate client signal aggregation, add/drop, and pass
through. With two line ports and flexible traffic configuration, the 11DPM12 OT can
provide ADM on a blade and E-SNCP functionalities. All client signals can be transported
in a bit-transparent or character-transparent manner over OTN.
The 10G pluggable line port of the 11DPM12 supports 88 channels when configured with
a tunable XFP. When configured with a fixed channel XFP, only 44 even channels are
supported. Fixed odd channel XFPs are not supported. The fixed channel XFPs supported
on these line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from these XFPs may only
traverse 100 GHz systems.
The 11DPM12 card supports the following features:
• Twelve client interfaces with B&W or CWDM PTM optics (SFPs)
• Support for the following client interfaces: OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16,
OTU-1 (G.709), 1Gb Ethernet, FC100/200/400, Optical HD-SDI, Optical SD-SDI,
3G-SDI
• Any service on any client port
• Independent service level switching between two line ports for all types of supported
signals
• Independent port level add/drop switching between any line port and any client port
• Full-rate non-blocking muxing capacity into one OTU2 line port: 8xGbE, 8x
OC3/STM1, 8x OC12/ STM4, 4xHD-SDI, 4xOTU1, 4xOC48
Full-rate non-blocking muxing capacity into two OTU2 line ports: 12xGbE, 12x
OC3/STM1, 12x OC12/ STM4, 8xHD-SDI, 4xOTU1, 8xOC48
• Two OTU2 line ports (10.709Gbps, provisionable) with EFEC (G.975.1 I.4) and RS
FEC (G.709), supported by CWDM or DWDM PTM optics (XFPs) and tunable
DWDM XFP. DWDM XFPs DTV control function is supported at both line ports..
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Drop_continue configuration (unprotected) is supported with the following
unidirectional ODUk cross connects:
– GbE with ODU0
– SD-SDI with ODU0
– HD-SDI with ODU1
• Wavelength Tracker encoding on line-side transmit, by separate PTMs on the
faceplate. (Each line has a dedicated SFP VOA That supports slow eVOA for
attenuation and fast eVOA as Wavelength Tracker.)
• Independent terminal and facility loopback at any line and client port
• Protection:
– Uni- and bi-direction E-SNCP per port level
– Uni- and bi-direction Y-cable protection (Inter-board) per port level, using
protection switching protocol with mate OT
Figure 4-65 11DPM12 faceplate
Add/drop and pass through cross connections

11DPM12 supports the following unidirectional ODU cross connections:
• At the DROP node—Drop traffic is modelled by a unidirectional ODU cross
connection from the Line port to client port. 11DPM12 supports at least one Drop
cross connection sourced from a Line LO-ODU entity.
• At the ADD node—ADD traffic is modelled by a unidirectional ODU cross
connection from the client port to Line port.11DPM12 shall support at least 2 ADD
cross connections sourced from a client LO-ODU entity.
• At the DROP_Continue node—Drop_Continue traffic is modelled by a unidirectional
ODU XC from the Line port to client port (Drop XC), and a unidirectional
pass-through cross connection between line ports (Continue XC). 11DPM12 supports
at lease one DROP cross connection and one Continue cross connection sourced from
a Line Lo-ODU entity.
The following cross connection paths are supported in the current release:
• ADD/DROP bidirectional path between Client and Line ports (Lo-ODU cross
connect)
• ADD unidirectional path between Client and Line ports (Lo-ODU cross connect)
• Drop unidirectional XC between Client and Line ports consisting (Lo-ODU cross
connect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• ADD/DROP bidirectional path between Client and Line ports (Lo- ODU and OPTSG
cross connects)
• Pass-Thru bidirectional path between Line and Line ports (Lo-ODU cross connect)
• Pass-Thru unidirectional path between Line and Line ports (Lo-ODU cross connect)
• ADD/DROP bidirectional path between Client and Line ports (Lo-ODU protection
group)
• ADD/DROP bidirectional path between Client and Line ports (Lo-ODU protection
group and OPTSG cross connect)
Figure 4-66 11DPM12 ADM
As show above, at the 11DPM12 ADM site, traffic can be directly added to or dropped
from the client ports, or passed-thru between two line ports. The 11DPM12 supports the
client traffic add/drop and pass-thru in ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex granularity.
Client port mapping
The 11DPM12 supports the standard G.709 ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex mapping.
• Sub-1.25G clients are mapped to an ODU0 container (OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4,
GbE, FC-100, or SD-SDI).
• Sub-2.5G clients are mapped to an ODU1 container (FC-200, HD-SDI,
OC-48/STM-16, or OTU1).
• Super-2.5G clients are mapped to an ODUflex container (3G-SDI and FC-400).
The following figure shows the 11DPM12 mapping for client signals.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-67 11DPM12 ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex Mapping
The 11DPM12 also supports the proprietary mapping for OC-3/STM-1 and
OC-12/STM-4 clients to improve bandwidth utilization. In R3.6.50/3.6.51, 11DPM12
software supports mapping 12xOC-3/STM-1 or 4xOC-12/STM-4 clients into a single
ODU1. It will also support any combination of OC-3/STM-1 and OC-12/STM-4 clients
as long as the total number of clients does not exceed 12, and the total bandwidth from all
clients does not exceed ODU1 (approx. 2.5Gbps).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-68 11DPM12 OPTSG mapping
Port provisioning capabilities

11DPM12 ports and bandwidth can be provisioned according to the following
capabilities.
• Client Port Group:
The 11DPM12 has 12 client ports, consisting of 4 Port Groups. Each Port Group has a
maximum input bandwidth of 5Gb/s (4x1.25Gb/s). The assignment of Port group is
fixed, as shown below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Client Port Group Bandwidth:

The total ODU container bandwidth used in each port group can not exceed 5Gb/s
(4x1.25Gb/s). The bandwidth of the various types of ODU container are listed in the
following table:
ODU container No. of 1.25G timeslots Bandwidth

ODU0 1 1.25G
ODU1 2 2.5G
ODU1PTF (via OPTSG) 2 2.5G
ODUFlex-3GSDI 3 3.7G
ODUFlex-FC400 4 5G
ODU2 8 10G
For example: When Port 1 is provisioned with an ODU0 container, and Port 2 is
provisioned with ODU1, then Port 3 can only allow an ODU0 container, because the
sum of the bandwidth can only be 5Gb/s (1xODU0+1xODU1+1xODU0= 5Gb/s).
Note that the bandwidth is not taken into consideration for the OTU1 client.
• Line Port Bandwidth:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each Line port (i.e. a single ODU2) can allow low-order ODUs with 10G bandwidth.
• ODU1PTF Port Group association and OPTSG mapping (prior to R3.6.50)
Prior to Release 3.6.50 the following ODU1PTF functionality was supported for
OPTSG mapping and port group association.
- ODU1PTF/OPTSG mapping limitation:
With an OPTSG mapping container for STM-1/OC-3 and STM-4/OC-12 clients, each
ODU1PTF can only allow one port Group. In other words, each ODU1PTF (2.5Gb/s
bandwidth) can only allow 3 client ports. If one port is provisioned with the OPTSG
mapping, it is strongly recommended that the other two ports in the same port group
be provisioned with OPTSG mapping into the same ODU1PTF for bandwidth
efficiency.
- ODU1PTF and Port Group association:
With OPTSG Mapping container for STM-1/OC-3 and STM-4/OC-12 clients,
ODU1PTF-1 and ODU1PTF-2 are used with Port Group 1 (C1,C2 and C3).
ODU1PTF-3 and ODU1PTF-4 are used with Port Group 2 (C4,C5 and C6).
ODU1PTF-5 and ODU1PTF-6 are used with Port Group 3 (C7,C8 and C9). And,
ODU1PTF-7 and ODU1PTF-8 are used with Port Group 4 (C10,C11 and C12). This
is shown below.
Port group Client ports Associated ODU1PTF

1 C1, C2, C3 ODU1PTF-1, ODU1PTF-2
• Mixing OPTSG and Lo-ODUk mapping within a Port Group:

Note that Mixing OPTSG and Lo-ODUk mapping within One Port Group is not
recommended, although the system software allows this.
If there is a need to configure mixed OPTSG and LO-ODUk mapping within one Port
Group, provision the ODU1PTF XC and OPTSG mapping first. Then provision
Lo-ODUK mapping second.
For example, if C1 and C2 ports are provisioned within an ODU1PTF, and C3 in an
ODU1 container, the first step is to provision the associated ODU1PTF XC. The
second step is to provision the client C1/C2 OPTSG XC. The final step is to provision
C3 with Lo-ODUk mapping. The proper provisioning procedure can allow the system
software to calculate and allocate the resource efficiently.
• OTU1 Client Provision:
Any Client Port can be provisioned as an OTU1 client signal. The OTU1 bandwidth
does not occupy the client port group bandwidth. Each 11DPM12 card can allow a
maximum of up to 4 OTU1 clients.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11DPM12 OPTSG cascading configurations
Prior to R3.6.50, a single ODU1 (2.5G bandwidth) could only house a maximum of
3xSTM-1/STM-4 (OC-3/OC-12) within the same port group through OPTSG mapping.
To efficiently use the ODU1 bandwidth, in R3.6.50, 11DPM12 can now support multiple
STM-1/STM-4 (OC-3/OC-12) clients into an ODU1. It supports maximum of
12xSTM-1s, or maximum 4xSTM-4s clients from different port groups in an ODU1.
Figure 4-69 OPTSG cascading example: 3xSTM-4 + 4xSTM-1 + 3xSTM-16 over a

single ODU2
The figure above illustrates how 4xSTM-1s and 3xSTM-4s are mapped into a single
ODU1 through OPTS mapping and ODU1 cross-connect. As an OTU2 line port can
allow a maximum four ODU1s, the remaining three ODU1s can be used to transport
3xSTM16 services. In this way, the line bandwidth can be used efficiently. To collect the
STM-1/STM-4 clients into an ODU1PTF (the acronym for an ODU1 with Path
Termination Function) in a different group, the user needs to additionally provision the
internal ODU1 XCs between the ODU1PTFs (that is, ODU1PTF cascading). For
example, to provision the C4 port into the ODU1PTF-1 through OPTSG, it is necessary
for the user to provision ODU1PTF-3 (or ODU1PTF-4) to connect to the ODU1PTF-2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning procedure
1. Provision a cross-connect between an ODU1PTF and line ODU1. This is to root the
ODU1PTF.
2. Check whether the client ports and the root ODU1PTF are in the same port group. If
not, then an additional ODU1 XC between the ODU1PTFs is needed. Locate an
ODU1PTF to which the client ports are attached, and locate another ODU1PTF which
is in the same group of root ODU1PTF, and provision the XC ODU1PTF.
3. Provision the OPTSG cross-connect between the client port and root ODU1PTF.
In the end-to-end network transmission with STM-1 regeneration sites, if the number of
cascaded OPTSG mapping/demapping exceeds 30 and the number of STM-1
regenerations (client-to-client connection) exceeds 11, the transmission will not be set up.
Therefore it is necessary to limit the regeneration and OPTSG cascading numbers for
STM-1 service.
To regenerate the STM-1 within the 1830 PSS network, it is also recommended to
regenerate the STM-1 interface through OTU1 Client Port-Client Port connection, or
through Line-Line Port Pass-thru ODU0/ODU1 connections for a good jitter and
transmission performance. The STM-1 Client-Client regeneration connection is not
recommended for jitter and transmission issues.
For end to end transmission, the number of OPTSG mapping/demapping is counted as in
the following:
• The OPTSG cascading number is 1 if Client port is directly mapped to ODU1PTF
within the same port group
• The OPTSG cascading number is 2 if Client port is mapped to ODU1PTF with one
cascading ODU1PTF XC
• The OPTSG cascading number is 3 if Client port is mapped to ODU1PTF with two
cascading ODU1PTF XCs
• The OPTSG cascading number is 4 if Client port is mapped to ODU1PTF with three
cascading ODU1PTF XCs
Interworking with 4DPA4
11DPM12 client port can be connected to the 4DPA4 Line Port in OTU1 mode to allow
multiple 4DPA4 clients multiplexed onto the 11DPM12 line port. Each 11DPM12 card
can house maximum four 4DPA4 Line ports.
All the 4DPA4 clients with bit rate less than 2.5G are supported in this two stage
multiplexing configuration. Because the OTU1 interface is used, the 11DPM12 are
transparent for 4DPA4 clients transmission.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network node configuration

The following configurations and applications are supported:
• Multiplexer: Multiplex multiple clients onto the OTU2 client port.
• ADM on one blade - will be implemented in future release via software upgrade
• Dualstage multiplexing with multiple 4DPA4s.
• E-SNCP protection based on each port, and Y-cable protection per port level between
companions - will be implemented in future release via software upgrade
• Y-cable protection - will be implemented in future release via software upgrade
• Multiple 11DPM12 cards forming an OTU2 ring and OTU2 linear network
• Communication with 1830 PSS-4 via GCC channel in OTU2 Line port
43STX4/43STX4P module
The 43STX4/43STX4P is full-height, 3-slot wide, 4x10G module that provides up to four
multi-rate and multi-protocol client interfaces, capable of multiplexing 10GbE, OC-192,
STM-64 or G.709 OTU2 client signal types on to the OTU-3 line.
The 43STX4 supports DPSK, and the 43STX4P supports PDPSK modulation on the 40G
line. This is the only functional difference between the modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are four pluggable XPF client interfaces along the left side of the faceplate. The
line interface (L1) is on the right side of the faceplate. There is a pack status LED at the
top of the faceplate and five LEDs below the Client ports, one for each of those ports, and
one for the Line interface. For information identifying the PTMs supported on client
interfaces of this OT, see Table 8-11, “43STX4/4P XFPs” (p. 8-27).
The 43STX4 only supports 44 even channels. The 43STX4P, and all other tunable OTs,
support 88 channels. Traffic from all tunable OTs may traverse both 50 GHz and 100
GHz systems.
Figure 4-70 43STX4/43STX4P OT faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43STX4/43STX4P functional description
The 43STX4/43STX4P module is a full-height, 3-slot wide card that consists of the
components shown in the following illustration.
Figure 4-71 43STX4/43STX4P OT block diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Within the 43STX4/43STX4P OT, a Multichannel Packet Mapper provides bi-directional
transmission and maintenance functions. In the ingress direction, the mapper receives two
independently timed signals. These signals can be either 10GbE LAN, OTU2, or
OC-192/STM-64. The Demux/mux maps incoming 10G signals into an
OPU3/ODU3/OTU3 structure in the following ways:
• 10GbE LAN clients: The the four ODU2 signals from the mapper are multiplexed
into the ODU3 payload.
• OTU2 clients: RS-FEC coding/decoding are performed and the OTU2 overhead is
terminated. Then the four ODU2 signals are multiplexed into the ODU3 payload. A
non-intrusive ODU2 monitoring function is also performed in both the ingress and
egress directions.
• OC-192/STM-64 clients: The Demux/mus maps the client into the ODU2 frame with
either bit-synchronous or asynchronous CBR mapping. Then, it multiplexes the four
OUD2 signals into the ODU3 signal. An FPGA provides the forward error correcting
code and the interface to the line. The FPGA adds the Alcatel-Lucent proprietary
enhanced FEC (EFEC).
For all types of 10G signals, the mapper acts as a serializer/deserializer, converting the
serial 10G into parallel SFI-5 interfaces.
The 43STX4/43STX4P OT supports full band tunable line side optics, capable of
supporting 44 even channels (at 100GHz spacing). The frequency of the channel can be
provisioned manually (by the user), or automatically (by connection provisioning). The
frequency of the line side transmitter is controlled to within +/- 2.5 GHz. The line side
interface is based on NRZ-DPSK modulation, and supports the Alcatel-Lucent proprietary
Enhanced FEC (EFEC).
The 43STX4/43STX4P OT line side receiver includes its own Optical Amplifier (OA),
Tunable Dispersion Compensator (TDC), Delay Line Interferometer (DLI), differential
front-end and drive/control electronics. The TDC allows the 43STX4/43STX4P pack to
be deployed in 1830 networks designed with Engineering Rules for 10G interfaces.
Tunable dispersion compensation is implemented on a per-channel basis (every
43STX4/43STX4P MUX OT has a TDC for its optical channel), with a tuning range of
-100 ps/nm to +1000 ps/nm. The OT uses feedback control from the uncorrected bit error
rate to tune the TDC to its optimum value. The TDC is colorless, meaning that one circuit
pack supports the entire 100 GHz-spaced spectrum of channels.
43G single port tunable coherent muxing transponder (43SCX4)

The 43SCX4 is a 4x10G MUX OT with a single 43 Gb/s (OTU-3e2 = 44.583355576 Gb/s
± 20ppm) tunable line port and 4 client ports. It supports multiplexing of up to four 10G
client signals into the single OTU-3e2 line interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 43SCX4 OT uses a Polarization Division Multiplexing NRZ Binary Phase Shift
Keying (PDM NRZ BPSK) pulse format on the line interface. A line side coherent
receiver, combined with a digital signal processor (DSP), provides compensation of linear
transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD) and reduction of intra-channel
non-linear transmission impairments (Self Phase Modulation [SPM] and non-linear phase
noise). The line side optics of the 43SCX4 OT can be tuned to any of the 99 wavelengths
in the extended C-band, according to the following table:

Wavetracker is supported on the line interface for optical power auto-management in

1830 PSS. For the interoperability application with LambdaXtreme, Wavetracker is
turned off.
The following client signal types are supported by the 43SCX4 OT.

10GbE LAN 10.3125 Gb/s 10GbE (IEEE802.3e)
FC800 8.5 Gb/s ANSI INCITS 364-2003
OC-192 9.95328 Gb/s GR-253-CORE
STM-64 9.95328 Gb/s ITU-T G.707
10GbE WAN 9.95328 Gb/s 10GbE (IEEE802.3e)
OTU2 10.709 Gb/s ITU-T G.709
11.049 (overclocked)
11.096 (overclocked)
Note: To support the one or more 43SCX4 OTs installed in a 1830 PSS-32 shelf, a
high capacity fan tray (PN 8DG59606AB) must be installed in the shelf. The fans
should never be removed for longer than two minutes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-72 43SCX4 block diagram
The 43SCX4OT will support Y-cable protection.
43STA1P module
The 43STA1P is a 3-slot wide, full height 43G Single Port Tunable Anyrate Add/Drop
Transponder.
The 43STA1P accepts a single OC-768/STM-256 client signal and an OTU3 Line
interface with full-band tunable optics. The line interface can be used to select any one of
88 channels (50 GHz spacing). Channel frequency can be provisioned automatically or
manually.
Note: An enhanced version, 43STA1PB, was introduced in R3.0. It has the same
functionality as the 43STA1P and, except for ordering information, is not detailed
separately in this guide.
The 43STA1P pack supports transport in the C-band.
The following signals are supported on the line side:
• OTU3
– 43.018413 Gb/s, (±20ppm)
– Full-band tunable optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– P-DPSK modulation
– Supports colorless tunable dispersion compensation
– Wavelength Tracker encoding on line transmit
– Supports Ultra FEC (UFEC) (see “FEC” (p. 4-114))
The following signals are supported on the client side:
• OTU3 - 43.018413 Gb/s, (±20ppm)
• OC-768/STM-256 - 39.8132 Gb/s (±20ppm)
Note: The 43STA1P supports single channel regeneration for DWDM-DWDM and
CWDM-DWDM connections. CWDM-CWDM regeneration is not supported. For
regeneration, the client port rate must be OC768/STM256.
The client signal is transported as a Constant Bit Rate (CBR) signal, which is transparent
to the client bit stream and timing.
Figure 4-73 43STA1P faceplate
The 43STA1P supports Y-cable protection, but not OPS. Although there is no software
denial of protection group creation, Y-cable protection cannot be used with an OTU3
(OTM0.3) client. (The ODU3 layer is handled transparently, APS/PCC bytes are not
available for protection signaling.)
43STA1P (43STA1PB) functional description

The client interface is a fixed transponder. It contains transmit and receive optics as well
as multiplexer, driver, clock/data recovery, demultiplexer, and control functionality.
The pack supports ADD_DROP mode. In this mode, the OT processes the signal in the
ingress direction from client port towards the DWDM line port, and in the egress
direction from the DWDM line port to the client port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-74 43STA1P Block Diagram
In the ingress (add path) direction, received client data is converted to SFI-5 format and
sent to the UFEC. SONET/SDH overhead is processed, or the OTU3 format is passed.
The FPGA controls the client transponder, the line daughter board, and the UFEC device.
The UFEC then applies Ultra-FEC or RS-FEC code and the pre-coding required for the
PDPSK format used at the line interface. The data is then sent to the line transmitter and
WaveTracker encoder. The line-side transmitter (TX on the line daughter board in the
figure), contains an 88-channel tunable laser module and a Modulator.
In the egress (drop path) direction, data received at the line receiver is passed to the
UFEC which terminates the UFEC or RS-FEC code and processes the OTU3 overhead.
The UFEC also generates SONET/SDH overhead if required. The line-side receiver
(shown as RX on the line daughter board in the figure), contains a tunable dispersion
compensator (TDC), a delay line interferometer (DLI), and a differential optical front end
(OFE). Due to the insertion losses of these components, an optical amplifier (OA) is
required on the pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEC
On the line side interface, the 43STA1P supports an OTU3 signal with both
Reed-Solomon FEC (RSFEC) and Ultra FEC (UFEC).
RSFEC is G.709 compliant and uses a standard FEC format. UFEC is an FEC format that
is based on the LDPC code given in Appendix I.6 of ITU-T G.975.1. UFEC can provide a
net coding gain of more than 8dB OSNR at a BER of E-16, for improved engineering
rules.
The OT does not support FEC on the client interface when provisioned for a signal type
of OTU3. When the client is provisioned to OTU3, the FEC bytes pass to the line
interface without processing.
43SCA1 module
The 43SCA1 is a three slot wide, full height pack. The pack is intended for deployment in
the 1830 PSS-32 shelf, but is also physically compatible with the 1830 PSS-36. There is
one pluggable client interface: C1, and one (non-pluggable) line interface: L1. The card
has one status LED and each port has a dedicated port status LED.
Figure 4-75 43CSA1 faceplate
Line interface
The line side optics of the 43SCA1 OT can be tuned to any of the 99 wavelengths in the
extended C-band, according to the following table:

Client interface
The following client signal types are supported:

OC-768 39.813 Gbs GR-253-CORE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

STM-256 39.813 Gbs ITU-T G.707
OTU3 43.018 Gbs ITU-T G.709
43SCA1 functional description

The 43SCA1 OT supports one client port and one, single OTU3 line interface. This pack
is referred to as a “40G Add/Drop” or more simply “40G A/D” OT.
The 43SCA1 OT, like the 43SCX4, uses a pulse format with Polarization Division
Multiplexing NRZ Binary Phase Shift Keying (PDM NRZ BPSK) on the line interface. It
has a line side coherent receiver, combined with a digital signal processor (DSP), that
provide compensation for linear transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD)
and reduction of intra-channel non-linear transmission impairments (Self Phase
Modulation (SPM) and non-linear phase noise).
The client interface is a fixed transponder. It contains transmit and receive optics as well
as multiplexer, driver, clock/data recovery, demultiplexer, and control functionality.
Figure 4-76 43SCA1 Block Diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card mode
The card “Mode” parameter determines the feature type of the 43SCA1. It affects many
fundamental aspects of card and port behavior, including which client signal types are
supported.
The pack supports two card modes:
• SonetSdh (default: covers STM256 and OC768)
• Otu3
When the card mode is set to “SonetSdh,” STM256 and OC768 are the only client signal
types supported. STM256 and OC768 commands apply to 43SCA1 only in this card
mode. TL1 and CLI commands specific to other client signal types will be denied. Line
ports are created automatically.
When the card mode is set to “Otu3,” OTU3 is the only client signal type supported.
OTU3 commands apply to 43SCA1 only in this card mode. Details are specified in
following sections.
FEC
On the line side interface, the 43SCA1 supports an OTU3 signal with a FEC type on the
facility of afec.
On the client interface, when provisioned for a signal type of OTU3. the FEC type on the
facility can be rsfec or nofec. Default is rsfec.
112SCX10 OT module
The 112SCX10 OT is a three slot wide full height pack, which supports multiplexing of
up to ten-10 G client signals into one-OTU4 line interface. The 112SCX10 OT supports
one-line interface (non-pluggable) and ten-client interfaces with XFP modules (B&W,
CWDM). The line side optics of the 112SCX10 OT can be tuned to utilize all 88 channels
in the C-band. Each port has a dedicated port status LED and a dynamic Ethernet activity
Note: The Ethernet activity LED is used only when the port is provisioned with an
Ethernet signal type.
The 112SCX10 operates in the optical C band with other 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16 OTs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-77 112SCX10 faceplate
Note: To support the one or more 100Gb/s coherent Add/Drop OTs and/or 10x10Gb/s
coherent Muxponder OTs installed in a 1830 PSS-32 shelf, a high capacity fan tray
(PN 8DG59606AB) must be installed in the shelf. The fans should never be removed
for longer than two minutes.
112SCX10 functional description

The 112SCX10 provides client access through up to ten XFP modules (B & W, CWDM,
DWDM). Short, long, and extended reach XFP modules are supported. Client signal
processing includes Status, Alarms, PM, FEC, pre-mapping of the client signal into
p-ODTU24.
The 112SCX10 OT supports the following functional features:
– OTU4 facility and terminal loopbacks
overhead)
– Wavelength tracker supporting optical power auto-management. User
configurable option to disable the WT for the interoperability application with
other systems without WT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– OC-192, OTU2, 1GbE facility and terminal loopbacks
Optical interfaces
The 112SCX10 supports both B&W XFPs for single-channel applications and CWDM
XFPs for multiple channel applications (up to eight channels).
Client XFPs
The 112SCX10 OT supports the following types of client XFPs:
• 10GB-SR (B & W, 850 nm, 10G BASE-SR)
• 10GB-ZR (B & W, 10 GBE)
• L64.2 (B & W)
• XI-64.1
• XS-64.2b
• XS-64.2c
• XL-64.2c
112SNX10 OT module
The 112SNX10 OT is a three slot wide full height pack, which supports multiplexing of
up to ten-10 G client signals into one-OTU4 line interface. The 112SNX10 OT supports
one-line interface (non-pluggable) and ten-client interfaces with XFP modules (B&W,
CWDM). The line side optics of the 112SNX10 OT can be tuned to utilize all 88 channels
in the C-band. Each port has a dedicated port status LED and a dynamic Ethernet activity
Note: The Ethernet activity LED is used only when the port is provisioned with an
Ethernet signal type.
Figure 4-78 112SNX10 faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
coherent Muxponder OTs installed in a 1830 PSS-32 shelf, a high capacity fan tray
112SNX10 functional description

The 112SNX10 provides client access through up to ten XFP modules (B & W, CWDM,
DWDM). Short, long, and extended reach XFP modules are supported. Client signal
processing includes Status, Alarms, PM, FEC, pre-mapping of the client signal into
p-ODTU24. It has the same functional characteristics as the 112SCX10, except that
OSNR is improved from 16.2 dB to 15.2 dB.
The 112SNX10 OT supports the following functional features:
– OTU4 facility and terminal loopbacks
overhead)
– Wavelength tracker supporting optical power auto-management. User
configurable option to disable the WT for the interoperability application with
other systems without WT
– OC-192, OTU2, 1GbE facility and terminal loopbacks
Optical interfaces
The 112SNX10 supports both B&W XFPs for single-channel applications and CWDM
XFPs for multiple channel applications (up to eight channels).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client XFPs
The 112SNX10 OT supports the following types of client XFPs:
• 10GB-SR (B & W, 850 nm, 10G BASE-SR)
• 10GB-ZR (B & W, 10 GBE)
• L64.2 (B & W)
• XI-64.1
• XS-64.2b
• XS-64.2c
• XL-64.2c
112SCA1 OT module
The 112SCA1 OT is a three-slot-wide full-height pack, which supports one 100GBE
interface for a CFP module on the client interface. The 112SCA1 OT also supports one
OTU4 line interface (non-pluggable).
The 112SCA1 operates in the optical C band with other 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
OTs.
coherent Muxponder OTs installed in an 1830 PSS-32 shelf, a high capacity fan tray
Figure 4-79 112SCA1 Faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
112SCA1 functional description
The 112SCA1 OT supports the following functional features:
– OTU4 facility and terminal loopback
overhead)
WT
– Supports 100 GbE client interfaces
– 100GBE facility and terminal loopbacks
Client interfaces
The 112SCA1 supports one Compatible Front panel Pluggable (CFP) module on the
client interface. The CFP module is a hot pluggable form factor designed for optical
networking applications. The CFP contains multiple transmitters and receivers and optical
multiplex/demultiplex components. This allows it to combine multiple wavelengths into a
single fiber in the transmit direction, and demultiplex several wavelengths from the fiber
in the receive direction, thus providing Wavelength Division Multiplex (WDM)
capability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-80 112SCA1 block diagram with CFP
CFP details
The following information details some of the common characteristics of CFP module
types:
• One 148-pin electrical connector
• One mechanical package
• LC-type optical receptacles for transmit and receive port
• Hardware alarm and control functions
• Alarm, control and monitoring through management interface (MDIO)
The CFP module size is chosen to accommodate a wide range of power dissipations and
applications. The module electrical interface is generically specified to allow for
customization of vendor specific around 'M' lane by ten Gbit/s interfaces.
CFP module types differ depending on their optical transmission characteristics,
technology and total throughout rate. Each CFP module type can be implemented to
support different transmission reaches.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Currently the following CFP modules are available:
• 4x25G up to 10 km
This transceiver contain four optical transmitters nominally operating at 25 Gb/s
based on DML or EML. It also contains an optical multiplexer, an optical
demultiplexer and four optical PIN receivers. The four optical wavelengths are in line
with LAN-WDM grid. Internal ICs convert the ten parallel 10 Gb/s electrical input
lanes into four data streams at 25 Gb/s and vice versa.
• 10x10G DML up to 10 km
This transceiver contains ten optical transmitters nominally operating at 10 Gb/s
based on DML. It also contains an optical multiplexer, an optical demultiplexer, and
ten optical PIN receivers. The ten wavelengths are aligned to a 8 nm spaced grid in
third windows. The re-timing functionality on both electrical transmit and receive
lanes is implemented inside the module.
112SNA1 OT module
The 112SNA1 OT is a three-slot-wide full-height pack, which supports one 100GBE
interface for a CFP module on the client interface. The 112SNA1 OT also supports one
OTU4 line interface (non-pluggable). It has the same functional characteristics as the
112SCA1, except that OSNR is improved from 16.2 dB to 15.2 dB.
The 112SNA1 operates in the optical C band with other 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
OTs.
coherent Muxponder OTs installed in an 1830 PSS-32 shelf, a high capacity fan tray
Figure 4-81 112SNA1 Faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
112SNA1 functional description
The 112SNA1 OT supports the following functional features:
– OTU4 facility and terminal loopback
overhead)
WT
– Supports 100 GbE client interfaces
– 100GBE facility and terminal loopbacks
Client interfaces
The 112SNA1 supports one Compatible Front panel Pluggable (CFP) module on the
client interface. The CFP module is a hot pluggable form factor designed for optical
networking applications. The CFP contains multiple transmitters and receivers and optical
multiplex/demultiplex components. This allows it to combine multiple wavelengths into a
single fiber in the transmit direction, and demultiplex several wavelengths from the fiber
in the receive direction, thus providing Wavelength Division Multiplex (WDM)
capability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-82 112SNA1 block diagram with CFP
CFP details
The following information details some of the common characteristics of CFP module
types:
• One 148-pin electrical connector
• One mechanical package
• LC-type optical receptacles for transmit and receive port
• Hardware alarm and control functions
• Alarm, control and monitoring through management interface (MDIO)
The CFP module size is chosen to accommodate a wide range of power dissipations and
applications. The module electrical interface is generically specified to allow for
customization of vendor specific around 'M' lane by ten Gbit/s interfaces.
CFP module types differ depending on their optical transmission characteristics,
technology and total throughout rate. Each CFP module type can be implemented to
support different transmission reaches.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Currently the following CFP modules are available:
• 4x25G up to 10 km
This transceiver contain four optical transmitters nominally operating at 25 Gb/s
based on DML or EML. It also contains an optical multiplexer, an optical
demultiplexer and four optical PIN receivers. The four optical wavelengths are in line
with LAN-WDM grid. Internal ICs convert the ten parallel 10 Gb/s electrical input
lanes into four data streams at 25 Gb/s and vice versa.
• 10x10G DML up to 10 km
This transceiver contains ten optical transmitters nominally operating at 10 Gb/s
based on DML. It also contains an optical multiplexer, an optical demultiplexer, and
ten optical PIN receivers. The ten wavelengths are aligned to a 8 nm spaced grid in
third windows. The re-timing functionality on both electrical transmit and receive
lanes is implemented inside the module.
OT protection
Optical transponder cards in 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 support several protection
configurations.
• Per-channel optical line protection (with OPS) (1+1 optical path)
• Optical sub-block network connection protection (O-SNCP) [O-SNCP, 1+1 Optical
Path & Equipment protection configuration (Y-cable splitter/coupler between the pair
of OTs and client equipment)]
• Diverse route
Note: Y-cable protection cannot currently be used with OTM0.2 client on 11STAR1
OT. ODU2 is handled transparently, so APS/PCC bytes are not available for
protection signaling.
The protection capabilities supported by 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 OTs is detailed in
Table 4-4, “OT protection support” (p. 4-126). Specific information for protection for the
4DPA4 and 4DPA2 is provided using E-SNCP as described in “E-SNCP support”
(p. 4-130).
Table 4-4 OT protection support
OT Protection Support provided NE regen.

type support for
PSS-36 PSS-32 PSS-16 PSS-1 protected paths
112SCA1, — — — — — —
112SNA1
112SCX10, Y-cable R3.6.50 R3.6.50 — — R3.6.50
112SNX10 R3.6.51 R3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-4 OT protection support (continued)

type support for
11DPE12 E-SNCP R3.5.1 R2.5 R2.5 — No
(FullRate)
E-SNCP R3.5.1 R3.0 R3.0 — No
(QinQ)
11DPE12E E-SNCP R3.6 R3.5 R3.5 — Yes
(QinQ)
11DPM12 E-SNCP R3.6 R3.5 R3.5 — Yes
Y-caable R3.6 R3.6 R3.6 — Yes (R3.6)
11QPA4 E-SNCP R3.5.1 R2.5 R2.5 — Yes
OPS R3.6 R3.6 R3.6 — Yes (R3.6)
Y-cable R3.6 R3.6 R3.6 — Yes (R3.6)
11STAR1 Y-cable R3.5.1 R1.0 R2.5 — No
OPS R3.5.1 R1.0 R3.0 — Yes
11STGE12 Y-cable R3.5.1 R1.0 R2.5 — No
OPS R3.5.1 R1.0 R3.0 — No
11STMM10 Y-cable R3.5.1 R1.0 R2.5 — No
OPS R3.5.1 R1.0 R3.0 — No
43SCA1 — — — — — —
43SCX4 Y-cable R3.6 R3.6 — — Yes (R3.6)
43STA1P Y-cable R3.5.1 R2.5 — — No
43STX4 Y-cable R3.6 R2.0 — — Yes
43STX4P Y-cable R3.5.1 R2.5 — — Yes
4DPA2 E-SNCP — R2.5 R2.5 — No
4DPA4 E-SNCP — R2.0 R2.5 — Yes (R3.6.5)
(FlexMux)
MVAC OPS R3.6 R3.5 R3.5 — No
PSS1GBE E-SNCP — — — GBEH Yes
(FullRate) R1.0
E-SNCP — — — GBEH Yes
(QinQ) R2.7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-4 OT protection support (continued)

type support for
PSS1MD4 E-SNCP — — — MD4HR1.0No
(FlexMux) MSAHR1.0
SVAC OPS R3.6 R1.0 R3.0 — No
Protection configurations
In optical Path protected configuration OT modules, colored line interface is connected to
two OTS lines via an OPS pack (Optical Protection Switching pack). Optical signal is
bridged in the source direction and transported via diverse optical paths through a
DWDM domain. In sink direction, one of the two received signals is selected by a 2:1
optical switch. This type of protection is 1+1 unidirectional type, where autonomous
switch decision can be made based on monitoring optical power on the received signals
O-SNCP configuration relies on client transmitter arbitration between the peer protected
entities (OT packs in adjacent slots). Using so called Y-cable client input is split and fed
to both OT client port inputs while OT client port outputs are run through a 2:1 coupler.
Protection manager (implemented in OT HW) on each of the OTs collects tributary status
signals from local tributary (by reading local HW registers or via SW interrupt service
routine processing) and from the adjacent companion OT (via backplane link). Status of
both tributaries is input to a state machine which determines the state of associated
transponder.
This implementation allows 1+1 protection applications, either unidirectional or
bidirectional. One protected instance can be supported per each client adaptation function.
In the case of 11STMM10 and 11STGE12 packs, there could be multiple adaptation
functions while in 11STAR1 there is one client adaptation function. As shown in Figure
4-83, “1+1 protection using Y-cable” (p. 4-129) , a pair of OT packs in adjacent slots
(horizontal adjacency is supported for full height packs and vertical adjacency for half
height modules) are configured for 1+1 protection using Y-cable. Protection manager
manages one instance of protection state machine which takes inputs such as Signal Fail
(SF[n] where n=1,..,10) from both local and companion pack. Based on these inputs and
additional SW controls (to implement Manual, Forced and Inhibit switch requests)
protection manager determines the ON/OFF state of the associated client transmitter.
Protection on one client port shall be done independently from protection on the other
ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This implementation ensures fast protection switching based on autonomous failures of
either transmission path or supporting equipment entities. Switching is accomplished in
period shorter then 10 ms (detection, except SD) + 50 ms (switch completion) for failures
such as dLOS, dLOF, or equipment failures.
Note: Protection switching time may exceed 60ms, if the active pack (the pack that is
carrying transmission) is removed or reset cold.
Follow the procedure below, before removing or performing a cold reboot on a pack
that is a member of an APS y-cable group.
1. Check APS status to determine which is the active pack.
2. If the pack you plan to remove or reset is the active pack, perform a force switch
to standby.
3. Check the APS status again and make sure the pack you intend to remove or reset
cold is the standby pack.
4. Perform cold reset or remove the pack.
Refer to Figure 4-83, “1+1 protection using Y-cable” (p. 4-129) for an illustration.
Figure 4-83 1+1 protection using Y-cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-SNCP support
The 4DPA4 and 4DPA2 E-SNCP. This is a line side (network side) protection mechanism
which protects against loss of the line signal due to an OTM failure, fiber interruption, or
a malfunction of an intermediate NE node. For additional information on E-SNCP, see
“Electrical sub-block network connection protection (E-SNCP)” (p. 2-82).
Up to four protection groups, one for each client port, can be created on a 4DPA4 OT.
Each protection group consists of at least one client port, the working line port, and
protection line port. Switching, both automatic by user command, is on a per-group basis.
Each protection group operates independently of the others.
On a 4DPA4 card, all services must be protected, or unprotected. A combination of
protected and unprotected services on the same card is not supported.
The total outage from a protected Signal Fail (SF) condition is less than, or equal to, 60
ms. This 60 ms is the sum of:
• 10 ms switch initiation time — The time it takes from occurrence of the failure to
detection and initiation of the switch.
• 50 ms switch completion time — The time it takes to perform the switch and to
recover transmission.
Note: Total outage may be greater than 50ms when there is an OTU1/ODU1 TTI
Mismatch defect, or ODU1 payload Type mismatch, as those defects usually require
more time to initiate a protection switch.
4DPA2
In E-SNCP protected mode, only one client port can be protected. A bridge/selector
function is implemented in the matrix between this client port and the two line ports. The
4DPA2 supports one protection group, made up of one client port and both line ports.
As with the 4DPA4, the total outage from a protected Signal Fail (SF) condition is less
than, or equal to, 60 ms. This 60 ms is the sum of:
• 10 ms switch initiation time — The time it takes from occurrence of the failure to
detection and initiation of the switch.
• 50 ms switch completion time — The time it takes to perform the switch and to
recover transmission.
PTMs
Client ports and line ports on some OTs are implemented with PTMs to provide flexibility
in supporting various physical layer requirements associated with configured signal type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system allows user to configure expected PTMs to the
following types.
• Specific module type from the list of acceptable modules for that OT and port (see
“PTM optics” (p. 8-6)).
• Automatic module type detection and configuration
• User-specific module type
For the first two options, 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system provides monitoring of
mismatch between the expected and actual inserted PTM in the configured slot. The third
option is intended for users that prefer to use PTMs outside of the set approved by
Alcatel-Lucent. In that case, module mismatch monitoring is not supported.
Refer to “PTM optics” (p. 8-6) for a listing of Alcatel-Lucent approved PTM types that
allow explicit expected module provisioning (user configures one of the modules in the
list explicitly) or provides automatic detection and provisioning of the module upon
insertion.
Automatic module detection

Automatic module type detection and configuration is accomplished by configuring
desired interface MODULETYPE on associated port entity to AUTO.
When MODULETYPE is set to AUTO, upon port provisioning, the NE SW performs the
following steps:
1. Monitors for PTM insertion
2. When PTM insertion (module presence if attribute change has been performed) is
detected, read the module EEPROM and compare content to find a match to a module
in acceptable module list for that port.
3. If a match to a module in an ALU acceptable type list is found, automatically
configure MODULETYPE attribute to the matched type.
4. Generate autonomous message to indicate MODULETYPE change.
5. If EEPROM content doe not match any of the modules in an acceptable types for that
port, declare UNKNOWN condition on the port and retain MODULETYPE value of
AUTO.
This process allows user to configure and monitor consistency between expected and
actual PTMs in an easy manner. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.5.60 and 3.6.51 User Provisioning Guide for more
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Miscellaneous non-mandatory modules
In addition to core optics and OT modules, 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 also supports
the following modules
• Optical Protection Switch (OPS) module
• Single Variable Attenuator Card (SVAC)
• Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)
OPS module is used to provide optical layer protection functionality. SVAC serves as
demarcation point for Alien optics input to the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DWDM
domain. These modules are logically positioned between the OT modules and core optics
modules hence they are listed in this document in a separate group.
OPS protection can be used with two MVACs. For this type of protection an OPS card is
placed on the client-side optical path of the MVACs. Protection is provided against both
fiber cuts and MVAC failure.
OPS module
The OPS card provides photonic protection switching in DWDM configurations for any
supported channel in the C-band, allowing user to provide 1+1 dedicated OCh protection
for any optical signal carried in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DWDM domain.
Refer to Figure 4-84, “OPS functional diagram” (p. 4-132) for an illustration.
Figure 4-84 OPS functional diagram
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
As shown in Figure 4-84, “OPS functional diagram” (p. 4-132), the OPS card performs
head-end bridging and tail-end switching of an optical signal.
• At the head end of the protected link, an optical signal is split into two identical
signals and sent over a specified OCh path to another OPS card at the tail end of the
protected link. There are also electronic variable optical attenuators (eVOAs)
controlling the A and B port transmit power.
• At the tail end, the total optical power of each of the received signals is monitored. A
switch is initiated if the total optical power of one of the signals falls below a defined
threshold (according to the rules associated with OPS protection state machine).
The threshold level at which a switch is initiated, is calculated automatically by the
system on a per-port basis on port A and port B only. When the total optical power of an
input signal falls below a threshold, the OPS card performs a protection switch with
signal disturbance of less then 50 ms due to protection switching execution.
Note: LOS switch thresholds and tolerance can be also be provisioned manually, but
only an expert user should manually provision the thresholds. The commands used to
accomplish this are only available at the Admin or Service security level. (See the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS User Provisioning Guide, and Command Line Interface
Commands Guide (Vol.I) for details.)
In addition to autonomous switching based on monitoring of input LOS, OPS provides
user protection management by supporting Manual, Forced and Lockout protection
requests. OPS protection state machine supports 1+1 unidirectional, non-revertive
protection.
The optical protection switch (OPS) pack is implemented as a half-height module that can
be configured in any of the universal slots in the universal shelves.
Refer to Figure 4-85, “OPS module faceplate” (p. 4-133) for an illustration.
Figure 4-85 OPS module faceplate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SVAC and MVAC variable attenuator cards
Variable Attenuator Card (VAC) type packs are used to control the power level and insert
WaveTracker keys onto optical signals from client equipment.
• The Single Variable Attenuator Card (SVAC) contains a fast optical VOA and
WaveTracker encoder to condition a single alien wavelength to pass through the
TOADM system. The SVAC is a bidirectional pack.
• The Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) contains an array of eight fast optical
VOA and WaveTracker encoders to condition up to eight alien wavelengths to pass
through the TOADM system. The MVAC is a unidirectional pack.
SVAC
The single port variable attenuation card is used as a bridge by the compatible wavelength
transponders into 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DWDM domain.
The following are the basic functions provided by SVAC as demarcation and adaptation
for so-called “alien” (foreign wavelength) channel.
• Encodes the Wavelength Tracker wave keys onto the optical channel.
• Automatically adjusts a variable optical attenuator (VOA) on each channel to set the
channel output optical power to the target level determined by NE SW
• Monitors incoming alien wavelength optical power level and appropriate alarming.
SVAC is implemented as a half-height module that can be configured in any of the
universal slots in the universal shelves.
Figure 4-86 SVAC faceplate
MVAC
The Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) contains an array of eight fast optical
VOA and WaveTracker 32 encoders to condition eight alien wavelengths to pass through
the TOADM system. The MVAC is a unidirectional pack with 8 ports for adding and
dropping alien wavelengths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For unidirectional topologies, the MVAC supports unidirectional (single-strand)
connections to and from its ports, as shown in the figure below. The alien wavelength
passes through the MVAC when added to the network for Wavelength Tracker encoding
and monitoring. When the wavelength is dropped from the network, it does not go
through the MVAC.
The MVAC is implemented as a half-height module that can be configured in any of the
universal slots in the 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 shelves. MVAC ports do not support
bidirectional connections.
Figure 4-87 MVAC faceplate
Multi-shelf arrangement
Multiple 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves can be configured as a single NE. Refer to
Figure 2-59, “Sample multi-shelf 1830 PSS-32 NE connectivity” (p. 2-108) for an
illustration that shows an example TOADM NE with three universal shelves, one DCM
shelf with one DCM module, and one OMD shelf. The positions of the connections on the
individual cards and modules are for illustration purposes only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description DCM shelf overview
DCM shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM shelf
DCM shelf overview

Description
A DCM shelf can hold a maximum of 8 DCM modules when used with ETSI or 23-inch
ANSI racks, or 4 DCM modules when used with 19-inch EIA racks. The system models
each DCM module as a separate shelf. The inventory port of a DCM module can be
connected to an inventory port on an LD module. If connected, the inventory port must be
connected to the same LD as the Line to which it is connected. The DCM shelf can be
user-provisioned or auto-detected.
Note: The distance limit of the serial electrical inventory wire is short enough that
some customers will need to locate the DCM beyond the distance limit. In order to
accommodate a user's need to mount the DCM shelf outside the range of electrical
inventory monitoring cable, 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports non-managed
DCM shelves.
Table 4-5, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs” (p. 4-136) lists the DCMs that 1830
PSS-32 supports.
Table 4-5 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs
Acronym DCM/Range DCM Height1

DMSMF010 DCM010(SSMF) 18.5 mm
10 km DCM
20 km DCM
30 km DCM
40 km DCM
DMSMF050 DCM050(SSMF) 41 mm
50 km DCM
60 km DCM
70 km DCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
DCM shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-5 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs (continued)

80 km DCM
90 km DCM
100 km DCM
110 km DCM
120 km DCM
130 km DCM
140 km DCM
DMBSM010 DCM - Fiber Bragg SMF 10 18.5 mm
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
DCM shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

km
km
DMBSM140 DCM - Fiber Bragg SMF 140 41 mm
km
km
km
km
km
km
DMTWR020 DCM020(TWRS) 18.5 mm
20 km DCM
40 km DCM
60 km DCM
80 km DCM
100 km DCM
120 km DCM
DMLEF020 DCM020(ELEAF) 41 mm
20 km DCM
40 km DCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
DCM shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

60 km DCM
80 km DCM
100 km DCM
120 km DCM
DMBLE040 DCM - Fiber Bragg ELEAF 18.5 mm
40 km
60 km
80 km
100 km
40 km
140 km
160 km
180 km
200 km
220 km
240 km
Notes:
1. DCM width and depth are 245 mm (W) x 238 mm (D) for all units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Overview
Non-COS/EOS shelves
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-COS/EOS shelves
Description of non-COS/EOS shelves

Overview
Some 1830 PSS network elements that do not reside physically within a slot of a
universal shelf are modeled as separate shelves and depend upon inventory connections
for integrated monitoring.
The maximum distance between the inventory port at the LD/CWR faceplate and the
location of the furthese inventory port is 40m. If customers need to locate the passive
module shelf beyond this distance limit, the module will be provisioned as unmanaged,
and will be treated as always present, even though there is no communication.
SFD40
The SFD40 (40ch DWDM static filter, even channels) is modeled as an SFD40 shelf with
a SFD40 card. In the case of a FOADM node, the inventory port of the SFD40 can be
connected to the inventory port on an LD or OSCT card. The inventory port should be
connected to the same LD/OSCT as the Line to which it is connected.
The SFD40 may also be daisy-chained with other non-COS/EOS shelves. The SFD40 has
2 inventory ports, so it can be located at the end or middle of the daisy chain. For
additional details about inventory connections and configurations, see “Inventory
configurations” (p. 3-68).
SFD40B
The SFD40B (40ch DWDM static filter, odd channels) is modeled as an SFD40B shelf
with a SFD40B card. In the case of a FOADM node, the inventory port of the SFD40 can
be connected to an LD or OSCT card. The inventory port should be connected to the same
LD/OSCT as the Line to which it is connected.
The SFD40B may also be daisy-chained with other non-COS/EOS shelves. The SFD40B
has 2 inventory ports, so may be located at the end or middle of the daisy chain. For
additional details about inventory connections and configurations, see “Inventory
configurations” (p. 3-68).
SFD44
The SFD44 (44ch DWDM static filter, even channels) is modeled as an SFD44 shelf with
a SFD44 card. The inventory port of the SFD44 can be connected to the inventory port on
a CWR8 or CWR8-88 card or, in the case of a FOADM node, an LD or OSCT card. The
inventory port should be connected to the same CWR8/CWR8-88/LD/OSCT as the Line
to which it is connected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Description of non-COS/EOS shelves
Non-COS/EOS shelves
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SFD44 may also be daisy-chained with other non-COS/EOS shelves. Since it only
has one inventory port, the SFD44 must be at the end of the daisy chain. For additional
details about inventory connections and configurations, see “Inventory configurations”
(p. 3-68).
SFD44B
The SFD44B (44ch DWDM static filter, odd channels) is modeled as an SFD44B shelf
with a SFD44B card. The inventory port of the SFD44B can be connected to an inventory
port on a CWR8-88 card or, in the case of a FOADM node, an LD or OSCT card. The
inventory port should be connected to the same CWR8-88/LD/OSCT as the Line to which
it is connected.
The SFD44B may also be daisy-chained with other non-COS/EOS shelves. Unlike the
SFD44, the SFD44B has 2 inventory ports, so may be located at the end or middle of the
daisy chain. For additional details about inventory connections and configurations, see
“Inventory configurations” (p. 3-68).
DCM
A DCM shelf can hold a maximum of 8 DCM modules when used with ETSI or 23-inch
ANSI racks, or 4 DCM modules when used with 19-inch EIA racks. The system models
each DCM module as a separate DCM shelf with a DCM card. The inventory port of a
DCM module may be connected to an inventory port on an LD card. The inventory port
should be connected to the same LD as the Line to which it is connected.
The DCM may also be daisy-chained with other non-COS/EOS shelves. Since it only has
one inventory port, the DCM must be at the end of the daisy chain. For additional details
about inventory connections and configurations, see “Inventory configurations” (p. 3-68).
ITLB
The ITLB module uses the same enclosure as the DCM. The system models each ITLB
module as a separate ITLB shelf with an ITLB card. The ITLB has one inventory port that
may be connected to an inventory port on a CWR8- 88 card. In the case of a FOADM
node, the inventory port may be connected to an LD or OSCT card. The inventory port
should be connected to the same CWR8-88, LD, or OSCT as the Line to which it is
connected.
The ITLB has 2 other ports that may be used for daisy-chaining with other non-COS/EOS
shelves. Since the ITLB has 2 ports available for daisy chaining, it may be located at the
end or middle of the daisy chain. For additional details about inventory connections and
configurations, see “Inventory configurations” (p. 3-68).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Product description Description of non-COS/EOS shelves
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
5 5 perations,
O
administration,
maintenance, and
provisioning
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the user interfaces and network management applications that run
on the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE to simplify the operations, administration,
maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P) of the network services.
Contents
OAMP 5-2
Fault detection and alarm management 5-2
Performance monitoring 5-5
Automatic power adjustments 5-25
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability 5-30
NE software installation, upgrades, and back-outs 5-32
Security 5-33
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Quality and reliability chapter overview
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAMP
Fault detection and alarm management

Overview
Fault management is a set of functions that enable detection, isolation, and correction of
abnormal operation of the telecommunication network and its environment.
Alarm reporting is the notification to external management systems of the internally
detected faults.
The fault processing and alarm reporting functions are part of the supervision function of
the NE that monitors and manages the NE transmission resources (logical/physical
facilities and associated equipment modules).
Fault management functions

The fault management function consists of the following supervision categories:
transmission, equipment, processing, and correlation. The primary goal of this function is
to monitor and report any failure within the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system by
identifying the probable cause of abnormal operation of transmission resource supported
by the NE.
Transmission supervision
Transmission supervision consists of the following functions.
• Continuity supervision (monitoring of LOS, UNEQP, OCI, etc.)
• Connectivity supervision (monitoring of TIM)
• Quality supervision (monitoring of DEG and EXC)
• Payload type supervision (monitoring of PLM)
• Multiplex structure supervision (monitoring of payload structure mismatch, PSM)
• Alignment supervision (monitoring of LOF, LOM, and Loss of alignment in VCAT or
GFP frame stream)
• Protocol supervision (monitoring of FOP in protection configurations)
• Backward indication supervision (monitoring for BDI, BIAE, and RDI)
• Alarm correlation and suppression (generation and monitoring of AIS, FDI, and SSF)
Transmission supervision is implemented according to the specific functional model of
the facility being supervised. Details on set of monitored points, detection criteria, and
condition types are provided in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
(PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Fault detection and alarm management
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment supervision
Equipment supervision provides monitoring, detection, and isolation of equipment-related
problems and abnormal behavior. In general, equipment supervision comprises the
supervision of interchangeable and non-interchangeable units and cables. Probable causes
in this category include power, timing, temperature, and other equipment specific
abnormalities.
Processing supervision
Processing supervision is generally associated with a software or software processing
fault. Probable causes in this category include: software errors, communication errors,
version mismatches, DB consistency errors, etc.
Correlation and suppression
A correlation and suppression function is performed in order to isolate the root cause of
the abnormal system operation. It also suppresses alarming in downstream NEs that are
involved in providing end-to-end service.
Alarm reporting
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system provides defect processing, correlation, and
probable cause declaration for each piece of equipment and facility and generates
autonomous message towards the management system (alarm or event) based on the
provisioned alarm severity.
The NE supports four levels of NE condition reporting: CR, MJ, MN, and No Alarm. A
No Report condition is supported for conditions not reported.
• Conditions with a notification code CR (critical), MJ (major), MN (minor) are
reported as alarms.
• Conditions with a notification code NA (Non Alarmed) are reported as events
(standing conditions).
• Conditions with a notification code NR (Not Reported) are autonomously reported but
can be retrieved by user.
All alarms and conditions are available to the management systems as follows:
• 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports autonomous reporting and logging of all
alarms and conditions via WebUI or SNMP interfaces.
• 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports retrieval of all alarms and conditions via CLI,
WebUI or SNMP interfaces.
• Management and retrieval of alarm logs is available via CLI, WebUI, and SNMP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• All alarms that are reported by the system shall be time-stamped at the source.
• All standing conditions are retrievable regardless of whether these conditions are
reported or not. GR-474-CORE defines a standing condition as follows: “A standing
condition is a state of the NE that can be determined by inspection (e.g., examining a
light display) or by interrogating the NE (e.g., sending a request for status information
through an OS).”
A user can define and modify the severity designated to a particular condition by
configuring a specified alarm severity.
The following are the three levels of severity provisioning in the system.
• Each condition type in the system has a factory default severity.
• Each condition type in the system has a provisionable, system-wide factory override
severity with a higher priority than the factory default for the condition type.
• Each specific entity (AID) in the system has a provisionable severity with a higher
priority than the factory override or factory default for the condition type.
The system-wide factory override severity and specific entity severity are provisionable
via CLI, TL1, and SNMP.
Effect on service declaration

The NE supports the capability of reporting Service Affecting (SA) alarms and
Non-Service Affecting (NSA) alarms. In general, failures impacting any traffic are
Service Affecting when no protection exists or when protection is not operational, and the
alarms impacting no traffic are Non-Service Affecting.
Typically, NSA alarms have a default severity of Minor or below, and SA alarms have a
default severity of Major or Critical. The condition’s report and retrieval processing
include the alarm effect on service parameter (SA/NSA).
Changing the alarm severity while some conditions on the facility are present might not
impact the exiting conditions until they clear and get declared again.
For purposes of generating alarm and event reports, time-hysteresis filtering is applied to
all signal conditions as described in GR-253. A condition must be present continuously
for 2.5 seconds before an alarm report is generated, and it must be absent for 10 seconds
before a CLEAR is generated. Some OTS and OCH layer transmission conditions that are
based on analog power monitoring are integrated over longer time periods to avoid
reporting network transient events.
Reported facility conditions correctly identify the underlying equipment source of the
problem. That is, the bay-shelf-slot part of the facility ID refers to the equipment on
which the fault exists.
Reports of alarms and conditions originating from facilities on non-failed equipment as a
result of secondary facility effects are suppressed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Audible alarm indications
The NE provides audible alarm dry contacts and alarm cut-off capability per GR-833. The
alarm cut-off function (OPR-ACO) removes the signal from the dry contacts, but it does
not change the internal state of the NE, nor affect any of the visual indicators.
The NE provides a visual alarm summary display on the user panel via one LED for each
alarm severity (see LED).
Performance monitoring
General performance monitoring (PM) processing
Performance Monitoring processing in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 provides the
following functions.
• Monitors and accumulates digital and analog parameters pertinent to a specific
physical or logical access point (see further detailed description of monitoring types
on specific 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE entities)
• Stores and manages history accumulation data (up to thirty-three 15-minute and seven
1-day accumulation registers can be stored)
• Validation and threshold crossing processing
• Manages threshold values through profile assignment to individual port entities
• Free-running counters for all monitored points
Performance Monitoring functions are performed on physical and logical points within
the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE representing the boundary with other NEs or an
external system. A user can define and monitor Quality Of Service at individual points in
which local NE interacts with other network entities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Performance monitoring
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 5-1, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 PM points” (p. 5-6) for an illustration
of performance monitoring points.
Figure 5-1 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 PM points
The identified points in Figure 5-1, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 PM points”

(p. 5-6) provide the following transport layer and PM monitoring types:
1. OTS layer → monitored type(s): Total OPR
OCh channel within the OTS → monitored type(s): OPR
2. Internal monitoring point for SCOT and diagnostics (not included in PM processing
related to binning and reporting)
6. OTS layer → monitored type(s): TOPT
OCh channel within the OTS → monitored type(s): OPT
7. OPS layer → monitored type(s): OPR & OPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTUk layer → monitored types: BBE, ES, SES, UAS, FEC-EC, FEC-UBC,
BERpreFEC, BERpostFEC, IAES and BIAEs
ODUk layer → monitored types: BBE, ES, SES & UAS
ODUkTCM layer → monitored types: BBE, BIAES, IAES, ES, SES & UAS
8. Client Optical → monitored types (s): OPR & OPT
9. OSC Receive direction → monitored type(s): OPR, CV, ES, SES, SEFS
10. OSC Transmit direction → monitored type(s): OPT
Whereas digital monitoring types provide progressive accumulation of monitored
performance event counts, analog monitoring types provide watermark points (high and
low watermarks), as well as average value of analog monitored parameter over an
accumulation period.
In addition to physical and logical (OCh) facility-related PM support, the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE supports monitoring of the equipment controller (EC)
processing use of resources.
The controller card provides monitoring as well as 15-minute and 1-day register
accumulation and provides storage of the following resource utilization statistics.
• Average CPU use
• Peak Heap use
• Peak Memory Pool use
Threshold crossing alert management

1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 provides users with the ability to configure and manage
threshold crossing alert message generation for every PM monitoring entity. Designated
threshold for the monitored type is considered crossed when the value in the current
register is equal to or exceeds the value in the corresponding threshold register.
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) occurrence is reported via REPT EVT messages or
SNMP traps upon recognition of the threshold crossings. A TCA is considered a transient
condition (implicitly cleared at the end of associated accumulation period).
Users can manage threshold values (change the threshold or disable threshold alert
generation) by modifying threshold attributes in the TCA profile assigned to an 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 NE port entity.
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 supports the following TCA profile types.
• OC_N (SONET port section monitoring)
• STM_N (SDH port section monitoring)
• DW (OTU2 and ODU2 layer PM parameters)
• ETH (Ethernet group, RMON statistic)
• INF (Interface group)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• PCS (PCS layer monitoring for Ethernet/FC ports)
• CP (Equipment PM parameters, applicable to EC, processor resources statistics)
• OPR (Optical Power Received on OT and OSC points)
• OPT (Optical Power Transmitted on OT and OSC points)
Nine instances of each profile type are supported. Profile instance 0 is used to disable
TCAs for the group. Profiles with index 7 contain factory default data with 15-minute
defaults pre-loaded, while profile with index 8 contains 1-day defaults pre-loaded.
Instances 1-6 are initialized with all 0 values and can be customized by user.
Each port can be assigned one or more profile instances. (Only one instance of each
profile type can be assigned to a port/time period combination. That is, one instance of a
profile type can be assigned to a port A, 15-minute time period, while another instance of
the same profile type can be assigned to same port A but 1-day time period.)
When a port is created, the system automatically assigns profile instance #7 (pre-loaded
with 15-minute defaults) and #8 (pre-loaded with 1-day defaults).
Analog parameter TCAs
Performance parameter thresholds are set to show degraded performance. A threshold is
the mechanism for generating a defined notification resulting from changes in parameter
values.
Two types of thresholds exist.
• Counter-threshold: associated with digital parameters
• Gauge-threshold: associated with analog parameters
Unlike the value of a “counter” parameter that can only increase in value unless its value
is reset, the value for a gauge parameter can increase or decrease continuously over time.
Analog parameters have two user configurable thresholds (notifyHigh and notifyLow) as
a high threshold and low threshold associated with the parameter, respectively
These threshold values are checked against the appropriate tidemark low and tidemark
high monitors. TCA notification is raised when tidemark high exceeds the defined
notifyHigh value for the parameter and time period or when tidemark low drops below
the defined notifyLow value for the parameter and time period.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Figure 5-2, “Analog parameter TCAs” (p. 5-9) for an illustration.
Figure 5-2 Analog parameter TCAs
Note that term exceed used with tidemark low/high monitored parameters indicates that
tidemark high value is greater than the corresponding threshold or that tidemark low is
below the corresponding threshold.
For OT physical layer OPR, OPT parameters TCA profiles contain values for positive and
negative deviation relative to established baselined analog value for that port. Baselining
of OPR/OPT values can be established automatically (at the point the input signal is
applied to the port initially or laser initially enabled) or manually by user command.
Baselining applies to OT and OSC ports but does not apply to OCh and OTS ports. OCh
and OTS port thresholds are established during the commissioning phase.
Client-specific PM monitoring parameters

1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders (OTs) provide a variety of client signal
types that a user can configure. Each of the specific client signal types includes optical
physical layer monitoring points as well as one or more digital layer monitoring points.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following tables list the digital layer monitoring groups that 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16 supports.
Table 5-1 SONET Section PM parameters
Parameter Mnemonic per T1.231 Definition

Coding Violations CV-S Count of BIP-8 (Byte B1)
errors
Errored Seconds ES-S Count of seconds with (B1)
Errors ≥ 1 or SEF ≥ 1 or LOS
≥1
Severely Errored Seconds SES-S Count of seconds with (B1)
Errors ≥ x2 or SEF ≥1 or LOS
≥1
Severely Error Frame SEFS-S Count of seconds with SEF ≥
Seconds 1
Coding Violations
Notes:
1. Value “x” is based on GR-253, T1.231 definition of SES for specified signal.
Table 5-2 SONET Line PM parameters
Parameter Mnemonic per T1.231 Definition

Coding Violations CV-L Count of BIP (Byte B2) errors
Errored Seconds ES-L Count of seconds with (B2)
Errors ≥ 1, or SEF ≥ 1, or
LOS ≥ 1
Severely Errored Seconds SES-L Count of seconds with (B2)
Errors ≥ x2, or SEF ≥ 1, or
LOS ≥ 1
Unavailable Seconds UAS-L 10 or more seconds of SES
Far End Coding Violations FECV-L Count of M1 Byte errors
(REI-L) and SES-L=0
Far End Errored Seconds FEES-L REI-L ≥ 1, or RDI-L ≥ 1 and
SES-L=0
Far End Severly Errored FESES-L Count of seconds with REI-L
Seconds Errors ≥x2, or SEF ≥ 1, or
LOS ≥ 1 and SES-L=0
Far End Unavailable Seconds FEUAS-L 10 or more seconds of SES
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-3 SDH regenerator and multiplex section PM parameters
Parameter Mnemonic Definition

Background Block Errors BBE-RS Σ (pN_EBC for all seconds
not declared SES)
Errored Seconds ES-RS Count of seconds with
pN_EBC ≥ 1 or OOF ≥ 1 or
LOS ≥ 1
Severely Errored Seconds SES-RS Count of seconds with Block
Errors ≥ x2 or OOF ≥ 1 or
LOS ≥ 1
Unavailable Seconds UAS-RS 10 or more seconds of SES
Notes:
1. pn_EBC indicates event of detecting a block error in STM-N structure. ITU-T and ETSI
documents define pN_DS event which contributes to ES, SES, and UAS declaration. This
simplified approach is consistent with pN_DS definition in referred documents.
2. Value “x” is based on G.784 definition of SES.
Table 5-4 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM NearEND PM Parameters
Parameter Mnemonic CLI MONTYPE Definition

Background Block BBE-OTU RX SM BIP8 Error Count of BIP-8 (SM
Errors Count BIP-8) errors fore all
seconds not declared SES
Errored Seconds ES-OTU RX SM Error Count of seconds with
Seconds (SM BIP-8) Errors ≥ 1 or
LOF = True or LOM =
True or LOS = True
Severely Errored SES-OTU RX SM Severely Count of seconds with
Seconds Error Seconds (SM BIP-8) Errors ≥ x2 or
LOF = True or LOM =
True or LOS = True
Unavailable Seconds UAS-OTU RX SM Unavailable 10 or more seconds of
Seconds SES
Incoming Alignment IAES RX SM IAE Seconds Count of IAE seconds
Error Seconds and LOS=False or
LOF=False or
LOM=False
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM NearEND PM Parameters (continued)

FEC Corrected FECC RX RS Corrected Count of FEC Errors
Errors Count Corrected3 and LOS =
False and LOD = False
FEC Uncorrected FECUBC RX RS Uncorrected Count of Uncorrectable
Bits Count Bits and LOS = False and
LOF = False
PreFEC Bit Error BERPreFEC Rx preFEC Bit Error Count of preFEC bit error
Ratio Ratio ratio and LOS=False and
LOF=false
PostFEC Bit Error BERPostFEC Rx postFEC Bit Error Count of FEC
Ratio Ratio uncorrectable bit error
ratio and LOS=False and
LOF=false
Background Block BBE-OTU RX PM BIP8 Error Count of BIP-8 (PM
Errors Count BIP-8) errors for all
Errored Seconds ES-ODU RX PM Error Count of seconds with
Seconds (PM BIP-8) Errors ≥ 1 or
LOF = True or
LOM = True or
LOS = True or
AIS = True or
OCI = True or
LCK = True or
TIM = True or
PLM = True
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Severely Errored SES-ODU RX PM Severely Count of seconds with
Seconds Error Seconds (PM BIP-8) Errors ≥ x2 or
LOF = True or
LOM = True or
LOS = True or
AIS = True or
OCI = True or
LCK = True or
TIM = True or
PLM = True
Unavailable Seconds UAS-ODU RX PM Unavailable 10 or more seconds SES
Seconds
Background Block BBE-TCM RX TCM BIP8 Error Count of BIP-8 (TCM
Errors Count BIP-8) errors for all
Incoming Alignment IAES-TCM RX STAT Count of seconds with at
Error Seconds least one TCM STAT IAE
defect occurred
Errored Seconds ES-TCM RX TCM Error Count of seconds with
Seconds (TCM BIP-8) Errors ≥ 1
or
SSF=True or
AIS = True or
OCI = True or
LCK = True or
LTC = True or
TIM = True or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Severely Errored SES-TCM RX TCM Severely Count of seconds with
Seconds Error Seconds (TCM BIP-8) Errors ≥ x
(see note 2) or
SSF = True or
AIS = True or
OCI = True or
LCK = True or
LTC = True or
TIM = True
Unavailable Seconds UAS-TCM RX TCM Unavailable 10 or more seconds SES
Seconds
Table 5-5 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM FarEND PM Parameters

Background Block FEBBE-OTU Rx Far-end SM BIP8 Count of OTU-BEI errors
Errors Error Count for all seconds not
declared far-end SES and
near-end defect seconds.
A far-end block error has
occurred if the BEI value
is between 1 and 8;
otherwise, no far-end
block error has occurred.
Backward Incoming BIAES-OTU Rx BIAE Seconds Count of seconds with at
Alignment Error least one OTU BIAE
Seconds defect occured.
Errored Seconds FEES-OTU Rx Far-end SM Error Count of all seconds not
seconds declared near-end defect
seconds with (OTU BEI)
Errors ≥ 1 or (OTU BDI)
= True.
Severely Errored FESES-OTU Rx Far-end SM Count of all seconds not
Seconds Severely error declared near-end defect
seconds seconds with (OTU BEI)
Errors > x (see note 2) or
(OTU BDI) = True.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM FarEND PM Parameters (continued)

Unavailable Seconds FEUAS-OTU Rx Far-end SM 10 or more seconds SES
unavailabe error
seconds
Background Block FEBBE-ODU Rx Far-end PM BIP8 Count of ODU-BEI
Errors Error Count errors for all seconds not
declared not declared
far-end SES and near-end
defect seconds..A far-end
block error has occurred
if the BEI value is
between 1 and 8;
otherwise, no far-end
block error has occurred.
Errored Seconds FEES-ODU Rx Far-end PM Count of all seconds not
Errored Seconds declared near-end defect
seconds with (ODU BEI)
Errors ≥ 1 or (ODU BDI)
= True
Background Block BBE-TCM RX Error Count Count of BEI (TCM BEI)
Errors TCM BEI errors for all seconds in
which there is no AIS,
OCI, LCK or LTC defect.
A far-end block error has
occurred if the BEI value
is between 1 [0001] and 8
[1000]; otherwise, no
far-end block error has
occurred.
Backward Incoming BIAES-TCM RX TCM BIAE Error Count of seconds with at
Alignment Error Count least one TCM BIAE
Seconds defect occured
(BIAE=1011).
Errored Seconds ES-TCM RX TCM Error Seconds Count of seconds with
(TCM BEI) Errors ≥ 1 or
(TCM BDI) = True.
Severely Errored SES-TCM RX Severely Error Count of seconds with
Seconds TCM Seconds (TCM BEI) Errors ≥ x or
(TCM BDI) = True.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-5 OTUk, ODUk, and ODUkTCM FarEND PM Parameters (continued)

Unavailable Seconds UAS-TCM RX TCM Unavailable 10 or more seconds SES
Seconds
Note: For far-end DW Parameters and IAE/BIAE Seconds, monitoring the far-end
parameters in DW group and IAE seconds are implemented on the following OT
cards: 11QAP4, 43STX4P.
The following 64B/66B Near-End Physical Coding Sublayer parameters can be
monitored for 10GbE LAN and 10GFC interfaces.
Table 5-6 PCS PM parameter definitions (64B/66B)

Code Violations - PCS CV-PCS Count of 64B/66B or 8B/10B
coding violations
Errored Seconds - PCS ES-PCS Count of 64B/66B or 8B/10B
coding violations ≥ 1 or dLSS
= True or dLOS = True
Severely Errored Seconds - SES-PCS Count of seconds with
PCS 64B/66B or 8B/10B errors ≥
x2or dLSS = True or dLOS =
True
Severely Errored Frame SEFS-PCS Count of seconds in which
Seconds - PCS dLSS = True or dLOS = True
The following 8B/10B Near-End Physical Coding Sublayer parameters can be monitored
for 1 GbE and FC100/200/400/800 interfaces.
Table 5-7 PCS PM parameter definitions (8B/10B)

Code Violations - PCS CV-PCS Count of 8B/10B coding
violations
Errored Seconds - PCS ES-PCS Count of seconds with
8B/10B coding violations ≥ 1
or dLSS=True or dLOS=True
Severely Errored Seconds - SES-PCS Count of seconds with
PCS 8B/10B errors ≥ x2or dLSS =
True or dLOS = True
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-7 PCS PM parameter definitions (8B/10B) (continued)

Severely Errored Frame SEFS-PCS Count of seconds in which
Seconds - PCS dLSS=True or dLOS=True
MAC layer monitoring types are split into two PM groups: ETH (Ethernet statistics
group) and INF (interface group).
Table 5-8 Ethernet statistics definitions (ETH group)

Ethernet Number of Octets ETHOCTETS Provides a count of the total
number of octets of data
(including the bad packets)
received on the port. Count
excludes framing bits (SFD &
Preamble) but includes Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) octets.
Ethernet Number of Packets ETHPKTS Provides a count of the total
number of packets (including
bad packets, broadcast, and
multicast packets) received.
Ethernet Broadcast Packets ETHBCSTPKTS Identifies a count of the total
number of good packets
received that were directed to
the broadcast address. This
does not include multicast
packets.
Number of collision events on ETHCOLLISIONS Provides a count of the total
Ethernet link number of collisions on the
port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-8 Ethernet statistics definitions (ETH group) (continued)

Ethernet Number of Errored ETHCRCAE Provides a count of the total
Frames number of packets received
that had a length of between
63 and 1518 octets, inclusive,
but had either a FCS with an
integral number of octets
(FCS error) or a bad FCS with
a non-integral number of
octets (Alignment Error). The
packet length excludes
framing bits and includes FCS
octets.
Ethernet Number of Drop ETHDROPEVTS Provides a count of the total
Events number of events in which
packets were dropped by the
monitoring entity due to a
lack of resources. This value
is not necessarily the number
of packets dropped; it can be
the number of times this
condition has been detected.
Ethernet Incoming ETHFRGMTS Provides a count of the total
Fragmented Packets number of packets sent or
received that were less than
64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits but including
FCS octets) and had either a
bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet Jabber Packets ETHJABRS Provides a count of the total
number of packets sent or
received that were longer than
1518 octets (excluding
framing bits, but including
FCS octets) and had either a
bad FCS with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
Ethernet Multi-cast Packets ETHMCSTPKTS Provides a count of the total
number of good packets
received that were directed to
a multicast address. This does
not include packets directed
to the broadcast.
Ethernet Oversize Packets ETHOVRSIZEPKTS Provides a count of the total
number of packets received
that were longer than 1518
octets and were otherwise
well formed. The packet
length excludes framing bits
and includes FCS octets.
Ethernet Undersized Packets ETHUNDRSIZEPKTS Provides a count of the total
number of packets received
that were less than 64 octets
long and were otherwise well
formed. The packet length
excludes framing bits and
includes FCS octets.
Ethernet 64-octet Packets ETHPKTS64OCTETS Provides a count of the total
number of packets (including
bad packets) received that
were exactly 64 octets in
length. The packet length
excludes framing bits and
includes FCS octets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet 65- to 127-octet ETHPKTS127OCTETS Provides a count of the total
Packets number of packets (including
were between 65 and 127
octets in length, inclusive.
The packet length excludes
octets.
octets.
octets.
octets.
octets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet Packet Error Ratio ETHPKTER Provides the value of packet
error ratio within the
monitoring period
Table 5-9 Interface PM statistics definitions (INF group)
Parameter Output MONTYPE Definition

Interface Incoming Number IFINOCTETS The IFINOCTETS contains
of Bytes the number of received bytes
in good and bad frames.
Interface Outgoing Number of IFOUTOCTETS The IFOUTOCTETS contains
Bytes the number of transmitted
bytes in good and bad frames.
Interface Incoming Number IFINUCASTPKTS The IFINUCASTPKTS
of Unicast Frames contains the number of
received unicast MAC
frames.
Interface Outgoing Number of IFOUTUCASTPKTS The IFOUTUCASTPKTS
Unicast Frames contains the number of
transmitted unicast MAC
frames.
Interface Incoming Number IFINBCASTPKTS The IFINBCASTPKTS
of Broadcast Frames contains the number of
received MAC frames with
broadcast Destination
Address.
Interface Outgoing Number of IFOUTBCASTPKTS The IFINBCASTPKTS
Broadcast Frames contains the number of
transmitted MAC frames with
broadcast Destination
Address.
Interface Incoming Number IFINMCASTPKTS The IFINMCASTPKTS
of Multicast Frames contains the number of
received MAC frames with
multicast Destination
Address.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-9 Interface PM statistics definitions (INF group) (continued)

Interface Outgoing Number of IFOUTMCASTPKTS The IFINMCASTPKTS
Multicast Frames contains the number of
transmitted MAC frames with
multicast Destination
Address.
Interface Incoming Frame IFINERR The IFINERR contains the
Errors number of errored frames
received.
The received frame counts as
errored if it contains:
• Symbol errors
• CRC errors
• Alignment errors
Interface Outgoing Frame IFOUTERR The IFOUTERR contains the
Errors number of errored frames
transmitted.
The transmitted frames count
as errored if it contains:
• Symbol errors
• CRC errors
• Alignment errors
Interface Incoming Discarded IFINDSCRD Provides a count of the
Frames number of packets discarded
at the IN port (IfInDiscards)
of the interface.
Interface Outgoing Discarded IFOUTDSCRD Provides a count of the
Frames number of packets discarded
at the OUT port
(IfOutDiscards) of the
interface.
Interface Incoming Frames IFINUNKNOWNPLTS Provides a count of the
with Unknown Protocol number of packets received at
the IN port of the interface for
which the protocol is
unknown.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-9 Interface PM statistics definitions (INF group) (continued)

Interface Incoming IFINUNCLASSPKTS Provides a count of the
Unclassified Frames number of unclassified
packets received at the
interface.
OSC port supports Section/RS monitored types, like OC3/STM1 port as well as INF PM
group.
Single-port tunable Any Rate module (11STAR1) supports the following performance
monitoring groups:
• 10-GbE client port entity: ETH, PCS, OPR and OPT
• 10 GFC client port entity: PCS, OPR and OPT
• OC192/STM64 client port entity: OC_N, STN_N, OPR and OPT
• OTM-0.2 client port entity: DW, OPR and OPT
• Line port entity: DW, OPR and OPT
Single-line port tunable multi-rate 10-client multiplexing module (11STMM10) supports
the following performance monitoring groups:
• 1/2/4 GFC client port entity: PCS, OPR and OPT
• OC-3/12/48/STM-1/4/16 client port entity: OC_N, STM_N, OPR and OPT
• CBR2G5 client port entity: OC_N, STM_N, OPR and OPT
Single-line port tunable 12-GbE client Multiplexing module (11STGE12) supports the
following performance monitoring groups:
OTS and OCH entities support only Optical Power Receive and Transmit performance
monitoring groups (no threshold crossing alerts).
The SVAC supports only OPR PM group on the client port and OPT PM group on the
line port.
The 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 OTs support the following performance monitoring
groups:
• 10-GbE client port entity: ETH, PCS, OPR, and OPT
• OC192/STM64 client port entity: OC_N, STM_N, OPR, and OPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• OTM-0.2-client port entity: DW, OPR, and OPT
• Line port entity: DW, OPR, OPT, CD, DGD, and FOFF
The 112SCA1 and 1112SNA1 OTs support the following performance monitoring groups
• 100 Gbe client port entity: DW, OPR, and OPT
• Line port entity: DW, OPR, OPT, CD, DGD, and FOFF
Compensated Chromatic Dispersion

The Chromatic Dispersion – received (CDR) parameter is the amount of compensated
chromatic dispersion at the line side optical receiver of the 112SCX10, 112SNX10,
112SCA1 OT, and 112SNA1 OTs. This value is measured by the ADCDSP on each OT
line-side receiver. This measured value is reported through CLI/SNMP, while CDR
average is stored as CDRAVG (CDR average) measurement value. PM uses the measured
value of CDR to calculate average compensated chromatic dispersion in the accumulation
period.
The following are the features of Compensated Chromatic Dispersion PM:
• The CDR for each OT is measured in 1-minute intervals.
• The system provides CDRL (CDR Low tide mark) and CDRH (CDR High tide mark)
measured value for each measurement interval when PM is enabled.
Compensated Differential Group delay

The Differential Group Delay – received (DGDR) parameter is the amount of
compensated differential group delay at the line side optical receiver of the 112SCX10,
112SNX10, 112SCA1, and 112SNA1 OTs. This value is measured by the ADCDSP on
each OT line-side receiver. This measured value is reported through CLI/SNMP, while
DGDR average is stored as DGDRAVG (DGDR average) measurement value. PM uses
the measured value of DGDR to calculate average compensated differential group delay
in the accumulation period.
The following are the features of Compensated Differential Group Delay PM:
• The DGDR for each OT is measured in 1-minute intervals.
• The system provides DGDRL (DGDR Low tide mark) and DGDRH (DGDR High
tide mark) measured value for each measurement interval when PM is enabled.
Beginning with Release 3.6.0, the 112SCX10 optical transponder with standard chromatic
dispersion and polarization dispersion mitigation performance is supported. The
112SCX10 OT supports up to 30,000 ps/nm CD and up to 90 ps DGD. Beginning with
Release 3.6.50 and Release 3.6.51, the 112SNX10 optical transponder is provides similar
functional characteristics as the 112SCX10, but with OSNR improved to 15.2 dB, from
OSNR of 16.2 dB on the 112SCX10. For CD and PMD performance enhancements in
future releases, contact Alcatel-Lucent for interface specifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Frequency Offset
The Frequency Offset – received (FOFFR) parameter is a measure of the optical
frequency difference between the local oscillator and the incoming signal at the line side
optical receiver of the 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 112SCA1, and 112SNA1 OTs. This
measured value is reported through CLI/SNMP, while FOFFR average is stored as
FOFFRRAVG (FOFFR average) measurement value. PM uses the measured value of
FOFFR to calculate the average amount of frequency offset in the accumulation period.
The following are the features of Frequency Offset Received PM:
• The FOFFR for each OT is measured in 1-minute intervals.
• The system provides FOFFRL (FOFFR Low tide mark) and FOFFRH (FOFFR High
tide mark) measured value for each measurement interval when PM is enabled.
Automatic power adjustments

Automated optical power management system
Automated optical power management is a software system that controls variable optical
attenuators in the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 to control the optical power levels on a
per-wavelength basis.
Several subsystems comprise the power management system:
• Stored target powers and amplifier gain ranges
• Pack level control loops
• Add wavelength power adjustment loop
• Amplifier gain and set-point adjustment functions
When a system is commissioned, data is transferred to the network elements (NEs) in the
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16. This data includes the target powers per-channel at key
locations in the NE and the expected minimum and maximum gains for amplifiers in the
system. The latter provides operational bounds on the gains of the amplifiers in the
system and ties their gain ranges to the planning of the network.
When an amplifier gain must be set outside the planned range, a potential optical
signal-to-noise ration (OSNR) problem is indicated within the network: The OSNR of
light paths travelling through this amplifier can experience more OSNR degradation than
planned. The planning data can be transferred to the NEs either manually by entering the
data using one of the user interfaces or by using the commissioning tools provided by the
Photonic Manager to automatically provision the planning data from a commissioning file
produced by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Automatic power adjustments
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-3, “EPT parameters for a TOADM node” (p. 5-26) illustrates an automatically
managed tunable optical add-drop multiplexer (TOADM) node with the power targets and
gain ranges from the planning tool labeled. The small green circles indicate Wavelength
Tracker monitoring points that are used to retrieve power readings used by the power
management system.
Figure 5-3 EPT parameters for a TOADM node
Pack levels
Pack level loops maintain target output powers that have been calculated and set by the
power management system. There are two types of pack level control loop.
In one version, the decoded Wavelength Tracker power levels at the output ports of the
wavelength selective switch pack (CWR8) are used to continuously update per channel
VOA settings to adjust the power level per wavelength to a target output power. The
VOAs are adjusted using an algorithm that guarantees stability of the system when many
CWR8 packs are traversed by a light path.
In another version, the VOA used to control the output power of a wavelength at the point
it is added onto the system and is continuously adjusted using the power reading available
on the pack where the VOA is located. In both cases, the target per wavelength power that
the loops try to achieve has been calculated by the power management system to achieve
the power levels designed for the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-4, “Per-channel power control points within a TOADM node”
(p. 5-27) illustrates the location of some local pack target points for a TOADM network
element.
Figure 5-4 Per-channel power control points within a TOADM node
The add wavelength power adjustment loop periodically checks the output power of
added wavelengths at their egress point onto the optical fiber at the node at which they are
launched. It then adjusts the set-points that control the add path wavelengths to achieve
the target powers at the output of the node. These adjustments compensate for changes in
output power at the egress point of the node as wavelengths are added and dropped from
the system and for minor changes in loss in the add path components.
Valid automatic and manual power adjustment configurations
The attribute setting for auto-power management must be consistent across the Through
path of a TOADM. Topological link creation is not allowed if it will result in a mismatch
of auto-power management attributes at opposite ends of a TOADM Through path.
If a TOADM Through path topology is established, when the auto-power managed
attribute of one external fiber is changed, the state of the other end of the Through path
will be changed to match.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE is capable of detecting an invalid auto-power managed Through path of a
TOADM upon topological link creation and software upgrade. Figure 5-5, “Valid
automatic and manual power adjustment configurations” (p. 5-28) illustrates valid and
invalid power management configurations for the TOADM Through path.
Figure 5-5 Valid automatic and manual power adjustment configurations
Adjustment functions
Two functions are provided that adjust amplifier gains, recalculate set-points, and reset
Wavelength Tracker expected powers.
Ingress adjustment
The ingress adjustment function adjusts the gain of the optical amplifier on an incoming
line, at the ingress LD, to compensate the loss from the preceding node’s egress point to
the output of the ingress LD. Target powers at both the upstream node and the local node
define the required loss.
Egress adjustment
The egress adjustment function adjusts the gain of the optional optical amplifier on an
outgoing line, at the egress LD, to compensate the loss of the network element’s through
path components between the ingress LD output and the egress line output. The target
power at the egress line and the ingress LD define the target loss. Additionally, the egress
adjustment function recalculates the drop path CWR8/CWR8-88 set-points for the
through channels and the output power required for the add path CWR8/CWR8-88 to
coincide with the egress amplifier’s gain and the egress line target output power.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The adjustment of the egress amplifier gain is done in such a way that the minimum
required gain is selected to compensate the node’s through loss. This minimizes the
amplifier’s contribution to the transmitted signal’s OSNR degradation. If there is no
egress amplifier the egress adjustment function only adjusts the set-points to meet the
egress line’s target output power. After an adjustment function completes the Wavelength
Tracker monitoring point expected powers are updated to reflect the changes in set-points
and gains within the node
The power management system’s adjustments are coordinated to prevent control loops
from changing VOA settings too far from estimated required values. Internode
communication provides a way to monitor for large loss changes in the network to
prevent downstream network elements from compensating loss that should be
compensated by a more upstream network element. The adjustments to set-points and
gains are made in small controlled steps to prevent any impact on other wavelengths or
other parts of the system
Automatic power management features

The automatic power management system enables the following features.
• Automatic compensation for loss changes in the network up to a limit, (after which
the adjustment functions must be used by the user to adjust optical amplifier gains or
set-points).
• Automated service turn-up.
• One-touch commissioning using the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager.
• System power rebalancing using the 1354RM-PhM Photonic Manager.
• Automated network equipment upgrade tools using the 1354RM-PhM Photonic
Manager.
• Alarms indicate when network events require the user to invoke a power adjustment
function. Alarms also indicate if adjustments have failed and when a local pack
control loop cannot maintain a target power.
Finally, automated power management can be disabled on a line-by-line basis to allow
mixing static OADM network elements with reconfigurable OADM network elements
within the same system. The ability to disable automated power management and use
manual power management also allows Alcatel-Lucent to be flexible when solving
network problems presented by the customer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

Overview
The key differentiating characteristic that separates open photonic layer services from
more primitive services offered by passive WDM equipment is that open photonic layer
services provide management capabilities through the Wavelength Tracker monitoring
capability feature. Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability allows a network operator to
remotely trace a light path and to monitor power levels without disrupting service. This is
invaluable during installation, commissioning, and ongoing management of the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is more than an integrated power measurement
feature. It has the capability to uniquely identify and track each wavelength throughout
the network. This is especially valuable in WDM and OADM networks where multiple
instances of the same wavelength may occur.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a technique to tag a wavelength so that the
wavelength can be traced through the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network. Wavelength
Tracker also allows the optical power levels to be measured along the path.
WaveKeys
To make use of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability, certain optical components
are equipped with detection points that can detect the presence of Wavelength Tracker
keys and measure the optical power of each wavelength. Each Wavelength Tracker
detection point can be programmed to expect particular channels and raise an alarm if the
channels are not detected. The Wavelength Tracker detection points can also measure the
optical power of individual wavelength services. Alarms can be raised if the optical power
is too high or too low. The alarm threshold is provisionable by the user.
The WaveKeys are detected on the following cards.
• LD - LINE IN and SIG OUT
• CWR - SIG IN and THRU OUT and Add VOA out
• OPS - A IN and B IN and SIG IN
Using the information from the Wavelength Tracker detection points throughout the
network, the Network Management System user can perform the following.
• Trace light paths through the network, verifying that the connectivity is correct
• Monitor power levels along a light path, as seen in Figure 5-6, “Path power trace”
(p. 5-31).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Identify all the services at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
• Monitor the power levels of all services at a Wavelength Tracker detection point, as
seen inFigure 5-7, “Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point”
(p. 5-32).
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability enables
service providers to pro-actively manage wavelength services and to deliver true optical
service assurance.
Figure 5-6 Path power trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-7 Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
NE software installation, upgrades, and back-outs

Overview
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network element (NE) software installation and upgrades
are performed by the service provider’s system administrator. Network elements can be
upgraded using a download from the 1354RM-PhM Element Management System, or the
WebUI via a personal computer (using a CD-ROM that contains the system software load
provided with the system).
Installation
The software installation service provides the control mechanism for nodal, shelf, and
line-card level software downloads, installations, upgrades, and back-outs. The service
performs an audit of those assets that require upgrade, and uses the software load transfer
mechanism to retrieve the software from a target server. Card software installations affect
only the specified card, whereas nodal software installations affect the entire network
element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning NE software installation, upgrades, and back-outs
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrades
Upgrades and back-outs are treated as software installations. The software upgrade
feature consists of software load distribution, card restarts, and activity switches. The
feature performs the upgrade with minimal data loss and card down time. Mechanisms are
provided to minimize traffic over the control network when multiple cards require
upgrade to the same revision level. Future releases will enable control of line card
upgrades that can be coordinated with maintenance and/or protection switching activities.
Back-outs
The upgrade feature also offers the ability to back out of an upgrade that is in progress.
When a nodal installation completes, all cards are running the target load with the
exception of inactive mate cards. The inactive mate cards retain the previous load. You
can then either issue a back-out command or commit the network element to the newly
installed load. The back-out reverts to the original load, but in this case you must restore
the database from backup. Once committed, the network element installs the target load
on all inactive mate cards, and the inactive master control card’s database is synchronized
to the active master control card. A back-out causes the inactive mate cards to become
active and reinstalls the previous load on the previously active card. For complete
installation information, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.6.50 and 3.6.51 Installation and System
Turn-Up Guide.
Security
Overview
The following information provides a brief overview of available security features and
information on using them. The security features and functions can be grouped into the
following:
• RADIUS server support for User Authentication
• User Login management
• Encrypted Mode and Secure Shell
• Crypto Key Management for Encrypted Data Exchange
• Encrypted File Transfer for Database Backup/Restore and SW Download
RADIUS server support for user authentication

RADIUS provides a centralized way of user login/authentication and management. A
RADIUS server is an external entity (server) that keeps a centralized Database of user
login, password and privilege information. Each NE in the network consults a configured
RADIUS server when a user attempts to gain access to the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Security
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The implementation in the current release, provides support for user authentication and
privilege (admin, provisioner, observer, etc.) retrieval. The RADIUS protocol does not
support changing a user login/password or adding a new user to an NE. All users must be
pre-configured on the RADIUS server. So some of the security features under User Login
Management may not be applicable (e.g. forcing a user to change a password due to
aging).
Encrypted mode and secure shell (SSH)

SSH provides encrypted access to an NE. An SSH server running on the NE is
responsible for setting up an encrypted channel for each user session. A typical user
session starts with an SSH client connection and ends when the connection goes away. All
data exchanged during the session is encrypted/decrypted using an encryption key.
The user is authenticated at SSH client connection time. Upon successful authentication,
the user is allowed to connect directly to the CLI.
Configuration of encrypted or normal mode can be used to restrict access to the NE.
When the NE is placed in encrypted mode, Telnet etc. normal access is disabled. To
prevent accidental lockout, the generation of an encryption key is allowed only in normal
mode.
SSH requires an encryption key. If no key is generated, SSH cannot be used. However, an
SSH session can be established regardless of security mode, as long as encryption key is
generated.
The current SSH implementation only employs a password authentication mechanism.
The publicKey based authentication mechanism is not supported in this release.
Invalid login protection

The following two situations are considered excessive invalid login attempts by a user, or
“intrusion violations.”
• The maximum number of consecutive failed login attempts has been reached
(regardless of time period or number of sessions).
• Two consecutive failed login attempts have been reached within the minimum time
interval.
In both cases, the system will automatically lock-out the user (disable login capability),
and record the user ID, IP address, and the source IP port number in the security log .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User activity logging
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS PSS supports logging of user activities. Activities are collected
in a user activity log (UAL) in a user-readable format. All user actions via the WebUI are
logged and stored in this UAL, along with the time and date of the action, the source IP
address and or user name of the operator, and the action itself. One entry is captured for
each user action. The purpose of this log is to provide non-repudiation.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS PSS also allows the administrator to transfer the UAL log to a
remote file server (RFS). The RFS can be the management system itself, or some other
server, as selected by the operator. This transfer mechanism can be performed using FTP
or SFTP.
Crypto key management for encrypted data exchange

The SSH server running on an NE uses an encryption key to encrypt/decrypt data
exchanged between the NE and external entities (e.g. SSH client).
• Currently, only the DSA key is supported. The RSA key will be supported in a future
release.
• Key generation is allowed only when the NE is in the normal mode, to prevent
accidental lockout.
• The Public key part of the Encryption key is not used for authentication. The NE uses
password based authentication only.
• If an encryption key is not generated, the NE will not change security mode from
normal to encrypted.
Encrypted file transfer With SFTP

Both Database Backup and Restore, and software download now support SFTP (Secure
File Transfer Protocol) data transfer. In this case, the NE communicates to an external
SSH server running on the DB backup and software repository machine.
The following notes apply to SFTP based download operations.
• All previous configuration supported in the CLI remains valid for both the operations
(e.g. config software ... or config database ... ).
• The option 'sftp' is now available under the 'server protocol' field, and must be used to
initiate SFTP based transfer,
• An SSH server must be configured using port 22.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
OAMP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• For software and database downloads, the applications running on the NE are SSH (or
SFTP) clients that connect to an external SSH server. Authentication is password
based only. No public key based authentication is performed in this release. As a
result, it is possible to initiate SFTP based database and software download operations
even when no encryption key is generated.
• Note that SFTP based operation may be somewhat slower than traditional tftp/ftp
based transfer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
6 S6ystem planning and
engineering
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides network and office planning guidelines to prepare for deployment
of a 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network.
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool 6-1

Power and grounding 6-3
Operating environment 6-11
Cooling 6-12
Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool

Overview
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering Tool (EPT) is used to design the networks
composed of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, 1830 PSS-16, and 1830 PSS-1 network
elements (NEs). It supports initial designs as well as incremental additions to existing
networks. Through its interface with the Network Management System, design
information produced by the EPT is downloaded to individual NEs to facilitate system
turn-up.
The EPT is a standalone Windows™ application with a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
capable of capturing network requirements and synthesizing network solutions. A built-in
design optimizer produces the lowest cost network requirements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
System planning and engineering Alcatel-Lucent Engineering and Planning Tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Given the complex nature of capturing network requirements, the EPT is capable of
operating in the following ways:
• Fully automatic network design synthesis
• Automatic design synthesis with manual override
• Fully manual design synthesis
• Phased design that enforces in-service upgrades from one phase to another
• “What-if” scenarios to quantify how future traffic patterns operate in the design
The EPT examines thousands of network alternatives, taking into account various optical
parameters including fiber attenuation, end- of-life attenuation margin, connector losses,
chromatic dispersion, and polarization mode dispersion. It calculates transmission
characteristics including typical and worst-case optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR),
residual dispersion, and nonlinear phase shift. The EPT also takes into account optical
penalties due to PMD, PDL, filter penalty, cross talk penalty, and nonlinear transmission
penalty.
The EPT is able to model Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16,
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1, and combinations of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/1830
PSS-16/1830 PSS-1 networks. Tunable OADM (TOADM), fixed OADM (FOADM), and
CWDM configurations can be modeled in the EPT according to the NE configuration
capabilities. Maximum channel counts and optional utilization of the Fiber Storage Tray
and Flex shelf can be specified in the EPT to accommodate cost/performance trade-offs as
well.
The EPT produces a set of reports that can be used to order, install, and configure
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS networks. These reports include Bill of Materials, Amplifier and
DCM Placement, Optical Transmission Characteristics, Card Placement (both tabular and
graphical Bay Layout), Fiber Characteristics, and general network assumptions. The EPT
also produces a design file for the Network Management System that works in
conjunction with WaveTracker™ to define alarm thresholds specific to each design for
preventive network maintenance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
System planning and engineering Power and grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power and grounding

Overview
Each shelf has independent power connections and is powered independently from the
other shelves in the network element. Power is provided to the front of the shelf via two
power filter modules: one on the right side of the shelf and one on the left. The shelf is
designed for redundant power – it will fully operate with only one power filter/supply
although two are always recommended.
Each shelf can be grounded two separate ways. Grounding can be accomplished through
the screws that mount the shelf to the rack or through specific grounding lugs. The
grounding lug connection point is located in the bottom right corner of the shelf. Power is
connected to the power input modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-1 1830 PSS-32 Shelf view showing power and ground connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf power and thermal budgets

Table 6-1, “Power dissipation for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16” (p. 6-5) lists the
maximum power (watts) for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16.
Table 6-1 Power dissipation for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
Pack Description Power Consumption (Watts)

Percent Utilization Max
0% 50% 100%1
Common
FLC36EA PSS-36 First Level Controller 55 55 55 55
MT0C PSS-36 Null Fabric Module 64 64 64 76
BT36 PSS-36 Bus Termination Card 12 12 12 12
EC2 Equipment Controller 28 28 28 43
USRPNL User Panel (PSS-32) 6 6 6 6
User Panel (PSS-16) 6 6 6 6
PFC PSS-36 Power Filter (3x50A inputs) 29
No breakers
PFDC20 DC Power Filter (20A - PSS-32) 10 10 10 10
PFDC30 DC Power Filter (30A) 10 10 10 10
PFDCA DC Power Filter (no circuit breaker 10 10 10 10
and WT support)
PFDC20K PSS-16 DC power Filter Managed 8 8 8 8
(20A)
PFDC35K PSS-16 DC power Filter Managed 8 8 8 8
(35A)
FAN3T8 PSS-36 HP Fan 170 170 170 650
3
FAN Fan Unit (PSS-32) 60 60 60 185
FAN32H High Output Fan Tray (PSS-32) 255 255 255 255
FAN16 Fan Unit (PSS-16) 30 30 30 110
Universal
CWR84 Colorless Wave Router - 44ch 23 23 23 35
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-1 Power dissipation for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 (continued)

0% 50% 100%1
CWR84 Colorless Wave Router - 44ch 30 30 30 45
Optimum
CWR8B4 Colorless Wave Router - 44ch 23 23 23 35
CWR8-884 Colorless Wave Router - 21 21 21 40
44ch@50Ghz boundaries
(frequencies for 88 channel
operation w/CWR8)
WR8-88A4 8-channel wavelength router - add 16.3 18 18 23
side WSS
AHPHG5 Adj High Power High Gain Optical 35 35 35 50
Amp with mid-stage access (13 -
33dB gain)
ALPHG5 Adj Low Power High Gain Optical 30 30 30 45
Amp with mid-stage access (10 -
30dB gain)
AHPLG5 Adj High Power Low Gain Optical 35 35 35 50
Amp with mid-stage access(6 -
24dB gain)
A2325A5 23dB Variable Gain Amplifier with 35 35 35 50
mid-stage access
AM2125A Medium Variable Gain Amplifier 35 35 35 50
with mid-stage access
AM2125B Medium Variable Gain Amplifier 35 35 35 50
with no mid-stage access
AM2318A Variable low gain amplifier with no 35 35 35 50
mid-stage access
RA2P Long Haul - 2 pump Raman, no 40 40 40 50
mid-stage access
ALPFGT Low Power Fixed Gain Amplifier 28 28 28 50
Total Power with mid-stage access
OSCT Optical Supervisory Card Total 22 22 22 31
Power
OPSA Optical Protection Switch 9 9 9 10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

0% 50% 100%1
11STAR1 10G Transponder 40 40 40 47
11STMM10 10 x Any Transponder 100 109 109 127
11STGE12 12 x GbE, Tunable 49 60 60 66
11DPE12 11G Dual Port Pluggable GbE Mux 61 78 78 84
(12 client) - similar to PSS-1 GBE
11DPE12E 11G Dual Port Pluggable GbE Mux 72 84 84 84
(12 client) - enhanced
11DPM12 11G Dual Port Pluggable 12-anyrate 84 84 84 100
Mux OT
4DPA4 MSC - 4G Dual Port Pluggable 17 21 21 23
AnyRate (4 client)
4DPA2 MSC - 4G Dual Port Pluggable 24 29 29 34
AnyRate (2 client)
11QPA4 11G Quad Port Pluggable Anyrate 71 76 76 82
(4 client)
11QPA4A 11G Quad Port Pluggable Anyrate 85 85 85 85
(4 client)
43STX4 40G Single Port Tunable Mux - 44 160 160 160 160
channels (4 client)
43SCX4 40G Single Port Tunable Mux 146 160 174 240
Coherent (4 clients)
43STX4P 40G Single Port Tunable Mux - 160 160 160 160
optimized for 88 channels, PDPSK
(4 client)
43STA1P 40G single Port Tunable AnyRate (1 100 100 100 100
client) - optimized for 44 channels,
PDPSK
43STA1PB 40G single Port Tunable AnyRate (1 100 100 100 100
client) - optimized for 44 channels,
PDPSK
43SCA1 40G single Port Tunable AnyRate 150 150 150 221
Coherent (1 client) - Add/Drop
112SCA1 100G anyrate A/D, coherent 235 255 255 290
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

0% 50% 100%1
112SCX10 10x10G mux, coherent 281 281 281 335
112SNX10 100G Single port tunable mux (10 199 252 304 335
universal clients), coherent,
w/Enhanced OSNR for extended
reach
112SNA1 112G Single Port Tunable Coherent 235 250 250 290
AnyRate Transponder w/enhanced
OSNR (1 client) for extended reach
SVAC Single Port Variable Attenuator 28
MVAC Multiple Variable Attenuator Card 20.8 23 23 23
Keyed
SFCx, SFDx static Filters, CWDM/DWDM 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
ITLB 88 Channel Interleaver 0 0 0 0
ITLU 88 Channel Interleaver 0 0 0 0
(unidirectional)
MESH4 1x4 Splitter card with optical 35 35 35 50
amplifier
WTOCM Wavelength Tracker optical channel 23 23 23 26
monitor
Rack Mount
DCMx Dispersion Control Module 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
RA3P External Raman Amplifier6 55 55 55 55
PB1 External Power Booster Amplifier6 55 55 55 55
SFD44 Static filter - 44 channel 0 0 0 0
SFD44B Static filter - 44 channel @ 50GHz 0 0 0 0
offset
SFD40 Static filter - 40 channel 23 23 23 23
Mux/Demux
SFD40B Static filter - 40 channel 23 23 23 23
Mux/Demux @ 50GHz offset
PTMs
SFP-MM 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

0% 50% 100%1
XFP-SR1 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.5
XFP-IR2 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.5
XFP-LR2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.5
XFP-CWDM SH 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5
XFP-CWDM LH 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.5
XFP-DWDM 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
XFP-Tunable 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5
Notes:
1. Represents “typical” power consumption @ 25° Centigrade.
2. EC power increases over TYP by 0.5W for each installed Line Card or Transponder (32
ports maximum)
3. Fan power starts to increase when the ambient temperatures rises past 30°C and reaches its
MAX at approximately 44°C. During system startup or when an EC has been replaced, the
Fan will operate at MAX power until the EC has completed its startup procedures.
4. The MAX power will decrease by 5W after an intial 3-minute startup period
5. MAX value decreases by 10W after initial 3-minute startup period.
6. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 3.5.0 RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA User
Guide for details.
Power redundancy and reliability

Shelf power distribution is fully redundant, with two circuits, A and B, able to supply
power to the shelf. Redundant power feeds (A and B) are connected to the power modules
in slots 19 and 36 (1830 PSS-32) or slots 1 and 11 (1830 PSS-16). Power is fed into the
shelf over two redundant power rails (A and B) that feed all components in the shelf.
Power filters for the 1830 PSS-32 are available with 20A, 30A, 50A, 60A, and 70A
capacity. Power filters for the 1830 PSS-16 are available with 20A and 35A capacitiy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power filter selection
For 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16 shelves, determine the total power used by all
components of the shelf and verify that this is less than or equal to the power of the power
filter that will be installed. For example:
• Select a 20A power filter if the power consumption of the packs in the shelf is less
than or equal to 20A.
• Select a 35A power filter (only for use on PSS-16 shelves) if the power consumption
of the packs in the shelf is less than or equal to 35A.
For 1830 PSS-36 shelves, in R3.6 only the PFC power filter is supported with three 50A
input connections, for a total of 150A.
Power sources
Shelves operates fault-free in a voltage range of -40V DC to -72V DC (-48V DC or -60 V
DC nominal). You can supply power from standard -48V DC or -60 V DC battery feeds,
as is typical in a central office, or you can use an AC rectifier with battery backup.
DC power system requirements
The DC source for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 must meet the requirements of a
safety extra low voltage (SELV) source.
In order to avoid oscillation in the system, maximum source inductance to the DC power
source is 15µH, with a nominal value of 8µH, assuming a maximum loop of 100 meters
(50 m feed and 50 m return).
Battery feeds
In a typical deployment, the shelves are installed in a central office (CO) or similar
environment that is equipped with its own power distribution center. In this environment,
power is distributed to the shelves from standard 48V DC battery feeds that are equipped
with fuses or circuit breakers.
AC rectifier feeds
In remote or controlled vault deployments, where the primary power source is an AC
utility line, a rectifier is required to convert the power from AC to DC, with a nominal
output voltage of 48 V DC. The rectifier must be capable of generating output power that
equals or exceeds the maximum input DC power requirement from the system, plus 20
percent for battery charging.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To ensure that the shelf has a reliable power source, it is recommended that the rectifier
be N + 1 redundant and have battery backup. The power system in this environment
typically consists of a power rack to hold the rectifier, batteries, and power distribution
panel, and cable feeds that provide DC power to each shelf.
Power monitoring
The shelf controller monitors the status of the A and/or B direct current (DC) input
voltages. When a battery voltage decreases below 45V ±1.5V, the Low Battery Voltage
alarm for that feed is triggered. When both power feeds are present and the A and B Low
Battery Alarms are raised, traffic may soon become interrupted. When both the A and B
power modules agree that their input power voltage has fallen below 38.5V ± 1.5V, they
will turn power OFF to all circuit cards on the shelf, with the exception of the EC and the
SFC/Dx filters.
Operating environment
Introduction
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves are designed to operate in environmentally
controlled locations or enclosures, such as central offices, commercial buildings, and
controlled environment vaults. The environmental operational limits for the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 are listed in Table 6-2, “Ambient temperature and humidity
limits” (p. 6-11).
Table 6-2 Ambient temperature and humidity limits
Factor Condition Limits

Temperature Normal operation 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
Short-term (2) -5°C to 50°C (23°F to 122°F)
Rate of temperature 30°C/hour (54°F/hour)
change
Humidity Normal operation 5% to 85%
Short-term (2) 5% to 90% but not to exceed 0.024 kg of
water per kg of dry air
Notes:
1. Ambient temperature refers to conditions at a location of 1.5 m (59 in) above the floor and
400 mm (15.8 in) in front of the equipment.
2. Short-term operation is a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not
more than 15 days in one year. (This refers to a total of 360 hours in any given year, but no
more than 15 occurrences during that one-year period.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
System planning and engineering Cooling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cooling
Introduction
The shelf is cooled by a fan tray with variable-speed fans. Fan trays for the 1830 PSS-32,
and 1830 PSS-36 shelves have three fans, and the unit for the 1830 PSS-16 shelf has five
fans. Fan trays are hot-swappable in the event of a failure in the unit. If a single fan fails,
the remaining fans will increase speed to compensate, allowing for the fan tray to be
replaced within a reasonable maintenance window. Note that the time frame to replace a
failed fan is 24 hours.
The fan tray is located near the top of the 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-36 shelf and near
the bottom of the 1830 PSS-16 shelf, as shown in the following illustrations. The fans
draw cool air up through the bottom of the shelf and exhaust the heated air through the
top of the 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-36 shelf, and on the left side of the 1830 PSS-16
shelf. Incoming air is filtered through a replaceable air filter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 Airflow through 1830 PSS-36 shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cooling redundancy and reliability

The cooling system provides full carrier class redundancy. In the event of any single
failure the cooling system continues to operate, up to the maximum long-term operational
temperature limit defined in NEBS (40°C).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan operation
In order to ensure the quietest possible operation, the speed of the fans is adjusted
automatically. Fan speed is increased to maximum in case of fault or fan tray removal.
Air filtering
Air for cooling the 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-36 is drawn through an air filter as it
enters the bottom of the shelf. The air filter is located below the fiber tray and is
replaceable from the front of the shelf.
For the 1830 PSS-16 air is drawn through fans at the bottom of the shelf, passed through
an air filter on the right side of the shelf, across any installed cards, and exhausted on the
left side of the chassis. The air filter on the right side of the chassis is replaceable from the
front of the shelf.
Figure 6-5 Air filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
7 Quality and reliability
7
Quality and reliability chapter overview

Purpose
This chapter provides the information about conformance in various regions for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and specifications for system quality and
reliability.
Contents
Product conformance statements by region 7-2

Canada 7-2
China 7-3
European Union 7-5
United States 7-9
Quality and reliability 7-11
Reliability program 7-11
Design and development 7-12
Manufacturing and field deployment 7-13
Failure rates 7-13
Sparing tables for field replaceable units 7-36
References 7-44
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Canada
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Canada
Introduction
The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)equipment when deployed in Canada.
Industry Canada statements

ICES-003: Interference-Causing Equipment Standard Digital Apparatus
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IC CS-03: Specification for Terminal Equipment, Terminal Systems, Network
Protection Devices, Connection Arrangements and Hearing Aids Compatibility
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
Product safety conformance statements

Indoor applications statement
This equipment is intended for installation in restricted access locations where access is
controlled or where access can only be gained by service personnel with a key or tool.
Access to this equipment is restricted to qualified service personnel only.
Optical transmitter statements

Class I laser statement
Optical transmitters
Alcatel-Lucent declares that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS)complies with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards IEC
60825-1 Edition 1.0 and its amendment 1 (1997) and amendment 2 (2001) and IEC
60825-2 Edition 3.1 (2007). It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems
“product” under the IEC classifications.
This product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal operation and fault conditions. This product
does not present a risk of eye injury because it is fully enclosed and does not contain
embedded lasers greater than Class I/1 unless otherwise noted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Canada
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser warning statement
WARNING
Laser hazard
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly
increases the risk of eye damage.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the optical
source is switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
Eco-environmental statements
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established. For more information
regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific
jurisdictions, contact the Alcatel-Lucent Environment, Health and Safety organization.
China
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)equipment when deployed in China.

Class 1 laser statement
Optical transmitters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability China
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent declares that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
complies with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards IEC
60825-1 Edition 1.0 and its amendment 1 (1997) and amendment 2 (2001) and IEC
60825-2 Edition 3.1 (2007). It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems
“product” under the IEC classifications.
This Product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
WARNING
Laser hazard
connectors.
Eco-Environmental statements
Material content compliance
The People's Republic of China Ministry of Information Industry has published a
regulation (Order #39) and associated standards regarding restrictions on hazardous
substances (China RoHS). Currently, the legislation requires all Electronic and
Information Products (EIP) to comply with certain labeling and documentation
requirements. Alcatel-Lucent products manufactured on or after 1 March 2007, that are
intended for sale to customers in the China market, must comply with these requirements.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability China
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In accordance with the People's Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard “Marking
for the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Products”
(SJ/T11364-2006), customers may access the Alcatel-Lucent Hazardous Substances Table
(http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/private/1/media/ChinaRoHS.
pdf).
European Union
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)equipment when deployed in the
European Union.
Declaration of Conformity for radio and telecommunication terminal equipment under the scope
of Directive 1999/5/EC statement
Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that the equipment documented in this publication is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is kept
at the Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For more information
please contact your local Alcatel-Lucent Customer Service Organization.
Declaration of Conformity for equipment not in the scope of Directive 1999/5/EC statements
Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that the equipment documented in this publication is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directives
89/336/EEC for EMC and 2006/95/EC for safety requirements.
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is kept
at the Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For more information,
contact your local Alcatel-Lucent Customer Service Organization.
Protection requirements of Directive 2004/108/EC statement
This equipment is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.

Alcatel-Lucent declares that Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)complies
with the CENELEC standards EN 60825-1 Edition 1994 and its amendment 1 (2002) and
amendment 2 (2001) and EN 60825-2 Edition 2004. It is a Class I/1 laser optical fiber
communication systems “product” under the IEC classifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability European Union
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
WARNING
Laser hazard
connectors.
Recycling / take-back / disposal of products and batteries
Electronic products and batteries bearing or referencing the symbols shown below shall
be collected and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicable
European Union and other local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part of
unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product and
batteries, such as heavy metals, the environment and human health may be negatively
impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note 1: For electronic products put on the market in the European Union, a solid bar
under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the market after
13 August 2005.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note 2: For batteries put on the market in the European Union, a chemical symbol Hg
(mercury), Cd (cadmium), or Pb (lead), or a combination of those symbols, beneath the
cross-out wheeled bin indicates that the battery contains the corresponding heavy metals.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products
displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of a product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent account manager. Visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback) web page, or contact Alcatel-Lucent
Takeback Support (mailto:[email protected]). For technical information on
product treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent Recycling Information (http://www.alcatel-
lucent.com/product_recycling) web page.
Material content compliance
European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, “Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances” (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium,
and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic equipment. This Directive applies
to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU market after 1 July 2006, with
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network infrastructure
equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU after 1 July 2006 comply with the
EU RoHS Directive.
United States
Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)equipment when deployed in the
United States.
FDA/IEC optical transmitter product compliance statements

Class I laser statement
Alcatel-Lucent declares that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS)equipment complies with the Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices
and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) regulations 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11. It is a
Class I/1 laser optical fiber communication systems “product” under the FDA.
This Product is designed to ensure that personnel operating the product are not
WARNING
Laser hazard
connectors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability United States
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Indoor applications statement
This equipment is intended for installation in restricted access locations where access is
controlled or where access can only be gained by service personnel with a key or tool.
Access to this equipment is restricted to qualified service personnel only.
jurisdictions, contact the Alcatel-Lucent Environment, Health and Safety organization or
Alcatel-Lucent Hazardous Waste Center technical support at (888) 539-2783.
Material content compliance statements
The following notification applies to Alcatel-Lucent products distributed for sale, resale,
or use.
This product, part, or both may include a lithium-manganese dioxide battery, which
contains very small amounts of a perchlorate substance. Special handling may apply.
For California:
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability program
Overview
The reliability program is implemented as an integral part of the Alcatel-Lucent Product
Life Cycle (PLC) process. The reliability program is comprehensive and includes the
following activities:
• Sets and ensures compliance with customer-focused system-reliability requirements
• Ensures component qualification is consistent with use environment and system
design
• Predicts failure rates of FRUs
• Assesses reliability architecture
• Models system reliability
• Ensures satisfactory system-downtime performance
• Reduces hardware failure rates through Environmental Stress Testing (EST)
• Tracks field returns
CO service life
The system has been designed to have a required life of 15 years in a central office. All
FRUs (Field Replaceable Units) will individually meet this requirement with the
following exceptions:
1. hard drives (7.5 years)
2. fans (6.5 years)
3. solid-state disks (7.5 years)
4. flash memory cards (7.5 years)
If an FRU is purchased from an external supplier, then the contract shall clearly specify
the required FRU design life.
Satisfying this requirement involves analysis of the onset of wear-out at the component
level. An FRU for which the onset of wear-out of each of its components exceeds the
specified design life satisfies this requirement.
This requirement defines a standard design life that applies across customers.
Customer-specific special cases are outside the scope of this requirement. The intent of
this requirement is to define design life under a nominal set of conditions, rather than the
worst case. This requirement is satisfied by considering failure rate averaged over
variables such as unit-to-unit variation in materials, slot-to-slot variation in temperature
within the system, and CO-to-CO variation in environmental conditions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RT service life
The system has been designed to have a required life of 10 years in a remote terminal
(uncontrolled) environment.
All FRUs (Field Replaceable Units) will individually meet this requirement with the
following exceptions:
1. hard drives (5 years)
2. fans (5 years)
3. solid-state disks (5 years)
4. flash memory cards (5 years)
If an FRU is purchased from an external supplier, then the contract shall clearly specify
the required FRU design life.
Satisfying this requirement involves analysis of the onset of wear-out at the component
level. An FRU for which the onset of wear-out of each of its components exceeds the
specified design life satisfies this requirement.
This requirement defines a standard design life that applies across customers.
Customer-specific special cases are outside the scope of this requirement.
The intent of this requirement is to define design life under a nominal set of conditions,
rather than the worst case. This requirement should be satisfied by considering failure rate
averaged over variables such as unit-to-unit variation in materials, slot-to-slot variation in
temperature within the system, and RT-to-RT variation in environmental conditions.
Assessment of compliance with this requirement is intended to take place prior to
deployment of product in significant quantities, by using reliability modeling methods.
This requirement is not intended to apply to field data after volume deployment of
product.
Design and development

Overview
During the design and development stage, built-in reliability is ensured through the
following activities: reliability predictions, qualification and selection of components,
definition of quality assurance audit standards, and prototyping of critical areas.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Manufacturing and field deployment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manufacturing and field deployment

Overview
During manufacturing and field deployment, techniques such as environmental stress
testing, production quality audits, field-return tracking, failure-mode analysis, feedback,
and corrective-action further enhance the ongoing reliability improvement efforts.
Failure rates
Overview
This section provides reliability figures of 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 available items
with non-zero failure rates per Telcordia SR-332 [1], Method I-D. Telecordia SR-332,
Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, Issue 3 has also been used
where noted. For reliability figures that pertain to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE,
refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH
Edge Device User Guide.
Failure rates are expressed in FITs, where one FIT is one failure in 109 operating hours.
The mean time to failure (MTTF) in years is given by the following expression:
In the above expression, λ is the steady-state failure rate per SR-332, Issue 2; Method I-D.
The mean time between failures (MTBF) is defined by the following expression:
In the above expression, MTTR is the mean time to repair. Because MTTF >> MTTR,
MTBF is very close to MTTF. Therefore, the two terms MTBF and MTTF are often used
interchangeably.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Failure rates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Table 7-1, “Failure rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16”
(p. 7-14).
Table 7-1 Failure rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
Acronym Description Part No. Failure rate MTBF

(FITs) (yrs)
CMSKIT PSS36 Shelf Kit 3KC19145AA 11427 10
COSKIT Main Shelf Kit 8DG59605AA 4525 25
(incl. COSHF,
USRPNL, FAN,
TIBNKx2)
COSKITH Main Shelf Kit - 8DG59605AB 4525 25
PSS32, HIGH
CAPACITY
FAN
COEKIT Extension Shelf 8DG59606AA 3372 34
Kit (incl.
COSHF,
UPBNK, FAN,
TIBNKx2)
COEKITH EXT Shelf Kit - 8DG59606AB 3372 34
PSS32, HIGH
CAPACITY
FAN
EOSKIT PSS16 Main 8DG60273AA 4445 26
Shelf Kit (incl.
EOSHF, FAN,
UP)
CMSHF PSS36 SHELF 3KC19175AA 3420 33
COSHF Central Office 8DG59319AA 1229 93
Shelf (shelf +
backplane)
EOSHF End Office Shelf 8DG59859AA 651 175
RSA (Shelf
w/Backplane, air
filter, shelf ID)
FLC36EA PSS-36 First 3AG33727AA 2895 39
Level Controller
- Compact
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 7-1 Failure rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 (continued)

(FITs) (yrs)
MT0C Null Fabric 3KC18989AA 3694 31
Module
EC Equipment 8DG59241AB 2432 47
Controller
EC Equipment 8DG59241AD 2653 43
Controller - 16G
flashcard
PFC PSS-36 Power 8DG09183AA 1948 59
Filter (3x50A
inputs) No
breakers
PFDC20 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242AD 1179 97
Power Filter
(20A) - PSS-32
PFDC20 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242BD 1179 97
Power Filter
(20A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
PFDC30 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242AC 1179 97
Power Filter
(30A) - PSS-32
PFDC30 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242BC 1179 97
Power Filter
(30A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
PFDC50 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242AB 1179 97
Power Filter
(50A) - PSS-32
PFDC50 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242BB 1179 97
Power Filter
(50A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
PFDC60 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242AE 1179 97
Power Filter
(60A) - PSS-32
PFDC60 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242BE 1179 97
Power Filter
(60A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
PFDC70 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242AA 1179 97
Power Filter
(70A) - PSS-32
PFDC70 PSS-32 DC 8DG59242BA 1179 97
Power Filter
(70A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
PFDCA DC Power Filter 8DG60334AA 971 118
(no circuit
breaker and WT
support)
PFDC20K PSS-16 DC 8DG60175AA 1144 100
Power Filter
Managed (20A)
PFDC20K PSS-16 DC 8DG60175BA 1144 100
Power Filter
Managed (20A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
PFDC35K PSS-16 DC 8DG60175AB 1144 100
Power Filter
Managed (35A)
PFDC35K PSS-16 DC 8DG60175BB 1144 100
Power Filter
Managed (35A) -
w/voltage
monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
PDU1C Power 1AF11705AAAA 840 136
Distribution Unit
- ETSI (12 input,
12 outputs)
PDU2C Power 1AF10889AAAA 840 136
Distribution Unit
- NAR (12 input,
12 outputs)
PDU1 Power 1AF17443AAAA 400 285
Distribution Unit
- ETSI
PDU1B Power 1AF07335AAAA 800 143
Distribution Unit
- ETSI (4 inputs,
12 outputs)
PDU2 Power 1AF07336AAAA 400 285
Distribution Unit
- NAR (2 input,
6 outputs)
PDU2B Power 1AF07337AAAA 800 143
Distribution Unit
- NAR (4 input,
12 outputs)
— BREAKER 1AB0175000xx 50 2283
SHFID Shelf ID 3AL79242AA 23 4963
ATTEN-1 1-dB Attenuator 1AB371250006 30 3805
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
BT36 PSS-36 Bus 8DG09176AA 376 304
Termination
Card
USRPNL User Interface 8DG59240AA 1153 99
(PSS-32) Panel
USRPNL User Interface 8DG60094AA 1115 102
(PSS-16) Card PSS-16
FAN3T8 PSS-36/64 HP 8DG89249AB 4110 28
Fan
FAN (PSS-32) Fan Unit 8DG59243AA 2143 53
FAN32H High Output Fan 8DG59243AB 2143 53
Tray (PSS-32)
FAN (PSS-16) Fan Unit PSS-16 8DG59912AA 2680 43
RAMREFAN Raman 8DG60100AAAA 1400 82
Replacement
Fan1
ALPHG Low Power High 8DG59244AA 3559 32
Gain DWDM
Amplifier, with
mid-stage access
AHPLG High Power Low 8DG59945AA 2947 39
Gain DWDM
Amplifier, with
mid-stage access
AHPHG High Power 8DG59245AA 3659 31
High Gain
DWDM
Amplifier, with
mid-stage access
ALPFGT Low PWR Fixed 8DG60255AA 2818 41
Gain Amp Total
PWR, with
mid-stage access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
A2325A 23dB variable 8DG60242AA 3301 35
gain, amplifier,
with mid-stage
access
AM2125A Medium Variable 8DG60566AA 3250 35
Gain Amplifier,
with mid-stage
access
AM2125B Medium Variable 8DG60912AA 3250 35
Gain Amplifier,
with no
mid-stage access
AM2318A Low Variable 8DG60565AA 3210 36
Gain Amplifier,
with no
mid-stage access
PB1 Power Booster 8DG59966AA 5922 19
RA2P Long Haul - 2 8DG60567AA 3194 36
pump Raman, no
mid-stage access
RA3P Raman Amplifier 8DG59967AB 4823 24
(3 Pump)
CWR8 8 Channel 8DG59246AA 5283 22
Colorless
Wavelength
Router
CWR8B 8 Channel 8DG60117AA 4824 24
Colorless
Wavelength
Router
(Supplemental
Vendor)
CWR8-88 8 Channel 8DG59827AA 4597 25
Colorless
Wavelength
Router - 88
channel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
WR8-88A 8-channel 8DG59827AB 4490 25
wavelength
router - add side
WSS
MESH4 1x4 splitter card 8DG60568AA 3338 34
with optical
amplifier
WTOCM Wavelength 8DG60323AA 2436 47
Tracker optical
channel monitor
SFD5A Static Filter 8DG59437AA 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (A
Variant)
SFD5B Static Filter 8DG59437AB 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (B
Variant)
SFD5C Static Filter 8DG59437AC 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (C
Variant)
SFD5D Static Filter 8DG59437AD 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (D
Variant)
SFD5E Static Filter 8DG59437AE 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (E
Variant)
SFD5F Static Filter 8DG59437AF 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (F
Variant)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
SFD5G Static Filter 8DG59437AG 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (G
Variant)
SFD5H Static Filter 8DG59437AH 272 420
DWDM 5
Channel (H
Variant)
SFD8A Static Filter 8DG60210AA 296 386
DWDM 8
Channel (A
Variant)
SFD8B Static Filter 8DG60210AB 296 386
DWDM 8
Channel (B
Variant)
SFD8C Static Filter 8DG60210AC 296 386
DWDM 8
Channel (C
Variant)
SFD8D Static Filter 8DG60210AD 296 386
DWDM 8
Channel (D
Variant)
SFD40 40 Channel 8DG60368AA 500 228
Optical
Mux/Demux
SFD40B 40 Channel 8DG60367AA 500 228
Optical
Mux/Demux -
50GHz offset
SFD44 44 Channel 8DG59248AA 560 204
Optical
Mux/Demux
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
SFD44B 44 Channel 8DG59857AA 560 204
Optical
Mux/Demux -
50GHz offset
SFC2A Static Filter 8DG59440AA 235 486
CWDM 2
Channel (A
Variant)
SFC2B Static Filter 8DG59440AB 235 486
CWDM 2
Channel (B
Variant)
SFC2C Static Filter 8DG59440AC 235 486
CWDM 2
Channel (C
Variant)
SFC2D Static Filter 8DG59440AD 235 486
CWDM 2
Channel (D
Variant)
SFC4A Static Filter 8DG59441AA 260 439
CWDM 4
Channel (A
Variant)
SFC4B Static Filter 8DG59441AB 260 439
CWDM 4
Channel (B
Variant)
SFC4x Static Filter 8DG59441Ax 260 439
CWDM 4
Channel
SFC8 Static Filter 8DG59442AA 296 386
CWDM 8
Channel
ITLB 88 Channel 8DG59841AA 309 370
Interleaver
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
ITLU 88 Channel 8DG59841AB 309 369
Interleaver
(unidirectional)
SVAC Single Port 8DG59561AA 1830 62
Variable
Attenuator Card
MVAC Multiple 8DG59561AA 1724 66
Variable
Attenuator Card
Keyed
YSMFV Protection 1AB215120040 20 5708
Y-Cable Splitter
(SMF) - Vertical
Orientation
YSMFH Protection 1AB215120039 20 5708
Y-Cable Splitter
(SMF) -
Horizontal
Orientation
YMMF62V Protection 1AB215120043 20 5708
Y-Cable Splitter
(MMF 62.5/125
μm) - Vertical
Orientation
YMMF62H Protection 1AB215120044 20 5708
Y-Cable Splitter
(MMF 62.5/125
μm) - Horizontal
Orientation
YMMF50V Protection 1AB215120041 20 5708
Y-Cable Splitter
(MMF 50/125
μm) - Vertical
Orientation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
YMMMF50H Protection 1AB215120042 20 5708
Y-Cable Splitter
(MMF
50/125μm) -
Horizontal
Orientation
OPSA Enhanced 8DG59247AA 1687 68
Optical
Protection
Switch
OSCT Optical 8DG59829AA 2001 57
Supervisory
Card Total
Power
DMSMF010 DCM-SMF 10 8DG59423AA 20 5708
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
km
km
km
DMBSM010 8DG59423AE DCM - Fiber 20 5708
Bragg SMF
10km
Bragg SMF
20km
Bragg SMF
30km
Bragg SMF
40km
Bragg SMF
50km
Bragg SMF
60km
Bragg SMF
70km
Bragg SMF
80km
Bragg SMF
90km
Bragg SMF
100km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
Bragg SMF
110km
Bragg SMF
120km
Bragg SMF
140km
Bragg SMF
160km
Bragg SMF
180km
Bragg SMF
200km
Bragg SMF
220km
Bragg SMF
240km
DMTWR020 DCM-TWR 20 8DG59424AB 20 5708
km
km
km
km
km
km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
DMLEF020 DCM-LEF 20 8DG59424AC 20 5708
km
km
km
km
km
km
DMBLE040 DCM - Fiber 8DG59426AF 20 5708
Bragg ELEAF
40km
Bragg ELEAF
60km
Bragg ELEAF
80km
Bragg ELEAF
100km
Bragg ELEAF
120km
Bragg ELEAF
140km
Bragg ELEAF
160km
Bragg ELEAF
180km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
Bragg ELEAF
200km
Bragg ELEAF
220km
Bragg ELEAF
240km
11STAR1 11G Single Port 8DG59249AA 3301 35
Tunable
AnyRate (1
client)
11STGE12 11G Single Port 8DG59339AA 3804 30
Tunable GBE
Mux (12 clients)
11DPE12 11G Dual Port 8DG59340AA 3082 37
Tunable GBE
Mux (12 clients)
11DPE12E 11G Dual Port 8DG59340Ab 3065 37
Pluggable GBE
Mux (12 client) -
enhanced
(SyncE, Eth
OAM)
11DPM12 11G Dual 8DG59828AA 3150 36
Pluggable
12-anyrate Mux
OT
11QPA4 11G, Quad Port 8DG60349AA 2451 47
Any rate, 4 client
11QPA4A 11G, Quad Port 8DG60349AB 2463 46
Any rate
HARDENED, 4
client
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
11STMM10 11G Single Port 8DG59251AA 5078 22
Tunable
Multirate Mux
(10 universal
clients)
4DPA4 MSC - 4G Dual 8DG59713AA 2154 53
Port Pluggable
AnyRate (4
clients)
4DPA2 MSC - 4G Dual 8DG60158AA 1688 68
Port Pluggable
AnyRate (2
clients)
43STX42 40G Single Port 8DG59831AA 6457 18
Tunable MUX (4
clients)
43STX4P2 40G Single Port 8DG60237AA 6457 18
Tunable MUX (4
clients, C-band,
PDPSK)
43SCX42 40G Single Port 8DG60320AA 7615 15
Tunable Mux
Coherent (4
clients)
43STA1P2 40G Single Port 8DG60230AA 9996 11
Tunable
AnyRate (1
client, PDPSK)
43STA1PB2 40G Single Port 8DG60230AB 9996 11
Tunable Anyrate
C-Band PDPSK
Enhanced
43SCA12 40G Single Port 8DG60317AA 9059 13
Tunable Anyrate
Coherent 1-client
A/D
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
112SCX102 10x10G mux, 8DG17121AA 8709 13
coherent
112SNX102 100G Single port 8DG60977AA 8709 13
tunable mux (10
universal
clients),
coherent,
w/Enhanced
OSNR for
extended reach
112SCA12 100G anyrate 8DG60008AA 8529 13
A/D, coherent
112SNA12 112G Single Port 8DG60987AA 8529 13
Tunable
Coherent
AnyRate
Transponder
w/enhanced
OSNR (1 client)
for extended
reach
C113G4C CFP 100G 1AB402160012 800 143
(4x25G) SR
100G LR4
w/heatsink
C113G10C CFP 100G 1AB402160010 800 143
(10x10G) LR10
w/heatsink
C113G4CD CFP 100G 1AB402160001 800 143
(4x25) DR 100G
LR4 w/HeatSink
155M SFP SFP L-1.1 1AB376350002 210 544
L-1.1/LR-1 -40/+85 (B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(L-1.1/LR-1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
622M SFP SFP S-4.1 1AB376360001 210 544
S-4.1/IR-1 -40/+85 (B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(S-4.1/IR-1))
2G5 SFP SFP I-16.1 1AB376370001 210 544
I-16.1/SR-1 -40/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(I-16.1/SR-1))
2G5 SFP SFP L-16.1 1AB376370003 210 544
L-16.1/LR-1 -5/+85 (B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
2G5 SFP SFP L-16.2 1AB196370009 210 544
L-16.2/LR-2 -5/+85 (B&W;
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
(L-16.2/LR-2))
2G5 MR SFP SFP S-16.1 ANY 1AB376370005 210 544
S-16.1/IR-1) RATE -40/+85
(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
Multirate (<
2.7G) DDM
1310nm
(S-16.1/IR-1))
1G SFP SFP GBE SX 1AB376720001 210 544
1000BASE-SX -40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
850nm
(1000BASE-
SX))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
1G SFP SFP GBE LX 1AB376720002 210 544
1000BASE-LX -40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
1310nm
(1000BASE-
LX))
1G SFP SFP GBE LX 1AB376720003 210 544
1000BASE-ZX -40/+85 (B&W
1GbE DDM
1550nm
(1000BASE-ZX)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200001 210 544
CWDM SFP 1471NM
80km APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1471nm Multirate APD
(<2.7G) DDM)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200002 210 544
CWDM SFP 1491NM
(<2.7G) DDM)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200003 210 544
CWDM SFP 1511NM
(<2.7G) DDM)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200004 210 544
CWDM SFP 1531NM
80km APD/ (CWDM 2.5G
(<2.7G) DDM)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200005 210 544
CWDM SFP 1551NM
1551nm Multirate
APD(<2.7G)
DDM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200006 210 544
CWDM SFP 1571NM
(<2.7G) DDM)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200007 210 544
CWDM SFP 1591NM
(<2.7G) DDM)
2G5 MR SFP CWDM-LH 1AB377200008 210 544
CWDM SFP 1611NM
(<2.7G) DDM
CH1610)
CWP151DDMB CWDM 1AB373110001 210 544
(OSC 1510 PIN) OC3/STM1 PIN
SFP (1510nm)
with DDM
CWA151DDMB CWDM 1AB373120001 210 544
(OSC 1510 OC3/STM1 APD
APD) SFP (1510nm)
with DDM
OSC 1510 APD OC3/STM1 APD 1AB373120002 210 544
ULH ULHSFP
(1510nm)
FC SFP 1G OPTO-TRX SFP 1AB379640001 210 544
FC/2G FC SN-1 FC/2FC MM
W/DDM (B&W
1G/2G Fibre
Channel DDM
850nm (SN1))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
FC SFP 1G OPTO-TRX SFP 1AB379640002 210 544
FC/2G FC LC-L FC/2FC SM
W/DDM (B&W
1G/2G Fibre
Channel DDM
1319nm (LC-L))
X8G5M10I XFP 1AB375380009 500 228
I-64.1/8.5GFC
IT (8G FC XFP
SM)
10G MR XFP XFP 1AB375380002 500 228
1310nm I-64.1/10GBE
BASE-L (B&W
Multirate 11G
(STM64/OC-
192/OTU-2/
10GBASE-LX)
DDM (1310nm)
IR2 MR XFP XFP 1AB375380003 500 228
S-64.2B/10GBE
BASE-E (B&W
Multirate
11G(STM64/
OC-192/OTU-2/
10BASE-EX)
DDM
10GbE ZR XFP ALU XFP 1AB375380004 500 228
P1L1-2D2/10G
BASE-Z
10G GBE XFP XFP 10BASE-S 1AB375380001 500 228
850nm (B&W
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370001 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1471nm) DDM 1471nm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240001 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1471nm) DDM 1471nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370002 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1491nm) DDM 1491nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240002 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1491nm) DDM 1491nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370003 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1511nm) DDM 1511nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240003 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1511nm) DDM 1511nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370004 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1531nm) DDM 1531nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240004 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1531nm) DDM 1531nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370005 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1551nm) DDM 1551nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240005 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1551nm) DDM 1551nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370006 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1571nm) DDM 1571nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240006 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1571nm) DDM 1571nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370007 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1591nm) DDM 1591nm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(FITs) (yrs)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240007 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1591nm) DDM 1591nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370008 500 228
XFP 70km (80km) 10G
(1611nm) DDM 1611nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240008 500 228
XFP 40km (40km) 10G
(1611nm) DDM 1611nm
eVOA P eVOA SFP 1AB396080001 310 368
Notes:
1. Per Telcordia SR-332, the fan unit is a limited-life component, meaning that the published
failure rate (or MTBF) represents an average rate during the useful life of the fan unit, which
is 6.5 years. Preventive replacement of a fan unit which has reached its end-of-life is highly
recommended. If a fan unit is allowed to run past its end-of-file, then its failure rate will be
greater than the published value.
2. The FIT rates of the standard electronics in this circuit pack has been upgraded to SR-332
Issue 3.
Sparing tables for field replaceable units

Overview
The circuit pack sparing levels in Figure 7-1, “Recommended 1830 PSS-36/PSS-
32/PSS-16 circuit pack and unit sparing levels: 30-day lead time” (p. 7-38), Figure 7-2,
“Recommended 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 circuit pack and unit sparing levels: 60-day
lead time” (p. 7-41), and Figure 7-3, “Recommended 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 circuit
pack and unit sparing levels: 90-day lead time” (p. 7-43) were determined using the
methodology in Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385 [2].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability Sparing tables for field replaceable units
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the context of sparing calculations, lead time is the time to replenish the sparing pool
with a new or repaired pack. The sparing levels are based on circuit pack steady-state FIT
rates given in Table 7-1, “Failure rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16”
(p. 7-14), with a service continuity objective of 99.999 percent.
Figure 7-1 Recommended 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 circuit pack and unit sparing
levels: 30-day lead time (1 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1. Lead time, as used herein, does not pertain to the delivery intervals from the
submission of a purchase order, as that term may be used under any applicable contract.
Furthermore, lead time should not be confused with mean time to repair (typically, 2
hours in a central office), which is the time elapsed from when a circuit pack or unit is
known to fail in service to when a spare circuit pack or unit is placed in service to replace
the failed item. It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain the recommended sparing
levels at all times.
The need to maintain recommended sparing levels implies that a replacement spare must
be ordered immediately upon the detection of a pack failing in service. In addition, lead
times and FIT rates specified here are assumptions for purposes of maintaining adequate
sparing levels only, and they do not change the terms of any applicable contracts,
including ordering terms, lead times, delivery provisions, or any applicable warranties
that may be in effect.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Quality and reliability References
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
References
[1] Telcordia SR-332, Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, Issue 2,
September 2006.
[2] Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385, Reliability Manual, Issue 1, June
1986.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
8 Technical specifications
8
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 specifications, including
equipment dimensions and wavelength frequencies.
Contents
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf 8-2

Shelf overviews 8-2
PTM optics 8-6
Transmission parameters 8-31
Technical specifications 8-46
Technical specification reference tables 8-46
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Technical specifications Shelf overviews
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf overviews
Installation environment
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf is designed to operate in environmentally
controlled locations or enclosures, such as central offices, commercial buildings, and
controlled environment vaults; 1830 PSS-32 is not intended for outdoor deployments. The
1830 PSS-32 is compatible with standard equipment frames and overhead rack/raised
floor office practices commonly found in such environments.
The 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 is mounted in a standard 19-inch, 23-inch, or ETSI
rack. Three 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 shelves, and two 1830 PSS-36 shelves can be
mounted in a standard 7-foot rack. Provided adequate clearance, the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf can be installed in any environment that is able to house a
standard rack.
The fan trays that are part of the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf common equipment
provide all of the cooling for the shelf. In order for the fan trays to provide adequate shelf
cooling, however, the following conditions must be met:
• To ensure long term reliability of the shelf, the ambient temperature of the facility
should not exceed 40°C. In the event that the ambient temperature does exceed 40°C,
the shelf can operate at temperature up to 50°C for short periods of time. These
periods are defined in Telcordia GR-63-CORE as lasting no more than a total of 96
consecutive hours, for not more than 15 days in a year.
• The facility must provide adequate ventilation for the shelf and remain free of
obstructions that may affect fan efficiency.
• If the 1830 PSS-32 subrack is installed in a cabinet with front/rear doors, the front
subrack cover should not be used.
– Minimum of 80%-open perforation on the door at the area directly in front of the
subrack inlet with the perforation area larger than the subrack inlet area
– Minimum of 40%-open perforation on the door in front of the PSS32 subrack inlet
with perforation area that is at least twice or larger than the subrack inlet area.
– Minimum of one inch space between the door and the subrack.
– If there is a top panel on the cabinet, the top should be a minimum of 80% open.
– If fans are used on the top panel, the fans must draw a minimum volume of air
flow for each subrack that is installed, as follows: 650 CFM for each 1830
PSS-36, 360 CFM for each 1830 PSS-32, and 300 CFM for each 1830 PSS-16.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dimensions and weight
The following information provides the dimensions and weight information for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36, 1830 PSS-32, and 1830 PSS-16.
1830 PSS-36
The dimensions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf are:
• Height: 649.55 mm
• Width: 498.5 mm
• Depth: 300 mm
The 1830 PSS-36 shelf, as provided in shelf kit 3KC19145AA, weighs 26kg.See Figure
8-1, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf dimensions” (p. 8-4).
Note: See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
Guide for full details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 8-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf dimensions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The shelf consists of 32 universal card slots and a number of dedicated one-card slots.
1830 PSS-32
The dimensions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf are 621.8 mm (Height) X 438.9
mm (Width) X 289.5 mm (Depth). The 1830 PSS-32 shelf, as provided in shelf kit
8DG59605AA, weighs 15.77kg. See Figure 8-2, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf
dimensions” (p. 8-5).
Note: An additional top air baffle, adds 44.5 mm to the overall height of the unit in
stacked installations. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
Guide for full details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-16
The dimensions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf are 355 mm (Height) X 439
mm (Width) X 280 mm (Depth). For EIA/ANSI applications, the depth with front cover
is 304 mm.. The 1830 PSS-16 shelf, as provided in shelf kit 8DG60273AA, weighs
11.1kg. See Figure 8-3, “Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf dimensions” (p. 8-6).
PTM optics
Overview
An array of PTM optics are available that support interfaces on the optical transponders.
The following lists identify the cards and ports on which specific modules are supported.
(B&W refers to the “black and white” non-WDM wavelengths.)
Note: Where both ETR and non-ETR PTMs are supported for a particular interface,
this information is shown. Where ETR capability is not shown, it is not supported,
and only a non-ETR PTM is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Technical specifications PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4DPA2
Table 8-1 4DPA2 SFPs
Interface Acronym APN Description Wavelength

Client: 2G5 MR SFP 1AB376370005 B&W 1310
STM16/OC-48 S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(S-16.1/IR-1)
GbE
(1000BASE-LX)
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370003 B&W 1310
STM-16/OC-48 L-16.1/LR-1 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1 (40km)
(SL-16.1)
Client: 1000BASE-T 1AB359780002 Electrical GbE NA
GbE
(1000B-T)
Client: 1G SFP 1AB376720001 B&W GbE 850
GbE 1000BASE-SX (1000BASE-
SX/550m)
(1000BASE-SX)
GbE 1000BASE-LX (1000BASE-
LX/10km)
(1000BASE-LX)
Client or Line: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR 1471 - 1611
STM-16/OC-48 SFP 40km -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
(40km - to support 20)
GbE 1AB377160008
OTU1)
(SS-16.2C)
Client or Line: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377200001 CWDM multirate 1471 - 1611
STM-16/OC-48 SFP 80km -thru- ≤2.7Gpbs (80km) (in increments of
GbE 1AB377200008 20)
(SL-16.2C)
Line: DWDM SFP 1AB377220003 DWDM - 2400 191.7 - 196.05 THz
STM-16/OC-48 120km -thru- ps/nm (120km) (in increments of
(SL-16.2D-{9170- 1AB377220046 .05)
9605})
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4DPA4/1830 PSS-1 MD4H
The information below shows the PTMs and interfaces that are supported for both
FlexMux and DualTran applications of the 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H.
FlexMux application
Table 8-2 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (FlexMux)

Client: 155M SFP 1AB376350001 B&W STM-1/OC-3 1310
STM1/OC-3 S-1.1/IR-1 (S-1.1/IR-1)
(S-1.1)
STM1/OC-3 L-1.1/LR-1 (L-1.1/LR-1)
(SL-1.1)
STM1/OC-3 L-1.2/LR-2 (L-1.2/LR-2)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360001 B&W 1310

STM-4/OC-12 S-4.1/IR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(S-4.1/IR-1/15km)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360002 B&W 1310
STM-4/OC-12 L-4.1/LR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(L-4.1/LR-1/ 40km)
(SL-4.1)
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080005 B&W 1000BX / 1300
GbE STM-4 STM-4 (20km
(GE- upstream)
BX20U)/STM-4
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080006 B&W 1000BX / 1500
(GE- downstream)
BX20D)/STM-4
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080009 B&W 1000BX / 1310/1490
(1000BX)/STM-4 upstream)
Client: SFP FE (100Base 1AB393080007 B&W 100BX/FE 1310/1490

STM1 / FE-FC BX40) (40km upstream)
(40km)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-2 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (FlexMux) (continued)

Client: SFP FE (100Base 1AB393080008 B&W 100BX/FE 1310/1550
STM1 / FE-FC BX40) (40km downstream)
(40km)
Client: SFEBTEE 1AB310140001 Electrical FE NA
FE (100BASE-T)
Client: SFP 1000BX / 1AB393080010 B&W 1000BX / 1310/1550
(1000BX)/STM-4 downstream)
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370001 B&W 1310

STM16/OC-48 I-16.1/SR-1 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(I-16.1/SR-1)
2G5
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370004 B&W 1550
STM16/OC-48 L-16.2/LR-2 STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
OTM-0.1
(L-16.2/LR-2)
STM-1/OC-3 S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
(S1.1/IR-1) multirate ≤2.7Gbps
(S-16.1/IR-1)
STM-4/OC-12
(S-4.1/IR-1)
STM-16/OC-48
(S-16.1/IR-1)
GbE
(1000BASE-LX),
FC100
(100-SM-LC-L),
FC200
(200-SM-LC-L),
HDSDI (S-16.1),
SDSDI (S-16.1),
DVBASI (S-16.1),
OTM-0.1
(SS-16.1A)
Line:
OTM-0.1
(SS-16.1A)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370003 B&W 1310
STM16/OC48 L-16.1/LR-1 STM-16/OC-
(SL-16.1) 48/OTU-1
(L-16.1/LR-1)
Line:
OTM-0.1 (SL-16.1)
Client: 100BASE-LX10 1AB382180001 Fast Ethernet SFP 1310
FE (100BLX10) (100BASE-LX10)

GbE (1000B-T)
GbE (1000B-SX) 1000BASE-SX (1000BASE-
SX/550m)
GbE (1000B-LX) 1000BASE-LX (1000BASE-
LX/10km)
GbE (1000B-ZX) 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-
ZX/80km
Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640003 B&W 4G FC - 850
FC-100 FC / 4G FC LC-L Hardened (SN-1)
(100-M5-SN-1)
FC-200
(200-M5-SN-1)
FC-400
(400-M5-SN-1)
Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640002 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1310
FC-100 FC / 4G FC LC-L 1300NM (B&W
(100SM-LC-L) 1G/2G/4G Fibre
Channel DDM
FC200
1310nm)
(200-SM-LC-L)
FC400
(400-SM-LC-L)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR 1471 - 1611
STM-1/OC-3 SFP 40km -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
(40km - to support 20)
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377160008
OTU1)
STM-16/OC-48
HDSDI, SDSDI,
DVBASI, GbE
Line:
OTM-0.1
Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377200001 CWDM multirate 1471 - 1611
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377200008 20)
STM-16/OC-48
HDSDI, SDSDI,
DVBASI, GbE
Line:
OTM-0.1
Line: DWDM SFP 1AB377220003 DWDM - 2400 191.7 - 196.05 THz
OTM-0.1 120km -thru- ps/nm (120km) (in increments of
(SL-16.2D-{9170- 1AB377220046 .05)
9605})
VOA eVOA_P 1AB396080001 Fast eVOA SFP NA
DualTran application
Table 8-3 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (DualTran)

FC-400 (4FCSN-1) FC / 4G FC SN-1 Hardened (SN-1)

FC-400 (4FCLC-L) FC / 4G FC LC-L 1300NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G Fibre
Channel DDM
1310nm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-3 4DPA4 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (DualTran) (continued)

Line: 2G5 CWDM 1AB155070001 OE-TRX-SFP 1471 - 1611 (in
OTM-0.1 (4FC-OC 1471nm through -thru- STM16/OC48 increments of 20)
1471-1611) 1611nm CWDM
1AB155070008
TTL--5/+75 C
1.471µm
DFB PIN-SI
-thru-
OE-TRX-SFP
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.611µm
DFB PIN-SI
Line: S4FCW62LC- 1AB383360003 ALU SFP 4FC 191.7-196.05 THz
OTM-0.1 (4FC-OD S4FCW17LC -thru- DWDM CH in increments of .05
{9170-9600 even 620-170
1AB383360046
channels})
VOA eVOA_P 1AB396080001 Fast eVOA SFP NA
11DPE12
Table 8-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs

GbE S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
multirate ≤2.7Gbps
(SS-16.1A)
(IR-1)
GbE (1000B-T)
SX/550m)
LX/10km)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs (continued)

ZX/80km
Client: 100BASE-LX10 1AB382180001 Fast Ethernet SFP 1310
FE (100BLX10) (100BASE-LX10)

GbE SFP 40km (1471nm -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
- 1611nm) (40km) 20)
1AB377160008
GbE SFP 80km -thru- ≤2.7Gpbs (80km) (in increments of
1AB377200008 20)
Line: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310

OTM-0.2 1310nm STM-64/OC-
192/OTU-2/10GbE
P1I1-2D1
(I64.1/SR-
(XI-64.1) 1/10GBASE-LX)
Line: IR2 MR XFP 1AB375380003 B&W 1550
OTM-0.2 STM-64-OC-
192/OTU-2/10GbE
P1S1-2D2b
(S64.2b/IR-
(XS-64.2b) 2/10GBASE-EX)
Line: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240001 CWDM (40km) 1471 - 1611
OTM-0.2 40km (1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1611nm
10G-SR-1471 1AB379240008
-thru- 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240009
10G-SR-1611 40km (-40/85) -thru-
(1471nm -thru-
1AB379240013
1611nm
-thru- 1611nm)
10G-LR-1471 1AB378370008
-thru-
10G-LR-1611
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-4 11DPE12 SFP/XFPs (continued)

Line: DWDM XFP 80km 1AB375650001 DWDM (1600 191.7 - 196.0 THz
OTM-0.2 CH60 (196.0) - -thru- ps/nm (80km))
DWDM XFP 80km
10G-LR 1AB375650044
CH17 (191.7)
Line: 10GbE ZR XFP 1AB375380004 ALU XFP 1550
OTM-0.2 P1L1-
2D2/10GBASE-Z
P1L1-2D2
Line: X11MDTNC 1AB375650046 XFP DWDM 191.7 - 196.05 THz
OTM-0.2 Tunable CT
(50GHz 10G XFP)
VOA eVOA_P 1AB156220001 Slow eVOA SFP NA
11DPE12E
Table 8-5 11DPE12E SFP/XFPs

GbE S-16.1/IR-1 (ETR and STM-16/OC-48
non-ETR) multirate ≤2.7Gbps
(1000B-LX)
(IR-1)
GbE (ETR and
(1000BASE-T) non-ETR)
Client: 1000BASE-T2 SFP 3KC13009AAAA 10/100/1000BASE- NA
GBE (1000B-T2) (ETR and T1 SFP Electrical
FE non-ETR)
(1000BASE-T2)
GbE 1000BASE-SX (ETR and 1000BASE-
(1000BASE-SX) non-ETR) SX/550m

GbE 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-
(1000BASE-LX) LX/10km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-5 11DPE12E SFP/XFPs (continued)

GbE 1G SFP 1AB376720003 B&W GbE 1550
1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-
ZX/80km
Client: SBFEU40I 1AB393080007 B&W 100BX/FE 1310/1490
FE (FE-BX40U) (40km upstream)
(100BX-FE-
BX40-u)
STM-1
(40km-BiDi-U)
Client: SBFED40I 1AB393080008 B&W 100BX/FE 1310/1550
FE FE-BX40D (40km downstream)
(100BX-FE-
BX40-u)
STM-1
(40km-BiDi-U)
Client: 100BLX10 1AB382180001 Fast Ethernet SFP 1310
FE (100BASE-LX10)
(100BASE-LX10)
GbE SFP 40km (1471nm -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
— 1611nm) (40km) 20)
(S-C8SI-IDx 1471 1AB377160008
— 1611)
GbE SFP 80km -thru- ≤2.7Gpbs (80km) (in increments of
(S-C8LI-IDx 1471 1AB377200008 20)
— 1611)
Line: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
OTM-0.2 1310nm (non-ETR) STM-64/OC-
(P1I1-2D1) 1AB375380007 192/OTU-2/10GbE
(ETR) (I64.1/SR-
10GBASE-LR
1/10GBASE-LX)
(LAN Client)
OTM-0.2 (non-ETR) STM-64-OC-
(P1S1-2D2b IR-2) 1AB375380005 192/OTU-2/10GbE
(ETR) (S64.2b/IR-
10GBASE-ER
2/10GBASE-EX)
(LAN Client)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-5 11DPE12E SFP/XFPs (continued)

OTM-0.2 (non-ETR) P1L1-
(P1L1-2D2) 1AB375380008 2D2/10GBASE-Z
10GBASE-ZR (ETR)
(LAN Client)
-thru- 1611nm)
10GbE LAN Client 1AB379240008
(10G-SR-1471 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240009
-thru- 40km (-40/85) -thru-
(1471nm -thru-
10G-SR-1611) 1AB379240013
1611nm)
-thru- 1611nm)
(10G-LR-1471 (non-ETR)
-thru-
10G-LR-1611
)
DWDM XFP 80km
CH17 (191.7)
(DW100U-2AxC -
9170 to
DW100U-2AxC -
9600 in increments
of 10)
Line: X11MDTNC 1AB375650046 XFP DWDM 191.7 - 196.05 THz
OTM-0.2 (non-ETR) Tunable CT
(50GHz 10G XFP)
10GbE LAN Client
(DN50U-2AxC(F)-
Tunable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. This PTM will support 1000BASE-T transmission. However 1000BASE-T applications are not currently
supported by 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves.
11DPM12
Table 8-6 11DPM12 SFP/XFPs

STM1/OC-3 L-1.1/LR-1 (ETR and (L-1.1/LR-1)
non-ETR)
(SL-1.1)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360001 B&W 1310
STM-4/OC-12 S-4.1/IR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(S-4.1/IR-1/15km)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360002 B&W 1310
STM-4/OC-12 L-4.1/LR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(L-4.1/LR-1/ 40km)
(SL-4.1)
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370001 B&W 1310
STM16/OC-48 I-16.1/SR-1 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(I-16.1/SR-1)
2G5
STM-1/OC3 S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
STM-4/OC-12
(IR-1)
STM-16/OC-48
OTM-0.1
2G5
GbE
FC-100
FC-200
(SS-16.1A)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-6 11DPM12 SFP/XFPs (continued)

Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370003 B&W 1310
STM16/OC48 L-16.1/LR-1 (non-ETR) STM-16/OC-
1AB376370007 48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(ETR) (L-16.1/LR-1)
2G5
(SL-16.1)
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370004 B&W 1550
STM16/OC-48 L-16.2/LR-2 (non-ETR) STM-16/OC-
1AB376370008 48/OTU-1(L-
OTM.1
(ETR) 16.2/LR-2)
2G5
(SL-16.2)
GbE (1000B-SX) 1000BASE-SX (ETR) (1000BASE-
SX/550m)
FID 130
GbE (1000B-LX) 1000BASE-LX (ETR and (1000BASE-
non-ETR) LX/10km)
FID 140
GbE (1000B-ZX) 1000BASE-ZX (ETR and 1000BASE-
non-ETR) ZX/80km
FID 150
Client: FC SFP 1G FC / 2G 1AB379640003 B&W 4G FC 850
FC-400 (4FCSN-1) FC / 4G FC SN-1 (ETR) (SN-1)

FC-100 FC / 4G FC LC-L (ETR and 1300NM (B&W
non-ETR) 1G/2G/4G Fibre
FC-200
Channel DDM
FC-400 (4FCLC-L) 1310nm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

STM-1/OC-3 SFP 40km (1471nm -thru- multirate ≤2.7Gbps (in increments of
- 1611nm) (40km) 20)
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377160008
STM-16/OC-48 (non-ETR)
OTM-0.1
2G5
GbE
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377200008 20)
OTM-0.1 1AB377200009
2G5 -thru-
GbE 1AB377200016
(ETR)
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377200008 20)
OTM-0.1 1AB377200009
2G5 -thru-
GbE 1AB377200016
(ETR)
GbE (1000B-T)
Line: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
STM-64/OC-192 1310nm (non-ETR) STM-64/OC-
1AB375380007 192/OTU-2/10GbE
OTU-2
(ETR) (I64.1/SR-
10GbE 1/10GBASE-LX)
(XI-64.1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

STM-64/OC-192 (non-ETR) STM-64-OC-
1AB375380005 192/OTU-2/10GbE
OTU-2
(ETR) (S64.2b/IR-
10GbE 2/10GBASE-EX)
(XS-64.2b)
10G-SR-1471 40km (1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1611nm)
-thru- 1AB379240008
10G-SR-1611 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240009
40km (-40/85) -thru-
(1471nm -thru-
1AB379240013
1611nm)
-thru- 1611nm)
10G-LR-1471 1AB378370008
-thru- (non-ETR)
10G-LR-1611
DWDM XFP 80km
10G-LR 1AB375650044
CH17 (191.7)
P1L1-2D2 (non-ETR) P1L1-
1AB375380008 2D2/10GBASE-Z
10GBASE-Z
(ETR)
Client: 3GSDI-SH AB300320001 3GSDI B&W Short 1310
Haul
Client: 3GSD-MH AB300320002 3GSDI B&W 1310

3GSDI Medium Haul
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11QPA4(A)
Table 8-7 11QPA4(A) XFPs

Client: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
STM-64-OC192 1310nm STM-64/OC-
(SR-1/VSR2000- 192/OTU-2/10GbE
2R1) (I64.1/SR-
1/10GBASE-LX)
1G LAN PHY
(10GBASE-LR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-LW)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(P1I1-2D1)
Client: IR2 MR XFP 1AB375380003 B&W 1550
OTM-0.2 STM-64-OC-
(P1S1-2D2b) 192/OTU-2/10GbE
(S64.2b/IR-
STM-64/OC-192
2/10GBASE-EX)
(IR-2/S-64.2b)
10G LAN PHY
(10GBASE-ER)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-EW)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(P1S1-2D2b)
10G LAN PHY GBE XFP 850nm 1AB375380001 B&W 10GbE 850
(10GBASE-SR) (10GBASE-SR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-SW)
10GFC
(1200-MX-SN-I)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(10GBASE-SR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-7 11QPA4(A) XFPs (continued)

Client: 10GbE ZR XFP 1AB375380004 ALU XFP 1550
STM-64/OC-192 P1L1-
(P1L1-2D2) 2D2/10GBASE-Z
10G LAN PHY
(10GBASE-ZR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-ZW)
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
(P12L1-2D2)
Client: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240001 CWDM anyrate 1471 - 1611
STM-64/OC-192 40km (1471nm -thru- (40km)
-thru- 1611nm)
10GFC 1AB379240008
10G LAN PHY 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240009
Client or Line: 40km (-40/85) -thru-
(1471nm -thru-
OTM-0.2 1AB379240013
1611nm)
-thru- 1611nm)
10GFC 1AB378370008
10G LAN PHY
Client or Line:
OTM-0.2
Client: X8G5M10I 1AB375380009 X8FCLC-L 1310
FC-800
Client: X8G5M03I 1AB375380011 X8FCSN-I 850
FC-800
DWDM XFP 80km
1AB375650044
CH17 (191.7)
Line: X11MDTNC 1AB375650046 10GHz-Tunable 192.10-196.05 THz
OTM-0.2 10G-XFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STAR1
Table 8-8 11STAR1 XFPs

192/OTU-2/10GbE
STM-64/OC-192
(I64.1/SR-
10G LAN PHY 1/10GBASE-LX)
10G WAN PHY
10GFC
OTM-0.2 10G GBE XFP STM-64/OC-
850nm 192/OTU-2/10GbE
STM-64/OC-192
(S64.2b/IR-
10G LAN PHY 2/10GBASE-EX)
10G WAN PHY
Client: 10G GBE XFP 1AB375380001 B&W 10GbE 850
OTM-0.2 850nm (10GBASE-SR)
10G LAN PHY
10G WAN PHY
10GFC
-thru- 1611nm)
10GFC 1AB379240008
10G LAN PHY
10G WAN PHY
OTM-0.2
-thru- 1611nm)
10GFC 1AB378370008
10G LAN PHY
10G WAN PHY
OTM-0.2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-8 11STAR1 XFPs (continued)

OTM-0.2 P1L1-
2D2/10GBASE-Z
STM-64/OC-192
10G LAN PHY
10G WAN PHY
11STGE12
Table 8-9 11STGE12 SFPs

GbE S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
(1000Base-LX)
(IR-1)
GbE 1AB377200008 20)
(SL-16.2C)
GbE (1000B-T)
SX/550m)
LX/10km)
ZX/80km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STMM10
Table 8-10 11STMM10 SFPs

STM-1/OC-3 L-1.1/LR-1 (L-1.1/LR-1)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360001 B&W 1310

STM-4/OC-12 S-4.1/IR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(S-4.1/IR-1/15km)
Client: 622M SFP 1AB376360002 B&W 1310
STM-4/OC-12 L-4.1/LR-1 STM-4/OC-12
(L-4.1/LR-1/ 40km)
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB376370001 B&W 1310
STM16/OC-48 I-16.1/SR-1 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(I-16.1/SR-1)
2G5
STM1/OC-3 S-16.1/IR-1 STM-16/OC-48
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
STM-4/OC-12
STM-16/OC-48
OTM-0.1
2G5
GbE
FC-100
FC-200
STM-16/OC-48 L-16.1/LR-1 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(L-16.1/LR-1)
2G5
Client: 2G5 SFP 1AB196370009 B&W 1550
STM-16/OC-48 L16.2/LR-2 STM-16/OC-
48/OTU-1
OTM-0.1
(L-16.2/LR-2)
2G5
GbE 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-
SX/550m
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-10 11STMM10 SFPs (continued)

GbE 1000BASE-LX (1000BASE-
LX/10km)
GbE 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-
ZX/80km
FC-100 FC / 4G FC SN-1 Hardened (SN-1)
FC-200
FC-400
FC-100 FC / 4G FC LC-L 1300NM (B&W
1G/2G/4G Fibre
FC-200
Channel DDM
FC-400 1310nm)
Client: 2G5 MR CWDM 1AB377160001 CWDM - multirate 1471 - 1611
STM-1/OC-3 SFP 40km 1471nm -thru- ≤2.7Gbps (40km) (in increments of
through 1611 20)
STM-4/OC-12 1AB377160008
STM-16/OC-48
OTM-0.1
2G5
GbE
STM1/OC3 SFP 80km -thru- ≤2.7Gpbs (80km) (in increments of
STM4/OC-12 1AB377200008 20)
STM-16/OC-48
OTM-0.1
2G5
GbE
GbE (1000B-T)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43STX4/4P
Table 8-11 43STX4/4P XFPs

Client:: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
192/OTU-2/10GbE
STM-64-OC192
(I64.1/SR-
1G LAN PHY 1/10GBASE-LX)
10G WAN PHY
OTM-0.2 STM-16/OC-
192/OTU-2/10GbE
STM-64/OC-192
(S64.2b/IR-
10G LAN PHY 2/10GBASE-EX)
10G WAN PHY
Client: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240001 CWDM (40km) 1471 - 1611
STM-64/OC-192 40km (1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1611nm)
10GbE 1AB379240008
10G WAN PHY
OTM-0.2
Client: 10G CWDM XFP 1AB378370001 CWDM (70km) 1471 - 1611
STM-64/OC-192 70km (1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1611nm)
10GbE 1AB378370008
10G WAN PHY
OTM-0.2
OTM-0.2 P1L1-
2D2/10GBASE-Z
STM-64/OC-192
10G LAN PHY
10G WAN PHY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43SCX4
Table 8-12 43SCX4 Client XFPs

OTM-0.2 1310nm (non-ETR) STM-64/OC-
(P1I1-2D1) 1AB375380007 192/OTU-2/
(ETR) 10GbE
STM-64/OC-
(I64.1/SR-1/
192
10GBASE-LX)
(SR-1/VSR2000
- 2R1)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN PHY)
10GBASE-LW
(WAN PHY)
OTM-0.2 (non-ETR) STM-64-OC-
(P1S1-2D2b, 1AB375380005 192/OTU-2/
IR-2) (ETR) 10GbE
(S64.2b/IR-2/
STM-64/OC-
10GBASE-EX)
192
(IR-2/S-64.2b)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN PHY)
10GBASE-EW
(WAN PHY)
Client: 10G GBE XFP 1AB375380001 B&W 10GbE 850
10GbE LAN 850nm (10GBASE-SR)
PHY
Client: X8G5M10I 1AB375380009 X8FCLC-L 1310
FC-800
Client: 10G CWDM 1AB379240001 CWDM (40km) 1471 - 1611
10G-SR-1471 XFP 40km -thru-
(1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1AB379240008
1611nm)
10G-SR-1611
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-12 43SCX4 Client XFPs (continued)

Client: 10G CWDM 1AB378370001 CWDM (70km) 1471 - 1611
10G-LR-1471 XFP 70km -thru-
(1471nm -thru-
-thru- 1AB378370008
1611nm)
10G-LR-1611
OTM-0.2 (non-ETR) P1L1-2D2/
(P1L1-2D2) 1AB375380008 10GBASE-Z
STM-62/OC- (ETR)
192 (P1L1-2D2)
10G LAN PHY
(10GBASE-ZR)
10G WAN PHY
(10GBASE-ZW)
112SCA1 and 112SNA1
Table 8-13 112SCA1 and 112SNA1 Client CFPs

100GBASE-LR4: C113G4C 1AB402160012 4x25 Single rate 4 wavelengths -
100G LAN PHY Opnext CFP with 1295.56
heatsink
1300.05
1304.58
1309.14
100 BASE-LR4: C113G4CD 1AB402160001 4x25 dual rate 4 wavelengths -
OTM-0.4 Opnext CFP with 1295.56
heatsink
100G LAN PHY 1300.05
1304.58
1309.14
100GBASE-LR10: C113G10C 1AB402160010 CFP 100G 10 wavelengths -
OTM-0.4 (10x10G) see the following
note
100G LAN PHY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The 10x10G CFPs support the following channels with associated center
wavelengths
• Ch 1: 1523nm
• Ch 2: 1531nm
• Ch 3: 1539nm
• Ch 4: 1547nm
• Ch 5: 1555nm
• Ch 6: 1563nm
• Ch 7: 1571nm
• Ch 8: 1579nm
• Ch 9: 1587nm
• Ch 10: 1595nm
112SCX10 and 112SNX10
Table 8-14 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 Client XFPs

P1I1-2D1: 10G MR XFP 1AB375380002 B&W 1310
OTM-0.2 1310nm (non-ETR) STM-
(XI-64.1) 64/OC192/OTU-
SR-1/VSR2000-
2/10GbE
2R1:
(164.1/SR-
STM-64/OC-192
1/10GBASE-LX)
10GBASE-LR:
10G LAN PHY
10GBASE-LW:
10G WAN PHY
P1S1-2D2b: IR2 MR XFP 1AB375380003 B&W 1550
OTM-0.2 (XS-64.2b) (non-ETR) STM-64/OC-
192/OTU-2/10GbE
IR-2/S-64.2b:
(S64.2b/IR-
STM-64/OC-192
2/10GBASE-EX)
10GBASE-ER:
10G LAN PHY
10GBASE-EW:
10G WAN PHY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-14 112SCX10 and 112SNX10 Client XFPs (continued)

10G-SR-1471 — 10G CWDM XFP 1AB379240001 CWDM anyrate 1471 — 1611
10G-SR-1611: 40km (1471nm — -thru- (40km)
STM-64/oc-192 1611nm
1AB379240008
10GFC (XS-64.2C
1471—1611)
10G LAN PHY
10G WAN PHY
OTM-0.2
Transmission parameters
STM-n/OC-n Optical interfaces
Table 8-15 Parameters specified for STM-1 optical interfaces
Parameter ETSI STM-1 S-1.1 STM-1 L-1.1 STM-1 L-1.2
ANSI IR-1 OC-3 LR-1 OC-3 LR-2 OC-3
Digital signal STM-1 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G.958

Nominal bit rate 155520 kb/s
Laser type DFB DFB DFB
Operating wavelength range 1261 to 1360 nm 1280 to 1335 nm 1480 to 1580 nm
Transmitter at reference point S

Source type MLM MLM SLM
Spectral characteristics:
– maximum RMS width 7.7 nm 4 nm -

– maximum –20 dB width - - 1 nm
– minimum side mode suppression ratio - - 30 dB
Mean launch power:
– maximum –8 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm

– minimum –15 dBm –5 dBm –5 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 10 dB 10 dB
Optical path between S and R
Attenuation range 0 to 12 dB 10 to 28 dB 10 to 28 dB
Maximum dispersion 100 ps/nm 250 ps/nm 1900 ps/nm
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) NA NA 20 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Technical specifications Transmission parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-15 Parameters specified for STM-1 optical interfaces (continued)
Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R NA NA –25 dB
Receiver at reference point R

Type of detector In Ga As PIN
-10
Mean received power (@ BER = 10 ):
– minimum (sensitivity) –28 dBm –34 dBm –34 dBm

– maximum (overload) –8 dBm –10 dBm –10 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB

Maximum reflectance of receiver measured at R –14 dB –14 dB –25 dB
Digital signal STM-1 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G.958


Source type MLM SLM SLM
– maximum RMS width 2.5 nm - -
– maximum –20 dB width - 1 nm 1 nm
– minimum side mode suppression ratio - 30 dB 30 dB
Mean launch power:
– maximum –8 dBm +2 dBm +2 dBm

– minimum –15 dBm –3 dBm –3 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 10 dB 10 dB
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) 14 dB 20 dB 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R –20 dB –25 dB –27 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type of detector In Ga As PIN

Mean received power (@ BER = 10-10):
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB

Maximum reflectance of receiver measured at R –20 dB –20 dB –27 dB
Parameter ETSI STM-16 I-16.1 STM-16 S-16.1 STM-16 L-16.1 STM-16 L-16.2
ANSI SR-1 OC-48 IR-1 OC-48 LR-1 OC-48 LR-2 OC-48
Digital signal STM-16 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G957

Laser type DFB DFB DFB DFB
Operating wavelength range 1270 to 1360 nm 1270 to 1360 nm 1280 to 1335 nm 1500 to 1580 nm

Source type MLM SLM SLM SLM
– maximum RMS width 4 nm - - -
– maximum –20 dB width - 1 nm 1 nm 1 nm
– minimum side mode suppression ratio - 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB
Mean launch power:
– maximum –3 dBm 0 dBm +2 dBm +2 dBm
– minimum –10 dBm –5 dBm –2 dBm –2 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Attenuation range 0 to 7 dB 0 to 12 dB 10 to 24 dB 10 to 24 dB
Maximum dispersion 12 ps/nm 100 ps/nm 250 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) 24 dB 24 dB 24 dB 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB -27 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter ETSI STM-16 I-16.1 STM-16 S-16.1 STM-16 L-16.1 STM-16 L-16.2
ANSI SR-1 OC-48 IR-1 OC-48 LR-1 OC-48 LR-2 OC-48
Type of detector In Ga As PIN In Ga As APD

-10
Mean received power (@ BER = 10 ):
– minimum (sensitivity) –18 dBm –18 dBm –27 dBm –28 dBm
– maximum (overload) –3 dBm 0 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB 2 dB

Maximum reflectance of receiver measured at R –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB
Table 8-18 Parameters specified for STM-16 colored optical interfaces
Parameter STM-16 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G958

Application code CWA CWP DWA
Interface type APD CWDM PIN CWDM APD DWDM
interface for long interface for short
haul (C8L1-1D2) haul (C8S1-1D2)
Addressed wavelengths 1571 nm, 1491 nm, 1511 nm, 153 nm1, 1551 1527,98 nm (196.200
nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm, 1611 nm compliant THz) to 1563,96 nm
with ITU-T G.694.2 (191.700 THz), 100
GHz grid, compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1
Launched power:
– minimum 0 0 0
– maximum +5.0 +5.0 +4.0
Maximum wavelength deviation at end of life: t.b.d t.b.d ±100
Allowed bit rates 2 to 2700 Mbps 2 to 2700 Mbps 100 to 2700 Mbps
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Maximum -20dB bandwidth 1 nm 1 nm NA
Maximum -15dB bandwidth NA NA 0.12 nm

Minimum SMSR 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-18 Parameters specified for STM-16 colored optical interfaces
(continued)
Parameter STM-16 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G958
Maximum chromatic dispersion 1600 @ 1611nm 1000 @ 1611nm 1800/24001

1600 @ 1591nm 900 @ 1591nm
1500 @ 1571nm 900 @ 1571nm
1400 @ 1511nm 900 @ 1511nm
1400 @ 1531nm 800 @ 1531nm
1300 @ 1511nm 800 @ 1511nm
1200 @ 1491 nm 700 @ 1491 nm
1100 @ 1471 nm 700 @ 1471 nm
-10
Min. sensitivity, @ BER=10 -28 dBm -18 dBm -28 dBm
Minimum overload -9 dBm 0 dBm -8 dBm

Maximum optical path penalty 2 dB 1dB 2/3 dB depending on
dispersion1
Maximum receiver reflectance -27 dB -27 dB -27 dB
Optical connector (Tx/Rx) LC LC LC
Fiber type SMF SMF SMF
Notes:
1. 2 dB path penalty corresponds to a dispersion of 1800 ps/nm/km, 3dB to 2400 ps/nm/km.
Table 8-19 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192/OTU-2 optical interfaces
Parameter ETSI STM-64 I-64.1 STM-64 S-64.2b STM-64 P1L1-2D2
ANSI OC-192 SR-1 OC-192 IR-2 OC-192 P1L1-2D2
OTN OTU-2 P1I1-2D1 OTU-2 P1S1-2D2b OTU-2 P1L1-2D2
Digital signal STM-64 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G.959.1, G.691
Nominal bit rate 9953280kb/s


Source type SLM EA-ILM SLM
– maximum spectral power density t.b.d. mW/MHz 1 t.b.d. ffs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-19 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192/OTU-2 optical interfaces
(continued)
Parameter ETSI STM-64 I-64.1 STM-64 S-64.2b STM-64 P1L1-2D2
ANSI OC-192 SR-1 OC-192 IR-2 OC-192 P1L1-2D2
OTN OTU-2 P1I1-2D1 OTU-2 P1S1-2D2b OTU-2 P1L1-2D2
– maximum -20 dB width 1 nm NA. NA4
– minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB 30 dB 30dB
– chirp parameter t.b.d. radians t.b.d. t.b.d.
Mean launch power:

– maximum –1 dBm +2 dBm 12 dBm
– minimum –6 dBm –1 dBm 10 dBm

Minimum extinction ratio 6 dB 8.2 dB 9 dB
Maximm chromatic dispersion: 6.6 ps/nm 800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm

Maximum DGD 30 ps 30 ps 30 ps
Minimum ORL at S (including connectors) 14 dB 24 dB 24 dB

Maxim. discrete reflectance between S and R –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB
Type of detector PIN PIN PIN
–12
Mean received power: (@ BER = 10 and OSNR=19 dB/0.1 nm)

Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 2 dB 2 dB3
Maxim. reflectance of receiver measured at R –14 dB –27 dB –27 dB
Notes:
1. t.b.d. = to be defined
2. n.a. = not applicable
3. With 10 dB attenuation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. Maximum -20dB spectral width (in nm) of an SLM laser is specified by the maximum full width of the
central wavelength peak, measured 20dB down from the maximum amplitude of the central wavelength
under standard operating conditions.
Table 8-20 Parameters specified for STM-64 optical interface L-64.2c
Characteristics Unit Values
Digital signal STM-64 according to ITU-T Recommendations G.707, G958,

G.691
Nominal bit rate kb/s 9953280

Application code L-64.2c
Transmitter at reference point MPI-S

Operating wavelength range nm 1530 to 1565
Mean launch power:

– maximum dBm +2
– minimum dBm –2
– maximum spectral power density mW/10 MHz t.b.d.
– maximum –20 dB width nm t.b.d.

– chirp parameter α rad t.b.d.
– minimum side mode suppression ratio dB t.b.d.

– minium EX dB 10
Main optical path, MPI-S to MPI-R
Attenuation range
– maximum dB 22
– minimum dB 11
Chromatic dispersion
– maximum ps/nm 1600
– minimum ps/nm t.b.d.

Passive dispersion compensation
– maximum ps/nm n.a.
– minimum ps/nm n.a.
Maximum DGD ps 30
Minimum ORL of cable plant at MPI-S, including dB 24
any connectors
Maxim. discrete reflectance between MPI-S and dB –27
MPI-R
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-20 Parameters specified for STM-64 optical interface L-64.2c
(continued)
Characteristics Unit Values
Receiver at reference point MPI-R
Minimum sensitivity (BER of 1 × 10–12) dBm –26
Minimum overload dBm –9

Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
Maxim. reflectance of receiver measured at MPI-R dB –27
Notes:
1. t.b.d. = to be defined, for further standardization
2. n.a. = not applicable
3. L-64.2c uses prechirp as DA.
Table 8-21 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192 uncompensated tunable full

C+ DWDM optical interface
Parameter DN50U-2A2(C)F DN50U-2A5(C)F
Digital signal STM-64, OC-192, OTU-2

Nominal bit rates 9.95328Gbps, 10.709225Gbps (±20ppm) 10.3125Gbps, 10.51875Gbps, 11.0957Gbps,
11.3176Gbps (±100ppm)
Laser type DFB
Operating wavelength range 1568.3623 to 1529.1633 nm

Transmitter at reference point MPI-S
Source type SLM
– maximum spectral excursion ±10 GHz
– maximum –15 dB width 15 GHz
– minimum side mode suppression 30 dB

ratio
– chirp parameter α —
Mean launch power:

– maximum +4 dBm
– minimum +0.5 dBm
– minium extinction ratio 10.5 dB
Main optical path, MPI-S to MPI-R

Chromatic dispersion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-21 Parameters specified for STM-64/OC-192 uncompensated tunable full
C+ DWDM optical interface (continued)
Parameter DN50U-2A2(C)F DN50U-2A5(C)F
– maximum 1600 ps/nm
– minimum 0 ps/nm
Maxim. discrete reflectance between –27
MPI-S and MPI-R
Receiver at reference point MPI-R

Minimum sensitivity (BER of 1 –26
× 10–12)
Minimum overload –9
Maximum optical path penalty 2
Maxim. reflectance of receiver –27
measured at MPI-R
Optical interfaces (Ethernet)
Table 8-22 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces

1000BASE-SX/-LX/-ZX
Parameter 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-ZX (1)
BOL EOL BOL EOL BOL EOL
Digital signal 1 GbE according to IEEE 802.3

Baud rate and reference pattern Bit rate: 1.25 GBd ± 100 ppm
Line code: PRBS 223–1, K28.5 characters
Laser type VCSEL FP DFB
Target distance 550 m (2) 10 km over SMF (550 m (3, 80 km
4
)
Transmitter at reference point TP2
Source type MLM MLM SLM
Nominal center wavelength 770 to 860 nm 1270 to 1355 nm 1500 to 1580 nm

– maximum RMS width (σ) 0.85 nm 3.5 nm NA
– maximum –20 dB width 1 nm

– minimum side mode suppression ration 30 dB
Mean launched power:
– maximum –1 dBm 0 dBm –4 dBm –3 dBm +4 dBm +5 dBm
– minimum –8.5 dBm –9.5 dBm –8 dBm –9 dBm +1 dBm 0 dBm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-22 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces
1000BASE-SX/-LX/-ZX (continued)
Parameter 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-ZX (1)
Maximum mean launched power for Tx –40 dBm –40 dBm –40 dBm
disabled
Minimum extinction ratio 10 dB 9 dB 10 dB 9 dB 10.0 dB 9.0 dB

Eye mask definition IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3ah - 2004 IEEE 802.3
Mask margin 10 % 10 % 10 %
Max opt. power overshoot vs. shutdown 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB
deactivation
Rise and fall time (unfiltered 20%/80%) 210 ps (5) 260 ps 260 ps
Maximum relative intensity noise –117 db/Hz –120 db/Hz –120 db/Hz
Maximum total transmitter jitter 345 ps 345 ps 345 ps
Optical return loss tolerance 12 dB 12 dB 20 dB
Optical path between TP2 and TP3
Attenuation range (6) 0 to 7.5 dB 0 to 10.5 5 to 21 dB

dB (7)
Maximum dispersion 1600 ps/nm

Optical path penalty 2 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance between –25 dB
TP2 and TP3
Receiver at reference point TP3

Optical wavelength range 770 to 860 nm 1270 to 1355 nm 1500 to 1580 nm
8
Minimum sensitivity ( ) with fiber –19 dBm –17 dBm –21.5 dBm –19.5 dBm –26 dBm –24 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity (9) –13.5 dBm –15.4 dBm
(10)
Minimum overload 1 dBm 0 dBm –2 dBm –3 dBm +1 dBm 0 dBm

Minimum acceptable jitter 408 ps 408 ps 408 ps
Maximum reflectance of receiver, 12 dB 12 dB 12 dB

measured at TP3
LOS assert level (11) –30 to –23 –33 to –39 to –30

dBm –25.5 dBm dBm
LOS hysteresis 0.5 to 5 dB 0.5 to 5 dB 0.5 to 5 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. The 1 GbE long reach device, 1000BASE-ZX, is based upon the 1000BASE-LX devices in the IEEE 802.3
standard. However, wavelength and reach were re-defined supporting an 80 km interface.
2. For a modal bandwidth of 500 MHz × km @ 850 nm (min. overfilled launch). Summary of reaches vs. BL
product: 550 m MMF 50 mm (500 MHz × km @ 850 nm); 500 m MMF 50 mm (400 MHz × km @ 850 nm);
275 m MMF 62.5 mm (200 MHz × km @ 850 nm); 220 m MMF 62.5 mm (160 MHz × km @ 850 nm)
3. For a modal bandwidth of 500 MHz × km @ 1310 nm (min. overfilled launch) using a singlemode fiber
offset-launch mode-conditioning patch cord. Summary of reaches vs. BL product: 550 m MMF 50 mm (400
MHz × km @ 1300 nm); 550 m MMF 62.5 mm (500 MHz × km @ 1300 nm)
4. Values in brackets deviate from the SMF interface specifications and apply to MMF operation using a
single-mode fiber offset-launch mode-conditioning patch cord.
5. Trise/Tfall ≤ 0.26 ns for wavelengths > 830 nm.
6. Attenuation assumed to be worst-case values including losses due to splices, connectors, optical attenuators
(if used) and any additional cable margin.
7. Link power budget for 50 μm and 62.5 μm MMF is 7.5 dB using a single-mode fiber offset-launch
mode-conditioning patch cord.
8. Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point TP3 to
achieve a 1 × 10–12 BER at 1.25 Gb/s both with a PRBS 223–1 and repetitive K28.5 characters. It takes into
account power penalties caused by use of a transmitter under all operating conditions with worst-case values
of extinction ratio, pulse rise and fall times, optical return loss at point TP2, receiver connector degradations
and measurement tolerances.
9. Measured with a conformance test signal as defined in the applicable standard.
10. Stressed receiver sensitivity ≤ –12.5 dBm for 62.5 µm MMF.
11. It is expected that the LOS assert level always occurs at power levels below that of the receiver sensitivity
power level. LOS is not asserted at power levels where there is error-free transmission.
Table 8-23 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces 1000BASE-ZX
Characteristics 1000BASE-ZX ()
BOL EOL
Baud rate and reference pattern Bit rate: 1.25 GBd ± 100 ppm
Line code: PRBS 223–1, K28.5 characters
Laser type DFB
Target distance 80 km
Transmitter at reference point TP2
Source type SLM

Nominal center wavelength 1500 to 1580 nm
– maximum RMS width (σ) NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-23 Parameters specified for 1 GbE optical interfaces 1000BASE-ZX
(continued)
Characteristics 1000BASE-ZX ()
BOL EOL
– maximum –20 dB width 1 nm
– minimum side mode suppression ration 30 dB

– maximum +4 dBm +5 dBm

– minimum +1 dBm 0 dBm
Maximum mean launched power for Tx disabled –40 dBm

Minimum extinction ratio 10.0 dB 9.0 dB
Eye mask definition IEEE 802.3

Mask margin 10 %
Max opt. power overshoot vs. shutdown deactivation 3 dB
Rise and fall time (unfiltered 20%/80%) 260 ps
Maximum relative intensity noise –120 db/Hz
Maximum total transmitter jitter 345 ps

Optical return loss tolerance 20 dB
Optical path between TP2 and TP3

Attenuation range (2) 0 to 7.5 dB
Maximum dispersion 1600 ps/nm
Optical path penalty 2 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance between TP2 and TP3 –25 dB
Optical wavelength range 1500 to 1580 nm
Minimum sensitivity (3) –26 dBm –24 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity
Minimum overload +1 dBm 0 dBm

Minimum acceptable jitter 408 ps
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at TP3 12 dB

4
LOS assert level ( ) –39 to –30 dBm
LOS hysteresis 0.5 to 5 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. The 1 GbE long reach device, 1000BASE-ZX, is based upon the 1000BASE-LX devices in the IEEE 802.3
standard. However, wavelength and reach were re-defined supporting an 80 km interface.
2. Attenuation assumed to be worst-case values including losses due to splices, connectors, optical attenuators
(if used) and any additional cable margin.
3. Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point TP3 to
achieve a 1 × 10–12 BER at 1.25 Gb/s both with a PRBS 223–1 and repetitive K28.5 characters. It takes into
account power penalties caused by use of a transmitter under all operating conditions with worst-case values
of extinction ratio, pulse rise and fall times, optical return loss at point TP2, receiver connector degradations
and measurement tolerances.
4. It is expected that the LOS assert level always occurs at power levels below that of the receiver sensitivity
power level. LOS is not asserted at power levels where there is error-free transmission.
Table 8-24 Parameters specified for 10 GbE optical interfaces 10GBASE-LR/LW,

10GBASE-ER/EW, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Parameter 10GBASE-LR/LW 10GBASE-ER/EW 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Digital signal 10 GbE according to IEEE 802.3

Target distance 2/10 km 40 km 80 km
Fiber type G.652 G.652 G.652
Source type Single longitudinal mode Single longitudinal mode Single longitudinal mode
laser (SLM) laser (SLM) laser (SLM)
Nominal center wavelength 1290 to 1330 nm 1530 to 1565 nm 1530 to 1565 nm
– maximum –20 dB width 1 nm 0.5 nm 0.25 nm
– minimum side mode suppression ration 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB
– chirp parameter (α) rad rad rad for further rad negative
study chirp
– maximum spectral power density 0.1 0.1 0.1

mW/MHz mW/MHz mW/MHz
– maximum –2 dBm –1 dBm +1.5 dBm +2 dBm +3.5 dBm +4 dBm

– minimum –4 dBm –6 dBm 0 dBm –1 dBm +1 dBm 0 dBm
Maximum mean launched in case Tx_Dis –30 dBm –40 dBm –40 dBm
and/or P_Down are high
Minimum extinction ratio 6.5 dB 6 dB 9.0 dB 8.2 dB 10 dB 9 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-24 Parameters specified for 10 GbE optical interfaces 10GBASE-LR/LW,
10GBASE-ER/EW, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW (continued)
Parameter 10GBASE-LR/LW 10GBASE-ER/EW 10GBASE-ZR/ZW
Eye mask margin 10 % 10 % 10 %
Optical modulation amplitude (OMA) –4.2 dBm –5.2 dBm –0.7 dBm –1.7 dBm –0.7 dBm –1.7 dBm
RIN12 OMA –128 dB/Hz –128 dB/Hz
Optical path between point S and point R

Attenuation range (@ BER = 1 × 10–12) 0 to 4 dB 3 to 11 dB 11 to 22 dB

Maximum PMD 10 ps 10 ps 10 ps
Minimum optical return loss of cable plant 14 dB 24 dB 24 dB
at point S, including any connectors
Maximum discrete reflectance between –27 dB –27 dB –27 dB
point S and point R
Optical wavelength range 1260 to 1360 nm/ 1530 to 1565 nm 1530 to 1565 nm
5
1530 to 1565 nm ( )
Minimum receiver sensitivity –13 dBm –11 dBm –16 dBm –14 dBm –16 dBm –24 dBm
Minimum overload 1.5 dBm 0.5 dBm 0 dBm –1 dBm 0 dBm –7 dBm
Minimum receiver sensitivity in OMA –13.6 dBm –12.6 dBm –15.1 dBm –14.1 dBm
Stressed receiver sensitivity in OMA –11.3 dBm –10.3 dBm –12.3 dBm –11.3 dBm
Maximum reflectance of receiver, 12 dB
measured at TP3
RX-LOS assert level (see 3)
Hysteresis for RX-LOS, assert deassert 0.5 to 2.0 0.5 to 2.0 0.5 to 2.0
dB dB dB
Maximum optical path penalty (4) 1 dB 1.8 dB 2 dB 1.8 dB 2 dB

Maximum reflectance of receiver, –14 dB –27 dB –27 dB
measured at point R
Notes:
1. The receiver is specified for the 1550 nm window; in the 1310 nm window, the receiver will have
comparable performance to I-64.1, SR-1.
2. The receiver is specified for the 1550 nm window; in the 1310 nm window, the receiver will have sensitivity
degradation lower than 1 dB.
3. RX_LOS is pin 14 of the XFP’s electrical connector. This alarm is based upon total optical power received at
the photodiode. The assert level occurs at the optical input power that corresponds to an equivalent BER of 1
× 10–2 to 1 × 10–4. LOS will not be asserted at power levels where there is error-free transmission.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4. Due to chromatic dispersion + PMD + optical reflections.
5. To be guaranteed by design, no testing in production is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Technical specifications Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical specification reference tables

Management specifications
Table 8-25 Management specifications
Interface Location Use Connector Type

E1 User Panel OSS RJ45
E2 User Panel OSS RJ45
VOIP User Panel IP Phone / Orderwire RJ45
OAMP User Panel OSS RJ45
CRAFT User Panel WebUI USB
CRAFT User Panel WebUI DB9
(PSS-32 only)
RACK LAMP User Panel Visual Alarms DB9
HOUSEKEEPING User Panel Miscellaneous DB25 (PSS-32)
Discrete Alarms DB15 (PSS-16)
(PSS-32: 8 IN / 4
OUT - PSS-16: 6 IN /
4 OUT)
ALARM User Panel Office Alarms DB15
CIT EC WebUI/Local Craft RJ45
AUX EC WebUI/Local Craft RJ45
ES EC Expansion Shelf RJ45
ES EC Expansion Shelf RJ45
Shelf dimensions
Table 8-26 Shelf dimensions
System Height Width Depth

PSS-36 649.6 mm 498.5 mm 300 mm
(25.6 in.) (19.6 in.) (11.8 in.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Technical specifications Technical specification reference tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-26 Shelf dimensions (continued)
System Height Width Depth

PSS-32 621.8 mm 438.9 mm 289.5 mm
(24.48 in.) (17.28 in.) (11.4 in.)
PSS-16 355 mm 439 mm 280 mm
(14 in.) (17.28 in.) (11 in.)
PSS-1 44.45 mm 438.9 mm 289.5 mm
(1.75 in.) (17.28 in.) (11.4 in.)
Attenuator Drawer 44.45 mm 482.6 mm 241.3 mm
(1.75 in.) (19.0 in.) (9.5 in.)
Fiber Storage Tray 88.9 mm 482.6 mm 241.3 mm
(3.5 in.) (19.0 in.) (9.5 in.)
SFD44 88.9 mm 436.88 mm 200 mm
(3.5 in.) (17.2 in.) (7.87 in.)
SFD44B 88.9 mm 436.88 mm 200 mm
(3.5 in.) (17.2 in.) (7.87 in.)
SFD40 43.6 mm (1.72 in.) 444 mm (17.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.)
DCM Carrier (EIA) 88.9 mm 246.38 mm 241.3 mm
(3.5 in.) (9.7 in.) (9.5 in.)
DCM Carrier 88.9 mm 495.3 mm 241.3 mm
(ANSI/ETSI) (3.5 in.) (19.5 in.) (9.5 in.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Max Output
0 + Fiber
Power
(dBm)
+21.5
+21.5
Gain
+23
+17
Max Input
Power
(dBm)
+15.5
+6
+6
+7
0
Min Input
Power
(dBm)
-32
-35
-35
-28
-30
1
12 ELEAF
14 TWRS1
10 SSMF1
15 - 31
15 - 31
10 - 30
Gain
7-24
OA Type
RAMAN
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
AM2125A
AM2318A
AM2125B
Acronym
ALPHG
RA2P
Long Haul - 2
pump Raman,
Variable Gain
Variable Gain
Low Variable
Description
no mid-stage
LD specifications
Low Power
High Gain
Amplifier,
Amplifier,
mid-stage
mid-stage
Amplifier
Amplifier
mid-stage
Medium
Medium
DWDM
with no
access
access
access
access
Gain
with
with
8DG60567AA
8DG60566AA
8DG60912AA
8DG60565AA
8DG59244AA
Table 8-27
APN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Max Output
Power
(dBm)
20.5
20.5
15
23
Max Input
Power
(dBm)
+7
+7
-1
7
Min Input
Power
(dBm)
-30
-24
-25
-33
13 - 33
13-23
16-32
Gain
6-24
OA Type
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
EDFA
(continued)
Acronym
ALPFGT
AHPHG
A2325A
AHPLG
variable gain,
Description
Amp w Total
C-band, with
23db power,
LD specifications
High Power
High Power
Fixed Gain
PWR, with
Low PWR
High Gain
Amplifier,
Low Gain
Amplifier
mid-stage
Amplifier
mid-stage
mid-stage
mid-stage
DWDM
DWDM
access
access
access
access
with
with
8DG59245AA
8DG59945AA
8DG60255AA
8DG60242AA
Table 8-27
Average
Notes:
APN
1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ceiver
Over-
load
EOL
Re-
-10
-8
0
(dBm)
EOL
-18.5
Receiver
-28
-38
(dBm)
Max
-20.5
-30
-39
(dBm)
Transmit Power
EOL
+5
+5
+5
(dBm)
Max
+4
+4
+4
length
Wave-
(nm)
1510
1510
1510
~150km
tance
Dis-
~40km
~80km
Data Rate
1AB373110001 CWP151DDMB 155 Mbps
1AB373120001 CWA151DDMB 155 Mbps
155 Mbps
OSC specifications
Description
(OSC 1510
(OSC 1510
APD ULH
1AB373120002 OSC 1510
APD)
PIN)
Table 8-28
APN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel plans
The following table describes the standard channels of the ITU DWDM C-Band spaced at
100GHz intevals.
Table 8-29 DWDM wavelengths (100-GHz spacing)
DWDM (C-Band)
ITU Channel PSS-1830 channel Frequency (MHz) Wavelength (nm)
17 9170 191700 1563.86
18 9180 191800 1563.05
19 9190 191900 1562.23
20 9200 192000 1561.42
21 9210 192100 1560.61
22 9220 192200 1559.79
23 9230 192300 1558.98
24 9240 192400 1558.17
25 9250 192500 1557.36
26 9260 192600 1556.56
27 9270 192700 1555.75
28 9280 192800 1554.94
29 9290 192900 1554.13
30 9300 193000 1553.33
31 9310 193100 1552.52
32 9320 193200 1551.72
33 9330 193300 1550.92
34 9340 193400 1550.12
35 9350 193500 1549.32
36 9360 193600 1548.52
37 9370 193700 1547.72
38 9380 193800 1546.92
39 9390 193900 1546.12
40 9400 194000 1545.32
41 9410 194100 1544.53
42 9420 194200 1543.73
43 9430 194300 1542.94
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-29 DWDM wavelengths (100-GHz spacing) (continued)
DWDM (C-Band)
ITU Channel PSS-1830 channel Frequency (MHz) Wavelength (nm)
44 9440 194400 1542.14
45 9450 194500 1541.35
46 9460 194600 1540.56
47 9470 194700 1539.77
48 9480 194800 1538.98
49 9490 194900 1538.19
50 9500 195000 1537.4
51 9510 195100 1536.61
52 9520 195200 1535.82
53 9530 195300 1535.04
54 9540 195400 1534.25
55 9550 195500 1533.47
56 9560 195600 1532.68
57 9570 195700 1531.9
58 9580 195800 1531.12
59 9590 195900 1530.33
60 9600 196000 1529.55
The following table describes the standard channels of the ITU DWDM C-Band spaced at
50GHz intevals.
Table 8-30 DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz spacing)
Chan. Freq. λ (nm) Chan. Freq. λ (nm) Chan. Freq. λ (nm) Chan. # Freq. λ (nm)
# (THz) # (THz) # (THz) (THz)
9170 191.7 1563.863 9280 192.8 1554.94 9390 193.9 1546.119 9500 195.0 1537.397
91751 191.752 1563.455 92851 192.852 1554.537 93951 193.952 1545.72 95051 195.052 1537.003
9180 191.8 1563.047 9290 192.9 1554.134 9400 194.0 1545.322 9510 195.1 1536.609
91851 191.852 1562.64 92951 192.952 1553.731 94051 194.052 1544.924 95151 195.152 1536.216
9190 191.9 1562.233 9300 193.0 1553.329 9410 194.1 1554.526 9520 195.2 1535.822
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-30 DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz spacing) (continued)
Chan. Freq. λ (nm) Chan. Freq. λ (nm) Chan. Freq. λ (nm) Chan. # Freq. λ (nm)
# (THz) # (THz) # (THz) (THz)
91951 191.952 1561.826 93051 193.052 1552.926 94151 194.152 1544.128 95251 195.252 1535.429
9200 192.0 1561.419 9310 193.1 1552.524 9420 194.2 1543.73 9530 195.3 1535.036
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9205 192.05 1561.013 9315 193.15 1552.122 9425 194.25 1543.333 9535 195.35 1534.643
9210 192.1 1560.606 9320 193.2 1551.721 9430 194.3 1542.936 9540 195.4 1534.25
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9215 192.15 1560.200 9325 193.25 1551.319 9435 194.35 1542.539 9545 195.45 1533.858
9220 192.2 1559.794 9330 193.3 1550.918 9440 194.4 1542.142 9550 195.5 1533.465
92251 192.252 1559.389 93351 193.352 1550.517 94451 194.452 1541.746 95551 195.552 1533.073
9230 192.3 1558.983 9340 193.4 1550.116 9450 194.5 1541.349 9560 195.6 1532.681
92351 192.352 1558.578 93451 193.452 1549.715 94551 194.552 1540.953 95651 195.652 1532.29
9240 192.4 1558.173 9350 193.5 1549.315 9460 194.6 1540.557 9570 195.7 1531.898
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9245 192.45 1557.768 9355 193.55 1548.915 9465 194.65 1540.162 9575 195.75 1531.507
9250 192.5 1557.363 9360 193.6 1548.515 9470 194.7 1539.766 9580 195.8 1531.116
92551 192.552 1556.959 93651 193.652 1548.115 94751 194.752 1539.371 95851 195.852 1530.725
9260 192.6 1556.555 9370 193.7 1547.715 9480 194.8 1538.976 9590 195.9 1530.334
92651 192.652 1556.151 93751 193.752 1547.316 94851 194.852 1538.581 95951 195.952 1529.944
9270 192.7 1555.747 9380 193.8 1546.917 9490 194.9 1538.186 9600 196.0 1529.553
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9275 192.75 1555.343 9385 193.85 1546.518 9495 194.95 1537.792 9605 196.05 1529.163
Notes:
1. 50GHz “offset” frequency: Support for this frequency requires SFD44B and ITLB to interlace with the
frequencies from SFD44.
2. Channels offset 50GHz from standard 100GHz-spaced ITU channels cannot be added unless the signal has
passed through an ITLB or a 50 GHz WSS. Adjacent 40G signals cannot be added directly to the WSS
colorless ports. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3.5.60 and 3.6.51 User Provisioning Guide and Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 8.6.5 Photonic
Manager EMS Reference Guide for full configuration and implementation details.
Table 8-31 Channel plan (CWDM)
CWDM
ITU Channel Frequency (MHz) Wavelength (nm)
1471 204100 1470
1491 201300 1490
1511 198700 1510
1531 195300 1530
1551 195500 1550
1571 191100 1570
1591 188700 1590
1611 188300 1610
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Table 8-32 Filter specifications (Part 1 of 2)
and 3.6.51
APN Description Acronym Filter Type Channel Optical Insertion Loss (thru Mux/Demux)
Planning Guide
Spacing

8DG59437AA Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5A DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
1830 PSS Product Information and

Channel (A Variant) (p. 8-61)

8DG59437AB Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5B DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (B Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG59437AC Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5C DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (C Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG59437AD Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5D DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (D Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG59437AE Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5E DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (E Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG59437AF Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5F DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (F Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG59437AG Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5G DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (G Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG59437AH Static Filter DWDM 5 SFD5H DWDM 100GHz See Table 8-37, “SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss”
Channel (H Variant) (p. 8-61)
8DG60210AA Static Filter DWDM 8 SFD8A DWDM 100GHz <4.75 dB

Channel (A Variant)
8DG60210AB Static Filter DWDM 8 SFD8B DWDM 100GHz <4.75 dB
Channel (B Variant)
8DG60210AC Static Filter DWDM 8 SFD8C DWDM 100GHz <4.75 dB
Channel (C Variant)
8DG60210AD Static Filter DWDM 8 SFD8D DWDM 100GHz <4.75 dB

Channel (D Variant)
8DG60368AA 40 Channel Optical SFD40 DWDM 100GHz 3.0 - 6.0 dB

Mux/Demux
8DG60367AA 40 Channel Optical SFD40B DWDM 100GHz 3.0 - 6.0 dB
Mux/Demux - 50GHz offset
8-55
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-32 Filter specifications (Part 1 of 2) (continued)
8-56
APN Description Acronym Filter Type Channel Optical Insertion Loss (thru Mux/Demux)
Spacing
8DG59248AA 44 Channel Optical SFD44 DWDM 100GHz 5.7/6.0 dB

Mux/Demux
8DG59440AA Static Filter CWDM 2 SFC2A CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Channel (A Variant)
8DG59592HA Edge Device - Static Filter SFC2A CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Hardened CWDM 1 Channel
(A Variant)
8DG59440AB Static Filter CWDM 2 SFC2B CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Channel (B Variant)
8DG59592HB Edge Device - Static Filter SFC2B CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
(B Variant)
8DG59440AC Static Filter CWDM 2 SFC2C CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Channel (C Variant)
8DG59592HC Edge Device - Static Filter SFC2C CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
(C Variant)
8DG59440AD Static Filter CWDM 2 SFC2D CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Channel (D Variant)
8DG59592HD Edge Device - Static Filter SFC2D CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-38, “SFC2 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
(D Variant)
8DG59441AA Static Filter CWDM 4 SFC4A CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-39, “SFC4 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Channel (A Variant)
8DG59593HA Edge Device - Static Filter SFC4A CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-39, “SFC4 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
(A Variant)
8DG59441AB Static Filter CWDM 4 SFC4B CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-39, “SFC4 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
Channel (B Variant)
8DG59593HB Edge Device - Static Filter SFC4B CWDM 20 nm See Table 8-39, “SFC4 Insertion Loss” (p. 8-62)
(B Variant)
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-33 Filter specifications (Part 2 of 2)
and 3.6.51
APN Insertion Loss Bandwidth Adjacent Channel Loss Return Loss
Planning Guide
(@3dBm, min)
Temperature Sensitivity Ripple

8DG59437AA 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG59437AB 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG59437AC 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB

8DG59437AD 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG59437AE 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG59437AF 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG59437AG 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG59437AH 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±22.5 GHz 50dB 45dB
8DG60210AA 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±18.5 GHz 15dB 45dB

8DG60210AB 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±18.5 GHz 15dB 45dB
8DG60210AC 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±18.5 GHz 15dB 45dB

8DG60210AD 0.6 dB 0.5 dB ±18.5 GHz 15dB 45dB
8DG60368AA 0.5 dB 0.5 dB ±25 GHz 23dB 40dB
8DG59440AA 0.5 dB 0.5 dB 14 nm (@0.5dB, 40dB 40dB

min)
8DG59601HA 0.5 dB 0.5 dB 14 nm (@0.5dB, 40dB 40dB
min)
8DG59440AB 0.5 dB 0.5 dB 14 nm (@0.5dB, 40dB 40dB

min)
8DG59601HB 0.5 dB 0.5 dB 14 nm (@0.5dB, 40dB 40dB

min)
8DG59440AC 0.5 dB 0.5 dB 14 nm (@0.5dB, 40dB 40dB
min)
8-57
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Return Loss
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
Adjacent Channel Loss
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
40dB
14 nm (@0.5dB,
14 nm (@0.5dB,
14 nm (@0.5dB,
14 nm (@0.5dB,
14 nm (@0.5dB,
(@3dBm, min)
Bandwidth
min)
min)
min)
min)
min)
Ripple
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
(continued)
Insertion Loss
Temperature Sensitivity
Filter specifications (Part 2 of 2)
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
0.5 dB
Table 8-33
8DG59440AD
8DG59601HD
8DG59441AA
8DG59601HC
8DG59441AB
APN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Passband center wavelength
Table 8-34 Passband center wavelength
ITU Fre- Wave- Port SFD5 SFD8 SFD44

Channel quency length Label
(THz) (nm)
17 191.7 1563.86 9170 SFD44
18 191.8 1563.05 9180 SFD44
19 191.9 1562.23 9190 SFD5A SFD44
20 192.0 1561.42 9200 SFD8A SFD44
21 192.1 1560.61 9210 SFD44
22 192.2 1559.79 9220 SFD44
23 192.3 1558.98 9230 SFD44
24 192.4 1558.17 9240 SFD5B SFD44
25 192.5 1557.36 9250 SFD8A SFD44
26 192.6 1556.56 9260 SFD44
27 192.7 1555.75 9270 SFD44
28 192.8 1554.94 9280 SFD44
29 192.9 1554.13 9290 SFD5C SFD44
30 193.0 1553.33 9300 SFD8B SFD44
31 193.1 1552.52 9310 SFD44
32 193.2 1551.72 9320 SFD44
33 193.3 1550.92 9330 SFD44
34 193.4 1550.12 9340 SFD5D SFD44
35 193.5 1549.32 9350 SFD8B SFD44
36 193.6 1548.52 9360 SFD44
37 193.7 1547.72 9370 SFD44
38 193.8 1546.92 9380 SFD44
39 193.9 1546.12 9390 SFD44
40 194.0 1545.32 9400 SFD44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-34 Passband center wavelength (continued)
ITU Fre- Wave- Port SFD5 SFD8 SFD44

Channel quency length Label
(THz) (nm)
41 194.1 1544.53 9410 SFD5E SFD44
42 194.2 1543.73 9420 SFD8C SFD44
43 194.3 1542.94 9430 SFD44
44 194.4 1542.14 9440 SFD44
45 194.5 1541.35 9450 SFD44
46 194.6 1540.56 9460 SFD5F SFD44
47 194.7 1539.77 9470 SFD8C SFD44
48 194.8 1538.98 9480 SFD44
49 194.9 1538.19 9490 SFD44
50 195.0 1537.4 9500 SFD44
51 195.1 1536.61 9510 SFD5G SFD44
52 195.2 1535.82 9520 SFD8D SFD44
53 195.3 1535.04 9530 SFD44
54 195.4 1534.25 9540 SFD44
55 195.5 1533.47 9550 SFD44
56 195.6 1532.68 9560 SFD5H SFD44
57 195.7 1531.9 9570 SFD8D SFD44
58 195.8 1531.12 9580 SFD44
59 195.9 1530.33 9590 SFD44
60 196.0 1529.55 9600 SFD44
Note: The SFD44B spans the spectrum above at wavelengths that are offset by
50GhZ from those supported by the SFD44. For wavelength details of these offset
channels see frequencies 9175 through 9605 (THz), as described in Table 8-30,
“DWDM wavelengths (50-GHz spacing)” (p. 8-52).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFC2 and SFC4 wavelengths
Table 8-35 Wavelengths for SFC2 and SFC4
Label Center Wavelength SFC2 SFC4

(nm)
1471 1471 SFC2A SFC4A
1491 1491
1511 1511 SFC2B
1531 1531
1551 1551 SFC2C SFC4B
1571 1571
1591 1591 SFC2D
1611 1611
Insertion Loss
Table 8-36 SFD8 Optical Insertion Loss
SFD5 Loss OMD In OMD Out

Max (dB) Max (dB)
Ch1 3.35 2.15
Ch2 3.05 2.45
Ch3 2.75 2.75
Ch4 2.45 3.05
Ch5 3.05 2.45
Ch6 2.75 2.75
Ch7 2.45 3.05
Ch8 2.15 3.35
Exp 1.1 1.1
Table 8-37 SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss

Max (dB) Max (dB)
Ch1 4.2 2.8
Ch2 3.9 3.2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-37 SFD5 Optical Insertion Loss (continued)

Max (dB) Max (dB)
Ch3 3.5 3.5
Ch4 3.2 3.9
Ch5 2.8 4.2
Exp 2 1.4
MON 14.1 14.1
Table 8-38 SFC2 Insertion Loss
Insertion Loss Max (dB)

OMD-In ⇒ Ch i _OUT (i=1, 2) 1.8
OMD-In ⇒ Exp_OUT 1.5
Exp-In ⇒ OMD-OUT 1.0
Ch i_In ⇒ OMD-OUT (i=1, 2) 3.9
Table 8-39 SFC4 Insertion Loss
Insertion Loss Max (dB)

OMD-In ⇒ Ch i _OUT (i=1, 2, 3, 4) 2.3
OMD-In ⇒ Exp_OUT 2.2
Exp-In ⇒ OMD-OUT 1.7
Ch i_In ⇒ OMD-OUT (i=1, 2, 3, 4) 1.8
Table 8-40 CWR8/CWR8B insertion loss
Description Maximum Insertion Loss

(dB)
SIG IN to THRU OUT 6.7
SIG IN to OMD OUT 10.0
SIG IN to CLS(1-8) OUT 6.5
THRU IN to SIG OUT 2.1
CLS(1-8) (Add) IN to Amp IN 11.0
OMD (Add) IN to Amp IN 8.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-40 CWR8/CWR8B insertion loss (continued)
Description Maximum Insertion Loss

(dB)
VOA OUT to SIG OUT 7.8
TEST IN to OMD OUT 2.5
TEST IN to THRU OUT 16.8
TEST IN to CLS(1-8) OUT 16.3
CWR8-88 loss specifications
Table 8-41 CWR8-88 specifications
Description Loss (dB)

Typ Min Max
SIG IN to THRU OUT 6.6 4.0 8.7
SIG IN to OMD OUT 6.9 6.0 7.7
SIG IN to C-LESS DROP OUT 6.1 3.8 7.8
THRU IN to SIG OUT 1.8 1.6 2.1
C-LESS ADD IN to AMP IN 10.6 10.0 11.0
OMD ADD IN to AMP IN 7.3 6.8 7.6
VOA OUT to SIG OUT 6.0 5.2 7.8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Table 8-42 OT line-side specifications
8-64
APN Description Acronym Line Side Output Maximum Input Power Range (dBm) Output
Data Rate Power Range Wavelength Range
Min Max
(nm)
8DG59249AA 11G Single Port 11STAR1 11.1G -1 - 3dBm -26.4 +8 1529.16 to 1563.86
Tunable AnyRate (1
client)
8DG59339AA 11G Single Port 11STGE12 11.1G -2.8 - 2.5dBm -26.4 +8 1529.16 to 1563.86
Tunable GBE NMux
(12 clients)
8DG59340AA 11G Dual Port Tunable 11DPE12 11.1G Fixed: -3 - 1dBm1 -26 -8 1529.16 to 1563.86
GBE NMux (12 Tunable:
clients)
0 - 4/-1 - 3dBm1
8DG60349AA 10G, Quad port, any 11QPA4 11 G Fixed: -3 - 1dBm1 -26 -8 1529.16 to 1563.86
rate module with four Tunable:
client interfaces
0 - 4/-1 - 3dBm1
8DG60349AB 10G, Quad port, any 11QPA4A 11 G 2.8 - 2.5dBm -26 -8 1529.16 to 1563.86
rate module with four
client interfaces
8DG59828AA 11G Dual Pluggable 11DPM12 11 G Fixed: -3 - 1dBm1 -26 -8 1529.16 to 1568.36
12-anyrate Mux OT Tunable:
0 - 4/-1 - 3dBm1
8DG59251AA 11G Single Port 11STMM10 11.1G -1 - 3dBm -26.4 +8 1529.16 to 1563.86
Tunable Multirate Mux
(10 universal clients)
8DG59713AA MSC - 4G Dual Port 4DPA4 2.5G Fixed: -3 - 1dBm1 -26 -8 1529.55 to 1563.86
Pluggable AnyRate (4 Tunable:
clients)
0 - 4/-1 - 3dBm1
8DG60158AA MSC - 4G Dual Port 4DPA2 1G or 2.5G -2.8 - 5dBm -24 -8 1529.55 to 1563.86
Pluggable AnyRate (2
clients)
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-42 OT line-side specifications (continued)
APN Description Acronym Line Side Output Maximum Input Power Range (dBm) Output
and 3.6.51
Data Rate Power Range Wavelength Range
Planning Guide
Min Max
(nm)

8DG59831AA Multirate 43STX4 43.018413G -3 - 1dBm -21 0 1529.16 to 1563.86
Multiprotocol MUX
Tunable Transponder
(4 universal clients)

8DG60237AA Multirate 43STX4P 43.018413G -3 - 1dBm -21 0 1529.16 to 1563.86

Multiprotocol MUX
Tunable Transponder -
DPSK (4 universal
clients)
8DG60230AA 40G Single Port 43STA1P 43.018413 -3 - 1dBm -21 0 1529.16 to 1563.86
Tunable AnyRate G
Transponder - PDPSK
(1 client)
8DG60317AA 40G Single Port 43SCA1 44.6G -1.3dBm -21 2 1529.16 to 1568.36
Tunable AnyRate
Coherent Add/Drop
Transponder - (1
client)
8DG60320AA 40G Single Port 43SCX4 44.6G -1.3dBm -21 2 1529.16 to 1568.36
Tunable MUX
coherent (4 Client)
transponder
8DG17121AA 100G Single port 112SCX10 111.809973G -20 - -1dBm -21 2 1529.16 to 1568.36
tunable mux (10
universal clients),
coherent
8DG60977AA 100G Single port 112SNX10 111.809973G -20 - -1dBm -21 2 1529.16 to 1568.36
tunable mux (10
universal clients),
coherent w/enhanced
OSNR
8DG60008AA 100G anyrate A/D, 112SCA1 111.809973G –20 - –1dBm -21 2 1529.16 to 1568.36
coherent
8-65
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1529.16 to 1568.36
Wavelength Range
Values shown are before, or without e-VOA. The value after an installed e-VOA is -20 to -5.5. (See Table 2-5, “DWDM OT VOA usage”
Output
(nm)
Input Power Range (dBm)
Max
2
Min
-21
Output Maximum
Power Range
-20 - -1dBm
111.809973G
Data Rate
Line Side
(continued)
112SNA1
Acronym
(p. 2-74) for information on e-VOA usage.)

OT line-side specifications
coherent w/enhanced
100G anyrate A/D,
Description
OSNR
Table 8-42
8DG60987AA
Notes:
APN
1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Table 8-43 SFP-XFP-CFP specifications
and 3.6.51
APN Description App Code Fiber Type Launch Power Receiver Sensitivity Receiver
Planning Guide
Overload
Min BOL Max BOL Min EOL Max EOL Min EOL
(dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)

1AB376350001 SFP S-1.1 -40/+85 S-1.1/IR-1 SSMF -14 -9 -15 -8 -30 -28 -8..
(B&W)
STM-1/OC-3 DDM

1310nm

(S-1.1/IR-1))
1AB376350002 SFP L-1.1 -40/+85 L-1.1/LR-1 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -36 -34 -10
(B&W
STM-1/OC-3 DDM
1310nm
(L-1.1/LR-1)
1AB376350003 SFP L-1.2 -40/+85 L-1.2/LR-2 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -36 -34 -10
(B&W
STM-1/OC-3 DDM
1550nm
(L-1.2/LR-2))
1AB376360001 SFP S-4.1 -40/+85 S-4.1/IR-1 SSMF -14 -9 -15 -8 -30 -28 -8
(B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(S-4.1/IR-1))
1AB376360002 SFP L-4.1 -40/+85 L-4.1/LR-1 SSMF -2 +1 -3 +2 -30 -28 -8

(B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(L-4.1/LR-1))
1AB376360003 SFP L-4.2 -40/+85 L-4.2/LR-2 SSMF -2 +1 -3 +2 -30 -28 -8
(B&W
STM-4/OC-12
DDM 1550nm
(L-4.2/LR-2))
8-67
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-43 SFP-XFP-CFP specifications (continued)
8-68
Overload
1AB376370001 SFP I-16.1 -40/+85 I-16.1/SR-1 SSMF -9 -4 -10 -3 -20 -18 -3

(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(I-16.1/SR-1))
1AB376370002 SFP S-16.1 -5/+85 S-16.1/IR-1 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -20 -18 0
(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(S-16.1/IR-1))
1AB376370003 SFP S-16.1 -5/+85 L-16.1/LR-1 SSMF -1 +2 -2 +3 -29 -27 -9
(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
1AB376370005 SFP S-16.1 -5/+85 S-16.1/IR-1 SSMF -4 -1 -5 0 -20 -18 0
(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
MultiRate
≤2.7GBPS(S-
16.1/IR-1))
1AB376370003 SFP L-16.1 -5/+85 L-16.1/LR-1 SSMF -1 +2 -2 +3 -29 -27 -9
(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1310nm
(L-16.1/LR-1))
1AB196370009 SFP L-16.2 -5/+85 L-16.2/LR-2 SSMF -1 +2 -2 +3 -30 -28 -9

(B&W
STM-16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
(L-16.2/LR-2))
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

1AB382180001 SFP 100BASE-LX 100B-LX10 MMF -19 -15 -20 -14 -33 (BER -31 (BER -14
-40/+85 1E-10) 1E-10)

-31 (BER -27 (BER

1E-12) 1E-12

1AB359780002 EL TRX SFP 1000B-T — — — — — — — —
10/100/1000BASE-
T1 -40/+85
1AB376720001 SFP GBE SX 1000BASE-SX MMF -8.5 -1 -9.5 0 -19 -17 0

-40/+85 (B&W
1GBE DDM
850nm
(1000BASE-SX))
1AB376720002 SFP GBE LX 1000BASE-LX SSMF -8 -4 -9 -3 -21.5 -19.5 -3
-40/+85 (B&W
1GBE DDM
1310nm
(1000BASE-LX))
1AB376720003 SFP GBE LX 1000BASE-ZX SSMF +1 +4 0 +5 -26 -24 0
-40/+85 (B&W
1GBE DDM
1550nm
(1000BASE-ZX)
1AB379640003 OPTO-TRX SFP 1G FC / 2G MMF -9 -1 -10 0 -17 -15 0
FC/2FC MM W/ FC SN-I
DDM (B&W
1G/2G Fibre
Channel DDM
850nm (SN-I))
1AB379640002 OPTO-TRX SFP 1G FC / 2G SSMF -10.7 -4 -11.7 -3 -22 -20 -3
FC/2FC SM W/ FC LC-L
DDM (B&W
1G/2G Fibre
Channel DDM
1310nm (LC-L)
8-69
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-70
Overload
1AB377160001 SFP CWDM-SH S-C8S1-1D2 SSMF +1 +4 0 +5 -20.5 -18.5 0

1471NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM )
1491NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM )
1511NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
1531NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)

1551NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
PIN(<2.7G) DDM)

1571NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)

1591NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)

1611NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate PIN
(<2.7G) DDM)
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

1AB377200001 SFP CWDM-LH S-C8L1-1D2 SSMF +1 +4 0 +5 -30 -28 -8
1471NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G)

DDM)

1491NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)

1511NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)

1531NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)

1551NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD(<2.7G)
DDM)
1571NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
8-71
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-72
Overload

1591NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
1611NM (CWDM
2.5G Multirate
APD (<2.7G) DDM
CH1610)
1AB377220003 SFP DWDM CH 60 N/A SSMF +1 +3 0 +4 -34 with -32 with -8
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(196.0))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.9))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.8))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.7))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.6))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.5))
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC

ps/nm) DDM
(195.4))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.3))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.2))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.1))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(195.0))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.9))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.8))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.7))
8-73
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-74
Overload

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC

ps/nm) DDM
(194.6))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.5))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.4))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.3))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.2))
1AB377220022 SFP DWDM CH N/A SSMF +1 +3 0 +4 -34 with -32 with -8
41(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.1))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(194.0))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.9))
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

( DWDM (2400 FEC FEC

ps/nm) DDM
(193.8))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.7))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.6))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.5))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.4))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.3))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.2))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(193.1))
8-75
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-76
Overload

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC

ps/nm) DDM
(193.0))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.9))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.8))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.7))
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.6))
1AP377220038 SFP DWDM CH 25 N/A SSMF +1 +3 0 +4 -34 with -32 with -8
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.5))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.4))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.3))
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC

ps/nm) DDM
(192.2))

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.1)
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(192.0)
(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(191.9)

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(191.8)

(DWDM (2400 FEC FEC
ps/nm) DDM
(191.7))
AB300320001 3GSDI B&W Short 3GSDI-SH SLM -5 -1 -6 0 -19 -18 +1

Haul
AB300320002 3GSDI B&W 3GSDI-MH SLM -3 0 -4 +1 -19 -18 +1
Medium Haul
1AB373120004 SFP-EULH OSC EULH OSC SLM +3 +6 +2 +7 -43 -42 -9
1510 APD
8-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-78
Overload
1AB375380002 XFP I-64.1/10GBE I-64.1 (SR-1) SSMF -4 -2 -6 -1 -13 -11 0.5

BASE-L (B&W
Multirate 11G
(STM64/OC-
192/OTU-
2/10GBASE-LX)
DDM
1AB375380003 XFP S64.2B (IR-2) SSMF 0 +1.5 -1 +2 -16 -14 -1
S-64.2B/10GBE
BASE-E (B&W)
Multirate
11G(STM64
/OC-192/OTU-2
/10BASE-EX)
DDM
1AB375380001 XFP 10BASE-S 10GBase-SR MMF -6.3 -2 -7.2 -1 -12.1 -11 -1

(B&W)
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
1AB379240001 XFP CWDM N/A SSMF +2 +4 +1 +5 -17 or -20 -15 or -18 -1

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1471 nm

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1471 nm
(-40/85)

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1491 nm
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

(40 km) 10G

DDM 1491 nm

(-40/85)

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1511 nm
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1511 nm
(-40/85)
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1531 nm

(40 km) 10G
DDM 1531 nm
(-40/85)
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1551 nm
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1551 nm
(-40/85)
(40 km) 10G
DDM 1571 nm
8-79
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-80
Overload

(40 km) 10G

DDM 1591 nm
1AB379240008 XFP CWDM N/A SSMF +2 +4 +1 +5 -17 or -15 or -18 -1

(40 km) 10G -2019
DDM 1611 nm
1AB378370001 XFP CWDM N/A SSMF +2 +4 +1 +5 -26 -24 -8
(70km) 10G DDM
1471nm
(70km) 10G DDM
1491nm
(70km) 10G DDM
1511nm
(70km) 10G DDM
1531nm

(70km) 10G DDM
1551nm

(70km) 10G DDM
1571nm
(70km) 10G DDM
1591nm
(70km) 10G DDM
1611nm
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

1AB375380009 8G FC XFP SM N/A SSMF -7.4 -1 -8.4 0 -14.8 -13.8 +-0.5
1AB375380011 8G FC XFP MM N/A SSMF -7.2 -1 -8.2 0 -12.2 -11.2 0

1AB375650001 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8

CH60 (196.0) G.655
1AB375650002 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH59 (195.9) G.655
1AB375650003 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH58 (195.8) G.655
1AB375650004 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH57 (195.7) G.655
1AB375650005 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH56 (195.6) G.655
1AB375650006 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH55 (195.5) G.655
1AB375650007 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH54 (195.4) G.655
1AB375650008 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH53 (195.3) G.655
1AB375650009 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH52 (195.2) G.655
1AB375650010 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH51 (195.1) G.655
1AB375650011 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH50 (195.0) G.655
1AB375650012 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH49 (194.9) G.655
8-81
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-82
Overload
1AB375650013 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH48 (194.8) G.655

1AB375650014 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH47 (194.7) G.655
1AB375650015 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH46 (194.6) G.655
1AB375650016 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH45 (194.5) G.655
1AB375650017 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH44 (194.4) G.655
1AB375650018 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH43 (194.3) G.655
1AB375650019 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH42 (194.2) G.655
1AB375650020 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH41 (194.1) G.655
1AB375650021 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH40 (194.0) G.655
1AB375650022 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH39 (193.9) G.655
1AB375650023 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH38 (193.8) G.655
1AB375650024 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH37 (193.7) G.655
1AB375650025 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH36 (193.6) G.655
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and 3.6.51
Overload
Planning Guide

1AB375650026 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH35 (193.5) G.655

1AB375650027 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8

CH34 (193.4)

G.655
1AB375650028 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH33 (193.3) G.655
1AB375650029 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH32 (193.2) G.655
1AB375650030 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH31 (193.1) G.655
1AB375650031 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH30 (193.0) G.655
1AB375650032 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH29 (192.9) G.655
1AB375650033 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH28 (192.8) G.655
1AB375650034 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH27 (192.7) G.655
1AB375650035 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH26 (192.6) G.655
1AB375650036 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH25 (192.5) G.655
1AB375650037 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH24 (192.4) G.655
1AB375650038 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH23 (192.3) G.655
8-83
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-84
Overload
1AB375650039 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH22 (192.2) G.655

1AB375650040 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH21 (192.1) G.655
1AB375650041 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH20 (192.0) G.655
1AB375650042 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH19 (191.9) G.655
1AB375650043 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH18 (191.8) G.655
1AB375650044 DWDM XFP 80km N/A G.652 0 +2.5 -1.0 +3.0 -29 -27 -8
CH17 (191.7) G.655
1AB375650046 XFP DWDM N/A G.652 +0.5 — 0.0 +4 -27 -25 -8
Tunable CT G.655
(50GHz 10G XFP)
1AB402160012 CFP 100G (4x25G) N/A G.652 +0.4 +10.5 -0.6 +4.5 -9.4 -8.4 +6
SR 100G LR4
w/HeatSink
1AB402160010 CFP 100G N/A G.652 +0.9 +10 - +11 -0.1 +2.8 -7.7 -6.7 +4
(10x10G) 100G
LR10 w/HeatSink
Notes:
1. This PTM supports 1000BASE-T transmission, however 1000BASE-T applications are not currently supported on 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves.
and 3.6.51
Planning Guide

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Response
(ms)
VOA Range
1
Attenua-
tion (dB)
25
Accuracy
Setting
(dB)
±0.3
Optical Power
Detection
Accuracy
(dB)
±0.3
Overhead
(dB)
2.5
Egress
Path
-0 to 12
dBm
Input Range
-9.5 to 10
Ingress
Path
dBm
Alien wavelength client specifications
1525-1565
length
Wave-
Acronym
SVAC
Attenuator Card
Description
Single Port
Variable
Table 8-44
8DG59561AA
APN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Valid LD combinations
Table 8-45 1830 PSS-36 TOADM valid LD combinations
Raman Amp/EDFA Booster Ingress LD Egress LD

None A2325A A2325A, AHPHG AHPLG,
or None
None AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG AHPLG,
or None
None AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG AHPLG,
or None
None AM2125A AM2125A, AM2318A
None AM2125B AM2125B, AM2318A
None AM2318A AM2125A, AM2125B,
AM2318A
RA3P A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
RA3P AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
RA3P AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
RA3P+PB1 A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
RA3P+PB1 AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
RA3P+PB1 AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
RA2P A2325A A2325A, AHPLG, or None
RA2P AHPLG A2325A, AHPLG, or None
RA2P AM2125A AM2125A, AM2318A
RA2P AM2125B AM2125B, AM2318A
RA2P AM2318A AM2125A, AM2125B,
AM2318A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-46 1830 PSS-32 TOADM valid LD combinations
Raman Amp/EDFA Ingress LD Egress LD CWR

Booster
None A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
None AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
None AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
None ALPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
None ALPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
None AM2125A AM2125A, CWR8/CWR8-88
AM2318A
None AM2125B AM2125B, CWR8/CWR8-88
AM2318A
None AM2318A A2325A, AM2125B, CWR8/CWR8-88
AM2318A
RA3P A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P ALPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P ALPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-46 1830 PSS-32 TOADM valid LD combinations (continued)
Raman Amp/EDFA Ingress LD Egress LD CWR

Booster
RA3P+PB1 A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P+PB1 AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P+PB1 AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8/CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P+PB1 ALPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA3P+PB1 ALPHG A2325A, AHPHG, CWR8-88
AHPLG, ALPHG, or
None
RA2P A2325A A2325A, AHPLG, or CWR8/CWR8-88
None
RA2P AHPLG A2325A, AHPLG, or CWR8/CWR8-88
None
RA2P AM2125A AM2125A, CWR8/CWR8-88
AM2318A
RA2P AM2125B AM2125B, CWR8/CWR8-88
AM2318A
RA2P AM2318A AM2125A, CWR8/CWR8-88
AM2125B AM2318A
Note: All the above 1830 PSS-32 TOADM combinations support use of the WTOCM
and support both Auto and Manual power management.
Table 8-47 1830 PSS-36 ROADM valid LD combinations

None A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
None AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-47 1830 PSS-36 ROADM valid LD combinations (continued)

None AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
or None
AM2318A
or None
or None
or None
or None
or None
or None
RA2P AM2318A AM2125A, AM2125B
AM2318A
Note: All the above 1830 PSS-36 ROADM combinations use WR8-88A, and support
use of the WTOCM and both Auto and Manual power management.
Table 8-48 1830 PSS-32 ROADM valid LD combinations

None A2325A A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPHG, or None
None AHPHG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPHG, or None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-48 1830 PSS-32 ROADM valid LD combinations (continued)

None AHPLG A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPHG, or None
AM2318A
ALPHG, or None
ALPHG, or None
ALPHG, or None
ALPHG, or None
ALPHG, or None
ALPHG, or None
RA2P AM2318A AM2125A, AM2125B
AM2318A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: All the above 1830 PSS-32 ROADM combinations use WR8-88A, and support
use of the WTOCM and both Auto and Manual power management.
Table 8-49 1830 PSS-36 DFOADM valid LD combinations
Raman Ingress LD Egress LD Power WTOCM

Amp/EDFA Management support
Booster Support
None AHPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, or D2+: Manual
None
None AHPHG ALPFGT Manual N
None AHPLG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
None
None AHPLG ALPFGT Manual N
None — ALPFGT Manual N
RA3P AHPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
None
RA3P AHPLG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
None
RA3P+PB1 AHPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
None
RA3P+PB1 AHPLG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
None
AHPLG, or Manual
None D2+: Manual
AHPLG, or Manual
None D2+: Manual
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Amp/EDFA Management Support
Booster Support
None None None Manual N
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
None ALPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
None ALPHG ALPFGT Manual N
None OSCT None Manual N
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-50 1830 PSS-32 DFOADM valid LD combinations (continued)

Booster Support
RA3P ALPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
RA3P+PB1 ALPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPLG, or Manual
None D2+: Manual
AHPLG, or Manual
None D2+: Manual

Booster Support
None None None None N
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Booster Support
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
None ALPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
None ALPHG ALPFGT Manual N
None ALPFGT ALPFGT Manual N
None OSCT None Manual N
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
RA3P ALPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Booster Support
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
RA3P+PB1 ALPHG A2325A, D1: Auto & Y
AHPHG, Manual
AHPLG, D2+: Manual
ALPHG, or
None
Table 8-52 1830 PSS-32 ILA valid LD combinations

None A2325A None
None AHPHG None
None AHPLG None
None ALPHG None
None AM2125A None
None AM2125B None
None AM2318A None
RA3P A2325A None
RA3P AHPHG None
RA3P AHPLG None
RA3P ALPHG None
RA3P+PB1 A2325A None
RA3P+PB1 AHPHG None
RA3P+PB1 AHPLG None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-52 1830 PSS-32 ILA valid LD combinations (continued)

RA3P+PB1 ALPHG None
RA2P A2325A None
RA2P AHPLG None
RA2P AM2125A None
RA2P AM2125B None
RA2P AM2318B None
Table 8-53 1830 PSS-16 ILA valid LD combinations
Raman Amp/EDFA Ingress LD Egress LD WTOCM support

Booster
None A2325A None Y
None AHPHG None Y
None AHPLG None Y
None ALPHG None N
None AM2125A None Y
None AM2125B None Y
None AM2318A None Y
RA3P A2325A None Y
RA3P AHPHG None Y
RA3P AHPLG None Y
RA3P ALPHG None N
RA3P+PB1 A2325A None Y
RA3P+PB1 AHPHG None Y
RA3P+PB1 AHPLG None Y
RA3P+PB1 ALPHG None N
RA2P A2325A None Y
RA2P AHPLG None Y
RA2P AM2125A None Y
RA2P AM2125B None Y
RA2P AM2318A None Y
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: All the above 1830 PSS-16 ILA combinations support use of the WTOCM, and
support both Auto and Manual power management..
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Appendix A: Ordering
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this appendix is to provide the necessary ordering information (part
numbers, etc.) for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE.
Contents
Software A-3
Network element software A-3
1354RM-PhM A-5
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS engineering and planning tool (EPT) A-6
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 A-7
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment A-7
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 installation kits A-8
1830 PSS amplifiers A-12
1830 PSS filters A-14
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection A-16
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 dispersion compensation modules A-17
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders A-20
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks A-22
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables A-22
1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items A-27
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment A-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and A-1
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and 1830 PSS-1 PTM A-35

optics
SFP A-35
XFP A-56
CFP A-59
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 A-60
Edge device A-60
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering Network element software
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Network element software

Table A-1, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and license point fees”
(p. A-3) lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE network
element (NE) software CD-ROMs.
Table A-1 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and license point fees
Acronym Description Part No. 1830 1830 1830 1830 1830 1830
PSS-36 PSS-4 PSS-1 PSS-1 PSS-1 PSS-1
/32/16 GBEH MD4H MSAH AHP
SWP-1830 1830 PSS 8DG61311 X — — — — —
PSS R3.6.50 R3.6.50 (4G AAAA
EC) DVD
SWP-1830 1830 PSS 8DG61314 X — — — — —
PSS R3.6.51 R3.6.51 AAAA
(16G EC)
DVD
SWP-1830 1830 PSS 3KC13165 — X — — — —
PSS-4 R3.6.50 AAAA
R3.6.50 DVD
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC27889 — — X — — —
1830PSS-1 GBE R2.7 AAAA
GBEH R2.7 CDROM
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC27919 — — X — — —
1830PSS-1 GBE R2.7.1 AAAA
GBEH CDROM
R2.7.1
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC25544 — — — — X —
1830PSS-1 MSA R1.0.1 AAAA
MSAH CDROM
R1.0.1
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC25544 — — — — X —
1830PSS-1 MSA R1.0.2 ABAA
MSAH CDROM
R1.0.2
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC25554 — — — — X —
1830PSS-1 MSA R1.1 AAAA
MSAH R1.1 CDROM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering Network element software
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 GBE NE CD-ROMs and license point fees
(continued)
Acronym Description Part No. 1830 1830 1830 1830 1830 1830
PSS-36 PSS-4 PSS-1 PSS-1 PSS-1 PSS-1
/32/16 GBEH MD4H MSAH AHP
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC27893 — — — X — —
1830PSS-1 MD4H AAAA
MD4H R1.7.0
R1.7.0 CDROM
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC27893 — — — X — —
1830PSS-1 MD4H ABAA
MD4H R1.7.1
R1.7.1 CDROM
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC27908 — — — X — —
1830PSS-1 MD4H R1.8 AAAA
MD4H R1.8 CDROM
SWP 1830PSS-1 3KC05141 — — — — — X
1830PSS-1 AHP R1.0.0 AAAA
AHP R1.0 CDROM
SWL- 1830 PSS 8DG60207 X — — — — —
1830PSS Wavelength AAAA
WLT Tracker
Software
License Fee
SWL- WDM Blade 3AL75117 X — — X X —
Photonics License AAAA
VERS “A” Point Fee
WDM LP
SWL- TDM Blade 3AL75118 X — — — X —
Photonics License AAAA
VERS “A” Point Fee
TDM LP
SWL- Ethernet 8DG59727 X — X — — —
Photonics Blade AAAA
VERS “A” License
ETH LP Point Fee
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1354RM-PhM
Software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354RM-PhM
Table A-2, “1354RM-PhM CD-ROM and license point fees” (p. A-5) lists the ordering
information for the 1354RM-PhM software CD-ROM. For 1830 R3.5.1 the 1354 PhM
R8.5.2 supports: 1830 PSS-4 (R1.0.1), 1830 PSS-1 GBEH (R2.7.x), 1830 PSS-36/32/16.
Table A-2 1354RM-PhM CD-ROM and license point fees
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code

SWP KIT-Basic 1354 PhM 8DG61320AAAA —
1354RM-PHM Software Package
R8.6.50 R8.6.50
1354RM-PHM 1354 First Deployment 8DG59743AAAA —
FDL BP License - Base Product
(License to use the
1354RM-PhM network
management system.
Includes the license for
1 server, 1
operator/client and 10
network element)
1354RM-PHM 1354RM-PhM 8DG59744AAAA —
NGL - 10 Network Growth
License - PK 10
(License to
1354RM-PhM for 10
additional network
element.)
1354RM-PHM 1354RM-PhM 8DG59745AAAA —
NGL - 1 Network Growth
License - PK 1
(License to use the
1354RM-PhM for 1
additional network
element.)
1354RM-PHM CL 1354RM-PhM Client 8DG59746AAAA —
License (License to use
1 additional
1354RM-PhM
Operator/client.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS engineering and planning tool
Software (EPT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS engineering and planning tool (EPT)

The Engineering and Planning Tool for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS PSS Release 3.6.50 can
be ordered using part number 8DG61317AAAA as: 1830 SWP 1830PSS-EPT R3.6.50.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment

Table A-3, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment” (p. A-7) lists the ordering
information for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment.
Table A-3 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment

CMSKIT PSS-36 Shelf Kit 3KC19145AA —
(includes basic shelf,
TC36A blank, PFC,
High Output Fan, shelf
cover, mounting kit)
COSKIT Main Shelf Kit (includes 8DG59605AA —
COSHF, USRPNL,
FAN, TIBNKx2)
COSKITH Main Shelf Kit (includes 8DG59605AB —
COSHF, USRPNL, FAN
- high power, TIBNKx2)
COEKIT Extension Shelf Kit 8DG59606AA —
(includes COSHF,
UPBNK, FAN,
TIBNKx2
COEKITH Extension Shelf Kit 8DG59606AB —
(includes COSHF,
UPBNK, FAN - high
power, TIBNKx2
EOSKIT PSS-16 Main Shelf Kit 8DG60273AA —
(includes EOSHF, fan,
UP)
EOSHF End Office Shelf RSA 8DG59859AA WOM3P00CRB
(includes shelf
w/Backplane, air filter,
shelf ID)
FST Fiber storage tray kit 1AD151930001 —
DCMSHF19 DCM shelf (19-inch 8DG59417AA —
EIA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-3 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 common equipment (continued)

DCMSHF23 DCM shelf 8DG59417AB —
(ETSI/ANSI)
FLEX19 Flex shelf (19-inch EIA) 8DG59602AA —
FLEX23 Flex shelf (23-inch 8DG59602AB —
ANSI WECO)
FLEXETSI Flex shelf (ETSI rack) 8DG59602AC —
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 installation kits

1830 PSS-36 installation kits
Installation kits are available that contain the screws, brackets, cables, and other items
needed for installation of the shelf. These kits are listed below with their components.
Component details may be subject to change. Check with your local Alcatel-Lucent
representative when ordering.
1830 PSS-36 Switched Installation Kit - ANSI 23” (3KC19142AA) contains the
following components
• Power Cables (single hole 90 degree lug 6 AWG (16mm2) on PFC end - red RTN (+)
- label on both ends)
• Power Cables (single hole 90 degree lug 6 AWG (16mm2) on PFC end) - blue -48V -
label on both ends)
• Ground Cable (2 hold lug, 6 AWG (16mm2), 90 degrees, green/yellow)
• MA-PSS-36 ANSI ADJ. FLAP BAFFLE ASM - required in all shelf positions
• Shelf Extension Cover (HP FAN)
• M3X5 PANHEAD SCREW
• Lugs for PFC cable to PDU, 2 hole, straight, 5/8" spacing, 6 AWG, 1/4" hole
• Heat Shrink Tubing (1/2" diameter), RED
• Heat Shrink Tubing (1/2" diameter), BLUE
KIT-PSS-36 SWITCHED INSTALLATION KIT - ETSI (3KC19142AC) contains the
following components
• Power Cables (single hole 90 degree lug 6 AWG (16mm2) on PFC end - red RTN (+)
- label on both ends)
• Power Cables (single hole 90 degree lug 6 AWG (16mm2) on PFC end) - blue -48V -
label on both ends)
• Ground Cable (2 hold lug, 6 AWG (16mm2), 90 degrees, green/yellow)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 installation kits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• MA-PSS-36 ETSI FLAP BAFFLE ASM
• Shelf Extension Cover (HP FAN)
• M3X5 PANHEAD SCREW
• Lugs for PFC cable to PDU, 2 hole, straight, 5/8" spacing, 6 AWG, 1/4" hole
• Heat Shrink Tubing (1/2" diameter), RED
• Heat Shrink Tubing (1/2" diameter), BLUE
• ETSI Cable Connector Kit

NAR Installation Kit (EIA/ANSI) - PSS32 (8DG59604AA) contains the following
components:
• EIA SHELF COVER
• 12-24 SCREWS
• LEFT EIA/ANSI MOUNTING EAR
• RIGHT EIA/ANSI MOUNTING EAR
• MA-VERTICAL FIBER GUIDE ASSEMBLY A
• M5 X 8 CHEESEHEAD TORX
• M5X8 FLATHEAD
• UPPER BAFFLE
• MA-1U COVER
• A Power Cable (3.6m length)
• B Power Cable (3.6m length)
• LOWER SUPPORT 12" (existing)
• M3 x 8 Flathead phillips
• MA-VERTICAL FIBER GUIDE B
• M2.5 x 5 PANHEAD
• VERTICAL FIBER GUIDE ASSEMBLY C
• MPP-EIA SUBRACK MOUNTING BRACKET LEFT
• MPP-EIA SUBRACK MOUNTING BRACKET RIGHT
• M4 x 8 PANHEAD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation Kit (ETSI Rack) - PSS32 (8DG59604AC) contains the following items:
• M6 X 12 THREAD FORMING SCREW
• ETSI MOUNTING EAR
• M5 X 12 CHEESHEAD TORX
• UPPER BAFFLE
• A Power Cable (3.6m length)
• B Power Cable (3.6m length)
• M 2.5 WASHERS
• SFP Removal Tool
• LC Fiber Removal Tool
• KIT- ETSI Cable Installation Connector Kit
• 8AWG COMPRESSION LUGS
• HEAT SHRINK TUBING
• M4 x 8 CHEESEHEAD, SS
• 2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (1" SPACING)
• 2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (5/8" SPACING)
• M5 X 8 SCREWS
Installation Kit (19” ETSI Rack) - PSS32 (8DG59604AD) contains the following items:
• EIA SHELF COVER
• 12-24 SCREWS
• LEFT EIA/ANSI MOUNTING EAR
• RIGHT EIA/ANSI MOUNTING EAR
• M5X8 FLATHEAD
• UPPER BAFFLE
• MA-1U COVER
• A Power Cable (3.6m)
• B Power Cable (3.6m)
• LOWER SUPPORT 12" (existing)
• M3 x 8 Flathead Phillips
• MA-VERTICAL FIBER GUIDE B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• MPP-EIA SUBRACK MOUNTING BRACKET LEFT
• MPP-EIA SUBRACK MOUNTING BRACKET RIGHT
• M4 x 8 PANHEAD
• 2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (1" SPACING)
• 2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (5/8" SPACING)

NAR Installation Kit (EIA/ANSI) - PSS16 (8DG60266BA) contains the following
components:
• Left Exaust Baffle
• PSS-16 A-POWER CABLE (NAR)
• PSS-16 B-POWER CABLE (NAR)
• EIA/ANSI BRACKET
• M5 X 8 FLATHEAD PHILLIPS
• SHELF COVER
• UPPER SHELF COVER BRACKET
• LOWER SHELF COVER BRACKET
• 12-24 SCREWS
• CABLE CLAMP, RICHCO p/n E9-AM
Installation Kit (ETSI Rack) - PSS16 (8DG60266BC) contains the following components:
• PSS-16 A and B POWER CABLE (ETSI)
• ETSI BRACKET
• KIT - ETSI Cable Installation Connector Kit
• 2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (1” SPACING)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• 2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (5/8” SPACING)
• M5 X 8 SCREWS
Installation Kit (19” ETSI) - PSS16 (8DG60266BD) contains the following items:
• PSS-16 A and B-POWER CABLE (ETSI)
• ETSI/ANSI BRACKET
• SHELF COVER
• UPPER SHELF COVER BRACKET
• LOWER SHELF COVER BRACKET
• 12-24 SCREWS
M5 X 8 CHEESEHEAD TORX
• CABLE CLAMP, RICHCO p/n E9-AM
• KIT-ETSI Cable Installation Connector Kit
2 HOLE COMPRESSION LUG (5/8” SPACING)
1830 PSS amplifiers

Table A-4, “1830 PSS amplifiers” (p. A-12) lists the ordering information for 1830 PSS
amplifiers.
Table A-4 1830 PSS amplifiers

ALPHG Low-power, 8DG59244AA WOGUAHEUAB
high-gain DWDM
amplifier with
mid-stage access
AHPGH High-power, 8DG59245AA WOGUAHFUAB
high-gain DWDM
amplifier with
mid-stage access
AHPLG High-power low-gain 8DG59945AA WOGUAP0UAA
DWDM amplifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS amplifiers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-4 1830 PSS amplifiers (continued)

ALPFGT Low PWR Fixed 8DG60255AA WOGUASRUAA
Gain Amp w Total
PWR Mon Unkeyed,
A2325A Amplifier, 23dB 8DG60242AA WOGUASSDAA
power, variable gain,
C-band, with
mid-stage access
AM2125A Medium Variable 8DG60566AA WOGUAWBUAA
Gain Amplifier, with
DCM access
AM2125B Medium Variable 8DG60912AA WOGUAWJUAA
Gain Amplifier,
without DCM access
AM2318A Low Variable Gain 8DG60565AA WOGUAWGUAA
Amplifier, no
mid-stage access
RA2P Long Haul - 2 pump 8DG60567AA WOGUAWAUAC
Raman, no mid-stage
access
RA3P Raman Amplifier (3 8DG59967AB WOM3K00ERB
Pump)
(External)
PB1 Power Booster 8DG59966AA WOMNF10BRB
(External EDFA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS filters

Table A-5, “1830 PSS filters” (p. A-14) lists the ordering information for 1830 PSS
filters..
Table A-5 1830 PSS filters

CWR8B 8CH Colorless W 8DG60117AA WOTRBV0TAA
(replaces CWR8) Router
CWR8-88 8-channel colorless 8DG59827AA WOTRCHATAB

wavelength router - 88
channel
WR8-88A 8 channel wavelength 8DG59827AB WOTRCHCTAA
router - Add side
SFD5A Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AA WOFFAAXBAA
5-channel (A variant)
SFD5B Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AB WOFFAAYBAA
5-channel (B variant)
SFD5C Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AC WOFFAAZBAA
5-channel (C variant)
SFD5D Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AD WOFFAA0BAA
5-channel (D variant)
SFD5E Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AE WOFFAA1BAA
5-channel (E variant)
SFD5F Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AF WOFFAA2BAA
5-channel (F variant)
SFD5G Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AG WOFFAA3BAA
5-channel (G variant)
SFD5H Static filter DWDM 8DG59437AH WOFFAA4BAA
5-channel (H variant)
SFD8A Static filter DWDM 8DG60210AA WOFFABSBAA
SFD8B Static filter DWDM 8DG60210AB WOFFABTBAA
SFD8C Static filter DWDM 8DG60210AC WOFFABUBAA
SFD8D Static filter DWDM 8DG60210AD WOFFABVBAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-5 1830 PSS filters (continued)

SFD40 40-Channel Optical 8DG60368AA WOM3M00CRA
mux/demux - 50GHz
offset, even channels
SFD40B 40 Channel Optical 8DG60367AA WOM3N00CRA
mux/demux - 50GHz
offset, odd channels
SFD44 44-channel optical 8DG59248AA WOM2H00DRA
mux/demux
SFD44B 44 Channel Optical 8DG59857AA WOM3E00CRA
mux/demux - 50GHz
offset
SFC2A Static filter CWDM 8DG59440AA WOOMAEASAA
SFC2B Static filter CWDM 8DG49440AB WOOMAEBSAA
SFC2C Static filter CWDM 8DG49440AC WOOMAECSAA
SFC2D Static filter CWDM 8DG49440AD WOOMAEDSAA
SFC4A Static filter CWDM 8DG59441AA WOTRA19TAA
SFC4B Static filter CWDM 8DG59441AB WOTRA2ATAA
SFC8 Static filter CWDM 8DG59442AA WOOMAEESAA
8-channel
SVAC Single port variable 8DG59561AA WOCUAHEUAA
attenuator card
MVAC Multiple variable 8DG59561AB WOCUAT6UAA
attenuator card keyed
ITLB 88 Channel Interleaver 8DG59841AA WOCUANKUAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection

Table A-6, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection” (p. A-16) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection pack and GCC0 equipment.
Table A-6 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 protection

OPSA Enhanced optical 8DG59247AA WOCUAHDUAA
protection switch
pack
YSMFV Protection Y-cable 1AB215120040 —
splitter (SMF) -
vertical orientation
YSMFH Protection Y-cable 1AB215120039 —
splitter (SMF) -
horizontal orientation
YMMF62V Protection Y-cable 1AB215120043 —
splitter (MMF
62.5/125 μm) -
vertical orientation
YMMF62H Protection Y-cable 1AB215120044 —
splitter (MMF
62.5/125 μm) -
horizontal orientation
YMMF50V Protection Y-cable 1AB215120041 —
splitter (MMF 50/125
μm) - vertical
orientation
YMMF50H Protection Y-cable 1AB215120042 —
splitter (MMF 50/125
μm) - horizontal
orientation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 dispersion compensation
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 dispersion compensation modules

Table A-7, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs” (p. A-17) lists the ordering information
for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 dispersion compensation modules (DCMs).
Table A-7 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs

DMSMF010 DCM-SMF 10 km 8DG59423AA WOGUAHGUAA
DMSMF020 DCM-SMF 20 km 8DG59424AA WOGUAHHUAA
DMSMF030 DCM-SMF 30 km 8DG59425AA WOGUAHJUAA
DMSMF040 DCM-SMF 40 km 8DG59426AA WOGUAHKUAA
DMSMF050 DCM-SMF 50 km 8DG59427AA WOGUAHLUAA
DMSMF060 DCM-SMF 60 km 8DG59428AA WOGUAHMUAA
DMSMF070 DCM-SMF 70 km 8DG59429AA WOGUAHNUAA
DMSMF080 DCM-SMF 80 km 8DG59430AA WOGUAHPUAA
DMSMF090 DCM-SMF 90 km 8DG59431AA WOGUAH4UAA
DMSMF100 DCM-SMF 100 km 8DG59432AA WOGUAH5UAA
DMSMF110 DCM-SMF 110 km 8DG59433AA WOGUAHVDAA
DMSMF120 DCM-SMF 120 km 8DG59434AA WOGUAHWDAA
DMSMF130 DCM-SMF 130 km 8DG59435AA WOGUAHXDAA
DMSMF140 DCM-SMF 140 km 8DG59436AA WOGUAHYDAA
DMBSM010 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59423AE WOGUAUMUAA
SMF 10 km
DMBSM020 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59424AE WOGUAU3UAA
SMF 20 km
SMF 30 km

SMF 40 km
SMF 50 km
SMF 60 km
SMF 70 km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-7 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs (continued)

SMF 80 km
DMBSM090 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59431AE WOGUAVAUAA
SMF 90 km
DMBSM100 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59432AE WOGUAVBUAA
SMF 100 km
DMBSM110 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59433AE WOGUAVCUAA
SMF 110 km
DMBSM120 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59434AE WOGUAVDUAA
SMF 120 km
DMBSM140 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG59436AE WOGUAVSUAA
SMF 140 km
DMBSM160 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG60766AE WOGUAVTUAA
SMF 160 km
DMBSM180 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG60767AE WOGUAVUUAA
SMF 180 km
DMBSM200 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG60768AE WOGUAVVUAA
SMF 200 km
DMBSM220 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG60769AE WOGUAVWUAA
SMF 220 km
DMBSM240 DCM-Fiber Bragg 8DG60770AE WOGUAVXUAA
SMF 240 km
DMTWR020 DCM-TWRS 20 km 8DG59424AB WOGUAH6UAA
DMTWR100 DCM-TWRS 100 km 8DG59432AB WOGUAJAUAA
DMTWR120 DCM-TWRS 120 km 8DG59434AB WOGUAJBUAA
DMLEF020 DCM-ELEAF 20 km 8DG59424AC WOGUAJDDAA
DMLEF040 DCM-ELEAF 40 km 8DG59426AC WOGUAJEDAA
DMLEF060 DCM-ELEAF 60 km 8DG59428AC WOGUAJFDAA
DMLEF080 DCM-ELEAF 80 km 8DG59430AC WOGUAJGDAA
DMLEF100 DCM-ELEAF 100 8DG59432AC WOGUAJHDAA
km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-7 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DCMs (continued)

DMLEF120 DCM-ELEAF 120 8DG59434AC WOGUAJJDAA
km
DMBLE040 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG59426AF WOGUAVEUAA
ELEAF 40 km
DMBLE060 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG59428AF WOGUAVFUAA
ELEAF 60 km
DMBLE080 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG59430AF WOGUAVGUAA
ELEAF 80 km
DMBLE100 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG59432AF WOGUAVHUAA
ELEAF 100 km
DMBLE120 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG59434AF WOGUAVJUAA
ELEAF 120 km
DMBLE140 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG59436AF WOGUAVKUAA
ELEAF 140 km
DMBLE160 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG60766AF WOGUAVLUAA
ELEAF 160 km
DMBLE180 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG60767AF WOGUAVMUAA
ELEAF 180 km
DMBLE200 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG60768AF WOGUAVNUAA
ELEAF 200 km
DMBLE220 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG60769AF WOGUAVPUAA
ELEAF 220 km
DMBLE240 DCM- Fiber Bragg 8DG60770AF WOGUAVRUAA
ELEAF 240 km
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders

Table A-8, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders” (p. A-20) lists the
ordering information for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders (OTs).
Table A-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders

4DPA4 MSC - 4G Dual Port 8DG59713AA WOWUAXZTAA
clients)
4DPA2 4G Dual Port 8DG60158AA WOWUAY3TAA
client)
11STAR1 11G Single Port 8DG59249AA WOWUAR1TAA
Tunable AnyRate (1
client)
11STGE12 11G Single Port 8DG59339AA WOOMAFGSAB
Tunable GBE Mux
(12 client)
11DPE12 11G Dual Port 8DG59340AA WOOMAJ7SAA
Tunable GBE Mux
(12 client)
11DPE12E 11G Dual Port 8DG59340AB WOOMAMUSAA
Tunable GBE Mux
(12 client) enhanced
11DPM12 11G Dual Pluggable 8DG59828AA WOOMAM9SAA
12-anyrate Mux OT
11STMM10 11G Single Port 8DG59251AA WOOMAFHSAB
Tunable Multirate
Mux (10 universal
clients)
11QPA4 10G, Quad port, any 8DG60349AA WOTRB1WTAA
client interfaces
11QPA4A 10G, Quad port, any 8DG60349AB WOTRCE6TAA
client interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders (continued)

43STX4 Multirate 8DG59831AA WOWUAX0TAC
Multiprotocol MUX
Tunable Transponder
(44 channels, 4
universal clients,
C-band)
43STX4P Multirate 8DG60237AA WOOMAJYSAB
Multiprotocol MUX
Tunable Transponder
(88 channels, 4
universal clients,
C-band, DPSK)
43SCX4 40G Single Port 8DG60320AA WOWUA13TAC
Tunable MUX
coherent (4 Client)
transponder
43STA1PB 40G SPT AnyRate 8DG60230AB WOWUA1XTAA
C-Band PDPSK Enh
43SCA1 40G single port 8DG60317AA WOOMAM5SAA
tunable anyrate
coherent 1 client
Add/Drop
transponder
112SCX10 100G Single port 8DG17121AA WOOMAK5SAE
tunable mux (10
universal clients),
coherent
112SNX10 100G Single port 8DG60977AA WOWUA5BTAA
tunable mux (10
universal clients),
coherent, w/Enhanced
OSNR for extended
reach
112SCA1 100G anyrate A/D, 8DG60008AA WOOMAK4SAB
coherent
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-8 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 optical transponders (continued)

112SNA1 112G Single Port 8DG60987AA WOOMAPRSAA
Tunable Coherent
AnyRate Transponder
w/enhanced OSNR (1
client) for extended
reach
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks

Table A-9, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks” (p. A-22) lists the ordering
information for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks.
Table A-9 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 equipment racks

RACK23 23-inch rack support 1AD139370001 —
RACKETSI ETSI 300 × 600-mm Per region —
rack specifications
RACK19 19-inch rack support Purchase directly —
from ADC:
www.adc.com
Supplier P/N
PWUEF-7X19ERN
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables

Table A-10, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables” (p. A-22) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables.
Table A-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables

CA-RLP2N CA-RACK LAMP 8DG08358AA —
Cable (NAR) 2.8M
CA-RLP2E CA-RACK LAMP 8DG90079AA —
Cable (ETSI) 2.8M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-10 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 cables (continued)

RACK LAMP 8DG60416AA —
CABLE (NAR) -
PSS-16
CA-HKP3 CA-AUX CH/HK 8DG60495AA —
CABLE (NAR), 3M
CABLE (NAR),
15M, SHIELDED, 13
PR, 25 PIN D-SUB
CABLE (NAR),
30M, SHIELDED, 13
PR, 25 PIN D-SUB
CABLE (NAR),
45M, SHIELDED, 13
PR, 25 PIN D-SUB
CABLE (NAR),
60M, SHIELDED, 13
PR, 25 PIN D-SUB
CABLE (NAR),
100M, SHIELDED,
13 PR, 25 PIN
D-SUB
16CHK15 CA-HOUSEKEEPING 8DG60419AA —
CABLE
(NAR),PSS-16, 15M
16CHK30 CA-HOUSEKEEPING 8DG60419AB —
CABLE
(NAR),PSS-16, 30M
16CHK45 CA-HOUSEKEEPING 8DG60419AC —
CABLE
(NAR),PSS-16, 45M
16CHK60 CA-HOUSEKEEPING 8DG60419AD —
CABLE
(NAR),PSS-16, 60M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16CHK100 CA-HOUSEKEEPING 8DG60419AE —
CABLE
(NAR),PSS-16,
100M
CA-RA15 CA-RACK ALM 8DG08400AA —
CABLE (NAR),
15M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
CA-RA30 CA-RACK ALM 8DG08400AB —
CABLE (NAR),
30M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
CA-RA45 CA-RACK ALM 8DG08400AC —
CABLE (NAR),
45M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
CA-RA60 CA-RACK ALM 8DG08400AD —
CABLE (NAR),
60M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
CA-RA100 CA-RACK ALM 8DG08400AE —
CABLE (NAR),
100M, SHIELDED,
26AWG, 8 PR, 15
PIN D-SUB
16CRA15 CA-RACK ALARM 8DG60417AA —
CABLE (NAR),
PSS-16, 15M
16CRA30 CA-RACK ALARM 8DG60417AB —
CABLE (NAR),
PSS-16, 30M
16CRA45 CA-RACK ALARM 8DG60417AC —
CABLE (NAR),
PSS-16, 45M
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16CRA60 CA-RACK ALARM 8DG60417AD —
CABLE (NAR),
PSS-16, 60M
16CRA100 CA-RACK ALARM 8DG60417AE —
CABLE (NAR),
PSS-16, 100M
CA-LAN2 CA-LAN CABLE 8DG08368AA —
(NAR), 2M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 5M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 10M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 20M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 30M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 40M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 50M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
(NAR), 60M,
SHIELDED CAT5,
PVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CA-INV2 CA-INVENTORY 8DG08359AA —
CABLE (NAR)
(2.3M), SHIELDED
CAT5E
CABLE (NAR)
(5.5M), SHIELDED
CAT5E
CABLE (NAR) (7M),
SHIELDED CAT5E
CA-INV11 CA-INVENTORY 8DG08361AB —
CABLE (NAR)
(11M), SHIELDED
CAT5E
FOADMINV FOADM Inventory 8DG59724AA —
Cable Adapter for
SFD44
SF40RJ2 SFD40/SFD40B HK 8DG60494AA —
RJ45 Cable (2M)
SF40RJ5 SFD40/SFD40B HK 8DG60494AB —
RJ45 Cable (5M)
SF40RJ10 SFD40/SFD40B HK 8DG60494AC —
RJ45 Cable (10M)
SF40RJ20 SFD40/SFD40B HK 8DG60494AD —
RJ45 Cable (20M)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items

Table A-11, “1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items” (p. A-27) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items.
Table A-11 1830 PSS-36 kit: customer-replaceable items

CMSF PSS-36 shelf 3KC19175AA WOMLK00FRB
FLC36EA PSS-36 First level 3AG33727AA WOCUAT8UAA
controller
MT0C PSS-36 Null fabric 3KC18989AA WOCUAT0UAB
module
FAN3T8 PSS-36 HP Fan 8DG89249AB WOCUAMUAA
CVR36 Shelf Cover (PSS-36) 3KC18947AA —
PFC PSS-36 Power Filter 8DG09183AA WOPUACRMAA
(3x50A inputs) No
breakers
BFP Full slot blank, 3AG33109AC —
PSS-36
BHFP Half Slot Blank - 3KC19181AA —
PSS-36
HSA3664 Half Slot Adapter - 3KC19194AA —
PSS-36
— Termination Card 3KC19066AA —
Blank (PSS36) - 1/3
high, 20mm wide
FLCBNK First Level Controller 3KC19065AA —
(FLC36) Blank
(PSS36), 2/3 high,
20mm wide
MTXBNK Null Fabric Module 3KC19067AA —
Blank (PSS36), full
high, 20.5mm wide
AIRFLT36 Air Filter - PSS36 - 3KC19019AA —
Spare part
BT36 PSS-36 Bus 8DG09176AA WOCUAT1UAA
termination card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


COSHF Central office shelf 8DG59319AA WOMNW00ERB
(shelf and backplane)
CVR32EIA CO Shelf Cover - 8DG59348AA —
Large (PSS-32)
— PSS32 ETSI Cover 8DG60129AB —
Kit - Extended
CVEOKTET PSS16 Shelf ETSI 8DG60268AA —
Cover Kit
CVDMKT19 DCM Cover Kit 8DG60131AA —
(EIA)
CVDMKT23 DCM Cover Kit 8DG60131AB —
(ANSI)
CVOMKT19 OMD Cover Kit 8DG60130AA —
(EIA)
CVOMKT23 OMD Cover Kit 8DG60130AB —
(ANSI)
CVOMKTET OMD Cover Kit 8DG60130AC —
(ETSI)
CVDMKTET DCM Cover kit 8DG60131AC —
(ETSI)
CVCOKTET PSS32 ETSI COVER 8DG60129AA —
KIT
— PSS32 EIA/NAR 8DG60129AC —
Cover Extender Kit
FSCEIA Flex Shelf Cover 8DG59518AB —
BCEIA CO Shelf Baffle 8DG59535AA —
Cover (PSS-32)
USRPNL User interface panel 8DG59240AA WOCUAKCUAA
EC Equipment controller 8DG59241AB WOCUAL8UAA
EC Equipment controller 8DG59241AD WOCUAVTUAA
(16G)1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-12 1830 PSS-32 kit: customer-replaceable items (continued)

FAN Fan unit 8DG59243AA WOCUAKBUAA
FAN32H High Output Fan Tray 8DG59243AB WOCUASZUAD
(PSS-32)
TIBNK Timing interface bank 8DG59421AA —
UPBNK User panel bank 8DG59354AA —
AIRFLT Air filter 8DG59320AA —
PFDC20 DC power filter 8DG59242AD WOPUABXMAC
(20A) - PSS-32
PFDC20 DC power filter 8DG59242BD WOPUACZMAA
(20A) - PSS-32
w/voltage
monitoring2
PFDC30 DC power filter 8DG59242AC WOPUABAMAD
(30A) - PSS-32
PFDC30 DC power filter 8DG59242BC WOPUAC0MAA
(30A) - PSS-32
w/voltage
monitoring2
PFDC50 DC power filter 8DG59242AB WOPUABBMAD
(50A) - PSS-32
PFDC50 DC power filter 8DG59242BB WOPUAC1MAA
(50A) - PSS-32
w/voltage monitoring
PFDC60 DC power filter 8DG59242AE WOPUACPMAA
(60A) - PSS-32
PFDC60 DC power filter 8DG59242BE WOPUAC5MAA
(60A) - PSS-32
w/voltage monitoring
PFDC70 DC power filter 8DG59242AA WOPUABCMAD
(70A) - PSS-32
PFDC70 DC power filter 8DG59242BA WOPUAC2MAA
(70A) - PSS-32
w/voltage
monitoring2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-12 1830 PSS-32 kit: customer-replaceable items (continued)

PFDCA DC Power Filter (no 8DG60334AA WOPUAB1MAA
circuit breaker and
WT support)
Notes:
1. Required to support GMPLS control plane
2. Supported by 1830 PSS software in R3.6.50, hardware will be available in the future


EOSHF End office shelf 8DG59859AA WOM3P00CRB
(Shelf w/Backplane,
air filter, shelf ID)
CVR16 Shelf Cover - 8DG59957AB —
Medium - (PSS-16)
USRPNL User Interface Card 8DG60094AA WOCUARCUAA
PSS-16
FAN16 Fan unit PSS-16 8DG59912AA WOCUARBUAB
AIRFLT16 Air filter - PSS-16 8DG60080AA —
PFDC20K PSS-16 DC Power 8DG60175AA WOPUAB2MAA
Filter Managed (20A)
PFDC35K PSS-16 DC Power 8DG60175AB WOPUACJMAA
Filter Managed (35A)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment

Table A-14, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment” (p. A-31) lists the
ordering information for the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment.
Table A-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment

FSBNK Full-slot blank 8DG59418AA —
HSBNK Half-slot blank 8DG59419AA —
HSALD Half-slot adapter 8DG59443AA —
ECBNK Equipment controller 8DG59420AA —
blank
INST19 CO shelf NAR 8DG59604AA —
installation kit
(EIA/ANSI)
INSTET CO shelf installation kit 8DG59604AC —
(ETSI rack)
INSTE019 PSS-16 NAR 8DG60266BA —
Installation Kit
(EIA/ANSI)
INSTEOET PSS-16 Installation Kit 8DG60266BC —
(ETSI Rack)
INEO19ET PSS-16 19” ETSI 8DG60266BD —
Installation Kit
OSCT Optical Supervisory 8DG59829AA —
Card Total Power
OMDKIT OMD installation kit 8DG59603AA —
(EIA, ANSI, or ETSI)
SFD40IKE SFD40/SFD40B ETSI 8DG60451AC —
Installation Kit
SFD40IKN SFD40/SFD40B 8DG60451AA —
EIA/ANSI Installation
Kit
PDU1SLET Optional PDU Slider Kit 8DG60224AA —
for ETSI
BRDGJMP PDU Bridging/jumper 8DG60788AA —
Kit (only for PDU1C
and PDU2C)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-14 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 miscellaneous equipment (continued)

PDU1 Power Distribution Unit 1AF17443AAAA —
- ETSI (2 inputs, 6
outputs)
PDU1B Power Distribution Unit 1AF07335AAAA —
- ETSI (4 inputs, 12
outputs)
PDU1C Power Distribution Unit 1AF11705AAAA
- ETSI (12 inputs, 12
outputs)
PDU2 Power Distribution Unit 1AF07336AAAA —
- NAR (2 input, 6
outputs)
PDU2B Power Distribution Unit 1AF07337AAAA —
- NAR (4 input, 12
outputs)
PDU2C Power Distribution Unit 1AF10889AAAA —
- NAR (12 inputs, 12
outputs)
SHFID Shelf ID 3AL79242AA —
TOOLKIT 1830 tool kit (includes 8DG59613AA —
SFPTL, LCTL,
HSLADTL,
HSLADDRV)
SFPTOOL SFP tool 3AL81728AA —
HSLADTL Half-slot mechanical 8DG07796AA —
adapter tool
HSLADDRV Half-slot mechanical 1AD008610003 —
adapter screwdriver
LCTL LC removal tool 8DG59614AA —
ATTNDRW Attenuation drawer (1U) 1AD51940001 —
ATTEN-1 1-dB attenuator 1AB371250006 —
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BRK1A Breaker, 1A 1AB017500057 —
BRKTGL Breaker Toggle1 1AD094650001 —
DUJMSMN3 Duplex jumper (3.5m) - 1AB215120038 —
NAR (SM for internal
connections)
DUJMSME3 Duplex jumper (3.5m) - 1AB215120056 —
ETSI (SM for internal
connections)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SIMJSMN2 Simplex jumper 1AB215120057 —
2.350m) - NAR - SM
for LD when no DCM
present
SIMJSME2 Simplex jumper 1AB215120050 —
2.350m) - ETSI - SM
for LD when no DCM
present
DUJMMMN3 Duplex Jumper (3.5m) - 1AB215120058 —
NAR - MM (50μm) for
OTs for regen.
application
DUJMMME3 Duplex Jumper (3.5m) - 1AB215120059 —
ETSI - MM (50μm) for
OTs for regen.
application
JLCDEOSC Jumper, LC Duplex, 1AB155630001 —
140mm, for External
OSC (HH LD)
Notes:
1. Required for toggle operation of circuit breakers, not included with breaker.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and 1830 PSS-1
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and

1830 PSS-1 PTM optics
SFP
Table A-15, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and PSS-1 SFPs” (p. A-35) the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE/PSS-1 MD4H SFP
PTM optics.
Table A-15 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and PSS-1 SFPs
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code 1830 1830 1830

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
155M SFP SFP L-1.1 1AB376350002 NGI7AMFMAA X — X
L-1.1/LR-1 -40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310
nm)
(L-1.1/LR-1)
155M SFP SFP S-1.1 1AB376350001 NGI7AMEMAA X — X
S-1.1/IR-1 -40/+85
(B&W
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1310nm
(S-1.1/IR-1)
155M SFP SFP L-1.2 1AB376350003 NGI7AMGMAA X — X
L-1.2/LR-2 -40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-1/OC-3
DDM 1550nm
(L-1.2/LR-2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-15 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and PSS-1 SFPs (continued)

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
622M SFP SFP S-4.1 1AB376360001 NGI7AMHMAA X — X
S-4.1/IR-1 -40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-
4/OC-12
DDM 1310
nm)
(S-4.1/IR-1)
622M SFP SFP L-4.2 1AB376360003 NGI7AMKMAA X — X
L-4.2/LR-2 -40/+85 B&W
STM-
4/OC-12
DDM 1550nm
(L-4.2/LR-2)
622M SFP SFP L-4.1 1AB376360002 NGI7AMJMAA X — X
L-4.1/LR-1 -40/+85 B&W
STM-
4/OC-12
DDM 1310nm
(L-4.1/LR-1))
2G5 SFP SFP I-16.1 1AB376370001 NGI7AMTMAA X — X
I-16.1/SR-1 -40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-
16/OC-48
DDM 1310
nm)
(I-16.1/SR-1)
SFP SFP B&W 1AB376370004 NGI7ANSMAA X — X
L-16.2/LR-2 STM-
16/OC-48
DDM 1550nm
(L-16.2/LR-2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G5 SFP SFP L-16.1 1AB376370003 NGI7ANRMAA X — X
L-16.1/LR-1 -5/+85 (Black
and White
STM-
16/OC-48
DDM 1310
nm)
(L-16.1/LR-1)
SFP B&W 1AB393080005 NG17AWJ2AA X — X
1000BX / 1000BX /
STM-4 STM-4 (20km
upstream)
SFP B&W 1AB393080006 NG17AWK2AA X — X
1000BX / 1000BX /
STM-4 STM-4 (20km
downstream)
SFP FE B&W 1AB393080007 NG17AWL2AA X — X
(100Base 100BX/FE
BX40) (40km
upstream)
SFP FE B&W 1AB393080008 NG17AWM2AA X — X
(100Base 100BX/FE
BX40) (40km
downstream)
SFEBTEE FE 100Base-T 1AB310140001 WOTRCNDTAA X — X
SFP
SFP B&W 1AB393080009 NG17AWG2AA X — X
1000BX / 1000BX /
STM-4 STM-4 (40km
upstream)
SFP B&W 1AB393080010 NG17AWH2AA X — X
1000BX / 1000BX /
STM-4 STM-4 (40km
downstream)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G5 SFP SFP L-16.2 1AB196370009 WMUIAF4CAA X — —
L-16.2/LR-2 -5/+85 (Black
and White
STM-
16/OC-48
DDM 1550
nm)
(L-16.2/LR-2)
2G5 MR SFP S-16.1 1AB376370005 NGI7AMVMAA X — X
SFP ANY RATE
S-16.1/IR-1 -40/+85
(Black and
White
STM-
16/OC-48
Multirate [<
2.7G] DDM
1310 nm)
(S-16.1/IR-1)
1G SFP SFP GBE SX 1AB376720001 NGI7ANPMAA X X X
1000BASE -40/+85
(Black and
-SX
White 1 GBE
DDM 850 nm
[1000BASE-
SX])
1G SFP SFP GBE LX 1AB376720002 NGI7AMLMAA X X X
1000BASE -40/+85
(Black and
-LX
White 1 GBE
DDM 1310
nm
[1000BASE-
LX])
1000B-T 1000BASE-T 1AB359780002 NGI7ASGMAA X X X
SFP
HARDENED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
1G SFP SFP GBE LX 1AB376720003 NGI7AMMMAA X X X
1000BASE -40/+85
(Black and
-ZX
White 1 GBE
DDM 1550
nm
[1000BASE-
ZX])
FC SFP SFP 1AB379640003 NGI7AUJMAA X — X
1G FC/2G FC/2FC/4FC
FC/4G FC 850NM
SN-I (Black and
White
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 850 nm
[SN-1])
FC SFP SFP 1AB379640002 NGI7ANWMAA X — X
1G FC / FC/2FC/4FC
2G FC / 1300NM
4G FC (Black and
LC-L White
1G/2G/4G
Fibre Channel
DDM 1310
nm (LC-L))
2G MR SFP 1AB377160001 NG17AM7MAA X — X
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1471nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1491nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1511NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1511nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
2G MR SFP 1AB377160004 NG17ANAMAA X — X
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1531NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1531nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
2G MR SFP 1AB377160005 NG17ANBMAA X — X
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1551NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1551nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
2G MR SFP 1AB377160006 NG17ANCMAA X — X
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1571NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1571nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G MR SFP 1AB377160007 NG17ANDMAA X — X
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1591NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1591nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
2G MR SFP 1AB377160008 NG17ANEMAA X — X
CWDM CWDM-SH
SFP 1611NM
(CWDM 2.5G
40 km
Multirate
PIN/1611nm
PIN)
(<2.7G) DDM
S4FC1471C OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070001 WOTRB1XTAA X — X
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.471µm
DFB PIN-SI
S4FC1491C OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070002 WOTRB1YTAA X — X
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.491µm
DFB PIN-SI
S4FC1511C OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070003 WOTRB1ZTAA X — X
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.511µm
DFB PIN-SI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
S4FC1531C OE-TRX-SFP 1AB155070004 WOTRB10TAA X — X
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.531µm
DFB PIN-SI
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.551µm
DFB PIN-SI
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.571µm
DFB PIN-SI
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.591µm
DFB PIN-SI
STM16/OC48
CWDM
TTL--5/+75 C
1.661µm
DFB PIN-SI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G MR SFP 1AB377200001 NGI7ANFMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 1471NM
(CWDM 2.5G
80 km
Multirate
APD/1471
APD)
nm
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200002 NGI7ANGMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 1491NM
(CWDM 2.5G
80 km
Multirate
APD/1491
APD)
nm
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200003 NGI7ANHMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80 km 1511NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1511 nm Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200004 NGI7ANJMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80 km 1531NM
APD/ (CWDM 2.5G
1531 nm Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200005 NGI7ANKMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80 km 1551NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1551 nm Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200006 NGI7ANLMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80 km 1571NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1571 nm Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200007 NGI7ANMMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80 km 1591NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1591 nm Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G)
DDM]
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200008 NGI7ANNMAA X X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80 km 1611NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1611 nm Multirate
APD)
[(2.7G) DDM
CH1610]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220003 WOTRA78TAA X — X
DWDM CH 60
ch600 (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(196.00)
DWDM CH 59
ch590 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.90)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220005 WOTRA8ATAA X — X
DWDM CH 58
ch580 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.80)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220006 WOTRA8CTAA X — X
DWDM CH 57
ch570 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.70)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220007 WOTRA8ETAA X — X
DWDM CH 56
ch560 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.60)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220008 WOTRA8GTAA X — X
DWDM CH 55
ch550 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.50)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220009 WOTRA8HTAA X — X
DWDM CH 54
ch540 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.40)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220010 WOTRA8KTAA X — X
DWDM CH 53
ch530 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.30)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220011 WOTRA8PTAA X — X
DWDM CH 52
ch520 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.20)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220012 WOTRA8STAA X — X
DWDM CH 51
ch510 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.10)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220013 WOTRA8STAA X — X
DWDM CH 50
ch500 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(195.00)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220014 WOTRA8WTAA X — X
DWDM CH 49
ch490 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.90)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220015 WOTRA8XTAA X — X
DWDM CH 48
ch480 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.80)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220016 WOTRA8ZTAA X — X
DWDM CH 47
ch470 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.70)
DWDM CH 46
ch460 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.60)
DWDM CH 45
ch450 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.50)
DWDM CH 44
ch440 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.40)
DWDM CH 43
ch430 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.30)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
DWDM CH 42
ch420 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.20)
DWDM CH 41
ch410 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.10)
DWDM CH 40
ch400 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(194.00)
DWDM CH 39
ch390 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.90)
DWDM CH 38
ch380 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.80)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220026 WOTRA9BTAA X — X
DWDM CH 37
ch370 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.70)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220027 WOTRA9CTAA X — X
DWDM CH 36
ch360 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.60)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220028 WOTRA9DTAA X — X
DWDM CH 35
ch350 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.50)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220029 WOTRA9ETAA X — X
DWDM CH 34
ch340 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.40)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220030 WOTRA9FTAA X — X
DWDM CH 33
ch330 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.30)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220031 WOTRA9LTAA X — X
DWDM CH 32
ch320 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.20)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220032 WOTRA9PTAA X — X
DWDM CH 31
ch310 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.10)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220033 WOTRA9RTAA X — X
DWDM CH 30
ch300 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(193.00)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220034 WOTRA9TTAA X — X
DWDM CH 29
ch290 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.90)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220035 WOTRA9UTAA X — X
DWDM CH 28
ch280 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.80)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220036 WOTRA9WTAA X — X
DWDM CH 27
ch270 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.70)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220037 WOTRA9XTAA X — X
DWDM CH 26
ch260 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.60)
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220038 WOTRA9YTAA X — X
DWDM CH 25
ch250 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.50)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
SFP SFP DWDM 1AB377220039 WOTRA9ZTAA X — X
DWDM CH 24
ch240 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.40)
DWDM CH 23
ch230 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.30)
DWDM CH 22
ch220 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.20)
DWDM CH 21
ch210 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.10)
DWDM CH 20
ch200 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(192.00)
DWDM CH 19
ch190 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(191.90)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
DWDM CH 18
ch180 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(191.80)
DWDM CH 17
ch170 ST (DWDM
(2400 ps/nm)
DDM
(191.70)
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200009 NGI7AUHMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1471NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1471nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200010 NGI7AUNMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1491NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1491nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200011 NGI7AUPMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1511NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1511nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200012 NGI7AURMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1531NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1531nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200013 NGI7AUSMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1551NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1551nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200014 NGI7AUTMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1571NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1571nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200015 NGI7AUUMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1591NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1591nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM)
HARDENED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
2G5 MR SFP 1AB377200016 NGI7AUVMAA — X X
CWDM CWDM-LH
SFP 80km 1611NM
APD / (CWDM 2.5G
1611nm Multirate
APD (<2.7G)
DDM
CH1610)
HARDENED
CWP151 CWDM 1AB373110001 WOTRBAGTAA X — —
DDMB OC3/STM1
PIN SFP
(OSC
(1510 nm)
1510 PIN)
with DDM
CWA151 CWDM 1AB373120001 WOTRBAHTAA X — —
DDMB OC3/STM1
APD SFP
(OSC
(1510 nm)
1510 APD
with DDM
OSC 1510 OC3/STM-1 1AB373120002 WOTRBB7TAA X — —
APD ULH APD
ULHSFP
(1510 nm)
S4FCW60LCALU SFP 1AB383360003 WOTRBFKTAA X — X
4FC DWDM
CH 600
S4FCW59LC-ALU SFP 1AB383360004 WOTRBFVTAA X — X
S4FCW55LC4FC DWDM -thru- -thru-
CH 590-CH
1AB383360008 WOTRBFZTAA
550
S4FCW54LC-ALU SFP 1AB383360009 WOTRBF0TAA X — X
CH 540-CH
1AB3833600018 WOTRBF9TAA
450
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering SFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PSS- PSS-1 PSS-1
36/32/16 GBE MD4H
S4FCW44LC-ALU SFP 1AB383360019 WOTRBGATAA X — X
CH 440-CH
1AB3833600026 WOTRBGHTAA
370
S4FCW36LC-ALU SFP 1AB383360027 WOTRBGJTAA X — X
S4FCW3LC 4FC DWDM -thru- -thru-
CH 360-CH
1AB3833600031 WOTRBGNTAA
320
S4FCW31LCALU SFP 1AB3833600032 WOTRBGPTAA X — X
4FC DWDM
CH 310
S4FCW30LC-ALU SFP 1AB383360033 WOTRBGRTAA X — X
CH 300-CH
1AB3833600041 WOTRBGZTAA
220
S4FCW21LC-ALU SFP 1AB383360042 WOTRBG0TAA X — X
CH 210-CH
1AB3833600046 WOTRBG4TAA
170
SFP SFP-EULH 1AB373120004 WOTRB2UTAA X — —
EULH OSC 1510
OSC APD
eVOA_P Fast eVOA 1AB396080001 WOTRBVRTAA X — X
SFP
eVOA_P Slow eVOA 1AB156220001 WOCUARWUAA X X —
SFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering XFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP
Table A-16, “1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and GBEH XFPs” (p. A-56) lists the ordering
information for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and 1830 PSS-1 GBEH (edge device) XFP
PTM optics.
Table A-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and GBEH XFPs
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code 1830 1830

PSS- PSS-1
36/32/16 GBEH
10G MR XFP XFP 1AB375380002 NGI7ALJMAA X X
I-64.1/10GBE
BASE-LX
(Black and
White
STM64/OC-
192/OTU-2/
10GBASE-LX)
DDM (1310nm)
IR2 MR XFP XFP 1AB375380003 NGI7ALKMAA X X
S-64.2B/
10GBE
BASE-EX
(Black and
White
STM64/OC-
192/OTU-2/
10BASE-EX)
DDM
10G GBE XFP XFP 1AB375380001 NGI7ALHMAA X X
850 nm 10BASE-SR
(Black and
White
10G-BASE-SR
DDM (850nm)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240001 NGI7AL4MAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1471 nm) DDM 1471 nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240009 NGI7ASJMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1471 nm) DDM 1471 nm
(-40/85)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering XFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and GBEH XFPs (continued)

PSS- PSS-1
36/32/16 GBEH
10G CWDM 10G CWDM 1AB378370001 NGI7ALWMAA X X
XFP 70 km XFP 70 km
(1471 nm) (1471 nm)
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1491 nm) DDM 1491 nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240010 NGI7ASKMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1491 nm) DDM 1491 nm
(-40/85)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370002 NGI7ALXMAA X X
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1491 nm) DDM 1491 nm
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1511 nm) DDM 1511 nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240011 NGI7ASLMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1511 nm) DDM 1511 nm
(-40/85)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370003 NGI7ALYMAA X X
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1511 nm) DDM 1511 nm
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1531 nm) DDM 1531 nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240012 NGI7ASMMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1531 nm) DDM 1531 nm
(-40/85)
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB378370004 NGI7ALZMAA X X
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1531 nm) DDM 1531 nm
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1551 nm) DDM 1551 nm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering XFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-16 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 and GBEH XFPs (continued)

PSS- PSS-1
36/32/16 GBEH
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240013 NGI7ASNMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1551 nm) DDM 1551 nm
(-40/85)
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1551 nm) DDM 1551 nm
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1571 nm) DDM 1571 nm
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1571 nm) DDM 1571 nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240007 NGI7AMAMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1591 nm) DDM 1591 nm
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1591 nm) DDM 1591 nm
10G CWDM XFP CWDM 1AB379240008 NGI7AMDMAA X X
XFP 40 km (40 km) 10G
(1611 nm) DDM 1611 nm
XFP 70 km (70 km) 10G
(1611 nm) DDM 1611 nm
X11MDTNC 10GHz-Tunable 1AB375650046 WOTRBSV- X
10G-XFP GAA
X8G5M10I 8G FC XFP SM 1AB375380009 NGI7AXG2AA X
X8G5M03I 8G FC XFP 1AB375380011 WOTRCH- X
MM BTAA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering CFP
PTM optics
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CFP
Table provides ordering information for Compatible Front panel Pluggable (CFP)
modules currently available for the 100G interface of the 112SCA1 and 112SNA1 OT in
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and 1830 PSS-32.
Acronym Description Part number CLEI

C113G4C CFP 100G (4x25G) 1AB402160012 WOTRCERTAA
SR 100G LR4
w/HeatSink
C113G4CD CFP 100G (4x25) DR 1AB402160001 WOTRB37TAA
100G LR4
w/HeatSink
C113G10C CFP 100G (10x10G) 1AB402160010 WOTRB38TAA
100G LR10
w/HeatSink
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering Feature history
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Edge device
This section lists the equipment that is specific to the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Devices.
Table A-17, “1830 PSS-1 common equipment” (p. A-60) lists the ordering information
for the 1830 PSS-1 common equipment.
Table A-17 1830 PSS-1 common equipment

GBEHKIT 1830PSS-1 GBEH 8DG59988AA —
Shelf Kit (incl
PSS1GBEH, +
PWRx2 + FAN)
(hardened)
PSS1GBEH 1830PSS-1GBEH 8DG59989AA WOMNX10BRA
Edge Device
(hardened)
GBEKIT 1830PSS-1 GBE 8DG59656AA —
Shelf Kit (incl.
1830PSS-1GBE,
EDFANUP,
EDPFDCx2)
PSS1GBE 1830PSS-1 GBE 8DG59657AA WOMNL00ERC
Edge Device
MD4HKIT MD4H Shelf Kit 8DG59884AA —
(PSS1MD4H +
PWRx2 + FAN)
PSS1MD4H 1830PSS-1 MD4H 8DG59885AA WOM3Y10CRA
Edge Device
PSS1AHP HP Amplifier Edge 3KC05096AA WOM3L00CRA
Device
AHPKIT ED HP Amplifier 3KC05092AA —
shelf Kit (PSS1AHP,
PWRx2, FAN)
EDCVR Edge Device Shelf 8DG59494AA —
Cover - EIA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Ordering Edge device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-17 1830 PSS-1 common equipment (continued)

EDINST19 Edge Device 8DG59655AA —
Installation Kit
(19-inch rack)
EDINST23 Edge Device 8DG59655AB —
Installation Kit
(23-inch ANSI Rack)
EDINSTET Edge Device 8DG59655AC —
Installation Kit (ETSI
Rack)
DUJSME1 Duplex JUMPER 1AB215120060 —
S.M. LC/PC-LC/PC
1.4m ETSI
DUJSMN1 Duplex JUMPER 1AB215120061 —
S.M. LC/PC-LC/PC
1.4m NAR
1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items

Table A-18, “1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items” (p. A-61) lists the
ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items.
Table A-18 1830 PSS-1 GBE kit: customer-replaceable items

EDFANUP Edge Device Fan 8DG59379AA WOPQAB1RAA
Unit User Panel
integrated
EDAIRFLT Edge Device Dust 8DG59648AA —
Filter
EDPFDC Edge Device Power 8DG59382AA WOPUABDMAB
Filter (DC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-1 kits: customer-replaceable items
Table A-19, “Hardened 1830 PSS-1 kit customer-replaceable items” (p. A-62) lists the
ordering information for the hardened customer-replaceable items for the 1830 PSS-1
kits.
Table A-19 Hardened 1830 PSS-1 kit customer-replaceable items

EDFANUP Hardened Edge 8DG59379HA WOCUANJUAA
Device Fan Unit User
Panel
EDAIRFLT Edge Device Dust 8DG59648AA —
Filter
EDPFDC Edge Device Power 8DG59382HA WOPUABWMAA
Filter (DC) -
Hardened
1830 PSS-1 miscellaneous equipment

Table A-20, “1830 PSS-1 miscellaneous equipment” (p. A-62) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-1 miscellaneous equipment.
Table A-20 1830 PSS-1 miscellaneous equipment

EDHSFB ED Filter Blank 8DG59658AA -
(half-slot)
EDFSFB ED Filter Blank (full 8DG59691AA —
slot)
EDPSFB ED Power Filter 8DG59659AA —
Blank
EDHSLAD Half-slot adapter 8DG59642AA —
(filter slot)
E_SFC1A Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AA WOCUAJYUAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (A Variant)
E_SFC1A Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HA WOCUANFUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (A
Variant)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-20 1830 PSS-1 miscellaneous equipment (continued)

E_SFC1B Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AB WOCUAJZUAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (B Variant)
E_SFC1B Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HB WOCUANUUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (B
Variant)
E_SFC1C Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AC WOCUAJ0UAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (C Variant)
E_SFC1C Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HC WOCUANMUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (C
Variant)
E_SFC1D Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AD WOCUAJ1UAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (D Variant)
E_SFC1D Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HD WOCUANNUAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (D Variant)
E_SFC1E Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AE WOCUAJ2UAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (E Variant)
E_SFC1E Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HE WOCUANPUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (E
Variant)
E_SFC1F Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AF WOCUAJ3UAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (F Variant)
E_SFC1F Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HF WOCUANRUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (F
Variant)
E_SFC1G Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AG WOCUAJ4UAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (G Variant)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E_SFC1G Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HG WOCUANSUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (G
Variant)
E_SFC1H Edge Device - Static 8DG59592AH WOCUAJ5UAA
Filter CWDM 1
Channel (H Variant)
E_SFC1H Edge Device - Static 8DG59592HH WOCUANTUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (H
Variant)
E_SFC2A Edge Device - Static 8DG59601AA WOCUAJUUAA
Filter CWDM 2
Channel (A Variant)
E_SFC2A Edge Device - Static 8DG59601HA WOCUANVUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (A
Variant)
E_SFC2B Edge Device - Static 8DG59601AB WOCUAJVUAA
Filter CWDM 2
Channel (B Variant)
E_SFC2B Edge Device - Static 8DG59601HB WOCUANWUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (B
Variant)
E_SFC2C Edge Device - Static 8DG59601AC WOCUAJWUAA
Filter CWDM 2
Channel (C Variant)
E_SFC2C Edge Device - Static 8DG59601HC WOCUANXUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (C
Variant)
E_SFC2D Edge Device - Static 8DG59601AD WOCUAJXUAA
Filter CWDM 2
Channel (D Variant)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E_SFC2D Edge Device - Static 8DG59601HD WOCUANYUAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (D
Variant)
E_SFC4A Edge Device - Static 8DG59593AA WOCUAJSUAA
Filter CWDM 4
Channel (A Variant)
E_SFC4A Edge Device - Static 8DG59593HA WOCUAN0UAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 4 Channel (A
Variant)
E_SFC4B Edge Device - Static 8DG59593AB WOCUAJTUAA
Filter CWDM 4
Channel (B Variant)
E_SFC4B Edge Device - Static 8DG59593HB WOCUAN1UAA
Filter Hardened
CWDM 4 Channel (B
Variant)
E_SFC8 CWDM 8 Channel 8DG59594AA WOCUAJRUAA
Static Filter
E_SFC8 CWDM 8 Channel 8DG59594HA WOCUANZUAA
Static Filter Hardened
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Appendix B: Feature release
history
Feature history
Introduction
This section contains feature lists for the previous major release and all prior major
releases.
Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
Release 3.6.0 and 3.6.1.
• 1830 PSS-36 channel manager shelf enhancements:
– Support of PSS-36 shelf controller redundancy (FLC36EA and MT0C)
– Multiple PSS-36 shelves support managed as a single TID (up to 4 shelves)
– Configuration support with a PSS-36 shelf as master and PSS-32 shelves as
extension managed as a single TID
• 11DPM12 enhancements:
– Client interface support for: 3G-SDI (2970 Mb/s), Fiber Channel
FC-100/-200/-400
– OPTSG (155G subODU1 time-slot group) mapping for STM-1/STM-4 to improve
ODU bandwidth efficiency (allowing 3 STM-1/STM-4 clients mapped to ODU1,
and 12 STM-1/STM-4 clients mapped to ODU2)
– Add Drop Multiplex (ADM) on a blade supporting ADD/DROP clients to or from
any client ports, and direct ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex pass-through function.
– ODUk E-SNCP support:
Supports ESNCP with client mapping in ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex to protect line
defects or an intermediate NE node malfunction.
The ESNCP supports both automatic protection switch and external requested
protection switch (Lockout, Forced, and Manual).
Protection switching is unidirectional, non-revertive, and traffic restoration occurs
in sub-50 ms.
– 1+1 Y-cable protection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and B-1
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Feature release history Feature history
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supports unidirectional and bidirectional, revertive and non-revertive 1+1 Y-cable
protection for two adjacent OTs for clients with mapping in
ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex.
Traffic restoration occurs in sub-50 ms when the Y-cable protection group number
is 4 or less.
– Drop and continue support for GbE and video services (HD-SDI and SD-SDI)
– Support of slow eVOA on line ports
• 43SCX4 enhancements:
– 1+1 Y-cable protection with 43SCX4
– 8G Fiber Channel client interface support
• 11QPA4 enhancements:
– 1+1 Y-cable protection with a pair of adjacent 11QPA4 packs for client types of
10GbE LAN, OC192/STM64, and 8G/10G Fibre Channel.
– OPS line protection
OPS protection protects Wavelength keyed channel (the fast eVOA needs to be
equipped) from loss of signal failure.
OPS protection switching is uni-directional, non-revertive.
– Drop and continue support for the 10GbE service.
The source node supports multicast configuration. One 10GbE client can be
multicasted to multiple line ports.
The intermediate nodes support drop and continue configuration, with or without
ESNCP protection.
• The temperature hardened 11G Quad Port Pluggable Anyrate (4 client) transponder
(11QPA4A) is introduced in Release 3.6.0. The 11QPA4 and 11QPA4A support the
same features only the temperature range is different. Software manages the
11QPA4A as an 11QPA4.
• 11DPE12E enhancements:
– Line port SVID provision (The SVID is either kept or POPed as traffic leaves this
port, i.e. supports 802.1ad or 802.1q traffic hand off) is supported for a native
10GbE line configuration.
The 10GBE line port can support either UNI or NNI type. When the port is UNI
type, the incoming packets can be untagged, priority tagged, or 802.1q tagged, the
packets will be pushed for an SVLAN and forwarded. When the port is NNI type,
the incoming packets are 802.1ad tagged, the packet with SVLAN will be directly
forwarded without SVLAN changing.
– Support CIR/EIR provision range from 0 to 10Gbps at steps of 500Mb/s for the
10GbE line port (Q-in-Q mode).
For line port to line port flow, the CIR/EIR range is extended from 0 ~ 1Gbps to 0
~ 10Gbps. The granularity to provision CIR/EIR is 5 Mbps steps beyond 10Mbps
and up to 100Mbps. Steps are 50 Mbps steps beyond 100Mpbs, and up to 1Gbps
and 500 Mbps beyond 1Gbps to 10Gbps.
– VLAN ESNCP for up to 32 flows
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The pack supports up to 32 1+1 ESNCP protection groups that are based on
VLAN (flow) level switching with sub-50ms traffic restoration time.
– Synchronous Ethernet support (without SSM) with EEC Options 1 or 2 (ITU-T
G.8261).
Up to four external timing references are supported. (For example, two from client
GbE ports and two from 10GbE/OTU2 line ports.)
The timing reference switching can be automatic (based on reference
priority/signal status), or triggered by the external switch commands (Lockout,
Forced, Manual).
– Ethernet OAM (Y.1731/802.1ag)
The pack supports fast Continuity Check Monitoring (CCM, 3.33ms period).
CCM is used to detect loss of continuity (LOC) between any pair of MEPs, which
is a switching criterion for the VLAN ESNCP.
• 11DPE12 enhancements:
– Traffic Add Drop Multiplexing (ADM) between two adjacent 11DPE12 packs via
backplane on 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-36 shelf
The pack supports the traffic switching between two adjacent 11DPE12s via
backplane on 1830 PSS32 and PSS-36. It means that the pack client port traffic on
one pack can go to the adjacent 11DPE12 pack line port for transport and the line
port traffic one pack can go to the adjacent 11DPE12 pack client port or line port
for transport.
– ESNCP between two adjacent 11DPE12 packs via backplane on 1830 PSS-32 and
1830 PSS-36 shelf
The client traffic is protected by a pair of adjacent 11DPE12 packs: working line
is on one pack while protection line is on another pack.
• OA&M enhancements:
– Authentication of OSPF message using MD5 code via WebUI is supported
– Support of multi-area OSPF to improve DCN set-up and scalability is introduced
in Release 3.6.0. The NE will support creating and deleting system-level OSPF
Areas. The NE can be up to 3 OSPF areas, in addition to the default backbone area
(0-0-0-0). After an OSPF Area is created, it can then be assigned to an OAMP,
VOIP, E1, E2, OSC or GCC interface.
– Support for Alarm to indicate excessive power consumption in the PSS-32 shelf
– Support the ability to provision 16 GB compact flash memory on the equipment
controller for supporting GMPLS functionality. When the flash memory card is
provisioned to 16 GB and the physical flash card is less than the provisioned value
an alarm is reported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Security features:
– Access Control List (ACL) support on GNE allowing traffic control based on
source IP, source port, destination IP and destination port. ACL can be used to
block undesired or insecure types of traffic (e.g. block TFTP port).
– CIT port disablement support is introduced in Release 3.6.0/3.6.1. The CIT
interface can be configured for auto-disabled after node installation. The default
for the CIT interface will be "ON". Possible states are "ON", "OFF", and
"AUTO". When in "AUTO", the CIT interface will be disabled if the NE is able to
communicate with a source IP (typically the management system); if the NE is not
able to communicate with the source IP after some configured interval, the CIT
interface will be automatically set to "ON".
– SSL key management support for configurable parameters in certificate,
certificate transfer between NMS and NE and certificate installation in NE.
• Configuration features:
– Support of 1830 PSS-32 or 1830 PSS-16 as point-of-presence for PSS-4 DWDM
ring without LD or OSCT where the GCC management is used.
– The configuration of 11DPM12 cascaded with 43SCX4 (4x10Gb/s coherent) and
43STX4P (4x10Gb/s OT based on P-DPSK modulation) on 1830 PSS-32 and
1830 PSS-36 shelves is supported.
• Performance monitoring:
– OTN Overhead monitoring support (excluding TCM) is introduced on 43STA1P
(PSS-32), 11DPE12E, 11DPM12 and 11STAR1 circuit packs.
FTFL, EXP, RES (only for 43STA1P)
– Digital performance monitoring is introduced on 43STA1P (PSS-32), 11DPE12E,
11DPM12 and 11STAR1 circuit packs.
IAE seconds , BIAE seconds , Far End OUT/ODU layer BBE /ES/SES/UAS
– Pre-FEC/Post-FEC Bit Error Rate monitoring support is introduced on 43STA1P
(PSS-32), 11DPE12E, 11DPM12, 11STAR1, 43SCX4 circuit packs.
– Analog parameters monitoring support is introduced on 43STA1P (PSS-32),
11DPE12E, AHPLG, ALPHG, OSCT, ALPFGT (PSS-32) circuit packs.
Laser Temperature, Laser Bias Current, Transponder Output Power (only for
43STA1P).
• The power management algorithm is enhanced to improve transmission performance
– Support of bit rate/modulation technology dependant target powers setting for
power adjustment.
– The capability of providing WTOCM reading correction for different modulation
formats can be leveraged by power control algorithm in setting bit/rate modulation
technology dependent target power for LH transmission.
– Support of SCOT management with APA for linear topologies on PSS-32 shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• New Hardware
– WR8-88A wavelength router card with add-side 9x1 WSS, supporting 50GHz
channel spacing. The WR8-88A can be used for Anydirection/Colorless
configurations
– Mesh4 1x4 mesh extension pack
The 1x4 Mesh Expansion Card (Mesh4) is supported on the 1830 PSS-32 and
1830 PSS-36 shelf. The MESH4 is a uni-directional pack that monitors and
amplifies an input signal then splits it into 4 outputs. It is used to split the
MESHOUT signal from a WR8-88 pack into 4 signals
– The Unidirectional Interleaver Card (ITLU) is optimized for the T/ROAMD
architecture with WR8-88A circuit packs
– The low gain modular amplifier (AM2318A) without DCM access is a single-slot
width full height circuit pack introduced and optimized to support coherent
transmission.
– PFDC60 60A DC power filter (PSS-32 shelf)
– Equipment Controller with 16GB (PSS-16 and PSS-32 shelves)
– 11QPA4A, hardened version of 11G Quad Port Pluggable Anyrate (4 clients)
– 3GSDI PTMs for 11DPM12 (3GSDI-SH[14Km] & 3GSDI-MH[20Km])
• Release 3.6.0/3.6.1 supports Anydirection/colorless configuration with local
Add/Drop. In Release 3.6.1, the Anydirection/colorless configuration with local
Add/Drop can be supported by GMPLS control plane. A node with Anydirection
Add/Drop degree N+M is composed of N Connection blocks and M Add/Drop blocks.
This configuration supports colorless anydirection add/drop channels, with automated
commissioning, power control and optical monitoring provisioning.
• Release 3.6.1 supports the following control plane functionalities:
– Automatic topology discovery
– Link management protocol (LMP)
– WDM constrain-based path computation
– 1+1 OSNCP
– SBR (Source Based Restoration)
– PRC (1+1 OSNCP and SBR combined)
– Nominal route
Release 3.5.2
The following is a list of features for 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.5.2.
• AM2125B: Medium Variable Gain Amplifier with no mid-stage accesss
• User Activity Log and Log File Transfer capability via SFTP and FTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release 3.5.1
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/32/PSS-16 Release
3.5.1.
• Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 shelf — 36 universal slot backplane with dual star fabric
(Capable of supporting switching application when switch fabrics become available.)
• Common hardware for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36.
– PSS-36 Bus Termination Card (BT36)
– Fan Tray for 1830 PSS 36 High Power Application (FAN36H)
– Power filter (3x50A inputs) without breakers (PFC)
– MT0C - Null Fabric Module
– FLC36EA - PSS-36 First Level Controller (Full)
– PDU1C – Power Distribution Unit TRU - ETSI (12 input, 12 outputs)
– PDU2C – Power Distribution Unit TRU - ANSI (12 input, 12 outputs)
• OTS optical line intrusion detection (loss variation monitoring)
• 43SCX4 — 4x10Gb/s Coherent Muxponder with Single Tunable Line Port
• 11DPM12 — 11G Dual Pluggable 12-anyrate Mux OT
• Multimode 8G FC XFP support on 11QPA4
• Support for alarm on login intrusion condition
• Support for logs and alarms for OSPF up/down events on the OAMP interface
Release 3.5.0
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16 Release 3.5.0.
• 11DPE12E — 11G Dual Port Pluggable GbE Mux (12 clients)
• MVAC — Multiple Variable Attenuator Card Keyed (alien wavelength management)
• Scalable colorless/directionless capability, support for 64-channel directionless,
migration from directional configuration to directionless and colorless
• RA2P — Long Haul - 2 pump Raman module, no mid-stage access
• AM2125A — medium gain modular amplifier with mid-stage access
• Low latency/low loss DCMs for 10G support in coherent designs
• OTN Performance Monitoring and overhead value report
• preFEC and post FEC BER PM and alarm (line side only)
• Analog performance monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release 3.0
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Release 3.0, and
features introduced in separate documentation for Release 2.9.0.
• Support for keyed services on 11DPE12 and 11QPA4 via the fast eVOA PTM
module, providing Wavelength Tracker (WT) encoding for full end-to-end Optical
Channel Trail and power monitoring throughout 1830 PSS DWDM domain.
• 11DPE12 (Dual pluggable 12xGbE)
A new MAC layer encapsulation option for Ethernet Virtual Private Line services,
based on adding an SVLAN tag (QinQ/double tagged encapsulation), which increases
the number of EVPL flows per 10G line to 100.
Enhanced Ethernet aggregation applications, using a new user configurable option
that allows the 10G line port to be configured as UNI (native 10GbE LAN hand-off).
• 11QPA4 (Quad pluggable 10Gb/s)
Support for 8GFC (FC800) service transport utilizing GFP-T encapsulation and
mapping into ODU2/OTU2. Client physical layer termination is accomplished by the
8GFC compliant XFP module.
• Long haul application with target reach of 2200km at 10G and 1100km at 40G
P-DPSK for 88 channels. Long haul application is aided by the hardware and software
support of the 23dBm EDFA amplifier (A2325A) and WTOCM card.
• 23dBm mid-stage EDFA amplifier for C-band with auto power shutdown support
• A2325A APR support
With APR on A2325A, power will be automatically reduced to prevent levels at an
open fiber that could result in injury to personnel, or damage to equipment. (APR
support responds to a span cut, a fiber disconnection between nodes, or circuit pack
failures or fiber cuts within a node when needed to meet safety requirements.)
• WTOCM - Wavelength Tracker optical channel monitoring card
The WTOCM card is a single-slot, half-height pack that provides per-channel power
measurements, and WT decoding for long-haul networks. It enhances wavelength
tracking and channel control capability in the 1830 PSS.
• New Power Distribution Unit options for ANSI and ETSI applications
– PDU1B (4 inputs and 12 outputs) doubles the breaker feed capacity of PDU1 (first
supported in Release 2.0) for ETSI applications.
– PDU2 (2 inputs and 6 outputs) is available for ANSI applications.
– PDU2B (4 inputs and 12 outputs) is also designed for ANSI applications.
• PFDC35K - Power Filter
A new 35 Amp DC power filter variant for the 1830 PSS-16 shelf is now supported.
• Tunable DWDM XFP at 50GHz grid supported on the line side of 10G pluggable OTs
(11DPE12 and 11QPA4) with dynamic signal sampling threshold adjustment for
enhanced transmission performance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Threshold crossing alarm (TCA) is now implemented on the 1830 PSS network
element as a standing condition per ETSI models for TCA processing. The standing
condition is managed via Alarm Severity Profiles. Active TCAs are retrievable. Both
15-min and 1-Day accumulation periods are supported.
• Continued support of the Commissioning and Power Balancing tool
The CPB tool is a standalone Web GUI application that supports the complete set of
functions and configurations introduced by 1830 PSS Release 3.0 Network Element.
The CPB tool performs the following tasks:
– Provisions a new optical system
– Commissions a new optical system
– Power balances an existing in-service optical system
– Creates a Loss Report for either a new optical system or an existing in-service
system
• Multi-shelf management increased for up to 24 1830 PSS-32 shelves shelves per
single TID. The universal shelves can be interconnected using the expansion Ethernet
ports on the Equipment Controller (EC).
• Support for mixing Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
growth shelves
Support is now available for a mixed configuration with an 1830 PSS-16 universal
shelf as the main shelf and one or more 1830 PSS-32 universal growth shelves.
• 40G Add/Drop TL1 support
Full TL1 support on the 40Gb/s Add/Drop transponder (43STA1P) is now available.
• 88 Channel 2D FOADM support
2-degree FOADM support has increased from 80 channels in Release 2.5.x to 88
channels in Release 3.0.x with the use of the SFD44, SFD44B and Interleaver (ITLB).
• Configuration as a high speed optical transponder drop shelf for the 10x10Gb/s
coherent Mux OT, available since R2.9, is supported in Release 3.0.x.
The drop shelf configuration is an option where only coherent 100Gb/s transponders
are present in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf (enabling seamless addition of
100G services in an already deployed, non-1830 PSS, DWDM network).
• 112SCX10 (10x10G MUX OT - from R2.9)
The coherent receiver, PDM tunable transmitter 10x10Gb/s Mux transponder is
supported. The line port supports full 88-channel tunability, integrated WT encoder,
and industry leading performance for residual chromatic dispersion and PMD
tolerance. OTU4 digital structure is compliant with ITU-T G.709/G.798. Cient ports
are use XFP modules to support flexible configuration of aggregated 10G services.
Supported service types include 10GbE LAN (Transparent or GFP mapped), OC-192,
STM64 or OTU2.
• 112SCA1 (10 x 10-G Add-drop Muxponder OT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The new coherent receiver, PDM tunable transmitter100Gb/s Add/Drop transponder
has the ability to add/drop OCh services to/from the optical line. The line port
supports full 88-channel tunability, integrated WT encoder, and industry leading
performance for residual chromatic dispersion and PMD tolerance. OTU4 digital
structure is compliant with ITU-T G.709/G.798. The client port uses a CFP pluggable
module to support direct connectivity to a 100GbE LAN interface. (The 100GbE
LAN signal is transparently mapped into an ODU4 structure and transported via an
OTN network.)
• The Secure Socket Layer (SSL) version 3 support
SSL version 3 is now implemented on the 1830 PSS Network Element for enhanced
security (WebUI access via encrypted socket across a general purpose IP Management
Communication Network).
Release 2.9
Release 2.9 focused on application of 2 new 100G OTs in a dedicated shelf configuration
identified as the High Speed Optical Transponder Shelf. The 10x10G MUX OT
(112SCX10), and the 100G Add/Drop OT (112SCA1) are included in this release.
Features associated with Release 2.9 are documented in detail in the Photonic Service
Switch (PSS-32) Release 2.9.0 High Speed Optical Transponder Shelf User Guide.
Release 2.5
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/16 Release 2.5.0,
introduced in March 2010.
• New 1830 PSS-16 shelf introduced
• Low power fixed gain amplifier with total power (ALPFGT)
• 23 dBm amplifier (A2325A) for internode APR
• Unmanaged services (unkeyed OCH services)
• 8 channel static filter (SFD8A-D)
• Pluggable 2.5G optimized OT (4DPA2)
• Multiplexed line termination without amplification (OSCT)
• Fiber storage tray/Flex shelf optional in EPT
• ETSI rack power distribution unit (PDU1)
• 4x10 muxponder with P-DPSK support (43STX4P)
• 40G add/drop transponder with P-DPSK support (43STA1P)
• 40 Channel SFD (SFD40, SFD40B)
• 11G quad port pluggable anyrate 4-client transponder (11QPA4)
• 11G dual port pluggable GBE 12-client Mux (11DPE12), interworks with 1830 PSS-1
GBEH)
• Expanded 4DPA4 capabilities
– 4G Fibre Channel/FICON
– HD-SDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– SDSDI
– DVBASI
– SyncE
• EPT upload
• 8-degree R/TOADM support
• 2-degree 80 channel FOADM
• 20A power option without WT support
• New optical modules
– 50 GHz XFP (11QPA4 and 11DPE12)
– Enhanced ultra-long OSC SFP
– Slow e-VOA (11QPA4 and 11DPE12)
Release 2.0
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 2.0, introduced
in November 2009.
• 6-degree R/TOADM support
• 88 channel support with 50GHz channel spacing
Supported by new hardware:
– Colorless wavelength router for 50 GHz spacing (CWR8-88)
– 44-channel MUX/DEMUX for 'odd' channels at 50GHz offset (SFD44B)
– Interleaver to combine odd and even channels at 50GHz spacing (ITLB)
• 4x10Gb/s Mux OT (43STX4) with 100GHz channel spacing, OTU-3 line with DPSK
coding (EFEC), and multi-protocol client interfaces
• AnyRate multi-service transponder with 4 client ports and dual pluggable OTU-1
lines with E-SNCP protection (4DPA4)
• Support for new High Power Low Gain DWDM Amplifier (AHPLG)
• Raman amplifier with EDFA booster (optional, externally mounted) PhM/OMS based
management integrated with 1830 PSS network
• Extended DCM support: DCM+EPT (20~120km) on LEAF, TWRS, and SMF
(10~140km)
• Automatic Power Reduction (APR)
• OTU-1 client support on 10xAny OT 11STMM10 and 1830 PSS-1 (remote
management via the OTU-1 client)
• Two-level transparent muxing to 11STMM10 10xAny optical transponder
• Optical transponder level interworking with 1696ROADM
• RADIUS, CLI over SSH, SFTP, and SNMPv3 Security features
• EPT supported on Vista
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Full TL1 support
• Bidirectional transmission for CWDM applications over single fiber
Release 1.0
The following is a list of features for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Release 1.0, introduced
in October 2008.
• 14 RU (rack unit) 32-slot chassis (19-inch rack support)
• ANSI rack
• ETSI rack
• 2D Tunable OADM (8 colorless ports)
• 44-channel R/TOADM (8 colorless ports)
• 4D R/TOADM (6 colorless ports)
• Fixed OADM
– 5-/44-channel DWDM
– 2-/4-/8-channel CWDM
• In-line amplifier (ILA) node, terminal node
• Point-to-point networks: ring and mesh
• Tunable universal optical transponder (OT) units:
– 11STAR1 (11G Single-Port Tunable AnyRate) (1 client)
– 11STGE12 (11G Single-Port Tunable GbE Mux) (12 clients) (12xGbE Tunable
OT)
– 11STMM10 (11G Single-Port Tunable Multirate Mux (10 universal clients)
(10xAny Tunable OT)
• Dangling OT 1696R – 1830 interworking
• Optical protection switch (OPS) (1+1 protection)
• Alien wavelengths via SVAC (single-port variable attenuator card)
• SCOT (software control of transmission)
• Wavelength Tracker
• Auto power leveling
• Engineering Planning Tool (EPT)
• Web GUI
• Redundant controllers
• TL1, SNMP, CLI
• 1354RM-PhM Network Management System
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A access identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added
to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is
through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,
DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) and “AHPLG ” (p. GL-1) for
related terms.
AHPLG
High Power Low Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) and “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) for
related terms.
AID
See “access identifier ” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AIM
See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition.
alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)

A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received
a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and GL-1
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm indication signal (AIS)
A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.
alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) and “AHPLG ”
(p. GL-1) for related terms.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ANSI
See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition.
APD
See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APR
See “automatic power reduction” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APS
See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APSD
See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition.
ASE
See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition.
asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,
image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time
in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth
requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and
other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
ATM
See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition.
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power reduction (APR)

A technique (procedure) to automatically reduce the output power of optical amplifiers to avoid
exposure to hazardous output levels.
automatic power shutdown (APSD)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to
avoid exposure to hazardous output levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)

A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route
when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)

A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By
applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal
current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B back reflection
See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-12).
background block errors (BBE)

Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.
backward defect indication (BDI)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)

A band-dependent optical card.
bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.
BB
See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBA
See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBE
See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BDI
See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BER
See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition.
bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)

A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by
providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are
interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers
for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around
the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is
used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bit stream is transmitted through a system. It measures how
many bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BOF
See “band optical filter” (p. GL-4) for definition.
broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at
lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)

Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C CAD
See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition.
central office (CO)

A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
distance subscribers.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
channel add/drop card (CAD)

Used with automatic power management; allows set points for a manual transmission line.
channel optical filter (COF)

COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIDR
See “classless inter-domain routing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
CIT
See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition.
cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)

Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet
mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are
not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the
original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions.
CLEI
See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CN
See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CO
See “central office” (p. GL-5) for definition.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for
transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM).
COF
See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition.
common language element identifier (CLEI)

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
control network (CN)

The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does
not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
coupling ratio/loss (CR)

The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CPE
See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-7) for definition.
CR
See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition.
craft interface terminal (CIT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)

Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The
equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.
CWDM
See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-6) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D data communication network (DCN)

DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management
system (NMS).
DCM
See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DCN
See “data communication network” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-8) for definition.
DHCP
See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-8) for definition.
dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications -
Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DWDM
See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)

A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.
dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)

DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack
software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E earth
The European term for electrical ground.
EC
See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition.
EDFA
See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition.
edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an
interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network
EIA
See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition.
electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)

Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides
optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)

EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)

EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or
system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.
electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Element Management System (EMS)
The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces
to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
EMC
See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMI
See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMS
See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm.”
Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)

EC is the equipment controller card˙,
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into
the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is
used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the
1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,
and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
ESD
See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETSI
See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-10) for definition.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
failure in time (FIT)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
FC
See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FCC
See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCS
See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-12) for definition.
FDA
See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDDI
See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDI
See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FEC
See “forward error correction” (p. GL-12) for definition.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are
token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
fiber optic cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers.
fiber optic connector (FC)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)

General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are
mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.
file transfer protocol (FTP)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
FIT
See “failure in time” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
flash disk memory module (FMM)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA)

An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for
the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological
medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary
products, and cosmetics.
forward defect indicator (FDI)

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as mis-branching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP
label.
forward error correction (FEC)

A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
FPGA
See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-11) for definition.
frame check sequence (FCS)

Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and
other data link layer protocols.
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back
reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-11) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
gateway network element (GNE)

A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of
the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.
GbE
See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition.
generic framing protocol (GFP)

Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or
Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
stream.
GFP
See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition.
Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition.
graphical user interface (GUI)

A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.
GUI
See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-13) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I ILA
See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition.
in-line amplifier (ILA)

A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-24) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.
insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)

An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a
worldwide basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internet protocol (IP)
A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)

A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the
communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and
for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)

A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related
services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
IP
See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition.
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)

See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-14) for definition.
ISO
See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISP
See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-14) for definition.
ITU
See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L lambda (λ)
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
laser bias current (LBC)
Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
LBC
See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition.
LBO
See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LC
See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-16) for definition.
LD
See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on
the NE itself.
line build out (LBO)

Attenuation used to simulate a load.
line driver (LD)

Functional unit (circuit pack) providing the OSI model's physical level interface between a data
link and the exchange.
link state advertisement (LSA)

A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.
LOF
See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition.
long reach (LR)

An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
LOS
See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition.
loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
loss of frame (LOF)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LSA
See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition.
Lucent connector (LC)

Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.
This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power
requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single
mode).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M MAC
See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition.
management information base (MIB)

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
master controller (MC)

The system's master controller (MC) card.
MC
See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition.
mean time between failures (MTBF)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.
mean time to repair (MTTR)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
media access control (MAC)

The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the
media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as
many as ten degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and two
for the west.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIB
See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition.
mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)

An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external
dispersion compensation unit.
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-17) for definition.
MTBF
See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTTR
See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition.
multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition.
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NE
See “network element” (p. GL-17) for definition.
NEBS
See “Network Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)

Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching
and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,
and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are ILA (in-line amplifier) and
ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)

The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)

Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.
NMS
See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-18) for definition.
node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves that are
viewed as a single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the
following:
• up to two single optical shelves
• a single electrical shelf
• a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)

Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition.
NTP
See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OA
See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-20) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
OC-n
See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-20) for definition.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)

OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health
legislation.
OCHAN or OCh
See “optical channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU
See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-21) for definition.
OMD
Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex, See “Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex (OMD) ” (p. GL-20) for
definition.
OOF
See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition.
Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
Operations Support System (OSS)

A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or
provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on
mainframes or minicomputers.
OPR
See “optical path restoration” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OPS
See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical
signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or
reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)

A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.
optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
within the context of one cell.
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.
optical demultiplexer (ODU)

Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.
Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex (OMD)

A device that combines multiple optical wavelengths into a single optical line and splits the
incoming optical line into individual wavelengths.
optical path protection (OPP)

A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,
there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)

A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method
is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).
optical power meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)

An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.
optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise
signal.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and
operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and
orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.
OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is
not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,
reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring
(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)

A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network.
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical Network”
(p. GL-28) for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)

The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical
data.
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
OSC
See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSHA
See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSI
See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSP
See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition.
OSS
See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OT
See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OTN
See “optical transport network” (p. GL-21) for definition.
out of frame (OOF)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)

Refers to outside the central office/building premises.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P PCS
See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDL
See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDU
See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-23) for definition.
performance monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)

A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
photonic protection switch (PPS)

By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are
automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)

PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.
pluggable transmission module (PTM)

A pluggable module that provides a specific type of physical interface.
PM
See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PMD
See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition.
point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
received optical signal.
PPS
See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-22) for definition.
protocol data unit (PDU)

A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PTM
See “pluggable transmission module” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PXC
See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-22) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q QoS
See “quality of service” (p. GL-23) for definition.
quality of service (QoS)

A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as
signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also called
bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)

Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSNR degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating
a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line
tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate
resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)

Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term.
request for comment (RFC)

A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See “request for comment” (p. GL-24) for definition.
RIP
See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition.
RJ
See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RMON
See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-24) for definition.
ROADM
See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-24) for definition.
routing information protocol (RIP)

RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)
that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on
the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SA
See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SAN
See “storage area network” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SC
See “shelf controller” (p. GL-26) for definition.
scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the non-homogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SDH
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition.
secure shell (SSH)

An encrypted method of transmitting data.
segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage.
service affecting (SA)

Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.
Service Level Agreement (SLA)

A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
services
Within the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 system, services can be offered directly to end customers
or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SFD
See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-28) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition.
shared risk group (SRG)

A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items
therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with
cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The
shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every
node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node.
The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management system.
Connections between nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)

The SC card in a 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf.
signaling transfer point (STP)

A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 nodes and
the NMS. The SNMP traffic is carried over the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the light guide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition.
small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)

An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use
with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP
transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can
be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a
single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SMF
See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SNCP
See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SNMP
See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-26) for definition.
software control of transmission (SCOT)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
software generic (SW generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.
SONET
See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SONET wavelength service

The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
SRG
See “shared risk group” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SSH
See “secure shell” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSMF
See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-28) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ST
See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-28) for definition.
standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)

This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
static filter, CWDM (SFC)

A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.
static filter, DWDM (SFD)

A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.
storage area network (SAN)

A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data
storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.
STP
See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-26) for definition.
straight-tip connector (ST)

Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
STS, STS-n
See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-29) for definition.
Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)

An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.
SW generic
See “software generic” (p. GL-27) for definition.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40
Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the
international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET
technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical
long-distance networks.
SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the
physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 mB/s, called
OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T tap
The entry point into a system module.
target identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.
TCA
See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TCP
See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDM
See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition.
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive
information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See “target identifier” (p. GL-29) for definition.
time-division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium
by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to
send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)

An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See “Telecommunications Management Network” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TOADM
See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition.
topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a 1830
PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)

A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in
conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UDP
See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-31) for definition.
UL
See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

A U.S. nonprofit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,
assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)

A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring
are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction
(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for
example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along
opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport
channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:
• is path-specific as opposed to line specific
• does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
• requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition.
user datagram protocol (UDP)

A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
USPR
Unidirectional path switched ring.
UTC
Coordinated universal time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V variable optical attenuator (VOA)

A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the
receiving equipment.
VCAT
See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition.
very short reach (VSR)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)

1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.
VOA
See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VSR
See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VTS
See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-32) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W wave division multiplexing (WDM)

WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division
multiplexing (DWDM).
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 network,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and for the measuring of the wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-32) for definition.
WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
Web user interface (WebUI)

A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See “Web user interface” (p. GL-33) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)

A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to 16 XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z ZIC (zero installation craft)

An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Index
Numerics Alcatel-Lucent 1830 common equipment cards

1830 PSS key features, 1-6 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16
description, 3-1
1830 PSS-1 zero-touch transparent
compliance standards, 2-122
photonic network, 1-7
mixed network (w/PSS-32), configurations
3-89 alien wavelength
network, 7-1
1830 PSS-1 AHP, 1-11 protection, 2-87
node, 7-1
1830 PSS-1 GBE/GBEH amplifier nodes, 2-19
conformance statements
linear network, 3-87 automated optical power
management system, 5-25 Canada, 7-2
ring network, 3-88
automatic module detection, 4-131 China, 7-3
1830 PSS-1 GBEH
............................................................. Directive 1999/5/EC, European
Edge Device, 1-9 Union, 7-5
B bus termination card (BTC), 4-28
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Directive 2004/108/EC,
............................................................. European Union, 7-5
Edge Device, 1-9
1830 PSS-1 MSAH, 1-10 C cards eco-environmental, Canada,
7-3
1830 PSS-32 electrical, description, 5-1
eco-environmental, China, 7-4
shelf dimensions & weight, 8-3 optical, description, 4-1
eco-environmental, European
1830 PSS-32/16 central office shelf (COSHF), 2-96
Union, 7-6
shelves, 4-2 China
eco-environmental, United
1830 PSS-4, 1-11 conformance statements, 7-3 States, 7-10
2-Degree FOADM, 3-47 chromatic dispersion European Union, 7-5

compensation, 2-21
2-Degree TOADM, 3-10 indoor applications, Canada,
Class 1 laser statements 7-2
3-Degree FOADM, 3-52
Canada, 7-2 indoor applications, United
3-Degree TOADM mesh, 3-12
China, 7-3 States, 7-10
.............................................................
Industry Canada, 7-2
United States, 7-9
A airflow, 6-12 laser warning, Canada, 7-3
command line interface (CLI),
alarm reporting, 5-3 2-123 laser warning, China, 7-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and IN-1
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
laser warning, European CWR8-88 sub-tending, 4-32
Union, 7-6
colorless wavelength router, equipment controller (EC), 2-106,
laser warning, United States, 4-51 4-29
7-9
............................................................. European Union
material content compliance,
D DCM modules, 4-136 conformance statements, 7-5
China, 7-4
DCM shelf, 4-2 .............................................................
material content compliance,
European, 7-8 Declarations of Conformity F failure rates, 7-13
material content compliance, Directive 1999/5/EC, European FAN, 2-105, 2-110
United States, 7-10 Union, 7-5
FAN module, 4-34
optical transmitter, Canada, 7-2 radio and telecommunication
Fault management, 2-128
optical transmitter, China, 7-3 terminal equipment,
European Union, 7-5 fault management, 5-2
optical transmitter, European
Directive 1999/5/EC field-replaceable units
Union, 7-5
packaging collection and conformance statements, (FRUs), 7-36
recovery, European Union, European Union, 7-5 first level controller (FLC), 4-27
7-6 Directive 2004/108/EC FOADM
product safety, Canada, 7-2 conformance statements, architecture, 2-4
product safety, China, 7-3 European Union, 7-5
FOADM Hub, 3-47
product safety, United States, DWDM
FOADM line terminal, 3-43
7-10 wavelength channels, 2-4
.............................................................
radio and telecommunication .............................................................
terminal equipment, G gateway network element (GNE),
European Union, 7-5 E E-SNCP, 2-82
2-124
recycling / take-back / disposal E-SNCP protection, 4-130
grounding
of products and batteries, eco-environmental statements
European Union, 7-6 shelf, 6-3
Canada, 7-3 .............................................................
United States, 7-9
China, 7-4
cooling H hardware
European Union, 7-6
shelf, 6-12 architecture, 2-1
United States, 7-10
COS shelf, 4-2 description, xxvii
egress adjustment, 5-28
CWDM .............................................................
end office shelf (EOSHF), 2-100
filters, 2-91 I ILA node, 3-53
Engineering and Planning Tool
networks, 2-91 in-line amplifier
(EPT), 6-1
optical interface, 2-92 ILA, 2-21
EOS shelf, 4-2
CWR8 indoor applications statements
equipment controller
colorless wavelength router, conformance statements,
4-48 active master, 4-31
Canada, 7-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
conformance statements, MVAC module, 4-132, 4-134 11DPE12/11DPE12E, 2-46
United States, 7-10
............................................................. 11DPM12, 2-49
Industry Canada
N NE software 11DPM12 OT, 4-97
conformance statements, 7-2
ordering information, A-3 11QPA4, 2-45
ingress adjustment, 5-28
network configurations 11QPA4(A) OT, 4-86
interconnected rings, 3-3
DWDM topologies, 2-130 11STAR1, 2-41
Interworking
Ethernet, 2-132 11STAR1 OT, 4-77
with existing networks, 1-14
network element transmission, 3-5 11STGE12 OT, 2-43, 4-89
ITLB
............................................................. 11STMM10 OT, 2-42, 4-81
static filter CWDM, 4-63
40G A/D OT, 2-54
O O-SNCP, 2-81
.............................................................
43SCA1, 4-114
OEO conversion, 2-76
L laser statements 43STA1P, 2-56, 4-111
OMD shelf, 4-2
Canada, 7-2 43STX4P, 2-52
on-line customer support, xxx
China, 7-3 4DPA2 OT, 2-59
operating environment, 6-11, 6-11
United States, 7-9 4DPA4 OT, 2-57, 4-70
OPS, 2-77
laser warning statements 4x10G Mux OT, 2-50
OPS module, 4-132, 4-132
Canada, 7-3 4x10G MUX OT, 4-106
optical 1+1 protection, 2-77
China, 7-4 OSC, 2-19, 2-124
Optical amplifiers
European Union, 7-6 OSCT card, 4-45
line drivers, 2-18
United States, 7-9 OT modules
optical transmitter statements
Line drivers optical transponders, 4-67
conformance statements,
optical amplifiers, 4-39 Canada, 7-2 OT protection, 4-126
linear configuration, 3-2 conformance statements, .............................................................
............................................................. China, 7-3
P packaging collection
conformance statements,
M Management interfaces, 2-123 recovery requirements, xxx
European Union, 7-5
material content compliance packaging collection and recovery
optical transponder
statements statements
112SCA1, 4-120
China, 7-4 Canada, 7-3
112SCA1 OT, 2-61
European Union, 7-8 China, 7-4
112SCX10, 4-116
United States, 7-10 European Union, 7-6
112SCX10 OT, 2-59
matrix controller card (MTC), United States, 7-10
4-28 112SNA1, 4-123
power
mesh configuration, 3-4 112SNX10, 4-118
monitoring, 6-11
MESH4 card, 4-44 11DPE12(E), 4-93
shelf, 6-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS Product Information and IN-3
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
sources, 6-10 laser warning, United States, .............................................................
7-9
power filter, 4-32 T technical specification tables, 8-46
SDH/SONET, 2-129
modules, 4-32 threshold crossing alert, 5-7
Service cards
power filters, 2-105, 2-110 TL1, 2-123
blade-based, 1-8
product safety statements TOADM, 2-12
SFC2/4/8
conformance statements, TOADM networks
Canada, 7-2 static filter CWDM, 4-65
linear, 3-61
conformance statements, SFD40 module, 4-60
China, 7-3 split, 3-62
SFD40B module, 4-61
conformance statements, TOADM rings, 3-58
SFD44
United States, 7-10 interconnected, 3-60
as OMD shelf, 4-140
protection TOADM terminal node, 3-9
static filter, 2-8
configurations, 4-128 .............................................................
SFD44 module, 4-61
E-SNCP, 4-130 U United States
SFD44B module, 4-62
optical layer, 2-87 conformance statements, 7-9
SFD5, 2-5
OT, 4-126 user interface panel (USRPNL),
SFD5 module, 4-57
PSS-32/PSS-16 shelf, 4-3 2-110, 4-36
SFD8 module, 4-59
PTMs, 4-130 .............................................................
shelf
............................................................. W Wavelength Tracker, 2-68
cooling, 6-12
R radio and telecommunication monitoring, 5-30
terminal equipment description, 3-1
performance, 1-13
conformance statements, power and grounding, 6-3
wave keys, 5-30
European Union, 7-5 shelf configurations, 2-121
WDM
recycling / take-back / disposal of shelf ID, 4-31
products and batteries statements platform family, 1-7
shelves
European Union, 7-6 Web GUI, 2-123
description, 3-1
Recycling/take-back
SNMP, 2-123
disposal, xxx
static filter, 2-5
ring configuration, 3-2
Static filter DWDM modules, 4-56
ROADM, 2-9
SVAC module, 4-132, 4-134
.............................................................
system planning
S safety statements
node, 6-1
laser warning, Canada, 7-3
system timing
laser warning, China, 7-4 network, 6-1
laser warning, European
Union, 7-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide
and 3.6.51

Alcatel Lucent - 1830 - PSS 36 32 16 - Release3 6 50 - 3.6.51 - User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel Lucent - 1830 - PSS 36 32 16 - Release3 6 50 - 3.6.51 - User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel Lucent - 1830 - PSS 36 32 16 - Release3 6 50 - 3.6.51 - User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What are some of the main components discussed?

What are some of the main components discussed?

Title page

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

About this document

Reason for reissue .................................................................................................................................................................. xxvii

Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxvii

How to use this document ................................................................................................................................................... xxvii

Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxviii

Related information .............................................................................................................................................................. xxviii

Document support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................... xxx

Packaging collection and recovery requirements .......................................................................................................... xxx

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ......................................................................................................................... xxx

Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxxi

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Overview of Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio ............................................................................................................... 1-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product family ........................................................................................................................ 1-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 ................................................................................................................ 1-7

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device ......................................................................................................... 1-9

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ......................................................................................................... 1-9

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MSAH Edge Device ...................................................................................................... 1-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ................................................................................................................................................ 1-11

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 benefits ............................................................................................ 1-12

Release 3.6.50/ Release 3.6.51 Feature List ................................................................................................................ 1-15

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS36/PSS-32/PSS-16

OADM architectures ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3

DWDM filter architectures .................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

Bidirectional CWDM single-fiber transmission ......................................................................................................... 2-13

Optical amplification and dispersion compensation .................................................................................................. 2-18

Automatic power reduction (APR) .................................................................................................................................. 2-22

Optical transponders .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-40

Wavelength Tracker ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-68

Alien wavelengths .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-76

Optical protection ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-77

Optical protection for 40G OTs ......................................................................................................................................... 2-88

CWDM ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-91

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 shelves and equipage .................................................................. 2-93

Operation, administration, and maintenance ............................................................................................................. 2-123

DWDM topologies .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-130

Ethernet EPL and EVPL services ................................................................................................................................... 2-132

3 Topologies and configurations

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Network topology overview ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2

Network elements ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5

ROADM configurations ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-16

40G and 100G OT regeneration configurations .......................................................................................................... 3-22

Anydirection configurations ............................................................................................................................................... 3-23

FOADM configurations ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-42

In-line amplifier (ILA) ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-53

TOADM networks ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-57

FOADM networks ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-64

Mixed TOADM/FOADM network topologies ............................................................................................................ 3-67